Home

Inscriber TitleOne™ - Portland Community Media

1. 312 add new events rrrrnnrranrnnanernnnnnanennn 314 delete events rrrarrnnnnrnnnrnnanevnnnnnanennn 315 drag events to new location 316 duplicate events rrrrnrrrnrrnnanrrnnrnnanennn 316 MOVE events rrranrannannnnrnannannnnrnannnnnneen 315 use Animation Editor with playlist 312 use CG to add layouts ccooocccccccccncc 312 SEL TOMO ses 380 401 420 Shadow elements c cccceseeeeeees 154 155 TOP eier EEN 142 Shadow DN 154 sheen elements cc cccceeecseeeeeees 155 156 OOO MENS iaa ide 139 EE ege 155 SNOEN KES ds desd 521 Shot Box palette 56 375 383 add files to playlist 426 MAA NG aiii ds 417 output selected item 59 output with defined buttons 58 preview a media file 418 select events in Sequencer ocann 310 select files in Media Store 57 select layouts in playlist 56 set up files for single click takes 428 single click takes to video 428 take files to video 428 single click takes to video Shot Box 428 size CG CIOCK ONE ae 142 Lea EE 116 relative embellishments 117 135 E ODJECIS EE 121 Size to Fit database images 000n001nnan 399 Size to Full Screen database images 399
2. 0 frames 15 frames 30 Figure 4 87 Keyframe Inserted At Current Frame You can press INSERT on the main keyboard or select Insert Keyframe from the right click menu instead of using the Edit menu options Whether the keyframe is inserted before after or at the selected keyframe depends on the default on the Edit gt Insert Paste Defaults menu When you first launch Animation Editor the default is set to After Current Keyframe You can change the default by selecting Edit gt Insert Paste Defaults and selecting the desired option The option with the checkmark beside it is the current default The Edit menu options override the default Shortcut Keys Delete Keyframes Cut Copy and Paste Keyframes If you want to insert a keyframe without having to select a menu item or constantly reset the default settings use the following shortcut keys You can insert a keyframe before after or at the current keyframe with a simple keystroke e SHIFT INSERT places a keyframe before selected keyframe e CTRL INSERT places a keyframe after selected keyframe e ALT INSERT places a keyframe at current frame Insert keyframe shortcut keys override the default setting You can delete a selected keyframe by using the following options e Press DELETE on the main keyboard e Select Edit gt Delete Keyframe e Select Delete Keyframe from the right click menu You cannot select a path with only one keyframe when in Animation Ed
3. 360 PAUSE OULDUE ergett A 360 Start On Off Screen oocccoccccccocnnocccnnnnonnos 322 outside depth ccoocccccnccncncconccnonocanonnannnos 154 overlapping tab stops occcocccoccccccncnncnnns 128 ONE EV EE 73 add items for output rrrrnrrrronrernannnnn 77 basic workflow occoocccocnccooccconcnoncnconnnnns 73 delay on air display cccoonnccconnncooom 79 CES CHIDO ve 4 5 sade EMON EE 78 fade teM ON ee 78 load set of items oocccconcnccccnnccccnnnnonnos 78 loop animation cccooccncccnccncnncnconnncncncnnnnnos 80 OOD sje EE EE EEE 80 output items in Overlay rrrrrrrnrnnrrerrnnrr 81 OUPULOPUONS dla 80 output timers in Overlay 82 prepare items for output c cece eee 78 remove Items ocooccocccccncccnnocnnonncononanonanos 17 save set of Hemes oonnennnnnannnannnennnenne 78 set up items for output eee 74 tag layout text for updates o 74 update tagged text oocccoccccccccocnocononos 76 p page formatted crawls See multi page crawls page formatted rolls See multi page rolls PA ss 434 509 Elte 0 C 442 443 OVEFV EW rarrenenernnrrnanennnnnnanennannnnnsnnanenn 434 playlIStTUncuOn sacada id 13 SWIICA Onil 434 Parada see 107 Paste Below option ocococccoccccncnconcnnnonos 197 Paste Replace option ooocccocccconnconcco 197 paths Animation CUIVEG PANS aa ido ci 266 SPIKE E EE 28
4. Number Date Select Media Store gt Sort Okemerd 2 In the Sort Key dialog select a sort option Ge O User Owner OK Cancel 3 Click OK Chapter 7 Media Store 407 TitleOne User Guide 408 Edit a Title Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide Browse Folios Browse Set The sort order is used until you perform another search New search results are sorted by media number Global Browse The sort order you select is set as the default sort order for this folio The Global Browse folio uses this sort method until you select a new sort method using the Sort functionality Database Folios The sort order is used in only the current Media window When you close TitleOne or change folios the sort order resets to the default database sort order To change the default database sort order use the Preferences dialog For more information see Set the Default Database Media Sort Order on page 431 You can edit the title assigned to a browsed media file or a database media file e Fora browsed media file the default title is the filename e For a database media file you must assign a title when you add the file to a database To edit the title of a file complete the following steps Ensure that the Browse button is in the correct position selected to update a browsed file not selected to update a database file 2 Select a folio that contains the file to update 3 Inthe Media wind
5. ooccccccccocnccccnconcnnos 265 change shape 293 294 CODY Ta 263 E 263 determine order cccccccceeecseeeeeeeeees 266 OTC MO EE ee 294 NST gett 261 263 O a 287 MOVE sons no cda choot 264 266 A 292 pasle de 263 DIXGI ALS eee 296 DOE Gare 291 Eeg eege 294 SOE eee 264 SKEW ee 294 SONS std ote a ollo icono 291 A A E 290 keywords Media Store default for database files 431 EE ee 409 Index 593 TitleOne User Guide 594 set for database files cococon ccc 393 L layers GE ET EN EEE 192 change with the Layout Tree View 196 combine edges EEN 193 layers Paii sa 493 494 layers Strata soria 84 Layout Tree View cccceeesseeeees 194 198 layout yP S ae 101 230 HOU GE 98 allghto BOU NE 186 background objects rrrrrnrrrnnrrrnnrrennnr 199 elle 169 TEASE ves 98 230 create tagged layouts oocccocccocnconcnc 217 create templates rrrorrrrnrernnrrvarevanennn 232 Job Creator rrrrnnrrrranennarnvvnnnennannnnnnnen 236 link external data sources 000 218 prevent objects from scrolling 190 eh aan A EA EE T screen AA 103 SME vea 173 e osa 241 templates 231 transfer between Systems rrnrrrnrnnnrrnnnnn 6 U 010 EET EE EA 202 video transparent area rrrnnrnranernnnnnnrr 199 view selected layout s media 180 dutt Bee Un EE 217 See also media files
6. oocccoccccccnco 284 Tile transition NEE 325 Time Code trigger cccccoccccoconncccnncononnns 337 event duration sadel 334 offset time code occcocccccccncccccnccocnncnnnnos 347 output with Time Code trigger 346 select Time Code trigger 345 set up Time Code source oonnnen1en 344 time format CC 225 timecoded text files o cccoooncnccco 242 Timed trigger occcoocccconcncnnccncnncncnnannnoncnonnnnnos 337 event duration oocccocnccocnoconcconnnnanonos 334 output with Timed trigger 339 select Timed trigger ooccccocccccncnnnnoo 339 timeline Animation keyframe markers rrrrnnnnrnrnnrrnvnnnnrnnnnn 287 preview toolbar ocooccccoccncoccccccnconcnnnonos 286 Index 605 TitleOne User Guide 606 SITE Dal EN 286 Mack e EE 286 timing adjust multi page crawl timing 321 adjust multi page roll timing 318 for PC Clock triggers oocccccocnococooos 334 for Sequencer transitions o 327 for Time Code triggers ooccccccccoccncco 334 for Timed triggers oocccccccoccncccocnncnnnos 334 set event duration rrrrnnrrnnnnnrnnnrrnnnnr 334 set event IN point rrrararnnnrrarennnnnvanennn 335 set event out point rarrrnnnnranernnnnvanennn 335 MENE Ee 296 tint image treatments 163 Title Type drop down rrrrnnnnernnnnvanenn
7. rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnvrnnnnnr 317 adjust timing coooocccnoncnconcnnnnnnncnnnnnnnannos 318 create EEE EEE 317 PAUSE OUTPUT EA 360 multiple channels Frame Grab 369 multiple channels Strata oo ooonccnc 84 N Name events 312 name motion templates nnannannnannennnne 280 Navigate dialog ooocccooccccoccnconcnnnnncnnnnoo 54 navigation pane rrrnnrrnnnrrvnnnr 375 378 385 network drives Media Store browse for media files 385 SOUEE 100 NS ned 376 NEWS B L susen 202 210 News Edit Tables occcooccccoo 203 206 NEWS Tags o Wel 209 news tags See tags CG NET DURON eden 183 No Data Available option 219 none treatment EEN 161 NOT search Operator occcoccccocccccncncccncnnno 416 A o II 185 Number field Shot Box oooooooo 384 NVIDIA VGA preview occcooccccoccnccccccconcnconoo 18 O EIERE 98 MON NS 186 appearance ENE 100 clip Objects EEN 147 CODY Per 96 182 197 ee O 98 default style rrrrnrrrnrnnnrorrnnrronrnnnennnnn 174 delete EEE EE 198 Al le VE 189 alle le 182 197 elements 150 Ur 191 graphic objects 130 GOUD penn 193 ee 192 OCK GENE EE A AN AN 198 OCK DOSIOM EE 190 OOO ODJEC S ee 137 MATO EE EE RR 226 A Seeerei 100 185 PO elei EE 145 prevent from scrolling 101 190 KN EE 195 right click Menus
8. Every trip is a memorable one Of course you can t have all the comforts when you re on the road lt 00 37 43 01 gt lt 00 37 46 22 gt but the fans are so enthusiastic And that means a lot when you re far away from home lt 00 37 50 22 gt lt 00 37 53 09 gt Timecodes use the following format lt hours minutes seconds frames gt The opening and closing angle brackets are required The timecodes represent the actual times that the subtitles appear in the video When you import the subtitles into CG it converts the timecodes into the following components time in duration wait and time out EBU Subtitle Files CG supports the EBU file format for subtitles with non overlapping timecode CG ignores any other elements of the EBU specification When creating EBU based subtitle files make sure that the editor follows EBU guidelines Design a Layout Template Import a Subtitle File When you import subtitles into a playlist CG uses a fresh copy of the current template for each subtitle page You probably want to design a custom template for subtitle projects For example you may want to have two lines of centered text at the bottom of each page When designing a template make sure that there are enough blank lines to handle each subtitle page in the imported text file Otherwise some of the imported text may not appear on screen To save a template in the Template Manager Open the Template Manager by clic
9. Background Color a x Transparency Text Size Location Top Left wi Figure 3 59 The News Tag Editor External Data Sources If you purchased the ODBC option the Open Database Connectivity ODBC protocol allows different programs to share information held in database applications The ODBC option allows a database to feed information direction into CG You set up the CG layout with tagged fields and the information from the database flows directly into the layout A database can be as simple or as complex as necessary A single layout can use data from multiple sources CG connects the databases to the layout so you can display information in any layout you create General Workflow When making a database connection the steps depend on the type of database and connection you are setting up The basic workflow is l 2 Create a database to use with CG Add the database to the system list using the Windows Data Sources option You can also link a layout directly to a text file without using the ODBC drivers Create a layout in CG Use News Edit to tag the text fields for the data and to connect the layout to the database Format the ODBC data Save the layout to the network file server and play as needed Update the database whenever you need to update the displayed data Data is transferred to the layout as it s loaded into Sequencer or at set intervals while you are using the file Note Each computer using t
10. key on the number pad Pressing the PLUS key outputs the layout and loads the next event in the playlist to the preview channel If you select a new event in the sequence and press the PLUS key the previously setup event will take to air Set up the selected event by pressing the number pad MINUS key Then press the number pad PLUS key to output the event Run the Job Stop Playback Monitor Output Activity e Click the Take button tae on the Run tab to take the current event without loading the next event to the Preview Channel You can also use the ENTER key on the number pad for the same effect Use the Run Job button on the Run tab to run the playlist from the selected event Select the event where you want to start playback 2 Ifyou need to press CTRL SHIFT O to move online and access the Run tab 3 Switch to the Run tab 4 Click the Run Job button Use the Stop button on the Run tab to stop output after the current event completes playback Switch to the Run tab 2 Click the Stop button Output stops after the current event completes playback Note To stop playback immediately press the Pause key The current event freezes on screen You can click the CLR button above the Program palette to clear the screen When your playlist is online and you have started playback you can switch to the Run tab to monitor your output activity The Run tab displays the current time code the
11. Win Loss Win Figure 3 13 Four Text Objects Hold the SHIFT key and click each text object until all objects are selected Group all of the objects into a row using one of the following methods e Click the Row button in the CG Editor toolbar then select Make Row from the menu e Press the CTRL ENTER shortcut key Duplicate Below Duplicate Above Delete Cell Attributes The objects become individual cells in the first E FR row of the table With one of the cells in the first row selected create additional rows using the Duplicate Below option in the Row menu You can also create a row above your table with the Duplicate Above option Chapter 3 CG 123 TitleOne User Guide 124 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Each time you select the Duplicate Above or Duplicate Below option a new row is added to the top or bottom of the table The cells in the rows line up with the cells in the other rows forming table columns Figure 3 14 Table with Four Rows Edit Row Text Select a table cell with the Selection tool or double click it with the Pointer tool to edit the cell s text When you are finished editing the cell s text press the DOWN ARROW key to move to the next cell or the UP ARROW key to move to the previous cell Change Cell Attributes More than one cell can be edited at one time Hold the SHIFT key and click cells to select multiple cells or draw a selection boundary around the cells
12. Chapter 5 Sequencer 351 TitleOne User Guide Set Live Video You can use the DVE option to size and position live video by applying Display single channel digital video effects DVEs to your layouts TitleOne makes a copy of the incoming video and shrinks it to the set size On output the DVE window creates a video region containing the live video source The DVE plays on top of your events Roll event Live video in DVE window Executive Producers William Bourge Allison Withers Researchers Mary Hills Steven Randall Carol Whitney Black event background hides live video playing behind Figure 5 31 DVE Example When you play live video in a DVE window the live video also continues playing in the background For example if you have a DVE playing over a roll event the live video also plays in the background behind the roll event and is visible if the roll event has any transparent areas Use a full screen background in your layouts to hide the live video DVEs are applied to the entire group so every event in the group appears in the DVE window You can add as many group headers to your job as needed Playlist gt Insert Group Header When you output the group the live video plays in the DVE window and the event plays in the background 352 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Select a group header 2 Right click on the Pop Back icon which looks like a dash or hyphen in the group header and th
13. Table 2 2 TitleOne Output Options Task Preview a single layout before going to air Take a single layout to air Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide Options To preview a single media file on your preview channel drag the layout from the playlist to the Preview palette Use any of the following options to output a single layout e Select the layout in the playlist and press ENTER on the keyboard number pad Pressing ENTER outputs the layout but does not load the next event in the playlist to the preview channel e Double click on the layout thumbnail in the playlist e Drag the layout from the playlist to the Program palette The Program palette is always available in TitleOne Table 2 2 TitleOne Output Options Task Options Stop output To stop output immediately press the Pause key The immediately current layout freezes on screen You can click the CLR button above the Program palette to clear the on screen display To stop output after the current event completes playback click the Stop button on the Run tab in Sequencer See Stop Playback on page 53 for details Select a Program If you have a dual channel system you can send your layouts to channel I or Channel channel 2 Use the playlist or the Program palette to select the channel The Program Preview palette controls two program channels when you have a dual channel system e Playlist Use the Channel drop down list to select the channel f
14. You can switch between databases using the following three methods I Select File gt Media Store List The submenu lists all the databases that you have access to The current database has a checkmark beside it 2 From the submenu select the database to view OR Chapter 7 Media Store 403 TitleOne User Guide Fix Database Issues 404 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide Select Media Store gt Switch Current Media Store To The submenu lists all the databases that you have access to The current database has a checkmark beside it 2 From the submenu select the database to view OR In the navigation pane click the plus symbol beside Stores The Media Store database list displays 2 From the Media Store database list select the database to view If you encounter database problems with your Media Store databases use the Media Store tools to recover Rebuild a Database To rebuild your database I Select File gt Media Store Utilities gt Rebuild Database Note Rebuilding your database creates a new Global folio and deletes all other database folios Global Set and collection folios Recover a Database If the File gt Media Store Utilities gt Rebuild Database command does not fix your database problems you can manually rebuild the Media Store database Media Store uses metadata files see Metadata on page 386 to help recover the Attributes palette settings such as the title keywords
15. 16 use as background in CG 15 use as logo in Cisco ad 16 use as texture IN Co 16 use item in Media Store ooccoo o 15 use item in Paint ooccocccccccocnconiconiconnns 15 use item in playlist ooooocccconnnc 310 use layout mo 16 SCEON GNA sureste 103 SA ee ona ae ae ee ae 103 scroll on an image Paint cccco c 490 scroll with crawl roll 101 190 SD HD overview 27 29 SPE MANO tilo cli 27 conversion considerations occcoccco 27 Conversion limitations 29 conversion OPTIONS ccscccceeeeeeeeeeeess 28 fame FACS Gudene 27 native resolution 27 seamless textures Paint 488 search Media Store 382 413 421 advanced Searches occcccccocccccnconnconnnonos 415 attributes oocccoccconiconcccncocnconnnonocanononos 414 E o sats 414 date format ooccooccconcccccnconcncocnncnrnconcnnns 432 A E 416 find a file using the Shot BOX nn00n 417 Find dialog vir ene 417 OPeratorS ee 416 Index 601 TitleOne User Guide 602 results See search results Media Store Search dialog vassere 414 SEAN KEVS oroin EAER 414 simple searches rrnanrnnnnnnanrnnnnnvanennn 414 using previous criteria oocccco 418 search results Media Store 418 421 assign to Browse Set folio 419 create playlist from ooocc
16. 3 Change the settings in the Text Object Properties section to customize the behavior of your selected text object Lock the Object Height Select the Lock Object Height checkbox to prevent the text field s height from changing as more text is entered When checked new lines of text are added to the text field by shrinking the height of the existing text You can also lock an object s height by right clicking it and choosing Constrain gt Lock Object Height Chapter3 CG 119 TitleOne User Guide 120 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Lock the Object Width Select the Lock Object Width checkbox to prevent the text field s width from changing as more text is entered When checked additional controls set how the object behaves when text fills the text object e When the Constrain Text to Width control is checked the text in the field gets narrower to fit new text Otherwise any new text is placed outside the field and is not displayed unless the object is enlarged e The Enable Word Wrapping radio button appears when the text object s height is unlocked When word wrapping is enabled your text is wrapped to a new line when you type beyond the edge of the field You can also lock an object s width by right clicking it and choosing Constrain gt Lock Object s Width Create New Text Object with Enter When the Create New Text Object with Enter checkbox is checked pressing the ENTER key creates a new text object below the
17. 3 To copy the templates from one list to another use one of these methods e Drag the selected templates into the other list e Press the Copy Left or Copy Right button to copy the templates to the other list Copy Options If you are copying over templates with the same number the Copy Options dialog automatically opens You can also set copy options by clicking the Copy Options button in the Registry Manager Specify the way you want the templates renumbered in the target list e Renumber Item Coming from Source Database Select this option to assign the first available number to the source list s template e Renumber Item in Target Database Select this option to assign the first available number to the target list s template e Write Over Target Database Item Select this option to delete the template in the target list before copying e Skip Select this option if you are copying a group of items and you do not want to copy templates with duplicate numbers You can also set Prompt Options e Prompt Before Renumbering or Replacing Select this option to have the Copy Options dialog open every time you copy a template e Automatically Renumber or Replace Select this option if you always want templates copied with the chosen copy option You can change the Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 235 The Job Creator 236 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide copy options in the future by clicking on the Copy Options
18. A video clean up filter that smooths the image in the vertical direction to remove flicker caused by sharp changes in color in the vertical direction Render Converts information regarding objects or effects to a graphical bitmap form that can be displayed to video Object information includes shape color bevels and transparencies Effect information includes keys transitions movement and layering When you render an event a temporary file is written to the hard drive and then sent to the frame buffer when you do a take This process happens on the fly in offline mode In online mode all events are pre rendered for immediate output when you do a take Render Animation Animation A command that saves an animation in a bitmap via file for playback Render Location Sequencer The location where events are rendered when you go online Render locations include local disk or remote Rendered File Names Sequencer The file name of an event after it has been rendered To take events to video TitleOne needs to render the events to separate files Repeat Field Filters CG Paint and Frame Grab Video clean up filters that duplicate the even or odd numbered scan lines in an image replacing the odd or even numbered ones respectively The image appears to shift either up or down depending on the filter Restoring Alpha See Alpha Memory Tool Reveal CG and Sequencer A layout or transition that
19. Both the playlist and the Sequencer Playlist contain the events for the current project in the order that they are output When you select or move events in the playlist the events are also selected and moved in the Sequencer playlist e Playlist You can add events to the playlist from all TitleOne tools and arrange the event output order e Sequencer Playlist You can arrange the event output order display the playlist output details and apply output controls Chapter 5 Sequencer 307 TitleOne User Guide 308 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Sequencer Toolbar The Sequencer toolbar includes options for editing and viewing events Table 5 1 Sequencer Toolbar Buttons Button IIIe 4 Description Cut Event Removes the selected event from the playlist You can paste the event in a new location or leave the event deleted from the playlist Copy Event Creates a duplicate of the selected event The original event remains in the playlist You can paste the duplicated event in a new location in the playlist Paste Event Pastes the cut or copied event below the currently selected event Log Event Up Adds a blank event above the currently selected event in the playlist Log Event Down Adds a blank event below the currently selected event in the playlist Collapse Sequence Display Hides the events and only displays the group headers in the Sequencer playlist The playlist displays a thumbn
20. Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 175 176 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Library and select Add to Global Style Library The style is stored in the global library and can be loaded into any other layout Open the Global Style Library to load a style 3 4 Select Menu gt Open Global Style Library The Global Style Library opens Select the template registry you want to use from the drop down list If the registry is not in the drop down list click Open and navigate to the correct templates file Select the style you want to load from the list of styles Click the Load button The style is added to your layout s Style Library Manage Global Style Libraries Since Global Style Libraries are saved with template registries you can use the Registry Manager to share styles between different registries To open the Registry Manager select Menu gt Open Registry Manager The Registry Manager opens The left and right sides of the Registry Manager allow you to open two different registry files simultaneously The current registry is automatically loaded into the left side of the window Click the Open button above the right list to open the template registry you want to copy styles to or from Select the Text Style Library option from the drop down lists below both lists The Global Style Libraries for both registries are displayed Select the styles you want to copy then click the Copy Left or Copy Right butto
21. Dim crLayer As RtxLib Layer Dim crAnim As RtxLib Animation Dim animFB As RtxLib FrameBuffer Declare an integer for keeping track of the number of times you queue crLayer Dim LayerCount As Integer Private Sub Form_Load Set the GlobCon variable to the global RTXContext Set GlobCon myRTX GlobalContext LKK OK OK K K K K ak K OK OK OK K K K K K K OK OK OK K K K K OK OK K K K K K K K K Instantiate global variables Set contCrawl New RtxLib ContinuousCrawl Chapter 9 Resources 539 TitleOne User Guide 540 Chapter 9 Resources TitleOne User Guide Set crawlFB New RtxLib FrameBuffer Set crawlCon myRTX NewContext Set crLayer New RtxLib Layer Set crAnim New RtxLib Animation Set animFB New RtxLib FrameBuffer LKK OK OK K RR OK K K K K K K OK OK OK K K K K OK K K K K K OK OK K K K Name the RTXContexts GlobCon Name Global Context crawlCon Name Crawl Context LKK 2K OK K K K K K K K OK K K K K K K K OK K K K K K K OK K K K K K K K K K K Prepare for drawing to crLayer Set LayerCount to 0 LayerCount 0 Set the size of crLayer crLayer SetSize 200 100 Set crLayer as GlobCon s current Layer GlobCon Layer crLayer LKK K K K K K KK K K K K K K E K K K OK K RR K K K K K K OK OK OK K K K K Prepare and show the Animation Add the Animation file so you can set the FrameBuffer to the Animation s dimensions crAnim AddFile App Path clogo via Prepare and set up anim
22. Fielded Rendering Filter Fielded Output Export EXA Figure 4 97 Go Menu Options Table 4 34 Preview Options Option Show Trails Clip to Screen Render on Screen Selected Object Only Description Leaves a wireframe trail of each frame in the path Useful for judging the smoothness of a spline curve Limits the display of the preview to the screen area only Useful if you want to know exactly what objects or how much of an object will appear on the video screen Previews the entire animation Useful when you need to see exactly what the fully rendered object will look like at a particular frame and in relation to other objects Previews only the selected path in the animation Motion Templates Motion templates are preset effects that you can apply to any object in Animation Editor Templates include all placement shape filter spline and time information for a path Templates do not include the text and objects created in CG Editor You can add your own templates to the motion registry import or export templates as you need them or you can use the preset templates All template settings are located on the Templates tab Options include adding appending or overwriting the position and shape information of the keyframes currently in the path inserting the template at the start or end of the selected path and setting the duration and start time O Overwrite Start E E Append Length
23. Fr px E Show Borders O End On Screen 5 Reset All to Default fa Softness o Decelerate ove o Sub Pixel Proc e Clear Reset Take Cancel OK Figure 5 9 Set Your On Screen Off Screen Options If you start the event on screen you can set the following options e To increase the speed of the roll crawl check the Accelerate checkbox and enter the number of frames it takes for the event to accelerate in the Frames field e To set where the roll crawl starts on screen use the Pad options Select the Use Layout Spacing radio button to start the text at the existing edge of the layout If you are adjusting a multi page crawl TitleOne uses the left edge of the first crawl layout or the top edge of the first roll layout Select the Before First radio button to set an edge independent of the layout spacing Enter the edge value in the Before First field 4 Select the End Off Screen or End On Screen radio button Adjust Roll Crawl To adjust the speed of your roll or crawl you can set the amount of time it Speed takes to display the event or you can set a speed value Select the roll or crawl event in the Sequencer playlist 2 Switch to the Effect Settings tab Chapter 5 Sequencer 323 TitleOne User Guide 3 Select the Set Speed radio button and enter a value in the Set Speed field e The smaller the speed value the slower the playback e The greater the speed value the faster the playback Event E
24. Note Pressing CTRL G does not update the Frame Grab window Note Depending on your hardware you can grab a maximum of one frame per second Save a Grab to the Clipboard You can paste a grabbed image directly into another Windows application Click the Save Grab to Clipboard button 2 Switch to the other application 3 To insert the image select Edit gt Paste Add a Grab to the Scrapbook You can add a frame grab to the TitleOne Scrapbook to quickly use it in other modules Right click the Scrapbook and then select Add Add Info To use the grab in another module Switch to the module 2 In the Scrapbook right click the image and then select Use Chapter 6 Frame Grab 371 TitleOne User Guide 372 Chapter 6 Frame Grab TitleOne User Guide For example in Sequencer the grab is added to the Event list and an image thumbnail appears in the playlist You can set transition and duration information for the image Note The Scrapbook is a temporary file that is deleted when you close TitleOne To keep any images permanently ensure that you save them For more information on the Scrapbook see How Do I Use the Scrapbook on page IS Chapter 7 Media Store AN A searchable list of media files in Media Store Introduction to Media Store Media Store provides a searchable list of stills video clips and animations Media files display as thumbnails with text descriptions in the
25. Right click the Scrapbook in the bottom right corner of the Media Store window and then select Add Info Figure 7 13 Add a Media File to the Scrapbook Switch to the Media Store module on the toolbar click the Media Store button In the Scrapbook right click the media to add to the Build set and then select Use The Build Media Store dialog opens with the file added Add Files from Other Applications You can add media files from other applications to the Build set In the application copy the media to the Windows clipboard by using the Edit menu or by pressing CTRL C Open or switch to TitleOne Switch to the Media Store module on the toolbar click the Media Store button Select Edit gt Paste Image The Build Media Store dialog opens with the file added View Files Selected for Build To view the media files in the Build set folio click the Build button on the Media Store toolbar The Media window displays the files in the Build set If you are in browse mode Media Store switches to database mode E Serra Pl e Fs JS PE Pa VES JURE PS PUD Fl Wels pA ea Local Bronse sel OE EM worldmap E z clue 3 canada Figure 7 14 Build Set Set Titles and Keywords Before you add a file to the database you must set a title and at least one keyword You can search for or sort files using titles and keywords You can set a default title or list of keywords for all media files For
26. See Video Transparent Pattern Filters CG Paint and Frame Grab Filters that operate on the interlaced fields in a captured image are known as video clean up filters Other filters that manipulate modify and refine your image in complex ways include alpha adjustment filters color adjustment filters distortion filters and legalize filters Alpha filters work only on one channel of an image while the others affect the entire image Not all filters are available in all modules Animation An algorithm that changes the appearance of a keyframe as it moves through time Filters in Animation Editor include Transparency Crop Mosaic Blur Luminance and Tint See also Photoshop Filters and Third Party Filters Flyout Menu Paint and CG Some buttons on the Tools palette contain flyout menus with additional tools Buttons with flyout menus are identified by a small black arrow in the bottom right corner The flyout menus appear when you place the pointer on top of a tool and hold down the left mouse button Folio Media Store A subset of a Media Store database or the browsed media files In database mode you can use folios to organize Media Store media files into sets based on specific criteria such as media type job or client Adding a media file to a folio only creates a reference from the Global folio the media file is not duplicated Folios include the Set folio Local System folios Build folio and
27. The Wand Tolerance field on the Select tab specifies how similar the values have to be for inclusion in the selection Selects areas using the current brush attributes painting a selection Lets you select pixels less than 100 Selects a rectangular area Selects an elliptical area Selects an entire scan line Selects a column one pixel wide Lets you draw a freehand selection Lets you select an area as a free form polygon You draw a series of connected lines then double click or hold the CTRL key and click to close the selection Selection vs Contents Selection Marquee Selection Channel Opacity and Level of Selection Each selection has two parts the selection outline and the selection contents The selection tools and the options on the Select tab affect the selection outline The filters color alpha transformation and image editing tools modify the contents The selection area is outlined by a flashing dotted line called the selection marquee The selection marquee only shows you which pixels are selected as long as a pixel is at least 1 selected it appears within the selection marquee You can hide the marquee by selecting the Hide Selection checkbox on the Select tab The marquee disappears but the pixels remain selected The Selection Channel thumbnail on the Select tab shows the degree to which individual pixels are selected Black represents areas that are 0 selected white presents a
28. eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 96 DEE eneen eege 190 SUE ee 181 select multiple objects 183 Sapara 269 SUIS cid 174 GA OD OCIS usina ci ci 106 UM 157 ODBC See external data sources offset animation transition 327 keyframes ios dr 292 Time Code trigger cccccocnccoconnncononos 347 online MOVE ONline srine ar nn 355 online folders oocccconccccccnnccocnncnonnos 356 opacity of Paint filters cusco as 485 SCICCION Age E 467 open See load OR search Operator cccooccccccccccccnncccnnccnno 416 Organic ele Ee sia 326 Original Res database images 399 out point set event end time Sequencer 335 alle ele ON suis a 133 output clear preview channel rarrnnnnnnanennnnr 14 clear program channel 14 COonfigurge MEO 33 preview single layout ccoonccconnncc o 46 run the playlist oooocccconccccocnco 358 single layout NN 46 EIERE dee 47 output Media Store set up single click takes Shot Box 428 Index 597 TitleOne User Guide 598 take files to video saninin 427 take files using Shot BOX rrrrrnrnnrrernnnn 428 output Sequencer add space between events 06 335 apply audio to events rrrrrarrrnnrrvanernn 330 apply transitions Laser 325 clear output content rrarrrnnrrrnnrvanernn 359 highlight event during output 349 DOP Playlist eee 349 monitor output activ
29. or FTP 220 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide b To log onto the site anonymously select the Anonymous radio button Otherwise select the Name radio button and enter a name and a password c Click the Go button beside the Current Path field The contents of the site directory are displayed in the Directory list Select the text file you want to link to You are returned to the Select Text Source dialog Continue to select text files for each data tag To preview the content of a text file select a data tag from the drop down list Click OK in the dialogs to return to CG CG outputs the selected text files during playback Link to an XML Source You can link a layout to an XML source For example you can link to an RSS data feed which sends the latest updates to the layout In the Select Text Source dialog select the XML RSS option The XML Data Source Setup dialog opens Enter a name for the XML source in the Data Source name field and click OK Use the Select Data Source structure to select the fields from the XML file that you want to display a Click the plus signs to expand the file structure in the XML Data Structure section b Select a data type that you want to appear in your layout Chapter 3 CG 221 TitleOne User Guide 222 c Click the right arrow button to add that data type to the Data Source Structure section Select Data Source Structure ML File Structure Data Source Structure H rss
30. t Horizontal Vertical depth added depth added Figure 8 24 Horizontal and Vertical Transformation You can change the opacity of your transformations with the Opacity field on the Transform tab This allows you to superimpose transformations as ghost images or have deeper layers show through certain areas of the current layer Edit an Image Paint offers several tools that you can use to edit and retouch your images With the image editing tools you can remove unwanted objects or artifacts copy and offset areas and adjust the luminance Image Editing Tools Paint has twelve image editing tools All tools except the Clone Fill and Offset tools are brush based That is they use the attributes set on the Brush tab Table 8 17 Image Editing Tools Tool Name Description Clone e Paints with image data sy e You can set the clone source and clone destination or copy the image data to use as the clone source Clone Fill e Fills with image data e You can set the clone source and clone destination Smear e Smears the image y Blur e Blurs the image A Offset e Offsets the image and wraps the edges Dodge e Lightens the image by moving the color values for the pixels up to their maximum for example RGB 255 72 0 will dodge to 255 255 0 Darkens the image by moving color values for the pixels to their minimum for example RGB 255 72 0 will burn to 255 0 0 Burn Chapter 8 Paint
31. 3 Open the Preferences dialog File gt Preferences Date Format Switch to the Store Paths tab DOMMYY In the Date Format section select the DDMMYY R MMDDYY or YYMMDD option MMOD Click OK Chapter 8 Paint O M Create high end graphics with the advanced editing tools in Paint Introduction to Paint Feature Note Paint is a purchase option in TitleOne Paint is a full featured image manipulation application that lets you edit retouch and add alpha to bitmap images and Paint files The sophisticated tools in Paint make it easy to clean up logos and images With a variety of filters you can create effects Quickly and easily Paint also makes it easy to create textures for use in the CG Editor Switch to Paint Interface Overview You can easily switch between modules using the buttons on the Toolbar or the options from the Tools drop down menu To switch to Paint use one of the following methods e On the Toolbar click on the Paint button e Select Tools gt Paint D La Be e Press F8 on the main keyboard Paint is a full featured bitmap based image manipulation application It lets you create edit retouch and add alpha to bitmap images These images can be used as logos backgrounds and textures in the CG Editor You can import files from other applications in many file formats including 32 bit formats containing alpha Any image layout or frame from CG Animation or Frame Grab ca
32. 351 output two layouts simultaneously 48 preview option 24 Program Preview palette display 14 set primary program channel 25 duplicate objects 182 197 duplicate rows ooccocccccncocncocnconnconocononanos 123 duration add space between events o 335 event duration oocccocccconncccncconnnnanonos 334 for PC Clock triggers 334 for Time Code triggers ccccccoccnccnooc 334 Index 589 TitleOne User Guide 590 for Timed triggers E 334 Ol MOUOM p se 288 set event in point rrranrrnnnrnanrrnnnnvanennn 335 set event out point rrrnnnnnanrrnnnnvanennn 335 transition duration 327 424 DUE ed 352 354 DVE Switcher ooocoocccccccccnccncinonnnccnns 546 549 apply template in Sequencer 549 create DVE template cooocccoccccocc 547 COP DVE saadan 548 delete A 549 set DVE dimensions 547 set DVE duration saa sene 547 set DVE position coooccccoccccccccccncnncnnos 548 set DVE rotation eee a 548 SEED VE SIZE ee 548 SOU DVE SOURCE Lubbe 547 set DVE Z 01der ication is 547 E EBU subtitle files 242 edge elements 150 153 combine edges cccccooccccnccncnncnnoncnnoncnonnnnnos 152 create edges EE 151 TOR CIOCKS licita 141 A A 227 Ed Dt os 151 edit images Paint ocooonccccconnnccconnnnns ATT edit mode CG rrrrnrnnnrnrnnnrnvrnnnrnn
33. 42 SWAP Swaps the contents of program channel I and program channel 2 requires a two channel system or two virtual channels set up using Strata The current channel is indicated by the number displayed in the bottom left under the playlist of the TitleOne window 43 CHANGE Switches the output channel for the current event CTRL Clears Scratch vii layout The default template CHANGE loads into Scratch vii See Set Default Template on page 72 Chapter 9 Resources 537 TitleOne User Guide Number Key 44 SETUP EVENT 45 READ SHIFT READ CTRL READ 46 TAKE SHIFT TAKE 47 DEL SHIFT DEL 538 TitleOne User Guide Function Sets up event previews event Reads the next item in the sequence For example if 200 is in the RapidFire text field and the next item is 232 vii RapidFire loads 232 vii into Scratch vii Finds the previous item in the sequence Note The item is not loaded Finds the next free number after the current number in the sequence If the focus is in the RapidFire text field reads the layout from the sequencer into Scratch vii and does not output Otherwise takes the current layout to the current output channel Note The focus must be in the RapidFire text field If the Load From Working Directory option is enabled see Set the Working Directory on page 64 loads the layout from the working directory filename without extension specified in the RapidFire text field into the Scrat
34. COMIC VOR PIE VIEW A ee CES ECO O E TAE 22 a Rec AAA EEE OOO Geer 24 Set UN Your Program EE EE 25 Work with SD and HD Files in TitleOne 0 00 cee es 27 al Ee Be Eiere EE 27 PO DNS NN ee 28 Comes EINANS a ias 29 Configure Your XD 200 Boards 0 0ococccoccocc ee 30 XD 200 Control Panel Overview sirrini a A E E A A 30 Create ei le Uer 31 EE RE 32 Configure APULQUIPUE saa 33 Contigure Relerente IM Ze 36 Contigure Miker Setas are 37 COnNGUre Audio SENGS aar 38 vever 40 Save FL ON GU ON ee 40 Bee Rei le D I ON RE 41 Edita Com avart A E 41 DeletecarC NA MN TN 41 OMD 43 Output In TIUEONE sai ee EE eae ee ea ed area 44 THeOne Output CapabllillOS esti a 44 Global OUIDUE EEN 46 THEON Op OPS vas 46 Selecta Program Channel avse 47 Outout Two Layouts SimuUltameOus ly in sd id el Ne 48 C1EAr Ne UP sara 50 Output ROS Ard CVS aa 50 Change Roll Crawl Output Speed occooccccccccccocccccccnccncnnnoncnoconnnonacnnonnnnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonannnnnnnnss 50 Pause Roll Crawl Playback oooocccconccccococcnconocononnononnononononnnncnnonncnnonnnrnnonnnnnnonnnrnnnnnnrnnonanennnns 50 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide Sequencer e de EE EE 51 Move One OM Cec ia al 51 MV SE 51 Me ONE A cer ante nee mre er eee eee eer eet 51 KEENE an EVEN EE 52 TEKE SiInGle Byen saa odde 52 RUME po POPE CO O A e o O O os coaa ce cec snare sepa oce 53 SOP PA Lei O RENE COPE EE E O See SEN 53 Montor OULD UE KEN
35. Follow these steps if CG is unable to load the image files for a template or layout With the layout loaded into CG select File gt Utilities gt Verify Materials CG performs a more thorough search for the missing image files During this search CG looks in and around the folders specified by the Search Order and Materials Path settings See Project Tab on page 514 to learn how to change these settings 2 If the image files are not found you can move the files to a subfolder within the Materials Path and select File gt Utilities gt Verify Materials again 3 If CGis still unable to automatically find the image files or if you do not wish to move your image files manually edit your layout objects to reference the image files at their new locations Note Be sure to save your layout or update your template once the file references are corrected To create a new layout within the current playlist press the Add Default Event button at dh E E MX METE Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 229 230 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide the bottom of the Playlist The CG workspace shows the new layout To quickly format the layout using a pre defined template select a template from the Template drop down list in the CG toolbar See Templates on page 231 for more information You can create four types of layouts within CG stills rolls crawls or animations To change the type of the selected layout
36. Global See Figure Displays the media files in the current Media 7 5 On page 380 Store database Set See Figure 7 5 Displays search results from your last database on page 380 search For more information see Search for Media on page 413 FI FI2 Collection folios that you can use to organize files To add media to these folios drag thumbnails from the media window to a collection folio button For more information see Collection Folios on page 402 Build Displays media in the Build set files to be added to the Media Store database in the next build For more information see Create a Database on page 388 380 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide Table 7 3 Database Mode Toolbar Button Function Local System Switches the collection folio buttons FI FI2 between the Local collection folios and the System collection folios For more information see Collection Folios on page 402 Browse Stops viewing database files and switches to browse mode so that you can browse files on drives You can also click a folder in the navigation pane to switch to browse mode and browse the files in that folder Note The Global and Set folios available from the database mode toolbar are different from the Global Browse and Browse Set folios available from the browse mode toolbar Attributes Palette The Attributes palette contains tabs that display descriptive information for a media file such as title keyw
37. Offset 292 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Offset moves the focal point from the center of the keyframe to a new location Select the Offset tool and drag the keyframe up or down to offset the Y axis drag the keyframe left or right to offset the Y axis or hold down both mouse keys while dragging to offset the Z axis You can also enter the offset in the X Y or Z fields How Offset Affects Rotation Offset is only a factor when you are working with Orientation or Spins Animation Editor rotates an object around a pivot point By default this pivot point is at the center of the keyframe When you change the offset you are changing the location of a keyframe relative to the pivot point which is fixed You are moving the keyframe away from the pivot point so that it orbits around the offset point Change the Keyframe Shape You can change the shape of a keyframe in three ways Extend Skew and Scale The controls for all of these properties are located on the Shape tab as well as on the FX palette You can only change one property at a time but you can apply every property to a single keyframe What Happened to Z Space Keyframe Shape Right Click Menu t vi En G Ah Ah h A 000 gt x 0 00 x 0 00 Ch 1 00 3 y 0 00 Y 0 00 0 00 v 1 00 Obj Figure 4 118 Shape Tab While you can fly a 2D object in 3D space you cannot alter its shape in three dimensions because the true shape of the obje
38. Offsets the time values when applying a motion template containing more than one path Stagger starts each path after a specific number of keyframes Strata Configuration utility that controls the output and display of your Inscriber applications You can assign applications to a layer on one or two channels Events can be scheduled and played independently on separate layers Style CG A set of attributes that you can apply to the text and graphic objects See also Text Styles Glossary TitleOne User Guide Surface CG Collects and organizes styles used in CG layouts By building a list of commonly used styles new layouts can be created with a standardized look without needing to recreate the Styles for every object Surface Texture Paint An imported image used to provide a more interesting pattern to an image Surface textures generally have finer detail than other types of textures Surface textures are used by all brush based tools and are applied using the Texture tool See also Texture System Folios Media Store Collection folios that are accessible to all network users Contrast with Local Folios T Tab Constrained Line See Floating Text Line Tablet See Graphics Tablet Tag A feature that allows you to label text objects for easy updates You can update the content with an external data source or manually in a TitleOne dialog Example dialogs that support tags are New
39. SD space The image is then stretched horizontally when outputting to 16 9 SD resulting in a clearer and sharper picture Animation CG Animation and Sequencer A type of CG layout or effect event From CG layouts are imported into Animation to move the text and graphic objects around in virtual 3D space then output in Sequencer Animation Editor Title One module that takes two dimensional CG text and graphics and creates three dimensional animations Animation Settings CG A dialog that determines how CG objects are sent in the FX workspace For each layer in a CG layout select As Lines As Characters or As Single Object To send the background to Animation click the Export Background checkbox Animation Transition Sequencer Displays a still event using the selected animation file as a transition The transition duration is determined by the length of the animation See also Transition ANSI Fonts A standard arrangement of alphanumeric characters within a font All ANSI fonts identify characters with three digit numbers ranging from 000 to 255 ANSI Identification Numbers Three digit numbers ranging from 000 to 255 used to identify specific characters in ANSI fonts A character usually has the same number in all fonts For example a is ANSI character 097 and is ANSI character 174 Use the Windows Character Map or the CG Character Map to find identification numbers Anti
40. Skew keyframes rrrnrnnnnnnrnnnrnnrnnnrnvnnnnrnnnnn 294 small caps EE 116 SMPTE eelere E 507 snap to QUIGES ie 103 SCreen GN savnede 103 video safe title area 104 239 snapshot of objects occcccocccccccoccnconoccnnnnos 269 Soft field Sequencer occcccoccccccnoccnconononoss 327 solid color treatments rrrnrrrnrrnnrrnnnnnnrr 158 sort Media Store Browse Set folio cocoocccoccccconcncno 408 database folios o ccocoooccccocnccccnncnnos 408 default database folio sort order 431 default Global Browse folio order 408 sort data SOUrCeS ccccooccnccnccccccncncnnnnnncnconcnnos 223 SOURCE ICONS aid 376 speed change crawl speed ona 50 change roll speed On air occccccccocn 50 for Crawl playback 323 for roll playback 323 spell check CG mitin ada 126 Spell Checker Media Store 394 spin keyframes rrrnrnnnrnnrnnnrnvrnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnn 291 spline objects CG rrrrrnnnrnrrnnnrnvrnnnrnnnnn 133 EN 182 line ONS rarrnnnnonnnronanevnnnnnanennnnnnanennnnee 134 line width ocooconccnncccccnnccocnnnccoccnnnnononoss 134 O E een 182 See also paths CG spline path Animation 282 285 SIE 282 285 continuity oocccoccccccnccncnccnncnncncnncnnos 282 284 ME 282 effect Of a change rrnnnnrnnnnnnenrnnrrennnnn 282 properties cccccccseeeeeeeeees 282 284 28
41. There are as many track sliders as there are paths Time Slider Animation A slider on the Preview Toolbar that gives you a visual representation of where you are at any time in your animation You can select any frame in the animation by dragging the time slider to the desired location Keyframes in your animation are represented by tick marks along the bottom of the time slider Timed Trigger Type Sequencer A group trigger type Plays each event sequentially for the set duration Once Sequencer reaches the event in point the event is triggered The Timed trigger starts the clock at 00 00 00 00 Glossary TitleOne User Guide Tint Filter Animation A motion filter that allows you to adjust color values of an object over time You can gradually change the saturation of an object from black and white to color or change the hue from one color to another Title The overall appearance of a video image created in CG consisting of three main elements background text and graphic objects Known also as a layout Tolerance Fill Paint A tool that fills a layer or selection based on luminance values in the image Use the Tolerance field to specify how close luminance values need to be in order to be filled in Total Event Duration The sum of the event duration and event wait time Track Slider See Timeline Animation Transformation Animation Changes the appearance of all or a portion of
42. To add criteria using a different search key repeat the following steps An AND operator is automatically inserted between criteria a From the Search Key list select another search key b Specify the attribute value using the Available attributes or Operators list 6 To perform the search click the Search button Use Search Operators An advanced search see Set Up an Advanced Search on page 415 uses multiple search criteria with operators The operators help to set your search parameters by narrowing or expanding your search criteria Table 7 10 Search Operators Operator Function Matches any value Matches any single character AND Both the previous and the following criteria must be matched OR Either the previous or the following criteria must be matched NOT The following criterion must not be matched Find a File The Find dialog selects individual search results based on the criteria set in the Key Search Criteria field The Find dialog closes after a search and selects the first media file that matches the search criteria in the Media window Using the buttons on the toolbar display the media to search in the Media window 2 Open the Find dialog Media Store gt Find Additive Search String Clear After Search Clear 28 09 2006 Clear After Search Clear Available Dates Recent Searches 12 09 2006 a AND 26 09 2006 OR 17 11 2006 E Search Key Keywords M
43. To show or hide the text baseline click the Display IAE Options button and select or clear the Text Baseline option Display Options GAR Use the controls in the Attributes tab to change text options such as font style rotation text size alignment and spacing You can also customize the way your object behaves when text is added to it and what happens when ENTER and TAB are pressed The Attributes tab contains a Paragraph tab and a Text Object Properties tab Click either tab to display its options Text Font A font is a complete set of type in a particular face The face is the design of the font Some fonts contain standard alphanumeric characters while other fonts contain only special symbols The fonts on your system are available for all Windows applications and they are specific to each computer If you work on multiple computers you need to be sure that the same fonts are installed on each one To change the font for your text objects Select a text object To select only some of the text in your object select the he Selection tool in the Tools palette hold the CTRL key and drag your cursor over the text you want to select 2 Switch to the Attributes tab of the Attributes palette 3 In the Formatting section of the tab open the Font drop down list The fonts that are installed on your system are displayed in the list 4 Select the font you want to use Your selected text changes to the new fon
44. You can rotate objects using the Rotate buttons the Attributes tab or the Rotate tool Chapter 3 CG To rotate selected objects e Click the Rotate Right and Rotate Left buttons in the CG Rotate Editor toolbar to rotate objects 90 degrees Right e In the Formatting section of the Attributes tab in the Attributes palette change the value in the Rotation field hd For text objects the Rotation field is on the Text Object Properties section of the Attributes tab Rotate Left e Position the Pointer or the Selection tool near the object s handle until it turns into the Rotate tool Click and drag the object clockwise or counter clockwise Figure 3 48 Rotate Objects with the Rotate Tool To flip graphic objects grab one of the object s handles with the Pointer or Selection tool then drag the handle through the object s opposite boundary The object flips across the boundary Select a handle Drag the handle across its opposite border Figure 3 49 Flip a Graphic Object Gradients Images and Active Textures do not flip with the objects You cannot flip text objects Chapter 3 CG 191 TitleOne User Guide Layer Objects Layers allow you to overlap the objects in a layout Each object is on its own layer unless you combine the edges of several objects Janet Murphy Janet Murphy PE Te a TET KR Se a LE i WfontherlatliGons A logo object ahead of the text A logo object behind the text objects
45. add to playlist as Media Store 426 loop Overlay animations during Output rrrnrrrrnnrrnnnn 80 Crawls during Output rrrrnrrnnnnrennnnrnnnn 80 loop Sequencer ANIMATIONS oser 332 L E 349 loop the playback CG 148 166 loosen the spline path oocccooncco 284 LRN button Shot Box 00 384 427 429 luminance filter occococccccncnccccnnnno 296 LZW image compression oocccoccnccncnccnncnnnos 399 M MacOS oa 226 228 Manual dd e 337 output with Manual trigger 339 select Manual trigger ssannennnennnennnn 338 markers keyframe Animation 287 matte avi files rrannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 148 166 O 211 media add to Media Library cooooccconcncno 177 insert into text objects 108 179 media files Media Store 374 add to databases rrrrrnnnrnnnrrnnnrrennnnen 388 add to playlist See playlist Media Store lge EEN 378 385 check availability 422 compress database images 399 databases See Media Store databases delete EEE 383 411 EE A gee cena a 386 keywords See keywords Media Store media Numbers 376 MENS pes 410 Metadatos 386 OLENE due eege 375 search for See search Media Store SOM deen 382 407 431 SOUCO ICON tal 376 take TO VideO sundene 427 thumbn
46. all pixels that are 100 transparent Invert e Inverts the current selection Crop e Crops the image to the current selection Select Fully e Selects all pixels in the selection at 100 To use the selection fields enter a specific value in the appropriate field and click on the corresponding button to apply the change All values are in pixels Table 8 14 Selection Fields Option Illustration Description Expand Contract Feather Border e Enlarges the selection outward e Shrinks the selection inward e Feathers or softens the selection by selecting pixels at lesser levels e Creates a border around the selection Table 8 14 Selection Fields Option Grow Similar Smooth Description Swells the selection based on the tolerance value Extends the selection based on the pixel values of its neighbors Selects regions similar to the current selection based on the tolerance value Includes or excludes pixels in the selection based on whether the majority of nearby pixels are selected Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual 471 472 Work with Transformation Tools The Transform tab and the transformation tools on the Tools palette control all the transformation options allowing you to move scale rotate and otherwise modify your selections You can also use these tools to add shadows Selections and Transformations Transform Tab vs Transformation Tools T
47. and transition information for all your media files To restore your database complete the following steps If your Media Store database is corrupt delete its folder To determine the location of your database folder Select File gt Preferences b Switch to the Store Paths tab c In the Store Locations area the Server field displays the database folder 2 Add each media file to the Build set For more information see Add Browsed Files on page 389 Note To add frame grabs you must browse to the folder that contains the images specified by the FrameGrabDirectory entry in the Preferences section of the Inscribe ini file 3 Open the Build Media Store dialog See Figure 7 11 on page 390 and Figure 7 12 on page 391 4 For each media file set media options Media options specify the following e Whether to include an image in the database or simply reference it e Image size e Image file compression only for included images For more information see Set Media Options on page 398 Note The title and keyword list are automatically recovered 5 Build the media files into the database For more information see Build a Database on page 400 Media Store automatically recovers the attribute information for each media file from its corresponding metadata file Chapter 7 Media Store 405 TitleOne User Guide Update Thumbnails You can control how the thumbnails display in the Media window and update the
48. channel playlist if focus is in RapidFire text field Otherwise take event Action Shortcut Shortcut Set up event Load layout from SHIFT ENTER working directory if Load From Working Directory option is enabled or Media Store if option is disabled into Scratch vii layout Focus must be in RapidFire text field See Set the Working Directory on page 64 Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Set up event as SHIFT Clear all output CTRL SHIFT linked event MINUS SIGN channels Read the next item Clear the CTRL in sequence Scratch vii layout and load default template Find the previous SHIFT A Clear RapidFire PERIOD item in the PLUS SIGN text field SEQUENCE For RapidFire keyboard key descriptions see RapidFire Keyboard on page 532 Chapter 9 Resources 531 TitleOne User Guide RapidFire Keyboard If you purchased the RapidFire Keyboard option for TitleOne you received the custom RapidFire keyboard designed for sports and live event coverage The following illustration shows the RapidFire keyboard with colored keycaps and labels The following tables describe the function of the RapidFire keys Modules Number Key Function l Switches to CG 2 Switches to Sequencer 3 Switches to Media Store Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne 4 Switches to Animation Editor 532 Chapter 9 Resources TitleOne User Guide Number Key Function
49. displays text one line or character at a time In Sequencer a reveal is recognized as an effect event RGB Color Model A color model that describes colors in terms of the amount of red green and blue light in the signal The values of the three components are added together to determine the final color White is defined with red green and blue set to full intensity 255 black is defined with red green and blue set to zero intensity Any color definition with equal amounts of red green and blue is gray Row CG Specially grouped text objects that are easily edited and duplicated using shortcut keys and the Row menu Used for creating tables and leaderboards S Safe Title Area See Video Safe Title Area Saturation The amount of pure color 100 saturation is pure color with no black or white mixed in 0 saturation is a shade of gray with no hint of color Glossary 575 TitleOne User Guide 576 Scale Animation A tool on the Shape tab that increases or decreases the size of an object or character while constraining its proportions Paint A tool on the Tools palette that increases or decreases the size of an object or selection without constraining its proportions Scan Line A single horizontal sweep across the face of a video display by the electron beam that creates the picture NTSC uses 525 scan lines PAL uses 625 Scanned Image A printed image that has been converted by a scann
50. l6 and 24 bit photographic images achieve at least 10 1 compression Not suitable for 32 bit images because it causes loss of the alpha channel 8 bit images or most computer generated images Combined with less than full screen sizing images display surrounded by black not alpha Some files achieve over 20 1 compression Suitable for computer generated images including graphic pages from CG May compress photographic images Fastest compression method Performs both LZW and VII compression If one file is smaller it chooses that compression method Otherwise no compression is applied Suitable when adding various file types 6 For each media file repeat steps 2 5 Build a Database The final step in creating or adding files to a Media Store database is to build it To open the Build Media Store dialog click the Add to the Store button on the Media Store palette The Build dialog lists all the files in the Build set See Figure 7 11 on page 390 and Figure 7 12 on page 391 2 To build the database click the Build All button OR View Database Files To add only the files selected in the Build Set area click the Build Selected button Note It is recommended that you build a database when you are not working in Media Store for example overnight or over a weekend To view the media files in the current Media Store database click the Global button on the Media Store toolbar Media Store displ
51. outlined in this chapter TitleOne includes a variety of output options that allow you to create a workflow specific to your environment Your choice of output may impact how you work in TitleOne Review the playback solutions described in this section to decide how you can make TitleOne work best for you TitleOne Output Capabilities Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide The playback capabilities in Title One allow you to output layouts from any TitleOne tool output the playlist from Sequencer or output using a Title One utility The following table provides an overview of the available options Table 2 1 TitleOne Output Options Output Option Global Output Sequencer Output Navigate Dialog Description The global output options allow you to preview or take a layout from any TitleOne tool CG Sequencer Media Store Animation Editor Frame Grab and Paint For details see Global Output on page 46 Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne The Sequencer output options are available in Sequencer only and control the output of the entire playlist For details see Sequencer Output on page SI The Navigate dialog is available in any TitleOne tool and allows you to quickly select and take layouts using your keyboard For details see Navigate Dialog on page 54 Table 2 1 TitleOne Output Options Output Option Shot Box Palette RapidFire Overlay Strata Compositin
52. simply make duplicate copies of the text and graphic objects called keyframes then create changes in motion color movement or transparency at each keyframe When you play back this sequence of keyframes the text and objects change gradually as they move through each keyframe along the motion path Create an All animations are based on CG layouts The following procedure shows Animation how to create a basic animation Detailed information on how to use Animation Editor is covered throughout this chapter Create and format your text and objects in CG 2 Select Animation from the Layout Type drop down list in CG 3 Click the Effect Settings button on the toolbar to open the Transition Settings dialog and select how you want the layers to pass to Animation 4 Click on the Animation button on the main toolbar 5 Select an object or line of text in the FX workspace and press INSERT to add a new keyframe Add as many keyframes as you want for each object 6 Select the Move tool from the FX Palette and then drag and drop the keyframe s anywhere on the screen 7 Use the options in the Position Shape and Filter tabs to change how the object appears over time 8 Use the options in the Time and Spline to adjust the timing and smoothness of each path 9 Select Go gt Render Animation IO Go online to make the animation fly Chapter 4 Animation 255 TitleOne User Manual Understand Spline Paths Time vs Space 256
53. the transition is applied to the event You can assign a disk based audio file to any event in Sequencer using the options on the Audio tab Feature Note Audio is an option in TitleOne h Ud ND Select the event in the Sequencer playlist Switch to the Audio tab Click the Browse button to select an audio file for the event Use the Offset field to delay the start of the audio file from the beginning of the event Time is measured in hh mm ss ff Apply an Alpha Mask Set Real Time Animation Playback 5 Use the Duck Input field to duck the pass through audio decrease the volume of the output video In the Duck Input field decrease the audio by a set number of decibels The audio level decreases when the event is playing 6 To remove the audio click the Reset All to Default button Note For information on setting audio options see Configure Your XD 200 Boards on page 30 You can select an image or video file to use as a mask The mask displays over the selected event during output The selected event displays through the alpha of the selected file Select the event in the Sequencer playlist h Wi oN Switch to the Mask tab Click the Browse button to select the mask file for the event If the image is in color use the Channel drop down list to select which pixel color s are converted to transparent alpha for 32 bit images luminance red green and blue red green blue 5 To remove t
54. 0 ch Relative OE O Absolute Count 2 All Reverse Stagger o Beginning O End BEEN A From left I to left From right I ko rigt From bottom f Eo E Template Applied tip up I tip back From nothing to 18 Q Uxgleg A 1 2 3 d expand squish 5 E Registry Preview Registry Template Options Management Template Template Preview Template Applied List to Layout Figure 4 98 Templates Tab Select a Template The Template List includes all preset templates as well as any custom templates you may add to the registry To select a template from the list click it Preview a Template The Template Preview window provides a view of what the template looks like To preview a template Select a path in the FX workspace 2 Select a template from the list 3 Click the Template tab above the preview window and then the green play button to the right to see how the template works 4 Click the Applied tab and then click the play button to see how the template works with the selected path Chapter 4 Animation 273 TitleOne User Manual Apply a Template Motion templates take the text and graphic objects created in CG Editor and create an animation path for each object based on the information in the template You can apply a template to an individual character a single path multiple paths or all paths in a single animation Apply to Individual Characters In Animation Editor yo
55. 0 00 16 12 00 00 11 12 00 R Progra o y SN vi 0 00 00 00 Loop 1 Ex Timed EI Trigger Type drop down list Figure 5 18 Trigger Type Menus Use the Manual The Manual trigger type allows an operator to manually trigger each event Trigger using the SPACEBAR Select the Manual Trigger Use the options on the group header or the Event Editor tab to select the Manual trigger Select the group header 2 Select the trigger using one of the following methods e On the group header right click on the current trigger and select Manual from the right click menu e On the Event Editor tab select Manual from the Trigger Type drop down list 338 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Use the Timed Trigger Output with a Manual Trigger Once you move the playlist online use the SPACEBAR to manually trigger each event I To go online press CTRL SHIFT O You are prompted to save your playlist if you have not saved yet Once all the events are rendered and moved online the Run tab becomes available Select the group header containing the events you want to output Switch to the Run tab Click the Run Job button to start the output Press the SPACEBAR to trigger your event The event plays on the program channel Ga NK 0 N 6 Continue to output the remaining events using one of the follo
56. 00 00 00 11 01 00 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 ar Program iW Local pisk Remote y poo 00 00 00 00 E Program Manual vw Label field Figure 5 16 Name the Group Header 4 Press ENTER on the main keyboard not the ENTER key on the number pad The group header is labeled in the Sequencer playlist Note Pressing the ENTER key on the number pad triggers output Delete Group Headers You can use the option on the Playlist menu to remove a group header from the playlist When you remove a group header the events become part of Chapter 5 Sequencer 333 TitleOne User Guide Event Duration Set Event Duration 334 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide the group above If you only have one group header in the playlist you cannot delete the header I To delete a group header select the header in the playlist 2 Select Playlist gt Remove Group Header CTRL U The Event Editor tab includes the options for setting your event duration Duration is set for individual events not for the entire group Events play sequentially based on their in and out points Event duration is dependant on the trigger type selected for the group The In Point and Out Point fields are available for the Timed Time Code and PC Clock trigger types Operators determine the event duration for the Manual and
57. 158 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Transparency Many treatments allow you to set a transparenc Yy y a P 2 Transparency E value with a slider control Drag the slider to fe the right to select 100 transparency completely invisible and drag it to the left to select 0 transparency completely opaque You can also enter a transparency percentage in the number field Solid Color Use the Solid Color treatment to apply a single color to an element WEATHER Figure 3 31 The Solid Color Treatment The controls for the Solid Color treatment are in the Settings section of the Edge Depth and Shadows tab They are in the Color section of the Face tab Click the Color drop down list to select a solid color with the Color Palette 2 Drag the Transparency slider to change the transparency of the element Linear Gradient Use the Linear Gradient treatment to apply a two color linear gradient to an element Linear gradients shade from one color to another in a straight line VATS ALIS ED Figure 3 32 The Linear Gradient Treatment The controls for the Linear Gradient treatment are in the Settings section of the Edge Depth and Shadows tab They are in the Color section of the Face tab I Select the colors for the linear gradient a Click the first Color drop down list to select the first color for the gradient By default the first color is applied to the top of the element b Click the second C
58. 293 SPINE LAD ias 251 282 Templates tab ccoccccnccocccocncoo 251 273 Time TaD sa 251 286 Attributes palette CO 95 Attributes tab ooocccc 113 141 189 Depth and Shadow tab o 142 DEP taD od 153 Digital Clock Format tab 143 Digital Timer Format tab 144 OGG TAD sti EE EN 151 Face and Edge tab E 141 FACE taD matan 139 148 150 Logo Details section oooccoococ o 138 Paragraph section 113 Shadow tab EE 154 Sheen section cococccccccncccccnccncnnnonnncnnnos 155 Text Object Properties section 119 Attributes palette Media Store 375 381 Image Info tab rrrrnnrnrnrnnnrvrrnnrrenrnnnnen 381 Key Info tab occccocccccccncco 381 409 410 MEMO TD eranan 381 411 Transition ab 381 424 Attributes palette Paint Brush taD NEE 436 450 GOD AD messene 436 458 A i 437 483 EN sadel 437 493 SEG ah vasse 436 465 Transform tab o ae 436 474 VIEW ED eee 436 490 Attributes palette Sequencer ANIMalon TAD EE 309 PUUIGIO ED 309 Effect Settings tab 0annnnaanenaannnnni 309 Event Editor tab aannannnannnnnnennennnnnn 309 Mask tab saler 309 Renderer tab ccccccscccseeeceeeeeeeesaees 309 ge EE eee 309 audio apply to Events rrrrrrrrarernnrrrarernnnnvanennn 330 configure audio settings 38 PAULO TET andel ias 69 aut
59. 3 74 Import a Text Based Subtitle File e To import an EBU based subtitle file select File gt Import gt Import EBU Subtitle File 2 Locate and select the file containing the subtitles 3 Click Open to import the text file The Subtitle Import dialog appears After the text import process is complete save the playlist by choosing File gt Save Subtitle Import Importing Subtitle Text Current Page Total Pages Cancel 244 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Set the Timing Values Versioning When you import a timecoded or EBU formatted file CG automatically converts the timecodes into a format that it can use The timecodes for each subtitle get converted into the following timing components time in duration wait and time out You can take these subtitles to video without any modification or editing If you need to view or modify the timing components use the Sequencer module See Event Duration on page 334 CG includes an option to export subtitles and timecodes to a text file You can edit the file and import it back into CG This feature is useful when creating multiple versions of a video each in a different language For example suppose you want to subtitle a video in English French and Spanish Import a subtitle only file containing subtitles in the original language into CG as described in Import a Subtitle File on page 243 2 Using the Sequencer module and a timecode source ad
60. 30 frames NTSC 25 frames PAL before or after the current keyframe Keyframe Original Original Keyframe inserted Before Keyframe Keyframe inserted After F S F 0 frames 30 0 frames 30 Figure 4 85 Keyframes Inserted Before and After Original Keyframe When inserting a keyframe at the current frame in time the keyframe plays no part in where the new keyframe is inserted Instead the new keyframe is inserted at the current frame in time as indicated in the Current Frame field and by the Time Slider on the Preview toolbar Chapter 4 Animation 261 TitleOne User Manual Insert Keyframe Defaults 262 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual To insert a new keyframe at specific frame in time I Move the Time Slider on the Preview toolbar to the desired location in the animation path Or 2 Enter a frame number into the Current Frame field 3 Select Edit gt Insert Keyframe gt At Current Frame to insert a new keyframe 2 EI d Jm IHR adr Current Frame Time Slider Figure 4 86 Keyframe Preview Toolbar When you insert a keyframe at the current frame no additional frames are added to the spline so the motion path does not become longer If the current frame in time is a keyframe the Insert Keyframe gt At Current Frame option is unavailable In the following example a new keyframe was inserted at frame 15 Original Keyframe Original Keyframe inserted At Keyframe
61. 5 Switches to Frame Grab 6 Switches to Paint 6 Paint is a purchase option in TitleOne Predefined Media Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Store Files Number Key Function 7 STORE I Loads predefined Media Store file assigned to the Shot Box palette Defined button I to the workspace The file is centered on the workspace 8 STORE 2 Loads predefined Media Store file assigned to the Shot Box palette Defined button 2 to the workspace The file is centered on the workspace 9 STORE 3 Loads predefined Media Store file assigned to the Shot Box palette Defined button 3 to the workspace The file is centered on the workspace IO STORE 4 Loads predefined Media Store file assigned to the Shot Box palette Defined button 4 to the workspace The file is centered on the workspace Overlay Number Key Function II OVERLAY Toggles Overlay open and closed STOP Stops all layers for example stops clocks and counters SHIFT STOP LAYER I Toggles Overlay layer I between the show and hide states but does not take the change to air N Chapter 9 Resources 533 TitleOne User Guide Text Editing Layout 534 Chapter 9 Resources TitleOne User Guide Number 13 Number 21 22 Number 23 24 Key ALL ON SHIFT ALL ON ALL OFF SHIFT ALL OFF K O lt TEXT DELETE CURSORS DELETE END STYLE LIBRARY NEWS EDIT CRAWL SHIFT CRAWL CENTER ROW CENTER PAGE Key GU
62. A7 Time Templates ee BEES ei NA i Cua Ey GER e Kess L PJend 0076 S A Timelines Figure 4 82 Animation Path Timelines In CG Editor only two dimensions come into play height and width These dimensions are represented by the X axis and the Y axis all the text and graphic objects created in CG are flat two dimensional objects You enter another dimension when you switch to Animation The text and graphics that were once only two dimensional now operate in a 3D space This third axis called the Z axis represents the depth of your text and graphics in the workspace In Animation all objects even objects that have only height and width exist in this 3D space Y axis X axis Figure 4 83 XYZ Axes Chapter 4 Animation 257 TitleOne User Manual Select a Tool Animation Tools are Position Orientation Rotate Spins Offset Extend Skew Twist and Scale Select a tool in any of the following ways e Click the tool on the FX palette e Click the tool on the Placement or Shape Attributes tabs e Right click the FX workspace and select a tool from the menu When you select a tool the cursor changes to reflect which tool is active Table 4 31 Animation Tools N Position Move Orientation Rotate Offset Spins Extend Twist Skew Scale Apply a Tool Whether you select a tool from the right click menu FX palette or Attributes tabs you apply a tool in the same way Select
63. Adjust Roll and Crawl e EE 322 Start Roll Crawl On Screen or Off Screen occcccccncccccnccncncccncnoconnnonnnnnnnnononnnnonnnnnnnnnnononnnenncnonanenos 322 AGiUSU RR Oli Crawl SPE ee 323 Prepare Events for Output 325 AN Man WONS ee 325 Apply an Animation Transition NEE 327 USE Global Tass aa 328 Create Global Transition File sic aii 328 Apply the Global Transitions sua ts 329 Save a New Set of Global Transitions ccococcoccnnccocnncconnncnonnncnnnnononononnnnonannonannnonannnnnnnss 329 Switch between Global Transition Files 00nnn0nnnnnnnannnunnnennnennnnrnnnsnrrsrrrsrrnnrrrenrrnerresrrenrrne 330 ele AUNG TO EVENIS ds 330 APPIV an Ana MaSK caia ii cdta 331 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide xvii xviii Set Real Time Animation Playback 331 LOOP ME AAN rep 332 GOUD E VOTIS A a 332 co A 333 Delete Group Header pe 333 Event RI e HE 334 SEL EVEN Dual arve 334 Add Space Between EE 335 Select Trigger for Output visir a NEEN es 337 A 337 Tigger TYDE UE 338 usete Manual TAI os 338 Seed Ne Manual Nee e EE 338 Output with a Manual Trigger occccccocnncoconnncccocnncnnononcnnnnnnononononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnncnnnnnns 339 Use the Timed NIE SPP PS 339 Select th med Tigger E 339 Output with a Timed Trigger ooccccooccnccccccnnccnncnnnnnncnnononcnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnonnrnnnnnnnnnnnnas 339 VSee PTE He 340 Se NS PT Tigger Ne 340 Ser up Your COM PON Egger av 3
64. Both Input Configures the XD 200 for both input and and Output output functions Use Key Input for Live DVE Sets the key input for the live DVE or frame of Frame Grab grab operations This option is available for SD only This checkbox is available when you select the above option No Input Required Only Configures the XD 200 for output only Output Enable Ancillary Data In SD allows your Inscriber application to Input Output read write video data to lines 17 20 on both fields This option is NTSC specific and has no effect in PAL In HD reads writes vertical ancillary data packets from to the SDI video stream Enable Timecode Input Sets your Inscriber application to read the timecode from the XD 200 If you do not have a timecode signal connected to the card make sure the checkbox is cleared In the Video Cards list colored indicators mark your timecode status An orange light indicates that timecode is present but not enabled A green light indicates a valid timecode 4 In the Input Output Standard section select whether the video card will broadcast in High Definition or Standard Definition 5 Select the video display standard in your environment from the Display Standards drop down list 6 Select the Use HD SD Downconversion checkbox to generate your CG content in HD and have your system output both HD and SD feeds Note the following configuration points e Optimal configuration is to have an HD video feed
65. Browse folio Font Manager CG An application that builds and maintains the Inscriber font database You can use the Font Manager to convert True Type fonts to Inscriber fonts Footprint Removal Field Filters CG and Frame Grab Video clean up filters that combine the average field filters and adaptive field filters First the average field filter is applied to the selected field then the adaptive field filter is applied to the other field Frame Animation A point along a spline path indicated by a small square between keyframes Frames are also referred to as in betweens See also Keyframe and Video Frame Frame Buffer A hardware card that stores frame information and then outputs it to video Inscriber products interact with the frame buffer to add information Glossary 561 TitleOne User Guide 562 to the video frame stored on the frame buffer to create complex effects Frame Grab TitleOne module that captures individual frames from a video feed The image can be filtered in Frame Grab and then added to the Scrapbook used as a background for layouts or edited in Paint using a variety of tools and filters G Gamut The available colors that can be displayed on a particular device video output or computer monitor The RGB color gamut describes the colors available in video and on the computer Orange and yellow colors are in limited supply in the RGB gamut making it difficult to
66. CTRL 0 Make Shotbox field active when Number pad ENTER DELETE Fl CG Shortcuts Action Shortcut Action Shortcut Text Objects Move cursor to UP ARROW Select character SHIFT LEFT previous line to left of cursor ARROW Move cursor to DOWN ARROW Select character SHIFT RIGHT next line to right of cursor ARROW Jump to start of HOME Select word to CTRL SHIFT LEFT line left of cursor ARROW Jump to end of line END Select word to CTRL SHIFT right of cursor RIGHT ARROW Jump to first line in CTRL HOME Select from SHIFT UP ARROW cursor to previous line text object Jump to last line in CTRL END Select from SHIFT DOWN text object cursor to next ARROW line Jump to start of CTRL LEFT Select from SHIFT HOME word ARROW cursor to start of line Delete selected DELETE Select from SHIFT END text remove cursor to end of character to the line right of the cursor Delete selected BACKSPACE Select from CTRL SHIFT text remove cursor to start of HOME character to the object left of the cursor Delete text to end SHIFT DELETE Select from CTRL SHIFT END of line cursor to end of object Switch to Insert CTRL Switch to Auto CTRL cursor Erase cursor Chapter 9 Resources 523 TitleOne User Guide 524 Chapter 9 Resources TitleOne User Guide Action Shortcut Shortcut Switch to Lock CTRL 0 cursor Text Rows Make row CTRL ENTER CTRL SHIFT X Swap rows CTRL SHIFT C Paste row CTRL
67. Change the Date Fora iia A ista 431 Pals E espera a ri CBE 433 INTFOGUCLION 10 Paint sosa ewe bee eee dees 434 SMP 434 xxii Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide Fa 11 g 5 0 OM EE 434 PAN NAS NE RE 435 PATTIES Paleo aa 436 MOONS Hl OC cad ds 437 Palit PETE TOONS ua 438 Active Channels aici oo o e a 440 PT a E ERE E O A een cee es ee eee ene oe 440 ils ele Men ae 441 o A 441 Program Preview E EE 441 PAN CONCEDIS sh ing se bir a 442 Clean Up Logos and Add Alpha ooccccoccncccccnccccnnccccncconnnonacnccnnnnnnonnnnannnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonens 442 NOL ells MAGS ee 442 REGUM IMEI versene aber ae dene 442 Create Backgrounds nd Collages cria rai 442 MAKE SEN EE 442 PAOD Trans Oras JF 442 Create Textures and Patterns rrrannrrnnnrrnnannvrnnnrnnannvnnnnrnnnnnnnanrnnannrnnannrnnansnnnnnennansnnnnnennannnnnnne 443 Apply Filters and Create Effects 00nnn0nnnnannnannnennnennnrnnnsnrrsrrrnrrrnnrrrnerrrrrrsnrrsnrrnnrrrnrrrrrrrererrene 443 EE EE 443 Work on Chanels EE 443 WOrk WIIN Files sisas AA Vee ea A 444 PAN FEFOT AAA e E E E E EE ET T E 444 Create a New Paint El toi 444 sto Opena EE 445 IMPOR ON ION ae 445 IMPOR FETE ti E A E A di soe 446 EXDOMM OF Save a RIO til a 446 Selen 446 Import and Export Selections occccocccccocnnococnccncnnccncncnonnnononnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonos 447 Change Image and Canvas A e cata 447 Work with Paint Tools 0ococc
68. EEN 213 216 link directly to layouts ooccccooo 219 text files MPON EE 240 UMECOUEA Lune 242 text objects AE 105 129 add tags iii il 206 aspect ratio oocccoccoconcconnoconiconnnnanonos 121 COLUMNS carreta 217 Create us 106 CUISO a O As 120 EM 106 format external data sources 225 A A 122 Insert mecdamio 108 179 DECK NEI ua 119 lOCK WAM sad 120 paragraph Trate 107 relative embellishments 117 OSIZO id 116 122 EE 182 selection MOde rarnarennrrurnnnenvennennneneenn 108 TEN 121 A EE ke Ne pr 173 TADSSIODS aa 126 UDG gt EE ET 202 update image files 209 update with News Edit 204 NA 122 word Wrap eoocccocccccccncncncnnonconocaninonnns 120 242 See also text CG OT DA iere eebe 105 textures CG See image treatment textures Paint NN 489 seamless sanden 488 MEET 489 textures add to playlist as Media Store 426 Thesaurus aner 395 DEE 397 third party filters 486 thousands separator rrrrnreranennnnernnnnnnre 225 thumbnail 3D effects folders 297 thumbnails Media Store 374 375 376 385 A 383 411 descriptive information 376 430 OSIZO pose 407 Ee asta 382 407 431 text CMAN GC ae 430 NTE ee 406 412 view of search results cococcccco 419 view transparency rrrnnnrnrnnrrrnnnrvnnnnnn 423 tighten the spline path
69. Edges List The Settings and Sheen sections of the Edge tab allow you to edit the properties of the currently selected edge To add an edge click the Add Edge button A new edge is added to your object New edges automatically become the outermost edge and appear at the bottom of the Defined Edges list Figure 3 26 Add a Black Outside Edge to a Graphic Object Chapter 3 CG 151 TitleOne User Guide 152 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Edit an Edge You can rearrange your edges set their widths add sheens and add treatments to them You can also set how they behave when the object is resized To edit an edge select it in the Edge tab s Defined Edges list and use the controls in the Settings section of the tab Set the position for an edge e Select the Outside Edge radio button to display the edge outside the object s face and any other outside edges If you switch an edge from the inside to the outside of an object it automatically becomes the outermost edge e Select the Inside Edge radio button to display the edge inside an object s face and any other inside edges If you switch an edge from the outside to the inside of an object it automatically becomes the innermost edge 2 Enter the width of the edge in the Edge Width field 3 Select a treatment for the edge from the Treatment list The treatment determines the color image and active texture choices available for the edge See Element Treatments on pag
70. GPI triggers so you do not set a duration for these trigger types e Timed triggers are based on a start time of 00 00 00 00 If you want to play your first event for 30 seconds you would enter 00 00 00 00 as your in point and 00 00 30 00 as your out point e Time Code triggers are based on the time code device you use Base your in and out points on the format the time code device uses e PC Clock triggers are based on your system clock and use the 24 hour format If you wanted to play your first event for 30 seconds starting at 6 00 PM you would enter 18 00 00 00 as your in point and 18 00 30 00 as your out point For more details on trigger types see Select a Trigger for Output on page 337 To set the event duration for time based triggered events complete the following steps Select the first event in the group Add Space Between Events 2 On the Event Editor tab enter a start time for the event in the In Point field Time is measured in HH MM SS FF hours minutes seconds frames I 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 11 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 00 1 i d V d gt 100 10 0 OD 00 11 08 00 01 04 0 0 O 00 1 D 10 Hi Preview CLR Pro
71. Media Store Palette Buttons Button Function r Adds media files in the Build set to a Media Store d database For more information see Create a Database on page 388 Edits the current folio name 2 st r Deletes files selected in the Media window For more a information see Delete Media Files on page All st Shot Box Palette The Shot Box palette provides a Quick keyboard method for finding and outputting files in the Media window or playlist The Store Play button switches between selecting files from the Media window and selecting files from the playlist To access a media file enter its media number in the Chapter 7 Media Store 383 TitleOne User Guide Number field Program Channel Buttons 1013 d Number Field lees Th Ie So H Learn Mode Button mie SK Preview Button Sl 7 5 g Take Take Button 4 5 6 Defined ajej EN Defined Buttons Find Button ST T cur N 4 Figure 7 8 Shot Box Palette Store Play Button You can perform the following tasks using the Shot Box e Find and then select or preview a media file For more information see Find a File Using the Shot Box Palette on page 417 e Add media files to the playlist For more information see Add Media Files to the Playlist Using the Shot Box Palette on page 426 e Define media files that you can take to video with a single click For more information see Set Up Media Files for Single Click Takes on p
72. Opacity and Texture fields on the Brush tab let you set how much texture is applied to your image See Work with Brush Tools on page 450 and Edit an Image on page 477 for details on applying surface textures with the Texture tool or other brush based tools Alpha textures are a variation of surface textures The texture is applied to the entire image but instead of texturizing the color channels as in surface textures in an alpha texture the alpha channel is texturized Follow these steps to create an alpha texture Import an image or fill a layer with color 2 Import a texture or image file as a selection 3 Paint with the Alpha Add or Alpha Fill tool depending on the desired effect The imported texture or image is applied to the canvas as an alpha texture 4 Export the image for use in CG You can use this texture in CG as a background logo or texture Chapter 8 Paint 489 TitleOne User Manual 490 View Your Image Paint has a variety of viewing options located on the View tab These options as well as the Zoom and Scroll tools alter the actual view so you can view all of your image at various magnifications All views are corrected for the current video aspect ratio Zoom Scroll Pan View Radio Buttons Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Dese ee ee een zoom 100 wi View Options Grid Options E in Brush Preview Cursor E Wen RGE O Alpha bi H l Line Type Dotted Ke fe a Small Cros
73. Playlist You can save your entire playlist as a scribelist file To save your playlist as a scribelist file select File gt Save from any TitleOne tool The playlist saves with a scribelist file extension The scribelist file is your working playlist file Generally you will save all your playlists as scribelist files which include the following features e Saves all of your playlist information including the information for each layout in your playlist e Saves all output information set in Sequencer e Saves a referenced file path to any media and font files used in the playlist e Contains animation data You can open legacy icg and ins files in TitleOne 5 0 Once you open the file in TitleOne save the file with the scribe or scribelist extension Note the following limitations of legacy files e Legacy clock layouts will convert to a still layout e Text colors may look different e With the improved accuracy of text placement you might notice subpixel shifting e Legacy draw panels are not support in TitleOne 5 0 layouts TitleOne Workspace As you work in different TitleOne tools the general layout of your workspace remains the same making it easy to learn TitleOne operations Every TitleOne tool includes the toolbars the playlist the Program Preview palette Attributes palette and the Scrapbook As you switch from one TitleOne tool to the next the options remain in the same location on your computer
74. QUIDUL parir td ia 33 mixer settings 37 preview channel rarannnnnranannnnevnnnnnnnennn 18 program channel rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnvnnnrnnnnen 25 reference in rrrarnnnarennnrnvanrnnnnennnnnnnnennn 36 Time Code source coccccoccncccnncnnononcnncnnnoos 344 TitleOne system rrrnnnrnnrnnrnvnnnnrrennnnnnen 18 video settings EE 30 XD 200 Control Panel rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen 30 constrain lock object height rrrnnnrnnnnnrrnnnrrnnnnrr 119 lock object wd 120 EO MIL see er 120 Control Panel See XD 200 Control Panel coordinates XYZ AXES rrrrrarrrnnnrrnnnnvanennn 265 copy CG ODI CCS ee 96 182 197 Templates Greter deeg 235 core TM ee 131 Crawl layouts rrrnnrrnnrernnrrranennnnnnnrr 101 230 adjust borders rnnrrnanennnnnvanennnnnvanennn 322 create multi page crawls rrrrrrnnnrnnnnr 319 prevent objects from scrolling 190 ClaW S OUDOT GN 50 adjust multi page timing 321 adjust output speed 323 359 change Speed On alf rrrnrnnennanevnnnnvanennn 50 loop in Overlay rrrrnrnrnrnnnnvvrrnnrrnvnnrennnnn 80 pause layouts E 360 pause playback rrrrnnrnnnnrrnnrnvnnevnnnnnanennn 50 Start on off screen rrrrarrnrnnrrnrannnnnnnn 322 Crop ler ve 296 Crop frame grabs rrrnnrrnnnnrrnnnvnvnnnnnnnnvnvnnre 364 emo CG cee eee 120 Curved paths rrrernrennrnnnennnnr 111 133 266 UNG ica 96 197 ET e WEE 325 D Data U
75. SHIFT V followed by CTRL Copy row CTRL SHIFT C CTRL SHIFT ALT V Move row up and CTRL SHIFT U Move row down CTRL SHIFT swap with row P ARROW and swap with DOWN ARROW directly above row directly below Manage Objects Move object one ALT ARROW Cut object CTRL X pixel in any direction Move object 10 ALT CTRL AR Copy object CTRL C pixels in any ROW direction Move object by CTRL ARROW _ Paste object CTRL V number of pixels in the Pixels field Bring to front CTRL F Select multiple SHIFT click on objects each object Send to back CTRL B Move text object Select text object then SHIFT drag Layouts Redraw CG CTRL D Load template ENTER workspace with Template Manager Animation Editor Action Shortcut Shortcut Open Layout Type CTRL E Load next ALT W list template with Template Manager Open Templates CTRL R Load multiple CTRL SHIFT list templates with ENTER Template Manager Open Template CTRL SHIFT R Manager dialog Text Tools Text Constraint CTRL Paragraph Field CTRL T Field tool tool Text Field tool CTRL Fixed Width CTRL H Paragraph tool Vertical Text Field CTRL SHIFT Vertical CTRL SHIFT T tool Paragraph Field tool Vertical Text CTRL SHIFT Vertical Fixed CTRL SHIFT H Constraint tool Width Paragraph tool Layout Tree View Bring To Front CTRL F Send Backward CTRL SHIFT B Bring Forward CTRL SHIFT Delete selected DELETE F objec
76. SHIFT key and click on the color chip Remove cursor e Remove a color chip hold the CTRL W key and click on the color chip Paint an Image All Color tools are available from either the Tools palette the Tool drop down list on the Brush tab or the right click menu The Tools palette allows you to quickly change the tools you are using while the Brush tab allows you to set specific tool attributes Tool specific options are always displayed on the Brush tab Color Tools There are ten color tools in Paint The following table lists the tools and their functions Table 8 10 Color Tools Tool Ed Fi x Y Or Or CN Pencil Brush Airbrush Eraser Fill Tolerance Fill Luminance Fill Description Paints hard edged brush strokes Brush tab softness setting is ignored Paints soft edged brush strokes Paints soft edged brush strokes Builds up opacity beyond the opacity setting Adds alpha to the real alpha channel Eraser brush strokes cannot be restored with the Alpha Memory brush Fills the layer selection with the selected color Fills all pixels adjacent to the selected pixel with color based on tolerance hue values of the image The Tolerance value specifies the range of hues for pixels to be filled in Fills all pixels adjacent to the selected pixel with color based on luminance values in the image The Tolerance field specifies the range of luminance for pixels to be
77. Search dialog closes Select All Search Results You can use the Select All button to select all of your search results in the Media window Other files in the searched folio still display in the Media window but only the results are selected For example if you are searching Chapter 7 Media Store 419 TitleOne User Guide 420 TitleOne User Guide your Media Store database files use the Select All button to select only the database files that match your search criteria In the Search dialog define search criteria For more information see Set Up a Simple Search on page 414 or Set Up an Advanced Search on page 415 2 Clear the Auto Build Set Folio checkbox 3 Click the Search button The search results are displayed at the bottom of the Search dialog 4 To select all the results in the Media window click the Select All button When you click the Select All button the Search dialog closes Note The Set and Browse Set folios are not updated when you select all search results For more information on these folios see Set and Browse Set Folios on page 420 Set and Browse Set Folios The Set and Browse Set folios contain your most recent database search results and browse search results respectively For more information on database and browse modes see Media Store Toolbar and Modes on page 378 To display the Set folio files click the Set button on the Media Store toolbar in database mode Set B
78. Select Toggle for the desired layer You can show or hide a layer by clicking on the View Layer Toggle There is no limit to the number of layers you can have visible at the same time You can change the layer name in the Name field By default layers are named according to numeric order Layer I Layer 2 etc The Opacity field allows you to set layer opacity Transparent layers allow the layers beneath to show through creating interesting effects To add a new layer to your Paint image click on the New Layer D button The new layer is added above the current layer To duplicate the current layer click on the Duplicate Layer button The copy is added above the original layer Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual 493 Delete a Layer To delete the current layer click on the Delete Layer button Trash Can The easiest way to delete many layers at once is to merge the layers and then delete the merged layer Rearrange Layers You can rearrange layers in your document quickly and easily To move a layer click on the layer thumbnail and drag it to the location where you want it To place the layer at the new location just release the mouse button The layer is always inserted in front of the layer the cursor is over Merging Layers There are four options for merging layers Merge Up Merge up Down Merge Visible and Merge All Down e Merge Up merges the current layer with the one above it visible e Merge D
79. Sequencer takes the next event Overlay TitleOne utility that allows you to insert and hide clocks timers stills animated logos and other events You can control three additional layers of graphics on top of your current output using the Overlay utility Over the Shoulder Graphic An image or collage that appears above a reporter s shoulder during a newscast Over the shoulder graphics are a type of DVE See also DVE and Collage P Page Formatted Crawls See Multi Page Crawls Page Formatted Rolls See Multi Page Rolls Paint TitleOne module that lets you create edit retouch and add alpha to bitmap images and Paint files Paint File Format See ipt PAL Phase Alternating Line Video broadcast standard used in Europe and much of the world A PAL television image has 625 horizontal scan lines per video frame with each frame transmitted at 25 fps frames per second Contrast with NTSC Path Animation The sum of the points along which an object moves in an animation The path includes all keyframes and frames Glossary 571 TitleOne User Guide 572 PC Clock Trigger Type Sequencer A group trigger type Uses the system clock to trigger events When the system clock reaches the event in point the event is triggered Personal Folios See Local Folios Perspective Paint An element of drawing on a two dimensional surface so that objects give the impression of relative posi
80. Serre 286 She Rara TIMO preses 287 IRE VLA Narko EE 287 HMEN GOnrols EE 288 Bee ee De EE 288 A nn A 288 LOCKEA St 288 PUSIMOS Jos 289 BEE EEE EE tagcat sa anno secon 289 ZOOM Mand OUT 225 289 Adjust the Keyframe Axes A Dee ria lekse san 290 Wok INEZ SACS SP 290 Ke virame Axes RION CIEK MENN debes 291 ic entrees Aer el T A N arena Aobicha cata miaslinta 291 SPINS ee 291 GE EEE A EEE LER ST Pree eer eee errr ee reer eee eee eee aren ee 292 How Offset Affects Rotation ooccccocccccccnccccnnccnnnnconnnnconnnonacnonnnnnonnnnononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnos 292 Change the Keyframe Shape 000 c eee ees 293 What Happened to Z Space oo csc ciccccincdsintscdvnadeieesaieescdeacdeieessddeicd4eaaesaxcesdsbedaadededs lt dcsaedsasdesedeeaces 293 Keyframe Shape Right Click Menu cccccecccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesseeeeeesseeeesseeseesseeeeesseeeeesaaeeneas 293 EET ge e 294 EN EE EE EE EE EET ES ee 294 EE NN OE NR Eee 294 Motom FIETS russere see 295 Motion Filler RiGhPClek Mensa 295 EE se ee EE 295 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide XV GLOD e O EC E EEN 296 MOSAIC ANG TEE 296 O o PA A 296 A o A 296 SD ENGS vestida eta eee ee pte a eo 297 Mol ct rca 297 SD EE ONO EE 298 o NN 298 ADDV Alu 298 Ine 298 REVERE NEBE EE 298 cn ee eee reer eee ree 299 Remove n BEG sara 299 ADN DEE Ja See Ge 299 Ad USTE TE DSO save 300 Render Animation sos A ee 301 include Paths INTE RENE suse
81. Start gt All Programs gt Harris gt Inscriber Strata Configuration Utility gt Inscriber Strata Configuration Utility 2 Click Next on the first and second screens until the Assign Outputs screen displays 3 Select the board you want to use for output Set Up Your Program Channel 4 From the Designation drop down list beside the board select Preview Sk Strata Utility Assign Outputs With multiple output boards you can designate whether they are intended for outputting program broadcasts assigned for previewing or both Output Designation List of physical outputs detected Steps for configuring XD 200 5415924 the Strata Utility D 200 5471086 Welcome Detect Installs gt Assign Outputs Mote Designated output it supported with G Scribe amp G Store products only This setting will have no effect on AE EE Automation Interface or Overlay etc Configure Applications IF you notice an application not listed above please refer to pour manual for tips on troubleshooting Back Next Cancel Figure 1 18 Strata Utility Preview Setup 5 Click Next through the remaining screens to apply the setup The available options for your program channel depend on your system setup Single Channel Systems Single channel systems include one XD 200 video board for your program output Dual Channel Systems Dual channel systems include two XD 200 video boards You can set one of the XD 2
82. The new News Edit Table automatically contains the Content items that are within the first News Edit Table in the template registry Chapter 3 CG 203 TitleOne User Guide Add Items to the Content List The Content list contains a list of items stored in the currently selected News Edit Table These items are typically names places and other phrases you frequently use in your layouts To add new items to News Edit s Content list enter the text into the Content field and press the Add button The text is added to the list as a new item and is also added to the currently selected News Edit Table Note When you import a News Edit Table see Import a News Edit Table on page 205 the O Import Text News Edit Table is automatically overwritten If you plan on importing News Edit Tables in the future do not add items to the O Import Text News Edit Table Instead create a new News Edit Table and select it in the Content Source drop down list before adding items Update Layout Text Use the Display button to update the text in a text object Select the text object you want to update 2 In News Edit select the text you want to use from the Content list The text appears in the Content field where you can edit it if necessary 3 Click the Display button The text object updates to display the text in the Content field it a tag name to quickly change content Content Victor Atlas Display Janet Murphy ki
83. There are 34 filters that come with Paint The filters are divided into groups according to their function Table 8 18 Paint Filters Alpha e Invert Key e Operate solely on the Adjustment alpha channel Legalize e Complex NTCS Legalize Identify and corrects e Complex PAL Legalize illegal colors for display Mark NTSC Illegal Colors to video Mark PAL Illegal Colors Simple NTCS Legalize Simple PAL Legalize Chapter 8 Paint 483 TitleOne User Manual Table 8 18 Paint Filters Color Brightness amp Contrast e Operate solely on the Adjustment Color Balance color channel to adjust inver Calor contrast or color levels Level Curves Levels Monochrome Posterize Threshold Distortion Color Emboss e Distort the image in a Emboss variety of ways to create Gaussian Blur special effects Motion Blur Pixelize Radial Blur Sharpen Video Adaptive Field e Removes interlaced Cleanup Adaptive Field 2 fields and corrects for flicker and luminance changes in images grabbed from video Average Field Average Field 2 Chroma Antialiasing Horizontal Risetime Interpolate Field Interpolate Field 2 Reduce Flicker Remove Flicker Repeat Field Repeat Field 2 484 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Recent Filters List Apply Filters Apply Filters to Selections Filter Opacity Undo a Filter When you first switch to the Filter tab the filters list is collapsed and only the filter types are listed To ex
84. TitleOne User Guide In the Select Text Source dialog select the ODBC option select the name of the database from the Database list and select the name of the table from the Table list If you are linking to a text file using ODBC the name of the database is the data source name you entered when you added the text file to the system list and the name of the table is the name of the text file Use the When Data Expires or No Data Available options to set what displays when data is expired or no data is available e Select the Don t Show Item option if you do not want to play tagged text that has expired e Select the Show Custom Message option if you want to display a message when the data has expired Enter a custom message in the field Click OK The Select Database Items window opens See Select Table Text for Output on page 222 to continue selecting your data for output Link Directly to a Text File You can link a layout directly to the content in a text file Use this procedure to link a layout to a text file that is not set up as a data table This type of text file does not need to be added to the ODBC system list When you link directly to a text file in this way the text file cannot use tabs to separate text entries and the data cannot be refined or formatted l 2 In the Select Text Source dialog select the Text File option Use the When Data Expires or No Data Available options to set what displays when dat
85. To add tags using News Edit Select a text or logo object in the CG layout 2 Click the News Edit button in the CG Editor toolbar News Edit opens A 206 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Update Tagged Objects 3 In News Edit enter a tag label in the Tags text box and then click Add The tag is applied to the object Note If you are adding a tag to a logo or clip object start the tag name with image_ This makes it easier to update your images and video clips using Inscriber MOS 4 Select another text or logo object in the layout to add another tag Do not use duplicate tag names in a single layout See Change Object Names on page 195 to add tags with the Layout Tree View You can update tagged objects using the following methods Table 3 27 Tagged Object Update Methods Method Description News Edit Window Select content items within TitleOne s News Edit window applying the updated content to the tags you select External Data Source When you edit the content items within an external data source the associated tagged objects are updated See External Data Sources on page 211 Overlay Application You can update tagged objects within the Overlay application See Overlay on page 73 Automation If you are using Automation Interface see the Interface Application Automation Interface User Guide to learn how to create compatible layouts and send updates to tagged layout objects Cha
86. To apply More Colors the most recently used color select the Default color chip Create a New Color To create a new color instead of selecting an existing one from the palette click the More Colors button at the bottom of the Color Palette The Color Dialog opens The Color Dialog contains controls for choosing new colors Chapter 3 CG 169 TitleOne User Guide 170 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide The pre defined and custom colors for the layout appear at the bottom of the Color Dialog Color Selector Color Slider Color Model List Value Fields Color Selection Color Picker Box Figure 3 40 The Color Selector In the Color Dialog use one of three color models HSV RGB or HLS to select colors You do not have to fully understand the models in order to select colors With a bit of practice you can find a color using any of the color definition systems In all three color models color definitions are the result of three values When you modify one value the range of possible colors that can be achieved using the other two values changes so the color display changes as well Use the Color Selector and the Color Slider to get close to the color definition that you want and then change the three values numerically until you reach the specific color Table 3 18 Color Models Color Model Description HSV Hue Saturation and Value This model often appeals to artists and others who work with pigments It
87. Undo Cuk Copy Paste Setup Event Take Event Clear Log Event Down Log Event Up Log Default Event Change Render File Mame Navigate Renumber All Render File Names Set Event 45 Default Transition Apply Global Transition to Event Cut Eyent Copy Event Paste Event Paste Special From the right click menu select Set Event As Default Transition gt Transition 2 from the right click menu The transition is automatically saved as Transition 2 in the saved file Se m I 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Alt 5hift 2 NumPad Minus Key I 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 MumPad Enter Ctri Shift MumPad Enter CirlHL CirlH Shift L CirlH Shift 643 Crit CirlH Shift 1 Transition 1 F Transition 2 Transition 3 Alt 5hift ER Transition 4 AltH 5hift C Alt ShiFt Figure 5 14 Set Event As Default Transition Option 6 Use the right click menu to set transitions for Transition 3 and Apply the Global Transitions Transition 4 option After you have set up your global transition file you can apply the transitions to events in the current playlist or a new playlist 2 Select an event in the Sequencer playlist Right click the event and select Apply Global Transition to Event From the submenu select the transition you want to apply Transition I Transition 2 Transition 3 or Transition 4 After you select the option the transition is applied to the event Save a New Set of Global Transitions
88. Use Texture from the Scrapbook right click menu Available in CG when the selected Scrapbook item is a layout Replaces the current layout with the selected Scrapbook layout Available in CG Fills the selected logo object in CG with the Scrapbook item The current logo object is replaced by the Scrapbook item Select the logo object in the CG workspace or use the Logo tool to draw a logo object 2 Select the Use Logo from the Scrapbook right click menu Removes the selected item from the Scrapbook Removes all items from the Scrapbook Copies the selected item to the Windows clipboard Adds the item on the Windows clipboard to the Scrapbook Opens the Scrapbook dialog that displays the disk space used by the Scrapbook and the number of Scrapbook items Save the Scrapbook Contents When you close TitleOne by default the items in the Scrapbook are not saved Every time you open TitleOne the Scrapbook is emptied To save Scrapbook items when you close the program Open the inscribe ini file located in your TitleOne program folder 2 Add the following lines to the inscribe ini file Scrapbook E inscribe ini Notepad ClearOnBoot FALSE File Edit Format view Help Maxsize 2 50000000 Me MaxFileSize 200 Max57ze 2 50000000 mMaxFilesjze 200 3 Save the inscribe ini file Save Individual Scrapbook Items TitleOne also includes a setting to save individual Scrapbook items The item is saved to disk as an Ins
89. You can create multiple trn files that save a set of four global transitions 2 To start a new global transition file select File gt Export gt Global Transition File In the Save As dialog enter a name for the new global transitions file Chapter 5 Sequencer 329 TitleOne User Guide 330 Apply Audio to Events Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide To define your new transitions right click the event with the transition and select Set Event As Default Transition gt Transition I from the right click menu Use the right click menu to save transitions for Transition 2 Transition 3 and Transition 4 The transitions are automatically saved with the new global transition file You can apply the new transitions to any event in any playlist Switch between Global Transition Files Aiter you create multiple global transition files you can open the files and apply the saved transitions to events To open a global transition file select File gt Import gt Global Transition File In the Load Transition File dialog select the trn file you want to use and then click Open The selected file is automatically loaded To apply a transition from the new file select an event in the Sequencer playlist Right click on the event select Apply Global Transition to Event From the submenu select the transition you want to apply Transition I Transition 2 Transition 3 or Transition 4 After you select the option
90. a Defined button for quick recall or output the selected item Simple Search Media Store A Media Store search that uses a single keyword to find and retrieve media files See also Complex Search Single Pixel Brush Paint A brush that adds color or alpha or edits an image information a single pixel at a time Smooth Processing See Sub Pixel Processing SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE Color Bars A video test pattern generally used when calibrating your output monitor and your frame buffer Snapshot Animation A rendered bitmap of an object at a particular point in time on a spline path Sort Key Media Store A particular media file attribute by which media files are sorted in the Media window Sort keys include date keywords title resolution media number and user name Sort Order Media Store The order in which media files are displayed in the Media window By default media Glossary 577 TitleOne User Guide 578 files are sorted by media number The default sort order is set on the Folios tab of the Preferences dialog Source File The data file where all image information is stored Spline Animation A curve whose shape is defined by a set of points along a path See also Path Spline Properties Animation The collection of attributes associated with a spline path such as tension continuity and bias Stagger Animation
91. a Logo Object The shadow element appears behind all the other elements in an object It is a color or pattern that is offset from the face and edge by a specific number of pixels Shadows add depth to flat 2D objects and provide an additional way of adding visual interest to your layouts Use the Shadow tab s Settings section to change an object s shadow properties In the Settings section of the tab set the offset distance of the shadow element using the Offset control 2 Set the shadow s blur with the Blur control A greater value produces a softer more diffuse shadow 3 Use the Glow control to set the amount of glow in your shadow A larger glow value spreads the shadow out from beneath your object in all directions Sheen Elements 4 Use the Angle control to change the angle of the shadow 5 Select a treatment from the Treatment drop down list The treatment you select determines the color image and active texture choices available for the shadow See Element Treatments on page 157 to learn about treatments Create a sheen for the shadow using the Sheen section of the Shadow tab See Sheen Elements on page 155 to learn how to create sheens Figure 3 29 Add a Blurred Shadow to the Graphic Objects A sheen refers to a band of color that cuts through an element like a focused highlight You can add a sheen to any of the visible elements in an object except elements using the active texture treatment
92. a file type from the list on the right side of the dialog To select multiple file types use the SHIFT or CTRL key Media Store scans all media files in a folder for changes if no file types are selected To scan the files for updates click the Scan button in the dialog You can change the render size that stamps are built at or simply change the display size of the thumbnails To force a rebuild of all stamps in the current database Click the Media Store menu 2 From the Set Stamp Render Size menu item select one of the sizes Very Large Large or Standard To view more thumbnails on screen display the thumbnails in the Media window at a size smaller than the default stamp size I Click the Media Store menu 2 From the Set Stamp Display Size menu item select one of the sizes Default Stamp Size 3 4 Rendered Stamp Size 2 3 Rendered Stamp Size or 1 2 Rendered Stamp Size 3 To display a large preview of a single media file in the Media window hover the mouse pointer over the thumbnail label See Figure 7 2 on page 377 By default files in the Media window are sorted by the media number assigned by Media Store You can change the sort order so that Media Store sorts the files by date keyword title resolution or user owner Note You cannot change the display order of the thumbnails in the Browse BI folio They are always sorted by media number To change the sort order for the items use the Sort functionality
93. and Pict Chapter 5 Sequencer EE Manage your events for output in Sequencer Introduction to Sequencer Use Sequencer to manage edit and output your playlist You can prepare your playlist for output in Sequencer by applying transitions duration audio alpha masks and trigger types to your events If you have a large playlist you can group your events into separate sequences or by layout type to make playback easier Switch to Switch between tools using the buttons on the toolbar or the options on the Sequencer Tools menu To switch to the Sequencer tool use one of the following methods On the toolbar click the Sequencer button Select Tools gt Sequencer FII Interface Overview The Sequencer interface includes the following components 306 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Playlist Sequencer Playlist Sequencer toolbar Sequencer Attributes tabs Scrapbook Shot Box palette Program Preview palette Playlist Sequencer playlist Sequencer toolbar Shot Box palette Dir Edt Playlist Tools Help ce al 01004 closing credits rames 0 Ej Soft 50 E Remote HARRIS 00 11 12 00 Y 00 12 16 00 a 00 01 04 00 i Program 0 00 00 00 a 4 Timed Program Preview palette Attributes tabs Scrapbook Figure 5 1 Sequencer Workspace Playlist vs Sequencer Playlist
94. and select the Paste Event option The duplicated event is pasted below the selected event Drag Events in the Playlist To quickly reorder the playlist drag the event up or down to a new location When you drag an event you can move a copy of the event or move the original event to a new slot To move a copy of the original event click and drag the event to a new location in the playlist When you drag an event the original event stays in its initial position and a copy is placed in the playlist To move the original event hold down CTRL when you click and drag the event The event is deleted from its old position once it is inserted in the new slot The cursor determines how the event is placed in the playlist See the following table for details Table 5 5 Playlist Cursor Y Cursor Description Places the selected event above the current event Places the selected event below the current event Replaces the current event with the selected event Set Up Long Rolls and Crawls To output long rolls and crawls smoothly Sequencer allows you to separate your roll crawl into multiple pages or events In Sequencer the multi page roll crawl displays as a separate group with each page displayed as a separate event During playback the multi page roll crawl plays as one smooth event Create Multi Page Multi page rolls also called page formatted rolls allow you to easily create Rolls and navigate long rolls All
95. as in the graphic to the right and together comprise the animation You can then use Via Builder or a third party application to rebuild the animation in a format readable for playback C News Export EK File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ae Address OC weus Export v 2 fe000003 TGA ey frO00004 TG ey R000005 TGA 2 fe000006 TG 3R000007 TGA 2 R000008 TGA 3 R000009 TGA 53R000010 TGA 3R000011 TGA 2 fe000012 TGA 2 fe000013 TG 2 frO00015 TG 2 feO000016 TGA 2 frO00017 TGA 2 fe000018 TGA 2 fe000019 TG 2 feO00020 TG 2 feO00021 TGA ey frOD0022 TGA 2 fe000023 TGA ey frO00024 TG ey feO00025 TGA 2 fe000026 TG 2 fe000027 TGA 2 frO00028 TG 2 fe000029 TGA 2 frO00030 TG 2 feO00031 TGA ey fe000032 TG 3R000033 TGA 53R000034 TGA ey frO00035 TG 2 feO00036 TGA ey frO00037 TGA 2 fe000038 TGA 50 0 MB 4 My Computer Figure 4 127 Exported Frame Folder If you like the way an animation looks at a particular frame you can save that single frame for use as a background or texture The Export Current Frame option saves the frame in the selected an image format Use the Time Slider on the Preview toolbar to move to the target frame in time then select File gt Import Export gt Export Current Frame The Save As dialog opens and you can select the location file type and bit depth for the image Formats include hkf bmp rle vii Igo tga
96. buffer is not recommended unless you know what you are doing and have access to the proper equipment When calibrating a frame buffer you generally output a test signal and use a waveform and vectorscope to adjust the video levels and colors If you are a one system shop or are only outputting images from the Paint system you may be able to work around not calibrating your frame buffer You can try to match colors by eye between the output monitor and the computer monitor by setting your computer monitor to display similar colors to the output monitor This method is not recommended since you are creating images that only look right if output using the current frame buffer Of the three devices you need to calibrate the output monitor is the only one that does not affect the image itself or the image output However you still want to calibrate the output monitor since you use it to gauge what your image colors really look like in video The quality of the image you see on your output monitor is much better than what you would see on the average television To calibrate your output monitor you need to e Set the white point e Set the black and white levels e Adjust the chroma and hue settings The color temperature should be set to 6500K warm Set the contrast and brightness levels according to the Pluge test pattern Adjust the chroma and hue according to the SMPTE color bars See your output monitor documentation or the SMPTE EC
97. button in the Registry Manager Move Templates Select Move gt Right to Left or Move gt Left to Right to move selected templates from one list to another Manage Templates Use the Registry Manager to delete rename and renumber templates e Press the Delete button to delete the templates selected in a list e Press the Rename button to rename and renumber the templates selected in a list Back Up Template Registries If you want to keep a backup copy of a template registry use Windows Explorer to duplicate the templates file you want to backup You can import a formatted text file into CG that automatically creates a multi layout playlist using available templates The text file contains formatting information that tells CG to use specific template numbers and contains tagged text that replaces the default template text when the playlist is created See Use Tags on page 206 for more information about tagging the objects in your layouts Creating a playlist using a text file consists of two steps Creating a formatted text file 2 Importing the text into CG For this example we will create a playlist containing three layouts All three layouts will be based on a template that contains the text tags Reporter and Location This template is 10 in our example template list 00000 Default layout 00003 Sports Scores 00010 Evening News 00000 00003 00010 nm Figure 3 72 Template 10 in the Templa
98. click The Shot Box palette contains four Defined buttons that you can assign media files to For general information about the Shot Box see Shot Box Palette on page 383 Select the database folio containing the media file to assign to a Defined button The folio s media files display in the Media window 2 Locate the media file to assign to a Defined button 3 Drag the media file to one of the Defined buttons labeled 1 4 in the bottom right corner of the Shot Box palette 4 In the message dialog click Yes to confirm that 4 51 5 ER the file be assigned to the Shot Box Defined Bee button EN gt lar Take Media Files Using the Shot Box Palette Using the Shot Box you can quickly output Media Store database files Media files display on the active output channel If there are multiple output channels installed on your system select a program channel button PI P2 or P3 on the Shot Box palette to use it to display media files To take a media file in real time with a single click click one of the Shot Box Defined buttons labeled 1 4 For information on setting up the Shot Box Defined buttons see Set Up Media Files for Single Click Takes on page 428 e Click one of the four Defined buttons labeled 1 4 in the bottom right corner of the Shot Box palette The assigned media file outputs immediately on the active output channel Note The tooltip for a Shot Box Defined button includes the media numb
99. current text object Otherwise pressing ENTER creates a new line within the existing text object Create New Text Object with Tab When the Create New Text Object with Tab checkbox is checked pressing the TAB key creates a new text object to the right of the existing text object Otherwise pressing TAB moves the text cursor to the next tab stop within the existing text object See Tabs in Text Objects on page 126 for information about tabs Cursor Use the Cursor drop down list to set the way the text cursor behaves when you select the text object e When the Insert Cursor is chosen the text cursor appears within the text object when it is selected This is useful for fields that need to be frequently edited without being completely re written The Insert cursor is the default cursor Text Object Size When the Auto Erase cursor is chosen all of the text within the text object is selected when you click the object This is useful for fields that are frequently re written such as sports scores When the Lock Content cursor is chosen you will be unable to edit the text within the text object You can unlock the object again by selecting it and choosing a different cursor Every CG object is surrounded by an outline rectangle with grab handles at each corner and at the midpoints Drag these grab handles to change the size of the object For more precise sizing use the controls in the Text Object Properties section of the Attr
100. describes colors in terms of tint hue tone saturation and shade value Add Colors to the Color Palette Manage Colors Table 3 18 Color Models Continued Color Model Description RGB Red Green and Blue This model is an additive model where the amount of red green and blue are added together to determine the final color HLS Hue Lightness and Saturation Unlike HSV the HLS color model represents saturation and lightness as independent values Use the Color Model drop down list to change the color model and press the buttons beside the Value Fields to assign a variable to the Color Slider For example select the RGB Color Model and click the G button to assign the G variable to the Color Slider Use the Color Slider to change the assigned variable s value and use the Color Selector crosshair to change the values of the other two variables You can also use the Color Picker tool to select any color visible on the screen Grab the Color Picker icon and drag it around A your operating system s desktop Release the mouse button to select the color of the pixel that the Color Picker is on top of To modify a color that has already been defined in the Color Palette click a color chip at the bottom of the dialog The Color Slider and the Color Selector crosshair move to reflect the values of the chosen color Once you have chosen a color with the Color Dialog you can add it to the color palette This is useful if you
101. descriptive information for thumbnails selected in the Media window e Monitor media files in browsed folders for updates e Change the size of the thumbnails e Change the order of the thumbnails using sort methods e Edit the title and keywords assigned to one or more media files Using titles and keywords you can easily search for media files e Adda memo to a database media file e Delete a file from disk a folio or a database For information on changing the text that displays below thumbnails see Change the Thumbnail Text on page 430 For information on assigning database media files to collection folios FI FI2 see Collection Folios on page 402 Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Scan Files for The Scan dialog lets you monitor browsed folders for changes to media Updates files Scanning the files forces Media Store to check the selected files and update the Media window with any changes Switch to browse mode ensure that the Browse button on the toolbar is selected 2 To open the Scan dialog click the Scan button on the toolbar 3 In the Scan for Media dialog select the checkboxes beside the folders to scan for updates 22 112_1269 croppe 112 1269 croppe ES pped2 jpg 3s 112 1272 r1 cropped jpg E 112 1272 rLjpg 406 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide Resize Thumbnails Sort Media Files 4 Limit the number of scanned files by selecting
102. double click the point Line Width Use the Attributes tab to change the width of spline and closed bezier lines Select a spline or closed bezier object in the CG workspace 2 Switch to the Attributes tab of the Attributes palette 3 Change the Line Width value Line Ends You can select three different line end types for spline objects This setting determines the shape of the line ends and how far they extend beyond the control points The differences between line ends are more obvious for splines with large line widths Figure 3 21 Three Different Line Ends To change line ends Select a line or spline object in the CG workspace 2 Switch to the Attributes tab of the Attributes palette 3 Select a Line End from the drop down list e Butt The line stops directly on the first and last control points e Round The line extends beyond the first and last control points with a rounded contour Change Graphic Object Size e Square The line extends beyond the first and last control points with a square contour Every CG object is surrounded by an outline rectangle with grab handles at each corner and midpoint Use these grab handles to change the size of the object l 2 Select a graphic object in the CG workspace Bainter Select the Pointer tool or the Selection tool from Tool the Tools palette Click and drag one of the handles to resize the k R object Use midpoint grab handles to resize only the ve
103. eee ee ee 463 e eg Kee Se eases ia ano ccoo coa 463 Vee NE Background Color EE 464 Make Selecti ns si cima rindas Seah er eee A Be 465 SE NN 465 Selection TOS ii A A A A tie aed melee dene 465 Selection VS Contents tt avd 467 Selection Marquee sust o a bd ts bo e aldo e bd be ld ls 467 Ele CHONG Male STE 467 Opacity and Level of Selection n00nnnn0nannnsenneneneeornnensnrnnsrrersrnrrsnrrrsnnrersrrerrrnrrrsnrrrsnrersrnerrenrenne 467 Import nd Export SClECHONS vasse ee 468 Import and Export Selection Contents occcccccnccoccnccncncconcnonononononnnnnnnnonnnnononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnos 468 Modify Selections ici asia eee nede 469 realon ODUONS PN 469 EON BDS NN 470 Selection Feeds aaret 470 Work with Transformation Tools oa 472 Selections and Transformations iii eanet 472 Transform Tab vs Transformation Tools 472 Tr nstormaton 160196 dni in o a Tenet 472 Import images as Transformations sverdene 472 Transtormaton MOdNES tata A talas 473 XIE SOMA ON EE 473 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide XXV xxvi Use the Transform Table et le da 474 beluegt ee NPE ar 474 Relativo 2D Tr nsiom aa vadesteder ad der 474 Relative or Absolute Corners rrranrrnnanrrrannernnnnnnnnnrnnansnnnnnennansnnnnnennansnnnnnennansennnnennannennussnnnee 475 Flip Horizontally and Vertically rrrnnnrnnnnrrnnnnrnnnnrernnnrnnnnrrnnnnrnnnnrennnnrnnnnrennnnrnnnnrennnrennnrennnssernnnee 476 POG DEP sennep ene 476 e
104. ei E o ee ee eee eres 516 Store Paths TAD tt dd c 517 FOSST A A EE 519 AE AAA O E EE CO EE 519 EANET DV een 520 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide DNOMCUE Keys sro eee 521 GlODal eler CN 521 SWAN Modules EEN 521 AE EE EE EN EEE SE EE 521 OP SU NN 522 CS EUS ee de 523 ANIMALON e are SEN 525 SEE rer 527 BEE EE SEE EE RE SE EE 527 Mel Se 527 PN 528 Se LTE 529 RapldFre Keyboard saa are STAT 532 IVA OCU SS oat E 532 Predefined Medi SOE FIES e EE EE 533 EEN ee 533 ETEN NR 534 Layout NN NN EM NN Sr VET er 534 Sata ia A EA A EN NM Ne 535 OE TT T Eet 536 3D FlyBy Auto Text and Animation susncisan duna died dende dianids 536 RE 537 RTXports Code Sample vvs sooo tek Sas eee 539 DVE SWINE usina care PETs 545 DVE Switcher iia ie wee be eae bs es Sa a 546 Open the DYE Switcher e UE 546 A Ee 547 See DVE DIMENSONS HP 547 Set the DVE Source Duration and Z Order rrnrnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnennernnnennnnernernnnnrnenennevnnnsnnenennenennennnne 547 Posion Size anda Crop Me DVE EE 548 ROE EE 548 Delete the DVE 00d id A need 549 Apply the DVE Template in Sequencer oocccccccnccoccnccocncccnnnocncnnnonnnononnnnononononnnonnnnonnnnnonarnnnnnnnonos 549 Table of Contents XX X TitleOne User Guide XXX Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide Chapter 1 Introducing TitleOne DN Get started in TitleOne TitleOne Overview Inscriber TitleOne 5 0 is a powerful software program that consists of a suite of broadcast
105. encoder technology is much better today and many newer encoders automatically replace problem colors with similar colors Avoiding illegal colors is now mainly a design consideration but you should still try to create graphics that do not need to be significantly modified by hardware or software Know Your Colors Know Your Tools Ingredients for Illegal Colors 502 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual You should know which colors are problem colors before you begin creating video legal graphics The least problematic main color is blue followed by red and then green Combinations of red and green tend to produce stronger and less legal colors Saturated yellows are the most problematic colors to work with One method of guaranteeing that your colors are legal is to work with desaturated colors Some of the tools in Paint can introduce illegal colors For example if you begin with an image that contains video legal colors but then paint with any of the Luminance Add Luminance Subtract Dodge or Burn tools or apply a filter that affects the luminance or chrominance values you can potentially introduce illegal colors But you do not have to avoid these tools or filters this knowledge should help you create better graphics by predicting problem areas Colors with high chrominance and luminance values lean towards illegal especially if they are combinations of red and green Any highly saturated color that ranges from green t
106. events in the multi page roll are rendered to disk and then played out as one smooth continuous roll The output plays back unbroken but each page is actually an individual event in the playlist Creating multi page rolls requires both the CG and Sequencer tools In CG Tools gt CG select an empty slot in the playlist Select Roll from the Title Type list Enter the text for the first page of your roll in the CG workspace Am Q N For each subsequent page of your roll a Select the next empty slot in the playlist b Select Roll from the Title Type list c Add your text and graphics to the layout Multi page roll in CG Roll selected D Fie Edit Playlist Tools Help wel a x O eH S io 329282 e 1 name t ile E fra AE BY Y Zen rut screen Y mme Playlist Items 200 160 120 80 0 4 80 120 166 20 24 2 d 40 440 49 aS Styles Media Figure 5 4 Multi page Roll Set Up in CG Chapter 5 Sequencer 317 TitleOne User Guide Adjust Roll Timing Switch to Sequencer Tools gt Sequencer Select the first event you want included in your multi page roll Select Edit gt Insert Group Header The group header is inserted above the selected event All the events that fall between the new group header and the next header belong to the same group On the group header right click on the column heading Default Group and select Page Formatted Rolls All of the events in your group are immedia
107. files to the playlist at the left side of the window and then switch to another module to update or use the playlist For example you can use the Sequencer module to edit timing and trigger options For more information see Add Media Files to the Playlist on page 425 e Take media files to video For time critical output assign media files to Shot Box Defined buttons you can take an assigned file to video with a single click For more information see Take Media Files to Video on page 427 Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Check Media Files Before using media files you can check the files e Verify that a media file is available for use e View the transparency levels of a media file For information on previewing media files in the Program Preview palette see How Do I Use the Program Preview Palette on page 13 Check Media File Reference To check whether a media file is referenced correctly in the Media window 422 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide Set Transition Effects select the thumbnail in the Media window and then select Media Store gt Check Reference If Media Store displays a message stating that the media file is available you can use the file in the playlist or take it to video If Media Store displays a message stating that the media file is not available the file cannot be used Note Image files that are included in a Media Store database instead
108. four corners of the element To set the Active Texture transparency for an element switch to the Texture section of that element s tab Click the Region drop down list to select the corner you want to set the transparency for To set the transparency for the entire element select the All region 2 Set the transparency for the region with the Transparency slider Set Active Texture Options Use the Face tab s Texture section to set how Active Textures are played e Enter a Start Delay for the Active Texture to prevent the texture from playing until this delay has elapsed e Select the Ignore AVI Transparency checkbox to ignore an alpha channel in matte avi files e Select the Invert Field Order checkbox to invert the field order of your media You may need to do this if the Active Texture appears jerky when you play the layout e When the display time of the layout is longer than the Active Texture clip the texture automatically loops To stop a texture from looping once it has finished playing clear the Loop the Playback checkbox You can apply two special treatments to object edges Beveled Edge Beveled text gives standard two dimensional characters a three dimensional look Beveling involves shading text with color and transparency so that it appears three dimensional When the bevel colors shade from a darker layout background to a lighter object face the beveled edge makes the object appear to press out
109. frequently use the same customized colors in your layouts Click the Add to Palette button in the Color Dialog to add a color to the color palette The new color appears at the bottom of the palette allowing you to quickly use it again without needing to recreate it If you use the Color Palette often organize the colors in the palette by deleting and replacing the colors you don t need You can start with a fresh palette by clicking the Clear button in the Color Dialog Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 171 Manage Palettes 172 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide To delete a color select it in the Color Dialog and click the delete button It is removed from the Color Palette To replace a color In the Color Dialog select the color chip you want to replace 2 Use the controls in the Color Dialog to create a new color 3 Press the Replace button The color chip you selected is replaced Color Palettes are automatically saved with your layouts but you can save frequently used Color Palettes for use in other layouts In the Color Dialog window choose to save or load Color Palettes e Click the Save As button to save a Color Palette to a palette file e Click the Load button to load a palette file The current Color Palette is replaced by the loaded palette The Style Library Styles are sets of attributes for CG objects Attributes include the sizes fonts colors and treatments of object elements The Style Li
110. from the Windows Control Panel or Start Menu Apply Figure 1 10 Start NVIDIA Control Panel In the NVIDIA Control Panel make sure the Advanced View is selected El NVIDIA Control Panel File Edit View Help Back Q Advanced View T Standard Help Contents Define Custom view Index Search Contact NYTDIA Recent Tasks Manage 3D settings 3D Settings Configure 3D performance and picture quality settings Change display configuration Adjust image settings with preview Figure 1 11 Select Advanced View 13 Click the 3D Settings option The 3D Settings display H In the Appearance section click the Manage 3D Settings option 3D Settings Control Panel Categories Appearance A Adjust image settings with preview Manage 3D settings Can Performance Monitor temperature levels Figure 1 12 Select Manage 3D Settings IS Select Custom from the Global Presets list 16 Select the appropriate option from the Feature list e If you have a Quadro FX 1500 4500 select the Hardware Acceleration feature and then select Single Display Performance Mode as the setting Global presets Custom Settings Feature Setting Anisotropic filtering Application controlled Antialiasing settings Application controlled Conformant texture clamp Use hardware Enable overlay Un Enable stereo Off Error reporting Un Extension lim
111. from the selected event l 2 Select the event where you want to start playback Switch to the Run tab If you need to press CTRL SHIFT 0 to move online Click the Run Job button If you are using the Manual or GPI trigger press the SPACEBAR or GPI button to trigger the events If you are using the Timed PC Clock or Time Code trigger the events play based on their in points Use the Stop button on the Run tab to stop output after the current event completes playback I Switch to the Run tab 2 Click the Stop button Output stops after the current event completes playback Note To stop playback immediately press the Pause key The current event freezes on screen You can click the CLR button above the Program Chapter 5 Sequencer Clear the Output Output Rolls and Crawls palette to clear the screen You can clear the content of program channel or the preview channel using the Program Preview palette e To clear the contents of the Preview palette click the CLR button above the Preview palette e To clear the contents of the Program palette click the CLR button above the Program palette Clear preview channel Clear program channel Preview 44 CLR Program CLR Figure 5 40 Clear Channel Options Note You can clear the contents of the program and preview channels from any TitleOne tool This option is not specific to Sequencer Sequencer includes options for changing the output
112. going into the first board and an SD video feed going into the second board e Both feeds must be genlocked e The two feeds must have the exact same frame rate For example 1080i 29 97 8 NTSC or 1080i 25 amp PAL or 720p 59 94 amp NTSC or 720p 50 amp PAL HD SD downconversion configures TitleOne for single channel HD to match board I Any graphics that play out through TitleOne are output in HD on board and simultaneously resized and output in SD on board 2 To determine how the graphics are resized select an option from the Downconversion Mode drop down list e Anamorphic Resizes the graphics horizontally so all pixels are still visible in the SD feed e Center Cut Displays the center portion of the graphic without displaying the left or right sides e Letterbox Scales the graphic so the 16 9 aspect ratio is maintained Bars are placed at the top and bottom of the screen to maintain the ratio 7 Select the Bypass checkbox if you want to send the input video through to output without compositing any graphics 8 In the Memory Tuning section use the DCM phase shift value to control the phase of the signal that the FPGA uses to communicate with the DDR memory In most cases a value between 350 400 is appropriate Note Generally you will not need to adjust the default value However if you notice vertical lines across your output try applying a new number 9 Set the horizontal and vertical timing for the vid
113. macro s name or shortcut key select the macro in the Macro A window and click the Edit button A dialog opens allowing you to edit the macro Once saved macros are available in the Macro windows list To play back a macro select it in the list and click the Play button The macro s actions are applied to any selected objects in the CG layout You can also play a macro by pressing the shortcut key assigned to it To delete a macro select it in the Macro window and press the Delete button Manage Layouts CG layouts can be created from scratch or they can be based on pre made templates that you create and store in one or more template registries Layouts can also be exported and imported in a variety of layout formats Layout Materials Create Layouts Your layouts and templates reference image files for backgrounds logos textures and graphic objects Since CG uses absolute file paths moving layouts or templates between computers is problematic because the file paths may change For instance if a layout references image files stored at D Images Sports and the layout and its image files are moved to another computer the image files must be stored at D Images Sports on the new computer as well If CG is unable to find image files in the referenced location it will search for the same files within the application s Samples subfolder If the files are not in that location then CG will be unable to load the images
114. make the icons larger and select Menu gt Small Icons to make them smaller Select Objects When you select an object in the Layout Tree View the object is also selected in the CG workspace To select the previous object in the list press the UP ARROW key Press the DOWN ARROW key to select the next item in the list Use the CTRL key to select multiple objects You can also select multiple objects by holding down the SHIFT key and pressing the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys Change Object Names You can change the default names of any objects in the Layout Tree View list Chapter 3 CG 195 TitleOne User Guide News tags are automatically added to objects when their default names are changed Use tags with News Edit to quickly modify the content of tagged objects See Use Tags on page 206 To change the name of an object double click it in the Layout Tree View list and give it a new name You can also rename an object by right clicking it in the Layout Tree View list and choosing Rename from the menu A News Tag is automatically added to the object when you first change its default name Note If you are adding a tag to a logo or clip object start the tag name with image This makes it easier to update your images and video clips using Inscriber MOS Change Object Layers Objects are arranged by z order in the Layout Tree View list Objects that are higher in the list are displayed in front of objects that are lower in
115. more information see Set the Default Title and Keywords on page 431 To add or edit the titles and keywords of files you are adding to your database complete the following steps 5 To open the Build Media Store dialog click the Add to the Store button on the Media Store palette The Build dialog lists all the files in the Build set See Figure 7 11 on page 390 and Figure 7 12 on page 391 In the Build Set area select a file In the Image Storage area add or edit the title Ensure that you use a descriptive title so that you can easily search for the file In the Image Storage area add or edit the list of keywords Separate entries with a space character Enter keyword phrases with quotation marks flags international Canadian flag patriotism It is recommended that you create a plan for creating keywords Consistently apply your plan when adding keywords Keyword lists should include general information about the file for example orientation and project and specific details for example nouns and adjectives that describe the contents For each file in the Build set repeat steps 2 4 When adding a title and keywords to a media file you can also Chapter 7 Media Store 393 TitleOne User Guide 394 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide Spell check the title or keywords See Spell Checker on page 394 Search for synonyms or antonyms See Thesaurus on page 395 Set media options for an ima
116. nor may you install the Software onto the hard disk drive of one computer and then use the original distribution media on another computer If you wish to use the Software on more than one computer you must either erase the Software from the first hard drive before you install it onto a second hard drive or else license an additional copy of the Software for each additional computer on which you want to use it 3 02 Right to Copy You may make one 1 copy of the Software for backup and archival purposes provided that the original and the copy are kept in your possession and that your installation and use of the Software does not exceed that allowed in Section 3 01 and provided you reproduce our copyright notice on the copy 3 03 Right to Transfer You shall not assign transfer sublicense rent lend or lease the Software or your rights under this Agreement without our prior written approval 4 Prohibited Uses You may not without written permission from us a use copy modify merge or transfer copies of the Software or documentation except as provided in this Agreement b use any backup or archival copy of the Software or allow someone else to use such copy for any purpose other than to replace the original copy in the event it is destroyed or becomes defective or c disassemble decompile or unlock reverse translate or in any manner decode the Software or the dongle security device for any reason 5 Limited Warranty We mak
117. not If the text becomes too wide to fit within the paragraph the text wraps to the next line creating a new line if necessary To customize the behavior of text objects see Text Object Properties on page 115 Relative Embellishments By default the size of an object s embellishments edge depth and shadow remain constant as its size changes Select the Relative Embellishments checkbox in the Paragraph section of the Attributes tab to scale an object s embellishments as its size changes Text Alignment Use the Attributes tab to change the alignment of your text Note The text within Text Field objects cannot be aligned because the text always fills the object Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 117 118 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Select a text object 2 Switch to the Attributes tab of the Attributes palette 3 In the Paragraph section of the tab click the Alignment buttons to change the way your text lines are aligned Table 3 9 Text Alignment Button Description Click the Align Left button to align your text to the left edge of the object ii Click the Align Center button to center your text inside the object HU Click the Align Right button to align your text to the right edge of the object DI Text Leading Leading refers to the amount of space between lines of text In CG leading is the number of scan lines between the lowest possible descender in one line and the highest
118. of media files stored on a local or network drive You can build and use many databases switching between them as needed Creating a database of your media files makes searching fast and easy This section describes how to set up Media Store databases and view database files e Add media files to the Build set and then build the files into a database as a batch process For more information see Create a Database on page 388 e View database media files in the Media window For more information see View Database Files on page 401 e Organize database files in folios For more information see Collection Folios on page 402 e Switch between databases For more information see Switch Current Database on page 403 Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Create a Database To create a database complete the following steps Create a database location 2 Add the files to build into the database to the Build set You can view the files in the Build set by clicking the Build button on the Media Store toolbar 3 For each file you must set a title and at least one keyword You can verify the spelling accuracy using the Spell Checker and search for synonyms or antonyms using the Thesaurus 4 For each file set the media options image sizing and compression 5 Build the database You can add only selected files or all the files in the Build set To add media files to an existing database
119. of the region The none treatment makes the element totally transparent This is useful when you need to have space reserved for an element but no element visible within that space Figure 3 35 The None Treatment Applied to the First Edge of an Object Select the None treatment from the Treatment drop down list Your element becomes completely transparent Use the Image treatment to apply an image to the element The image can be tinted and aligned in various ways Figure 3 36 The Image Treatment Chapter 3 CG 161 TitleOne User Guide 162 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Add an Image Treatment to an Object You can quickly apply an image to a face element using the Media Library Use the Edge Depth or Shadow tab to apply an image to other elements in an object To apply an image to an object s face using the Media Library Select the Pointer tool in the Tools palette You must use the Pointer tool to apply an image treatment to text objects If you use the Selection tool instead the logo is inserted into the text object See Insert Media into Text Objects on page 108 to learn about inserting logos into text objects Select the object you want to edit Les Switch to the Media tab of the CG Libraries palette ais e If the logo you want to use is not already stored in one We of the library boxes see The Media Library on page 177 to learn how to add media to the Media Library Grab the medi
120. options for various tools e The View tab contains options for the Zoom tool e The Brush tab contains brush attributes for the color image editing and alpha tools e The Select tab contains options for the selection tools e The Transform tab contains options for the transformation tools The Tools palette is displayed in groups of similar tools Many tool buttons on the palette contain flyout tool menu that reveal additional tools Buttons with flyout tools are identified by a small black arrow in the bottom right corner of the button For example the Brush Pencil Airbrush and Eraser tools share one button When you click and hold this button a flyout appears with the tool options The tool that you select from the flyout is the one that appears on the tool button Figure 8 9 Tools Palette Flyout General Tools There are three general tools on the Tools palette They are described in the following table Table 8 5 General Tools Tool Name Description Zoom e Zooms the view in or out A e To zoom in click on the image to zoom out hold the ALT key while clicking Scroll also called Scrolls or pans a zoomed in view d Pan e You can hold the SPACEBAR to quickly switch to and use the Scroll tool while using another tool Color Picker e Picks the color under the cursor e e Click anywhere in the image to select a color e The Color tab displays the last six colors chosen with the Color Picker Co
121. or from one level of transparency to another Graphic Object CG For adding colorful shapes behind text such as lower thirds and panels Can be simple shapes such as ovals rectangles wedges and arcs Polygons and splines are more complex graphic objects Graphics Tablet A device for controlling the cursor used instead of a mouse A pen is used as a drawing device on the tablet and pen motions are translated into cursor movement on the interface Unlike a mouse a graphics tablet is pressure sensitive Grayscale An image that is represented by up to 256 shades of gray In a grayscale image every pixel has a brightness number ranging from O black to 255 white The monochrome filter converts a color image to a grayscale image Green Channel Paint The channel that stores all of the green information in an image See also Channel Group Sequencer One or more events organized into categories Groups display in the Sequencer playlist starting with a group header and followed by the group s events Trigger types are applied to the entire group GUI Graphical User Interface See Interface H Hardware Acceleration Sequencer A checkbox on the Renderer tab that applies to animation events The option allows you to broadcast your animations in real time without having to render them to a via file first HDTV High Definition Television HDTV is a digital television format where the
122. playlist will loop Highlight Event During output you can set Sequencer to highlight the current event in the During Output global playlist and the Sequencer playlist Switch to the Run tab If you need to move online press CTRL SHIFT O 2 Set your highlight option e To highlight the current event in the global playlist select the Live Playlist checkbox e To highlight the current event in the Sequencer playlist select the Live Update checkbox Select Render The render location determines where your events are rendered when you Location go online You have two choices local disk or remote You can set the render location for each event in the playlist Select the event in the playlist 2 Switch to the Event Editor tab If you need to move offline press SHIFT CTRL O Chapter 5 Sequencer 349 TitleOne User Guide 350 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Select the Local Disk or the Remote button to set the render location for the selected event Diamond marks events rendered remotely Circle marks events rendered to disk 00 00 00 1 00 00 1 i me eegenen 006000 000 00 00 09 00 100 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 11 01 2010 00 00 00 0000 00 09 00 FIRSTEVENT VII Note Render options Figure 5 29 Render Options Local Disk Renders the event to a file on your local hard dr
123. replaces the existing playlist with a new playlist Create a Playlist from a Folio To define a playlist using the contents of a Media Store database folio drag the folio to the playlist Drag a database folio from the Media Store toolbar to the playlist 2 In the dialog specify whether to save the previous playlist Note This operation replaces the existing playlist with a new playlist Add Media Files to the Playlist Using the Shot Box Palette Using the Shot Box you can quickly add files to the playlist For general information about the Shot Box see Shot Box Palette on page 383 Using the buttons on the toolbar display the media to add in the Media window Take Media Files to Video On the Shot Box palette click the Store Play toggle button to read Store If the button reads Play the Shot Box searches for playlists To enable the Learn mode click the LRN Learn Mode button on the Shot Box palette In the playlist select the item that will precede the media file Select the folio containing the media files to insert The media files display in the Media window In the Shot Box Number field enter the media number of the file to insert The media number for a file is displayed below its thumbnail in the Media window To quickly set the focus to the Shot Box Number field press the FI2 key To add the file below the selected playlist item click the Take button on the Shot Box palette or press the ENT
124. screen Playlist Main toolbar J Edit Playlist Tools Help a x P PS tel EN Ee B 1 A ES a o D Default layout v CH Still v E Y MW zoom Full Screen Y Playlist Items 80 40 d 80 120 50 200 40 280 320 pou 400 440 48 0 560 Bni m7 Je v no js aA oros Ee AIR AO AR ZA 8 Preview 4 Op Program Formatting width Pixels Height Pixels Rotation El Form i io Relative Embellishments Program Preview palette Attributes tabs Scrapbook Figure 1 3 TitleOQne Workspace How Do I Use the The toolbars provide shortcuts to TitleOne actions You have access to the Main Main Toolbar toolbar from every TitleOne tool CG and Sequencer also have toolbars that allow you to perform actions specific to that tool Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual 9 The Main toolbar is available in all TitleOne tools and allows you to perform common Windows tasks as well as switch between the TitleOne tools Animation Editor New Save Copy Undo Paint option M p D ta bq P A Open Cut Paste AM IT Frame Grab Figure 1 4 Main Toolbar Buttons For a description of the Main toolbar buttons see the following table Table 1 3 Main Toolbar Button Description New Opens a new playlist When you click the New button you are prompted to save the current playlist TitleOne switches to the CG too
125. select a type from the Title Type drop down list in the CG toolbar Animation Still Layouts Still layouts are static screen images that contain text and graphic objects on top of a background Some common types of still layouts are lower thirds corner logos and full screen layouts Roll Layouts Rolls scroll text and graphic objects up or down the screen Generally rolls are used for credit sequences and consist of multiple vertical pages of text After you have selected the Roll title type and added some text to the layout a vertical scrollbar appears on the edge of the CG workspace Use the scrollbar to move up and down the layout As you add more text to the layout the vertical size of the layout increases See Prevent Objects from Rolling or Crawling on page 190 to learn how to keep objects motionless in a roll layout Multiple roll layouts can be combined into a single multi page roll using the Sequencer module See Create Multi Page Rolls on page 317 Note If you import text for a roll layout the imported text must not exceed 40 pages Crawl Layouts Crawls display a running line of text such as an announcement or a warning across the screen Crawls are not limited to a single line of text and can be placed anywhere on the layout After you have selected the Crawl title type and added some text to the layout a horizontal scrollbar appears on the bottom of the CG workspace Templates Chapter 3 CG 2
126. sets its initial position as the origin with video coordinates 0 0 Any changes to the position of your transformation are measured in relation to this point This frame of reference moves scales skews and rotates your selections in the same way as the Transformation tools Note that when you use the Skew Scale or Rotate fields on the Transform tab the center point of your transformation does not change Only the Move fields change the position of the center point Figure 8 22 Relative 2D Transformation Relative or Absolute Corners With the Relative Corner Offsets and Absolute Corner Position frames of reference you can use the transform tools to make the same basic transformations as with Relative 2D Transform You can also skew the transformation corners in unique ways with the Top Left Bottom Left Top Right and Bottom Right fields on the Transform tab The result of the transformation is the same whether you use the Relative Corner Offsets or Absolute Corner Position frame of reference the difference is in the way the origins are set Absolute Corner Offsets sets the top left corner of the Paint workspace as the origin When you move a transformation to a specific location its final coordinates are always the same no matter what the initial position is Since each corner occupies a different position each corner has different video coordinates Relative Corner Offsets sets four origins one at each initial corner
127. speed of rolls and crawls and for playing your page formatted multi page rolls and crawls Change Roll Crawl Output Speed You can change the speed of a roll or a crawl during output e To increase the roll crawl speed press ALT SHIFT Page Up e To decrease the roll crawl speed press ALT SHIFT Page Down Chapter 5 Sequencer 359 TitleOne User Guide 360 Monitor Output Activity Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Pause Roll Crawl Playback You can pause the playback of rolls and crawls using the PAUSE key During the roll crawl output press the PAUSE key to pause the output 2 Press the PAUSE key again to resume output Note You can pause the playback of rolls crawls from any TitleOne tool This option is not specific to Sequencer Pause Multi Page Rolls Crawls Use the Pause Page option to pause the playback of a multi page roll or crawl also called a page formatted roll crawl The multi page roll crawl displays as a separate group in the Sequencer playlist and each page of the roll crawl displays as a single event Select the page in the Sequencer playlist Each page appears as a single event in the group 2 Switch to the Effect Settings tab and check the Pause Page checkbox The output will pause on the selected page 3 During output to end the pause and restart playback use the trigger assigned to the page formatted group header When your playlist is online and you have started playback y
128. stop to the Tab List Click the Close button to close the Tab Editor Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 127 128 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Modify a Tab Stop You can modify tab stops in your text objects by dragging tab stops within the CG Ruler You can also use the Tab Editor dialog for more precise editing of your tabs To modify the position of a text object s tab stops with the CG Ruler select a tab stop in the CG Ruler and drag it to a new position To modify a text object s tab stops with the Tab Editor Click the Modify Tab Stops button in the CG Editor toolbar then select the Modify Tab Stops button The Tab Editor opens In the Tab Editor select the tab stop you want to modify in the Tab List Click the Left arrow button The tab stop s position and alignment information appears in the Tab Details section of the dialog 4 Change the position and alignment of the tab stop in the Tab Details section 5 Click the Right arrow button to replace the selected tab stop with the new tab details 6 Click the Close button to close the Tab Editor Overlapping Tab Stops You can choose whether text is allowed to overlap the text in other tab stops Select a text object 2 Click the Modify Tab Stops button in the CG Editor toolbar then select the Modify Tab Stops option The Tab Editor opens 3 In the Tab Editor select the Text may Not Overlap on the Tab Stops checkbox to prevent your text from ov
129. tab 6 If necessary position the I and 2 monitor icons to match the following image Display Properties Themes Desktop Screen Saver Appearance Settings Drag the monitor icons to match the physical arrangement of your monitors EN El 1 Plug and Play Monitor on NVIDIA Quadro Fx 4500 wi Figure 1 8 Position Monitor Icons Display 7 Select the 2 monitor icon 8 Select the Extend My Windows Desktop onto this Monitor checkbox Display Properties Themes Desktop Screen Saver Appearance Settings Drag the monitor icons to match the physical arrangement of your monitors 1 EJ 2 Plug and Play Monitor on N IDIA Quadra Fx 4500 k Screen resolution Color quality re Highest 32 bit v 1280 by 1024 pixels EF NE pa E C Use this device as the primary monitor Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor Figure 1 9 Extend Windows Desktop 9 Click Apply Chapter 1 Overview 19 TitleOne User Manual 20 Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual IO Click the Advanced button The NVIDIA options open Click the Start NVIDIA Control Panel button Plug and Play Monitor and NVIDIA Quadro FX 4500 P Pall General Adapter Troubleshoot Color Management Quadro FA 4500 SS ER a SD MVIDIA Looking for the NVIDIA Display Control Panel All of the NYIDIA control panels have been consolidated into a single application the NVIDIA Control Panel It can be launched
130. the DVE device from the expanded list Click the Delete DVE button e To delete the entire effect select the Effect name and then click the Delete Effect button When you save the DVE the DVE template is automatically available in Sequencer on the DVE Template tab You can use the DVE Template tab to apply a DVE template to individual events in the Sequencer playlist The DVE Template tab includes a list of preset and custom DVE templates In Sequencer select an event in the playlist You will apply the DVE template to the selected event 2 Switch to the DVE Template tab 3 From the Template Name list select the DVE template you want to apply Appendix A DVE Switcher 549 TitleOne User Guide 550 Appendix A DVE Switcher TitleOne User Guide eps file The most common form of a vector based image Objects in vector based images are described mathematically based on various specified points such as the four corner points of a rectangle Icg file Legacy file format for individual layouts Replaced by scribe file format in TitleOne 5 0 Jins file Legacy file format for playlist files Replaced by scribelist file format in TitleOne 5 0 ipt file An Inscriber image format for files created in Paint ipt files are 32 bit and contain alpha information Joo file An Inscriber image format for I 16 or 32 bit images with alpha scribe file File format for individual layouts created in TitleOne 5
131. the list Change the z order of the objects by dragging them in the list or by clicking the layer buttons e Drag selected objects up or down the list Drag objects higher in the list to bring them forward and drag objects lower in list to send them backward e To use the layer buttons select the object you want to move and click one of the layer buttons at the bottom of the Layout Tree View window Table 3 25 Layer Buttons Button Description Moves the selected object in front of all the objects in the Lh layout Moves the selected object in front of the object currently V ahead of it 196 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Table 3 25 Layer Buttons Continued Button Description Moves the selected object behind all the objects in the i layout Gh Moves the selected object behind the object currently behind it Duplicate Objects The Layout Tree View allows you to quickly duplicate the objects in a layout by copying cutting and pasting them Press CTRL C to copy selected objects in the Layout Tree View or press CTRL X to cut them You can also right click the Layout Tree View and select Cut or Copy To paste objects in the Layout Tree View select an object in the Layout Tree View list right click the Layout Tree View window and select one of the following options Table 3 26 Paste Options Option Description Paste Pastes the objects above the currently selected object Paste Below Paste
132. the specified folder are available While Inscriber filters can be applied to any channel individually including the alpha channel many plug in filters do not work with the alpha channel This means that if you have an image that has alpha around it the third party plug in filters may only affect the opaque areas If you have Photoshop installed on your computer you can use some of its filters with Paint Some Photoshop filters require special dlls to work properly To find these dlls the Photoshop path needs to be in your system path Once the dlls are found the filters will be displayed but not all of them may work TitleOne User Manual 487 Create Textures You can create three types of textures in Paint Seamless Surface and Alpha These textures can be used as backgrounds in CG or in Paint or as textures for text and graphic objects in CG Seamless Textures Seamless textures are good for all text objects graphic objects and backgrounds in CG These textures are small areas that are tiled when used in CG to create a repeating but seamless pattern Since every texture you use in CG is loaded into memory using seamless textures cuts down on the amount of memory required A good rule for the maximum size of your seamless textures is one half video resolution NTSC 360x243 max Figure 8 32 Seamless Texture Follow these steps to create a seamless texture in Paint OND Ul BW NR 488 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOn
133. the ENTER key on the number pad OR To preview the file in the Preview window of the Program Preview palette click the Preview button on the Shot Box palette For more information on the Program Preview palette see How Do I Use the Program Preview Palette on page 13 Search Using Previous Search Criteria Previous search criteria are saved in the Recent Searches list Using the buttons on the toolbar display the media to search in the Media window 2 To open the Find or Search dialog click the Find button or Search button on the Media Store palette 3 In the Recent Searches list double click the appropriate entry 4 Edit the search criteria 5 To perform the search click the Find or Search button Search dialog results can be used in several ways You can choose to display only the search results that match your criteria or you can select the search results in the Media window while still displaying all the files in the searched folio To allow you to refer to the most recent search results in browse mode and database mode you can assign your last search results to the Browse Set folio in browse mode or the Set folio in database mode You can also define a playlist using search results For more information see Create a Playlist from Search Results on page 426 Display All Search Results You can display the results from the Search dialog In the Search dialog define search criteria For more informat
134. the Mark NTSC Illegal Colors and Mark PAL Illegal Colors filters These filters identify illegal areas of your image by changing them to a specified color Since you probably do not want to keep the new color once you ve identified illegal areas of your image you will want to use the Edit gt Undo command or CTRL Z shortcut to undo the filter before you make any further changes to your image Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Third Party Filters Many of the filters you use in Photoshop and in other image manipulation applications can be used in Paint Once you have specified the filter locations these filters appear in the Plug ins section of the Filters list on the Filter tab View Brush Color Select Transform Layers Filter CH adobe Photoshop Plugins bi D Si Inscriber El Plug ins Si Artistic ES al al En DN pa gt e Di i aL E Colorec Pencil al Folder C adobelPhotoshopiPlugins Browse i i ve od mr ol Ti z b Select About Opacity 1005 f Th Y Include Subfolders Add Figure 8 30 Third Party Filters Define Filter Before you can use third party filters in Paint you need to show Paint what Folders folders the third party plug in filters are in Paint remembers the folder locations so you only have to do this the first time you use Paint or when you install new filters that are not in the current paths If Paint finds multiple filters with the sa
135. the Placement tab as well as on the FX palette You can only change one property at a time but you can apply every property to a single keyframe 2 A 720 E ME E J j I 450 480 Bro E E Mouse 0 71000 gt Sa 197 545 O Figure 4 117 Placement Tab Work in Z Space In three dimensional space the depth of your text and graphics in the workspace is represented by the Z axis Every frame in a path is defined by coordinates on the X Y and Z axes In Animation Editor you can change the Position Orientation Spins and Offset in all three dimensions To adjust the Position Orientation or Offset click a keyframe and hold down the left mouse button while dragging it up down left or right to change the shape Changing a value on the Z axis can make an object seem to come closer or move farther away from the surface To constrain a change to the Z axis only use one of the following options e Hold down the left mouse button along with the z key while dragging the keyframe e Hold down both the right and left mouse buttons while dragging the keyframe 290 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Keyframe Axes Right Click Menu Orientation Rotate Spins When adjusting the behavior of the selected keyframe on a particular axis each control SD WEE and tool button on the palette contains 3 right click menu The right click menu lets DR Apply to all keptrames App
136. the Thesaurus button beside the field The H Thesaurus dialog opens Thesaurus Word Gi Synonyms Antonyms Categories Synonyms authority noun nomenclature noun property noun title round enfranchisement Modify User Thesaurus Figure 7 17 Thesaurus Dialog 4 If the title or keywords list contains multiple words or phrases edit the text in the Word list to search for synonyms or antonyms of one word or phrase 5 By default the Thesaurus searches for synonyms To search for antonyms select the Antonyms option 6 To perform the search click the Look Up button 396 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide 7 If no matches are found verify the spelling Spelling Suggestions a Click the Check Spelling button Sep The Spelling Suggestions dialog mn opens ao b To select one of the suggestions persiane double click the correctly spelled entry Results are organized by category Click the appropriate category 9 To replace the original word or phrase double click an item in the Synonyms or Antonyms list IO Click OK II For each file in the Build set repeat steps 2 10 In addition to the built in thesaurus Media Store has a user thesaurus that you can customize In the Thesaurus dialog click the Modify User Thesaurus button The Modify User Thesaurus dialog opens Modify User Thesaurus Categories Synonyms inscriber noun clip video Add 8 Delete Word F
137. the progress 6 When the conversion is complete save the new HD template or playlist If required resave using another name to distinguish the HD file from the SD file The template files scribe are editable and the graphic elements within are scaled individually when converted from the 4 3 SD aspect ratio to the 16 9 HD aspect ratio Where an element is a vector graphic the scaling is seamless Where an element is a raster graphic such as a bitmap the scaling may be subject to certain limitations imposed by the nature of raster graphics A playlist file scribelist is composed of raster graphics and may be subject to the same limitations Some graphic design elements are known to be unsuitable when converted from SD to HD e Rendered video clips Via file are not resized on conversion between SD and HD e An SD Via file is too small and is in the wrong position in the HD monitor e An HD Via file is too large and is in the wrong position in the SD monitor It will only display on the top left corner of the monitor e Active texture used on characters or draw objects is not resized on conversion from SD to HD The active texture may not be visible on the character or object in the HD graphic e SD bitmaps used as backgrounds for HD output are distorted or stretched to fit the monitor e SD bitmaps mapped onto graphics are resized to fit the HD monitor but the results are grainy If you intend to use both SD and H
138. the texture All brush based tools apply the imported texture using the current brush attributes This includes color for the color tools Lighter areas of the texture image take on more color or are edited more than darker areas See Edit an Image on page 477 for details on applying textures with the Texture tool You can reset a brush to its default value by clicking on the Reset button You can reset all the brushes to their defaults by holding the SHIFT key and clicking on the Reset button Brush characteristics help define and accentuate the behavior of all brush based tools You may find that some settings are best for certain tools but need to be modified for others Brushes have six attributes Size Spacing Softness Angle Aspect and Speed Size 5 0 Spacing ES Softness 15 0 Angle 0 0 Aspect 0 84 em Reset Speed 75 ES E pa H I A j co Figure 8 12 Brush Attributes Chapter 8 Paint 451 TitleOne User Manual 452 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Size The Size attribute specifies the overall size of the brush in pixels The size of the brush affects painting speed Size is measured in pixels Spacing The Spacing attribute specifies the spacing eo between brush marks as a percentage of the Jen brush size You can modify this attribute to o create unique strokes Softness The Softness attribute specifies the softness of the brush edges The larger the
139. time then the hit rate is 33 Displays the number of hits which is used in calculating the Hit Rate Displays the number of misses which is used in calculating the Hit Rate Resets the caches back to the default sizes Shortcut Keys The following information provides a Quick reference to the TitleOne shortcut keys Action Shortcut Action Shortcut Print Playlist CTRL Y Global Shortcuts Switch Modules Action Shortcut Shortcut F6 CG Media Store F9 Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Animation SHIFT F6 F7 Playlist Shortcuts Action Shortcut Shortcut Open new playlist CTRL N Select next event ALT PAGE DOWN Open playlist CTRL 0 ALT PAGE UP event Print playlist CTRL P ALT HOME Save playlist CTRL S ALT END Chapter 9 Resources 521 TitleOne User Guide Output Shortcuts 522 Chapter 9 Resources TitleOne User Guide Action Cut event Copy event Paste event Undo cut copy paste events Action Setup event Take event Sign key Shortcut Shortcut CTRL J Number pad Open Navigate CTRL SHIFT ENTER dialog Stop current take Select event in ENTER Navigate dialog Increase output speed of rolls crawls Decrease output speed of rolls crawls Start stop roll crawl output Switch Online Offline Clear DVE SHIFT Page Up Take event in Navigate dialog Delete event in Navigate dialog PAUSE Close Navigate ESCAPE dialog SHIFT
140. to the Animation Editor To switch to the Animation Editor you can also select Tools gt Animation Editor or press the SHIFT F6 Switches to the Frame Grab tool To switch to the Frame Grab tool you can also select Tools gt Frame Grab or press the F7 key Chapter 1 Overview 11 TitleOne User Manual Table 1 3 Main Toolbar Button Description Paint Switches to the Paint tool option To switch to the Paint tool you can also select Tools gt Paint or press the F8 key How Do I Use the The playlist contains a series of layouts that you can sequence for output You Playlist can access the playlist layouts in every TitleOne tool The following table describes how each TitleOne tool uses the playlist Table 1 4 Playlist Functionality TitleOne Tool CG Sequencer Animation Editor 12 Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual Playlist Function Use CG to create layouts and place the layouts in the playlist Select an empty slot in the playlist and then create a layout in the CG work area Your current layout fills the selected slot in the playlist Selecting a new slot clears your CG work area and allows you to add a new layout to the playlist Use Sequencer to group playlist layouts and apply separate triggers for each group of layouts if necessary The Sequencer options also allow you to apply a duration and transition to playlist layouts Once you setup your output controls you can use the opt
141. transitions coooccccoccnccncnnnnocoo 328 transitions Animation OPEN ae 259 text dl e E 259 transitions Media Store 381 424 transitions Sequencer rrrrnrrrnrnnrrenrnnnrr 325 apply animation transition 327 apply to events rrrrnnrrnrrrnanernnrnnanennn 325 directional buttons 327 numbered buttons 327 Select transition ooocccoccoconcconnncannnos 326 SEL GUIAUION tege 327 SClUSOUNCSS Hanse 327 transition types gere 325 transparency CG Active Texture treatments 166 background objects rrrrnrrnrnrrnrnrrrnnnr 201 clip Objects rrrrnrrrrrnrrrrnrrrrnnrrnnnrrennnnen 149 treatments EE 158 transparency filter ocoooonccnccocnnncnno 295 transparency levels view Media Store 423 treatments oooccocccncnnnconnnonononanonaninannns 157 168 4 color gradients occcoccccccncoocccccncnncnnns 160 Active Texture treatments 164 PA ee 157 background objects rrrrnrrrrnrrnrnrrrnnnr 199 beveled edge EN 166 COON Eege 157 depth elements 154 edge elements AEN 152 face elements rrrrannrnnarnrrnnnrnnannnnnnnen 150 image treatments EN 161 Med sirra AT 227 linear gradiente 158 none treatment rrrrrrnnrrnnrvnnernrennnnnnnnnn 161 radial gradient rorrrnrnnrnrnnrrnnnrrrvnnnrnnnn 159 Shadow elements rrranrnnnnnnanennnnnvanennn 155 El e Rene EE 158 transpare
142. treatments to elements to change the appearance of the elements Embedded Audio Digital audio that is multiplexed combined into a serial digital video signal Glossary TitleOne User Guide Embellishments CG An object s edge depth and shadow elements Emboss Paint A distortion filter that makes an image appear raised or embossed by adding highlights and shadows based on the edges in the image Color information is suppressed Event Sequencer A layout that displays in the Sequencer Playlist Events include the layout details as well as transition timing and output information Event Duration Sequencer The total time it takes to play an individual event Event duration is dependant on the trigger type selected for the group You can set a duration for events triggered by Timed Time Code and PC Clock trigger types Operators control the event duration manually for the Manual and GPI triggers Event List See Sequencer Playlist Eye Dropper See Color Picker F Face Element CG The actual shape of the object It is the top element of the object unless it is overlapped by one or more inside edges Field One half of a complete video frame A field contains every second horizontal scan line in an image either all odd scan lines or all even scan lines Two fields make a complete video frame See also Interlaced Scan Field Filters See Video Clean up Filters Fill Pattern
143. use SC EN the default settings Screen Grid Editor Define the tab attributes of the screen grid Transparency ER If the Snap to Grid option is checked in the Display Options menu objects in your layout snap to the grid when they are moved Chapter 3 CG 103 TitleOne User Guide 104 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Video Safe Title Area The video safe title area consists of 80 of the output screen measured from the center of the screen outward in all directions The video safe marker provides a guideline for placing text and graphic objects To display the video safe title area select the Display Options gt Show 4 3 Title Safe Area If you are working on a 16 9 layout you can choose to display either a 4 3 or a 16 9 video safe title area If the Snap to Title Safe Area option is checked in the Display Options menu objects in your layout will to the video safe title area when they are moved Select Display Options gt Edit Video Safe Area to change the size and color of the video safe title area See The Video Safe Title Area on page 239 Adjust Workspace Zoom Zoom your layout display in or out to help you edit and position objects in your CG workspace Select a zoom level from the Zoom drop down list in the CG toolbar 400 SO0 e Select a value from 25 to 400 to zoom your 2009 j A 150 layout display in or out V e To zoom in so that your selected object fills the visible CG work
144. video clips CG See clip objects video clips Media Store SOUTCS ICONS estais 376 gl une E E 375 See also media files Media Store video feed CG ccccccocccccconconoconcnnoconcnnonanoss 199 video safe colors ccoocccccccccccocncococncnnnonos 501 video Safe title area rrnrrnnrnnnrrrrnnrrennnnnre 104 video transparent area rrrrrranrrnnnernnrnnnre 199 View buttons Paint rrrrnrnnnrrnrnnnrrennnnrre 490 view selected layout s media 180 view selected layout s styles 175 VII image compression rrrrrrnnrrrnnrrnnnnnen 400 virtual channels ocooccccncccccnccncnonanocucnnnanonos 84 W When Data Expires option oo 219 width ages ae 152 IA In 134 Sheen elements cccccccseecseeeseeeeees 155 SPINES vedde 134 Wipe transition occcoccccccncccnconcnccnnnnncncnnos 325 Word VED sen 120 242 working directory RapidFire 64 Index 607 TitleOne User Guide 608 X E A serte 257 265 XD 200 Control Panel rrrnnrnnnnvnnnnnnen 30 41 configure audio settings oo 38 configure input output cccocccccccncccccncn 33 configure mixer settings 37 configure reference In cccceeeeeseeeeees 36 create configuration 31 delete configuration rrrrrnnrrrrrnnrrernnnnre 41 edit configuration rrnnrrrrrnnnrrrrnnrnennnnnr 41 load configuration cccc
145. you have a picture of a yellow flower with green leaves and you apply a texture with the Texture tool the texture appears green when applied to the leaves and yellow when applied to the flower To add a surface texture to your image import an image to use as a texture Select File gt Import Export gt Import Texture and select an image Use the Texture and Opacity settings on the Brush tab to set how the texture is applied You can also apply surface textures with other brush based tools See Work with Brush Tools on page 450 for details Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual 479 Work with Clone Tools The Clone and Clone Fill tools let you paint an exact duplicate of a layer or image into the current layer As a brush based tool the Clone tool paints with the settings on the Brush tab With the Clone Fill tool you can fill entire sections with image data with a single click Defining a Source Point 480 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Before you can begin cloning you need to define a source point The source point is the location Paint copies from when you start painting with the Clone or Clone Fill tools With the Clone tool selected position the cursor over the part of the layer you want to use as the source hold the ALT key and click the left mouse button The cursor shape changes to show you that the source point is being set When you begin painting the source point is identified by a set of crosshai
146. you take an event when working offline the event is not pre rendered and a delay occurs while TitleOne renders the event for output Offline Take A take made while TitleOne is offline Online A state where all events are pre rendered and ready for immediate output You must be online to access the output options on the Run tab in Sequencer Online Folders Sequencer The location where TitleOne places your rendered events before playing them The folder uses the same name as your playlist For example if your playlist is called MorningShow ins the online folder is called morningShow OnlineFiles Online Manager A TitleOne application that renders all events before going online Online Output Directory The folder or folders where all rendered events for the current sequence are stored Online Take A take made while TitleOne is online Online Toggle Button Switches between offline and online modes Opacity CG and Paint The degree to which background information cannot be seen through a graphic object text or image An object with 0 opacity is transparent an object with 100 opacity is completely opaque you cannot see through it Operator Media Store A wildcard character such as or or a word such as AND NOT or OR used in complex search strings to find media files in a Media Store database Out Point Sequencer The point specifying when the current event ends and when
147. you want to edit Since you can edit multiple cells at one time you can easily select and modify the properties of entire rows columns or blocks of cells For example you can change the justification of each column the text style of the top row and the color of a block of table cells By selecting and modifying multiple cells you can quickly create an attractive table or leaderboard with complex formatting To change the Attributes of one or more cells right click a cell selection and select Cell Attributes You can choose whether to constrain the width or proportion of the cell and you can set the cell s cursor type For more information about text attributes and cursor types see Text Object Properties on page 119 Figure 3 15 Table Formatted with Multiple Selection Swap Rows You can swap rows in a table using the Select and Swap options Select a cell in one of the rows 2 Click on the Row button in the CG Editor toolbar and choose Select Row You can also right click in the cell and choose the Select Row option 3 Select a cell in the row that you want to swap 4 Click on the Row button and choose Swap The two rows change position in the table Manage Rows Use shortcut keys to manage table rows Table 3 11 Shortcut Keys for Row Management Shortcut Key CTRL SHIFT C CTRL SHIFT X CTRL SHIFT V CTRL SHIFT ALT V Behavior Copies the entire row to the clipboard Cuts the entire row p
148. 0 or later Contains the layout details animation data ODBC connections and transitions information Glossary scribelist file File format for saved playlists created in TitleOne 5 0 or later Contains the playlist details including layout details sequencing Media Store files and output information Via file ViaBuilder The file format of your single animation file ViaBuilder takes the imported animation sequence and creates the via file You can import via files in TitleOne 2D See Two Dimensional Space 3D See Three Dimensional Space A Absolute Position Animation A motion template option that ignores the placement of the selected path and uses the position set in the template instead Active Texture Treatment CG Applies a moving image to text or graphic objects They are usually looped video clips which Glossary 551 TitleOne User Guide 552 add texture and motion to several objects in a layout You must have the Clip Option activated on your system before you can use Active Textures Adaptive Field Filters CG Paint and Frame Grab Video clean up filters that modify the luminance numbers for each pixel on even or odd numbered scan lines based on the luminance numbers for the pixels directly above and below AES Audio Engineering Society AES is a professional organization that recommends standards for the audio industries Alpha Transparency in video images In Pai
149. 00 cards as your primary program channel To set one of the XD 200 boards as the primary program channel open the XD 200 Control Panel Start gt All Programs gt Harris gt TitleOne gt Configuration Utilities gt Phoenix Control Panel The two cards are listed in the Detected Video Cards list The first card is the primary program channel Chapter 1 Overview 25 TitleOne User Manual 26 Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual 2 To switch the cards so the second card becomes the primary program channel click the Swap Cards button Inscriber XD 200 Control Panel Use the Inscriber XD 200 control panel to configure your video card Detected Yideo Cards This list contains all video cards detected displays their status Select card in table to with its settings een Eee ORT ieee oasis Gun Qun Ona Ona ox renn gt 2 inscriber xD 200 5471086 us Gua Gua Gua Gor Frerun Swapping cards will force changes to be applied Figure 1 19 Switch Primary Program Channel with Swap Cards Button Work with SD and HD Files in TitleOne TitleOne can output both Standard Definition SD and High Definition HD video formats For single channel systems you can operate in one mode at a time either SD or HD For dual channel systems you can operate both channels in the same mode or you can use the HD SD Down Conversion option in the XD 200 Control Panel to output one channel in SD and out
150. 2 SC E EE 111 cued 0 EEN 133 pause multi page rolls CrawIS 360 roll crawl output EE 360 pause macro recording rrrrnrrrrnrrevnnrennnn 227 PC CIOCK NOGET Assos ee 337 event duration ccooocccocccccnccncnoconicononos 334 output with PC Clock trigger 348 select PC Clock trigger occcccooccoco 347 Photoshop filters oooccccoocncoo 487 DINOUL GP Gave 341 pixel aspect ratio oerein 491 SNAPE aida 501 pixelate keyframe rrrnnnnnnnnnnnrnrnnnnenrnnnnen 296 play ANIMATIONS 270 271 Play MAGOS ia 228 playback See output playlist CG create with Template Manager 233 JOD Creator si cdas 236 playlist Media Store add files as backgrounds 426 add files as I090S ccccconcccccccccnccnacnnnno 426 add files as textures ccccconccccccoconccns 426 add files from Media window 425 add files using Shot Box rrrrrrrrnrrennnnn 426 create from folios ooncccocccccconnncnoo 426 create from search results 426 playlist Sequencer loop during Output rrarernnrrranernnrnnnnnn 349 playlist vs Sequencer playlist 307 prepare for Output rrrrronrenrnnnernnnennnn 349 use Scrapbook item ccceeceeeeeee sees 310 playlist function in Animation Editor 12 MEG see 12 in Frame Grab ico ita 13 Ta ER 13 IN Sequencer rrrarernnnenransnnn
151. 21 Paint Shortcut Keys Tool Selection Tools Wand Luminance Wand Selection Brush Lasso Functionality Functionality Cut Copy Paste Select All Select None Select Visible Select Invisible Invert Selection Crop View Normal Shortcut Key Shortcut Key mamm o Some of the most popular features in Paint also have shortcut keys These features are listed below Shortcut Key Functionality Shortcut Key CTRL C Redo CTRL SHIFT Z CTRL V 0 CTRL Y Ge CTRL R Chapter 8 Paint 509 TitleOne User Manual 510 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Chapter 9 Resources o M Information on preferences and shortcut keys Preferences Dialog The Preferences dialog includes a number of options that allow you to setup your system and workspace preferences See the following information for details on each option General Tab Table 9 1 General Tab Preferences Option HORZ VERT NTSC PAL 4 3 16 9 Multi Channel Operation Disable Board Access 512 Chapter 9 Resources TitleOne User Guide Description Horizontal and vertical resolution sets the width and height of rendered images The values must match the board resolution in online mode Horizontal resolution is measured in pixels and vertical resolution is measured in scanlines Video standard sets the standard you are working in Layouts designed in one standard and output on another can produce undesired results Asp
152. 3 OR 28 09 2006 Search Key 17 11 2006 Keywords tring Media Resolution Title Media Type User Name Number Build Search 5 17 11 2006 A 28 09 2006 3 12 09 2006 A 173x271x32 173x269x32 172x270x32 C Auto Suggest C Auto Thesaurus Auto Build Set Folio C Wildcards On Search Cancel Figure 7 23 Search Dialog Search criteria can be simple with a single search key or complex with multiple search keys and operators You can also access previous search criteria To search for a single file that matches your criteria use the Find dialog If you know the media number of and folio containing the media file you can quickly select it by entering the media number in the Shot Box Set Up a Simple Search Media Store allows you to search for files based on keywords media resolution title media type user name media number and date You can search for media in any folio except the Build set Using the buttons on the toolbar display the media to search in the Media window 2 To open the Search dialog click the Search button on the Media Store palette 3 From the Search Key list select a search key Table 7 9 Search Keys Search Key Description Keywords Descriptive words assigned to the media file 4 5 Table 7 9 Search Keys Search Key Description Media Resolution Resolution of the media file Title Name assigned to the media file Media T
153. 301 Eelere EE 302 RENE ENE ves 302 Render from Sequencer rarnrnnnnrnrannennannnnannennansnnannrnnansnnannnnnansnnnnnennansnnnnnennansnnnnnennunsnnnnnennansennnne 302 RENE NAN MAIN He 302 Export and Import Files A gue eege EE 303 Import and EXPO TEN PAGES a es 303 Open an Existing AMEN HJT 303 EO AIT AMEN Pee 303 EXPoOrtana IMmportan FA SN vr 303 Export 4 Senes Of Flames usd A ida 304 Exporla SINgle Fame tii A A A A A A A id 304 SEQUENCER ui 305 Introduction to Sequencer ccccccc ees 306 SWIC ee E Le 306 terrace OVERVIEW vasene TLD dee ie 306 Playlist vs Sequencer Playlist AA 307 xvi Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide SEQUENCER TODIDAR uvaner eee 308 Sequencer Attributes Tabs cccocccccocnncccccnccncnnocnnnnonnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnannnnnnns 309 SANN Nkr 310 Seeler 310 Program Preview Palete ii 311 Organize th Playlist soi sider ced TEE 312 Create Pals ua 312 Name EVEN AF 312 Edit PI vlist OptOnS EE 313 AJO NEW EVENSEN 314 DES EVENS asada 315 ANG E 315 MOVE EVEN nt da SS 315 Dip cate Evenes dd ds ellos 316 Drag Events in the Playlist ua 316 Set Up Long Rolls and Crawls ooccoccocoococ es 317 Create MullicPaGe ROS undere 317 Adius FROM TINDE ae 318 Create Multi Page Crawls rrrnrnnnnrnrnnnnrnrnnnsrnrnnnsenrnnnsnnrnnnsnnnnnnsnnnnnnsnnnnnnsnnnnnnsnnnnnnsnnnnsnsnnnnnsnnnnnn 319 PASTE NNN Adr 321 Set Roll and Crawl Output Options ocococccoo eee 322
154. 304 OVEIVICW cocccoccccnccncncnoconccnanonnnnnnanonns 248 249 playlist function occccoccccccccccnconaccnnnnos 12 SVIN DENE 248 animation layouts 102 231 animations Animation combine templates occcoccccccccccnccncnco 278 display all paths ooccconccccnncccnccncnnos 268 display text outlines ccoocccccnccnccc 268 preview OPTIONS ccooccccocccconccucnonancnnnnss 272 ende ae 270 transition settings 259 animations Media Store SOURCE ICONS saadan 376 MUMBAI cani al 375 See also media files Media Store animations Sequencer apply animation transitions 327 loop animation events cccceeeeeee ee 332 set real time playback o 331 animations output loop in Overlay rrrrnnrrnrnnnnrvrrnrrrvnnrennnnn 80 loop IN Sequencer rrranrnnnnnenrnnnevnnnennnn 332 set real time playback o 331 antonyms md 396 Index TitleOne User Guide Append All button 205 application instances rrrnrrrranernnnnranennnnn 84 apply animation templates 274 aspect ratio CG OMS asta illo elas 116 graphic objects cuina 135 OO ODISCIS EE 137 text objects uer 121 aspect ratio Paint ep EE EE 491 501 de 452 491 Attributes palette Animation SD ENES taD ned 251 297 Fler tabs start cala 251 295 Placement tab rarnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 251 290 Snape AD adds 251
155. 31 Use the scrollbar to move left and right within the layout As you add more text to the layout the horizontal size of the layout increases See Prevent Objects from Rolling or Crawling on page 190 to learn how to keep objects motionless in a crawl layout Multiple crawl layouts can be combined into a single multi page crawl using the Sequencer module See Create Multi Page Crawls on page 319 Note If you import text for a crawl layout the imported text must not exceed 40 pages Animation Layouts Animation layouts allow you to turn a CG layout into an animation using the FX module Once you ve created the layout switch to the Animation Editor and add animation effects See Animation on page 247 for details on animating layouts Every layout in CG is based on a template Templates let you define standard commonly used layouts for projects They contain anything you put in a layout from lower third definitions to complex full screen layouts using logos and other graphic objects They can also contain Style Library and Media Library information If you define all the media styles text objects and graphic objects you need for a project in advance and save them as a template you can ensure that layouts created with the template use exactly the same colors and formats When you create a new layout CG uses the first template in the current template registry to format the layout By default this layout called O
156. 3D Effects Contains pre defined motion effects such as Squish Flop Peels Curls Blinds Twist Shatter Ripple Torus and Blackhole Spline Controls how an object moves from one keyframe to the next Time Adjusts the time between keyframes the path length and the start and end frames of a path Templates Contains pre set effects for your animation paths including Placement Shape Filters 3D Effects and Timing information Chapter 4 Animation 251 TitleOne User Manual 252 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual FX Palette The FX palette is divided into three parts tools actions and views The Tools palette is a duplicate of the tools on the Placement and Shape Attributes tabs and provides fast access to these tools Figure 4 79 FX Palette Action options can only be accessed from this palette Action options are advanced functions that reset your paths or keyframes back to their former state These options include reset shape reset keyframe reset object and reset placement as well as options to reverse the direction of the current path or all paths View options change how paths are displayed in Animation Editor You can limit the paths that appear or switch from rendered bitmap to wireframe view See Display Options on page 267 for details FX Palette Tools Table 4 30 FX Palette Tools Icon Name SI Tools Ce Move Position E Y gt Spin Offset a e Actions ay Re
157. 4 Inthe Select Text Access dialog select Read Data Through ODBC Driver and click OK It is also possible to link text files directly to a layout without using the ODBC system list See Link Directly to a Text File on page 219 for more information 5 In the next dialog click the Browse button and select the text file Enter a name for the data source in the Data Source Name field Select the User DSN radio button or the System DSN radio button e User DSN registers the database for the current logged on user If someone else logs on to the computer the database is unavailable e System DSN registers the database in a global location on the computer It is visible for any logged on user 8 Click Next Chapter 3 CG 215 TitleOne User Guide 216 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 9 In the next dialog select a delimiter column separator from the Delimiter list Tab is the default delimiter but you can select Comma Fixed Length or Custom and enter a custom delimiter in the Custom Delimiter field Select the Column Header checkbox if you want to use the text in the first line of the text file as the database s column headings ODBC Text File Setup Further refine the delineation of your data Data Delimiter Character Set Choose the method for determining data separation Choose your character set standards O Comma Specify my columns width ANSI Tab Custom Zz C 0EM Data Preview REPORTER LOCATION Janet M
158. 42 SE Ne PTE ee EE Ee 343 Output win a SPI RH dee EE 343 USE the Time Code Md oi e nea 344 Set Up Your Time e EE 344 select the Time Code Trigger cerca eden eres 345 Outout with a Time Code TIET EE ee 346 Se Mime COG Ce arr 347 USE ine PC COCK Tiggere 347 select the PC ClOGK Tiger sa 347 Output with a PC Clock Trigger oocccccccoccccccoccnnonocnnononcnconononnnnnncnononnncnnnnnnrnnonannnnnnnnrnnonnnnnnnns 348 Prepare the Playlist for Output 349 E A P 349 Highlight Event During Output 349 Select Render Location ENEE 349 Assign Events to Different Channels AA 351 Set DIVE VIGGO DE PA avse 352 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide Output in Sequencer Lig vare 355 Klee E 355 MV ET 355 A EE RE A 355 OMME FOTS eee 356 SET EVEN Ne 356 SeleCh need une 357 Select Events PLADEN passere 357 ProView an BEN svar o eee 357 PERSER 357 RUN ne VOD EE 358 HOP Play bike 358 Clear the Output use 359 Output ROS and Crawls A 359 Change Roll Crawl Output Speed ccooccccoccnccccncccccnccncncconcnocnnnnnoncnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnonannnennnnonans 359 Pause RO Cram Play bach as 360 Pause Multi Page ROS Cams vara 360 MOMtOr Rit e fe EE 360 Frame Glad serer reser PEO eda ae 361 Lao o neier E aN a a a A aT 362 SA o A A 362 DIES 362 Grab an IIMA 0 EE 362 Switch from Still to Live Video ken 363 Key IMMOMMAUON ae GS GR 363 FEST 363 Slab SENGS EE Re 364 Can EE Veere 364 Use the Image Filters us vivir
159. 477 TitleOne User Manual Table 8 17 Image Editing Tools Tool Name Description Luminance Add e Lightens the image by adding Ga luminance in HLS color space all colors start to move towards white Luminance e Darkens the image by subtracting Subtract luminance in HLS color space all colors start to move towards black Saturation Add e Adds chroma to the image by adding saturation in HLS color space e If the image is monochrome Saturation Add acts like a tint tool using the foreground color to tint geg Saturation e Subtracts chroma from the image by A Subtract removing saturation in HLS color space all colors move towards gray Texture e Adds texture using the image colors CH e Lightens or darkens the image based on light and dark areas in the texture Smear Settings The Smear tool is sensitive to the speed of your stroke The slower you move the tool across the image the more the colors will smear In the following image the Smear tool was moved quickly across the color boundary in the top smear and slowly across the color boundary in the bottom smear The dark color was carried much further into the light color in the slower smear Figure 8 25 Smear Tool Effect 478 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Adding Texture The Texture tool applies the imported texture to the current layer using the layer colors Darker areas of the texture image take on more color than lighter areas For example if
160. 5 PT 301 SMOOMNESS sad 284 IST in 282 284 SOL Statements muii 224 square line ends rrnnnrnnnnnanrnnnnnnnnrnnanennn 134 stagger templates rrrnrrrnnnernnnnnnrr 275 299 stamp size adjust cccoocccccnccccnccocnncannnos 407 SAT AGS vane o a 148 166 start time events ani 335 status bar Paint tica 440 SE EE 101 230 stills See media files Media Store stop macro recording oocccooccccnncnconcnnnnocos 228 STOP DUP varen 358 Store Play button Shot Box 384 Sala tendinitis 84 92 deschbed vas 4 stretch keyframes rrrrnrnnnrrrrnnnnrnnnnnnennnnn 294 Style Library CO 173 176 Subtes eege 241 246 VerSIONINO aa 245 suffix text formatting ooannoannnannnennneannnni 225 surface textures Paint occcconccccccncccncnn 489 SWAD OWS us 125 switch Media Store database 0 n0nnn0n00000an 403 Media Store mode nannnnnnnannnann 378 380 switch to Animation Editor uds 248 A E A E T 94 Frame Grab sessi 362 Media Store oocccocncoccccocnconcncncnconnnnnonos 374 PU see 434 Sequencer coccccoccnccnccnccncnononenonnnnncnnnnnnnnos 306 SYNONYMS find rrrrrrnrrrrrrnnrrvvnnrenvnnerennnnn 396 System DUO reed adi 381 System collection folios 381 401 system DON ireanii 214 215 Index 603 TitleOne User Guide 604 T RE Le EE 377 tab editor suse 127 DSO 126 e 128 tables See rows tags OE IP ooo R 206 210 add with the Layou
161. 6 FX Workspace Preview Toolbar The Preview toolbar also called the Scrubber is located on the bottom of the FX workspace This toolbar allows you to preview the animation in wireframe mode without rendering and saving With the toolbar you can preview the whole animation or preview from the current frame in time The toolbar includes a Time Slider that allows you to scroll or scrub through time in Animation Editor See Preview Motion Paths on page 270 for details _ HA gt Hm ar Current Frame Time Slider Figure 4 77 Preview Toolbar Attributes Palette Many of the main key controls in Animation Editor are located on tabbed pages The tabs are Placement Shape Filter 3D Effects Spline Time and Templates To switch between tabbed pages click the tab name Animation Editor brings the contents of the tab you clicked on to the front of the display E Er Coordinates rdinates 720 I 450 380 197 545 3 virtual GR vid o Ra RB xlo Ho o fs vio BR ln lt v o P g roo o Sain 5 zlo Figure 4 78 Animation Attributes Tabs Table 4 29 Animation Attributes Tabs Tab Description Placement Contains the options to adjust the keyframe behavior on a particular axis such as Position Orientation Spins and Offset Shape Extend Skew and Scale the shape of a keyframe in this tab Filter Apply special effects to the keyframe with Transparency Crop Mosaic Luminance and Tint
162. 69 Insert a Text String from the Auto Text File cccoooccccococnncoconnnncocononcnnononcnnannconannnconanonoss 70 R pPdFre Keyboard INN 71 set Default Template use 72 OVGllay sib a a aos See ace oe 73 O A A O on ee e 73 Se Up teme IT JPP 74 Tag Layout Texto ee EE 74 Update Tagged TE TIN Overlay cc ds 76 Add Remove tems EE 77 SAVE a SCL Ol EMS aa GDS 78 oad a SE eg un NS 78 Prepare tens TOR Et E EE 78 Fade em ONO ui enes eee een 78 Dela ADEN NE 79 OOP a M Fane i OM EE NE EEE EE EE 80 NE OUST 80 PENE ae 81 EH EIERE are 82 Strata Configuration Utility 84 Output USING otrata Kars 84 Use Strata to Configure UNDUE sosser eee tds 85 Welcome STEEN eege EE 86 Ree Ee WEE 86 ASSIGN EE ell STEEN aS 87 ele le Tele er 88 Configure Channels Program Channels Screen rrnnnrnrnnnnrnnnnnenvrnnnrennnnnrennnnnnensnnnensnnsrensnnsne 89 Configure Channels Preview Channels Screen rrrnnnnrnrnnnnvnvnnnnvrnrnnnrnvnnnnrnvnnnnrnsnnsnrnsnnssensnnn 90 SA A o A detec ngadeensbalaeboeeaae 91 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide Introduction 10 CG ceci scare da ada aa 94 EE EE eebe 94 Interface OvervieW eebe 94 TREC G NOIS HE ea 96 leie ele Mensen 96 ENN PEN 96 VITO RE ve 96 METER P NE a A ae e ee eee 97 ed eu e E 98 EO DER A a 98 EE 98 Klee EE 100 Ob EG EIDEN sl 100 EU TYPES ta A le a au ros 101 Enter 102 PSA OOS sa 102 GUESS ud Ende 103 STE ON 103 WIGEO ale TE NE eee 104 Adjust Workspace ZOOM sr 104 Move Works
163. 7 Round Corner Rectangles with 20 and 40 Corner Trim Values To change the corner trim for Round Corner and Clipped Corner Rectangles Select a Round Corner Rectangle or a Clipped Corner Rectangle Chapter3 CG 131 TitleOne User Guide Polygons 132 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 2 Switch to the Attributes tab of the Attributes palette 3 In the Formatting section of the tab change the Corner Trim value Use the Polygon tool to add custom made polygons to a layout Select the Polygon tool in the Tools palette fa 2 Click the CG workspace to place the first point of the polygon Figure 3 18 Place the First Point of a Polygon 3 Click the CG workspace to place the rest of the points The boundary of the polygon draws between the points Hold the SHIFT key while clicking to make a point part of a curve instead of a straight line Figure 3 19 Add Points to a Polygon 4 To change the curvature of a point position the Polygon tool or the Selection tool over the point until it becomes an arrow then hold the ALT key and drag the point s control handles Lines and Splines This creates convex and concave curves on either side of the point You can continue to select and move the control points as long as you hold the ALT key Figure 3 20 Edit a Polygon s Control Points To move one of the points position the Polygon tool or the Selection tool over the point until it becomes an arrow then drag the p
164. ALTY News Edit emm wm i Select a text box and give it a tag name to quickly change content f Content 00 00 00 0 N E AC a Ladd Display e Delete Append All Content Source Configure External Data Source Figure 2 22 Add Tags to CG Layout Click the X button to close the dialog Note Even if the label disappears in the CG workspace the tag is still added to the text line Save the layout as a scribe file File gt Export gt Export SCRIBE File Open Overlay Tools gt Overlay Click on the line beside the label Click the Setup button Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide 75 76 Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide 9 Click Choose and open the scribe file The file loads in Overlay Overlay File Edit Actions Help Preview Delay Status 4 penalty SCRIBE 2 sktationlogo SCRIBE 2 newscrawl SCRIBE aloft Reset take Ea Source File penalty SCRIBE Logo Setup Fade In Time frames Fade Out Time frames Display Delay o remes Figure 2 23 Three Files Loaded in Overlay Update Tagged Text in Overlay After you open the scribe file containing the tagged text you can update the text in Overlay for quick updates Select the tagged item from the Items list in Overlay 2 Click the Tags button to display the tagged text fields 3 Update the text beside the tag label When you change the text the line turns yellow indicating t
165. Add a Clock Use the Port Clock tool to add digital clocks and digital timers to your layouts On the Tools palette right click the Port Clock tool 2 From the right click menu select the clock you d 2 a Ae Digital Clock like to add You can add a digital clock or a Es Digital Timer digital timer 3 mG 3 Click and drag in the CG workspace to define the 45 9 3 9 size constraints of the clock The clock is added S r e at the size and position you specify Clock Appearance Digital clocks and digital timers allow you to select a font for the clock object You can also set the appearance of the font s face edge depth and shadow Use the Attributes tab in the Attributes palette to set the appearance of your selected clock object Face and Edge Switch to the Face and Edge tab within the Attributes tab to change the appearance of your clock s face and edge I Select the clock s font from the Font Face drop down list 2 Select the font s face color from the Face Color drop down list and drag the transparency slider to set the face s transparency You can also enter a value in the Transparency field 0 is completely opaque and 100 is completely transparent Chapter 3 CG 141 TitleOne User Guide 142 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 3 Set the width of the font s edge using the Edge Width field 4 Select the font s edge color from the color drop down list and drag the transparency slider to s
166. Aliasing Removes or avoids the jagged edges on curved and diagonal lines in text or graphic objects Anti aliasing works by interpolating pixels of an intermediate color along the edges of an object CG characters and various Paint tools use anti aliasing As Characters CG An animation setting that determines how items on a layer are grouped when imported into Animation As Characters puts each character in a word on a separate spline path in Animation As Lines CG An animation setting that determines how items on a layer are grouped when imported into Animation As Lines puts each word or object on a separate spline path in Animation As Single Object CG An animation setting that determines how items on a layer are grouped when imported into Animation As Single Object flies all objects and words in a layout on a single spline path Aspect Ratio The relationship between the width and height of an image Standard televisions have an aspect ratio of 4 3 4 units wide by 3 units high Widescreen television have an aspect ratio of 16 9 ATVista A brand of frame buffer Automatic Live Updates A Program Preview palette setting that automatically sends any changes you make directly Glossary 553 TitleOne User Guide 554 to the channels enabled for live updates You can set the updates for the Program and Preview channels Auto Text Text strings that can be quickly inserted into a layout using Rapid
167. Any changes you make to the layout s objects using the CG module s toolbars and right click menus are recorded Pause Recording Click the Pause Recording button to pause the recording process This is useful if you do not want certain layout changes to be recorded Click the Pause Recording button again to resume recording Chapter 3 CG 227 TitleOne User Guide 228 Edit Macro Play Macro Delete Macro Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Stop and Save Macro When you are finished recording the macro click the Stop Recording button The Record New Macro Name window opens allowing you to Assign Hot Keys name the macro and assi gna 2 Function key None Select at least 1 combination key Some shortcut key to it keys may already be in use Record New Macro The shortcut key can be any Flo Me shift at F w available function key from FI to FI2 combined with the CTRL SHIFT or ALT keys If you do not want to assign a shortcut key to the macro select the None radio button Otherwise select the Function Key radio button select a function key from the drop down list and select the checkboxes for the CTRL SHIFT or ALT keys Click OK when you have finished setting the macro name and shortcut key Note Some key combinations are already used by CG or by Windows If the shortcut key you select is reserved you are prompted to select a different key combination when you click the OK button To edit a
168. Backgrounds on page 199 e The Solid Color treatment adds a single color to an element e The Linear Gradient Radial Gradient and 4 Color Gradient treatments add a mix of colors to an element e The Image treatment adds an image file to an element e The Active Texture treatment adds a moving image to an element You must have the Clip Option activated on your system before you can add Active Textures and clip objects to your layouts e The None Treatment makes an element completely transparent e You can add Beveled Edge and Tube Edge treatments to edge elements Apply a Treatment To apply a treatment to an object Select one or more objects in the CG workspace 2 Select the element you want to edit by switching to the Face Edge Depth or Shadow tabs in the Attributes palette 3 If you are editing an edge select the edge you want to edit from the Defined Edges list 4 Select the treatment you want to apply from the Treatment drop down list Use the controls in the tab to customize the treatment See the sections below for an explanation of the controls for each treatment Mix and Manage Colors Customizing treatments often involves choosing one or more colors Click a color drop down list to select a color using the Mm Color Palette See The Color Palette on page 169 for information about choosing creating and managing colors for your layouts Chapter 3 CG 157 TitleOne User Guide Color Treatments
169. CG Toolbar CG Workspace Tools Palette CG Editor Toolbar Attributes palette Library Palette Description The CG toolbar allows you to configure your layouts and your display It also helps you navigate between the objects in the CG workspace Create your layout by adding and positioning text graphic logo clock and Port objects in the CG workspace You can also add a background to the layout The workspace shows what your layout looks like as you work Use the text graphic logo clock and Port tools from the Tools palette to draw objects in the CG workspace The Tools palette also contains the Pointer and Selection tools which allow you to select and transform your objects The CG Editor toolbar contains tools to help you position transform and layer the objects in the CG workspace The tabs in the Attributes palette help you change the attributes and appearance of your objects To display the contents of a tab click the tab name Manage your styles and media with the Library palette The Style Library helps you maintain a consistent look for your layout objects and the Media Library stores commonly used images clips clocks and Port objects Chapter3 CG 95 TitleOne User Guide 96 The CG Workspace Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Create your layout within the CG workspace The CG workspace displays the layout as it will appear on your output with a grey checkerboard pattern represen
170. Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Motion is created when an object moves through a series of points along a path This path is called the spline The significant events that make up the points along which the object moves such as the start and end points are called keyframes Every object moves smoothly between keyframes along a particular path The transitional values Animation generates to get from one keyframe to the next are called frames The spline path is made up of both keyframes and frames To create a path you need to define both a starting keyframe and an ending keyframe as well as any points of change in between See Keyframes on page 261 for details Coming MEXT Keyframe lt lt lt Frames A 2 lt Keyframe Figure 4 81 Animation Spline Path An animation is created by changing objects over time The series of still frames becomes animated as changes are made throughout the timeline In the FX workspace you can see every moment in time for the animation This is important for aligning objects at a particular point in time A track view of the timeline is presented on the Time tab This view is useful for changing the length of the spline path or shifting the entire timeline forward or backward without working with individual keyframes See From 2D to 3D Motion Timeline on page 286 for details on setting the timing for each animation path Placement Shape Filter A SD Effects Spline
171. Checkbox Multi page crawls also called page formatted crawls allow you to easily create and navigate long crawls All events in the multi page crawl are rendered to disk and then played back as one smooth continuous crawl The output plays back unbroken but each page is actually an individual event in the playlist Creating multi page crawls requires both the CG and Sequencer modules Aa Q N In CG Tools gt CG select an empty slot in the playlist Select Crawl from the Title Type list Enter the text for the first page of your crawl in the CG workspace For each subsequent page of your crawl a Select the next empty slot in the playlist b Select Crawl from the Title Type list Chapter 5 Sequencer 319 TitleOne User Guide 320 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide c Add your text and graphics to the layout Multi page crawl in CG Crawl selected D Fie Edit Playlist Tools Help IER P ES lal EN Ee B DE A 2 aus 2 Ze te ee Il SS oa h E y e za Fel eee IC 0 Playlist Items me em gt gt jE Kl om KI z D 2 E e Figure 5 7 Multi page Crawl Set Up in CG Switch to Sequencer Tools gt Sequencer 6 Select the first event you want included in the your multi page crawl 7 Select Edit gt Insert Group Header The group header is inserted above the selected event All the events that fall between the new group header and the ne
172. Clear this checkbox if Closed Captioning is not part of the video signal Disables TitleOne from making backup copies of your scribelist files when you open them Stops the output of the start up screen when TitleOne is opened Clear this option to output the output board start up screen when TitleOne is opened Applies a dither filter that compensates for banding that appears with reduced color resolution during conversions on some output boards The dither filter improves the look of gradients Choose the setting based on your output board Enter 0 to avoid applying the dither filter Chapter 9 Resources 513 TitleOne User Guide Project Tab 514 Chapter 9 Resources TitleOne User Guide Table 9 1 General Tab Preferences Option Windows Gamma Video Transparent Pattern Description Sets the VGA display to match the video output You can set the red green and blue channels separately Gamma correction changes the midtones without modifying the extremes of the brightness range Increase the gamma values to lighten midtone ranges or decrease the gamma values to darken the midtone ranges The default gamma value of 1 0 means the VGA display is not corrected Sets the pattern TitleOne displays that represents the video transparent areas of an image or a layout The pattern displayed is not saved as part of the layout information Table 9 2 Project Tab Preferences Option Search Order Materials Pat
173. Column Marne version lt 2 0 gt rss channel item title channel rss channel item link title lt Weil com gt rss channel item description link lt http news wnoi comrssheeds gt description lt Providing the latest news rep language en us gt copyright lt 2006 World News Informatic pubDake lt Fri 08 Sep 2006 10 03 02 EDT tel 10 gt Il image El item title lt Mayor Wilkins denies responsibilil link lt http rss zlmc news archiwe mar description lt Despite mounting criticism pubDate lt Fri 08 Sep 2006 09 31 46 E E item Figure 3 65 Add XML Data Types 4 Click OK You are returned to the Select Text Source dialog After a few seconds the Select Database Items window opens See Select Table Text for Output on page 222 to continue selecting data for output Select Table Text Select the table text for output in the Select Database Items window The for Output Select Database Items window lists the data available in the selected table Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide In the Select Database Items window link the data tags to table columns by selecting a column name from the Source Column list The Source Column list links the selected column information to the tag displayed beside it Data L E Tag LOCATION Janet Murphy City Hall Victor Atlas Community Center Kim Le City Hall Jade Engeline Reese Middle School Sam Lord Placid
174. Creek Figure 3 66 Data Tags Linked to Source Columns Select a column from the Sort list to determine which column the ODBC option uses to order the display of information If you do not select a sort column the text displays in the order listed in the table If you want to sort the data select the ascending or the descending option located beside the Sort list to determine if the selected column is sorted in ascending order or descending order e Columns with numerical data are sorted from smallest number to largest ascending order or largest number to smallest descending order e Columns with textual data are sorted alphabetically from A to Z ascending order or in reverse alphabetical order from Z to A descending order Use the Selection Criteria section to set specific table entries for output a Select the AND option or the OR option from the first list to help set the playback criteria Chapter 3 CG 223 TitleOne User Guide 224 AND Displays the table entries that meet the criteria set in the current row and the row above The table entries must have the attributes of both rows OR Displays the table entries that meet the criteria set in either the current row or the row above The table entries must have at least one of the row s attributes but not both b Select a column heading from the Column list for the selection criteria The Operator and Value condition applies to the selected column For examp
175. D templates you should maintain a set in both formats if you use a lot of raster graphics and you find results of conversion unsuitable If you are working exclusively with SD consider creating all your layouts in the SD 16 9 aspect ratio as this will make the transition easier should you upgrade to an SD HD switchable system in the future Working in SD 16 9 allows you to see how your layouts work in the HD world Chapter 1 Overview 29 TitleOne User Manual Configure Your XD 200 Boards The XD 200 Control Panel lets you configure standard definition and high definition SDI inputs and outputs and reference source The XD 200 Control Panel displays the status associated with different configurations and allows you to view a test pattern to ensure your configuration is working properly Feature Note The XD 200 Control Panel may include options that do not apply to your system XD 200 Control You can use the XD 200 Control Panel to configure up to two XD 200 Panel Overview boards The control panel allows you to save multiple configurations for each board These steps outline the basic steps for using the XD 200 Control Panel See the following topics for details on specific tasks Open the XD 200 Control Panel Start gt All Programs gt Harris gt TitleOne gt Configuration Utilities gt Phoenix Control Panel 2 To configure a video card select a video card in the Detected Video Cards list Information abou
176. Default layout is blank with a small selection of styles and media library objects You can use more than one template registry within CG For information about template registries see Template Registries on page 234 Select a Template To select a template for a layout click the Template drop down list in the CG toolbar A list of all the templates in the current template registry TitleOne User Guide appears Hover your mouse over the template names to display a thumbnail for each template 40 Live bug wi O Default layout 1 Reporter Location 2 Evening Mews 3 Sports Scores 10 Left Panel 40 Live bug Al Stil w 450 Figure 3 71 Select a Template from the Template Drop Down List Click a template name to load the template into the layout Modifying a layout does not modify the template that the layout was based on The Template drop down list can also be opened by pressing the CTRL R key Create a Template from a Layout Use the Template Manager to add your own layouts to the current template registry l 2 Open the layout in CG Open the Template Manager by clicking the Template Manager button in the CG toolbar You can also open the Template Manager by choosing le Template Manager gt CG Layouts or by pressing the CTRL SHIFT R key Click the Add button to add the current layout to the Template Manager The Add dialog opens In the Add dialog number the template and inc
177. E 148 files manage in G Scribe See also export import files manage in TitleOne occcccccccccccncc 6 Fill OMI OP HOM asset 363 MI PETE E o dekken 199 MEG BEEN ua 133 filters Animation rrrrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnn 295 296 filters Frame Grab rrrnrnrnnnnnnennnnn 365 368 filters Paint rrrrrnrrrrrnnnrennnnn 468 483 487 Find button Shot Box 384 Find dialog Media Store 417 find files in Media Store rrrrrrnnrnnnnennnvnnnnnn 382 416 USING SNOLBOX str aia as 417 flicker Frame Grab oocccooccccccncccncccncnnononos 363 le Beier CN 131 191 flip Paint transformations ooccccocccccoo 474 NOU MEN etnia a do 97 448 folios Media Store oonccccconccnccoccnnonooos 378 assign search results to 419 O 379 SLO EEE ene as 379 browse mode vs database mode 378 Browse Get 379 420 IIe WEE 379 380 383 388 392 COME CUON versene 380 401 402 create playlist from 426 edit NAMES Hae 383 FER ee 380 401 GIOD alll EE 380 401 Global Browse occccocccccocccccccncconcnononoss 379 Global vs Global Browse 381 A 381 401 402 DOU ee 380 401 420 Set vs Browse Set occccoccccccccnccucnnconnnos 381 SOM lid 407 431 SVS ae 381 401 402 ONS Loose 114 ASPECT TANO ne 116 for elle e tirada 141 ee Ee 116 SIES vea 115 See also text CG foreground color Paint ccc
178. E 53 Navigate RE e BEE 54 Output with the Navigate Dialog oocccococcococononcccnnnnnoconcnnononononnnoncnononcnnononcnnnnnnronononrnnenenas 54 nO BOX al mes svev 56 Select PAIS LAOS GS 56 Select Media Store WEE 57 Assign a Media File to a Defined Button A 58 Oulpul Selected MAS Las 59 C lia see NT 60 Key FOSNES aS 60 SETUD ET 0 a ee ide 60 Before Launching RA ess 60 Open Rapid ETE vaere 61 mide Tie el tel re DAN vade 62 RT ele i A E PE O A A A A 62 Docked RapidFire DEIGEN 62 Undocked RapidFire Dialog tico A A duet Ae ai eee 63 Perform a RapidFire Operation serren e E a a a a 63 SCEN Bers 5 GE ET EE EE 64 Se NE Working Directo uroni Pee 64 EXAMIDIC Volker 65 Create a New Playlist Using Registry Templates o occcooncncccoccnnccoononononconononcononnncnncnnanoncnnos 65 Send a Layout in the Playlist to Air AE 65 Moda Orm the Playlists di dd ia 66 Modify a Registry Template unica e 66 Create a New Layout Using a Layout in the Working Directory oooccccoccccoccncconnnconcncnnnnnos 67 Write a Layout to the Working Directory ue 67 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide iv Create a New Layout Using a Media Store Template cccocccccoccncoccncconcnconcnncnnnncnncncnnnonos 68 Write a Layout to Media Store as a Template occcooncnccconcncococnnccconcnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnononnnnnnnnons 68 Update a Layout VIT AUD TOT saved lletres 69 Create am AUO TEA File uvenn
179. EET ET EE EE RETT EE EE EE ER 228 Manage LayQU S cai TE 229 Layout MAE NN 229 EE ee ee ee 229 A thers date sGts afta eviancecaebe NRE 230 FROM HAY OURS vr 230 Craw Layouts EEE EE EE 230 Animation e EE 231 Knei EE 231 Selecta Template see 231 Create a Template roma Layout inet SG 232 update a E nei 233 Manage Templates ANNE 233 Create Playlists with the Template Manager rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnvnnrnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnsenrnnenensnnssen 233 Select a Different Template Registry rrrrrrnrrrnrnnrrvrrnnrrerrnnrrevrnnrrevrnnnrnnnnsrsennnsnsnnnnsrsnnnnsnennnnn 234 Template RESTEN e ties 234 Open the Registry Man eee celos 234 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide xi xii Create a New Registry File ccccooocccccococoncccoconoconcnnnonannnonanononononononnannnnnnannncnnannncnnananess 234 So eee 234 Copy Templates Between Registries AAA 235 EN CAS EE 235 WOVE TEMPEST 236 Manage Rea 236 Back Up Template Registries ooccooccccocncccnccocnnconccnnnonanonnnnonanonnnnonannnnnnonnnnonanonnnnonaninnnns 236 TRE JOD Creator vs 236 Create a Formatted Text File coccion a iia 237 Import The Formatted Ox FE NR 238 SE EE 238 The Video Sate Te Ned sara 239 Edit the Video Safe Title Area 239 Work WIEN ESVOUT PIGS Lassen eee 240 Import and Export EE Oe TE 240 IMPOR TET FE ae 240 SUBIO isis Tee a en 241 SU ee 241 Prepare Subtitle Only Files cocoooccocococnonoconnonoconcnnoconcn
180. ER key on the number pad not the ENTER key on the main keyboard Note The file is also output on the active output channel See Take Media Files Using the Shot Box Palette on page 428 To add more media files to the playlist repeat steps 4 to 7 To disable the Learn mode click the LRN Learn Mode button on the Shot Box palette You can easily take media files in Media Store to video Use one of the following methods to take your media file Double click the thumbnail in the Media window Drag the thumbnail from the Media window to the Program palette Select the thumbnail in the Media window or enter the file s media number in the Shot Box Number field and then click the Take button on the Shot Box palette Ensure that the LRN button is not selected on the Shot Box palette For more information see Take Media Files Using the Shot Box Palette on page 428 Click one of the four Shot Box Defined buttons on the Shot Box palette For more information see Set Up Media Files for Single Click Takes on page 428 and Take Media Files Using the Shot Box Palette on page 428 Select the thumbnail in the Media window and press the ENTER key on your keyboard number pad Chapter 7 Media Store 427 TitleOne User Guide 428 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide Set Up Media Files for Single Click Takes Using the Shot Box Defined buttons you can output a Media Store database media file in real time with a single
181. Editor tab Table 5 6 Transition Types Transition Description Cut Displays the entire event instantly The cut transition is the default option Wipe Gradually wipes the event on screen in the selected direction Wipe transitions include directional options duration Frames field and transition softness Soft field Tile Reveals the event one square at a time Tile transitions include directional options duration Frames field and transition softness Soft field Chapter 5 Sequencer 325 TitleOne User Guide Table 5 6 Transition Types Transition Organic Dissolve Push Description Reveals the event using one of 32 pre defined transition effects Organic transitions include numbered buttons that you use to select the effect Duration Frames field and transition softness Soft field options are also available Fades the event on screen until the event is fully displayed Dissolve transitions include the duration option Frames field Moves the event on screen in a specific direction Push transitions include the directional and duration Frames field options Select Transition To select a transition for your event complete the following steps I Select your event in the Sequencer playlist 2 Switch to the Event Editor tab 3 Select a transition from the Transition drop down list The transition is applied to the selected event 326 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Ev
182. Environment Update Mary Evans Ecologist Sep Shh DOLO EZ E E muv Postion x 37R 3 vam SG ES Pixel shift 10 Program ddifa velar car Attributes Face Edge Depth Shadow Treatment Color eon GA Solid Cok v C Apply Shee Color z Color v width 10 12 Transparency 3 a offset y 13 ne 0 Figure 2 3 Set Up Layouts on Separate Channels Chapter 2 Output 49 TitleOne User Guide 50 Clear the Output Output Rolls and Crawls Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide You can clear the content of program channel or the preview channel using the Program Preview palette e To clear the contents of the Preview palette click the CLR button above the Preview palette e To clear the contents of the Program palette click the CLR button above the Program palette Clear preview channel Clear program channel Preview d4 CLR Program CLR Figure 2 4 CLR Buttons Clear Channel Content Sequencer includes options for changing the output speed of rolls and crawls and for playing your page formatted multi page rolls and crawls Change Roll Crawl Output Speed You can change the speed of a roll or a crawl during output using keyboard shortcuts e To increase the roll crawl speed press ALT SHIFT Page Up e To decrease the roll crawl speed press ALT SHIFT Page Down Pause Ro
183. File Name Keyword Auto Use File Name Q C Auto Use Volume Label Date Format DOMM O MMDDYY O YYMMDD Case Insensitive Location Name Add Delete Picture Store Defaults Server C PictureStore Browse Local C PictureStorelStore User Browse Browse C PictureStorelStore Browsel Browse Store Locations OK Cancel Figure 7 31 Preferences Dialog Store Paths and Folios Tabs Change the Below each thumbnail in the Media window Media Store displays a source Thumbnail Text icon see Media Window on page 375 and media number followed by one of the following e Filename e First keyword e Title By default Media Store displays the filename You can change the default so that Media Store displays the first keyword or title assigned to the media file 430 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide Set the Default Database Media Sort Order Set the Default Title and Keywords Change the Date Format Open the Preferences dialog File gt Preferences 2 Switch to the Store Paths tab Thumbnail Text 3 In the Thumbnail Text section select the File 5 File Mame Name Keyword or Title option Keyword 4 Click OK en You can change the default order of Media Store database file thumbnails in the Media window The default sort order is None which sorts the files by media number To change the default sort order
184. Fire Average Field Filters CG Paint and Frame Grab Video clean up filters that compute new data for even or odd numbered scan lines by averaging each scan line with the line above Axis X Y or Z Animation An imaginary line that passes through an object and about which the object turns There are three axes Animation X width Y height and Z depth B B1 Folio See Browse Folio Background CG A pattern color image or incoming video signal Foreground objects such as text and graphics are placed on top of the background Paint Images created in Paint to be used in CG behind other text and graphic objects See also Collage Background Color CG and Paint Color used as a secondary color for gradients You can also use the background color as a secondary color choice when applying Glossary TitleOne User Guide color to an element If you hold down the ALT key the background color is applied instead of the face color Balanced Audio Balanced audio is a method of minimizing unwanted noise from interference in audio cables The idea is that any interference picked up in a balanced cable is eliminated at the point where the cable plugs into the audio equipment Balanced audio works on the principle that two identical signals which are inverted 180 out of phase will cancel each other out This method of transmission is designed for long cable runs Baud Rate A measu
185. Format Options Option Counter Format Time Format Display Leading Zero Separator Start at End at Count Until Next Take Description Sets whether the timer counts up or down Sets the format for the timer The default timer format is hours minutes seconds hh mm ss Select to always display the hour with two digits For example if the current time is 9 14 the clock displays 09 14 Sets the separator for the timer The default separator is a colon Sets the starting time for the timer If the timer is set to count up select an ending time with the End at drop down lists When checked the timer will continue to count until the layout is taken offline Port Objects If you purchased the RT Sports option you can expand the capabilities of your layouts by adding Port objects Port objects display layers of data created in their associated RTX applications Create an RTXports RTXports applications are created with the RTX development tools You can Application create multi zone displays with infinite overlapping layers real time data updates in layouts cascading effects DVEs 2D and 3D animations and more Your RTXports application can use all the features of Inscriber RTX For sample code see RT Xports Code Sample on page 539 Install an RTXports Before CG can use a Port object the object s RTXports application must be Application installed on the system Make sure TitleOne is closed 2
186. G Editor Toolbar to change the layering of your objects to control the way they overlap in the layout Sometimes it is easiest to select and edit large numbers of objects in a tree view Use the Layout Tree View window to select layer lock duplicate name and delete objects Select Objects You must select objects before you can modify or position Pointer them in the layout CG provides a Pointer tool to help you Tool select and manipulate objects and a Selection tool to give you more control over the text and control points within the A objects H R When you double click an object you automatically switch to f the Selection tool Selection Tool Table 3 19 The Pointer and Selection Tools Pointer Tool Selection Tool Moves modifies rotates Moves modifies duplicates and scales rotates and scales Overview j objects objects Selects control points and text Graphic Selects the entire object Selects the entire object Object Selection Chapter 3 CG 181 TitleOne User Guide Table 3 19 The Pointer and Selection Tools Continued Pointer Tool Selection Tool Selects the entire object Spline Object Selection Selects the entire object Text Object Selection Hold the ALT key and drag an object to duplicate it Duplicate Objects Selects the object and automatically displays all the control points within the spline Drag the control points to edit the spline shape Sele
187. Grab Paint Description Animates elements of your CG layout Apply preset filters and effects to your objects and create templates to assign standard motion to all your layouts See Animation on page 247 for details Manages the playlist applies transitions and assigns output triggers Use the flexible output options to take a single event or to output an entire playlist See Sequencer on page 305 for details Captures a single frame from an incoming video signal and saves it as a still image You can apply video filters to your frame grab to quickly improve the image quality See Frame Grab on page 361 for details Feature Note Paint is a purchase option in TitleOne Creates and edits images while maintaining alpha information Use the layers to quickly composite images for professional on screen graphics See Paint on page 433 for details Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual 3 4 Additional TitleOne Features Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual The Clip option and TitleOne utilities provide additional functionality to your software program See the following table for a description of TitleOne s additional functionality Table 1 2 Title One Features Feature Clip option Strata Compositing Description Feature Note The Clip option is a purchase option in TitleOne The Clip option supports clip playback in TitleOne You can play clips as full scr
188. IDES MARKERS SPELL CHECK Function Turns all Overlay layers on LAYER 2 Toggles Overlay layer 2 between the show and hide states but does not take the change to air Turns all Overlay layers off LAYER 3 Toggles Overlay layer 3 between the show and hide states but does not take the change to air Function Selects Text Field on the CG Tools palette Deletes all unused empty objects on the layout If an empty object is selected it is not deleted Deletes all text from the cursor position to the end of the line Opens Template Manager Style Library Opens News Edit Switches layout type to crawl ROLL Switches layout type to roll Centers selected rows horizontally on the layout Centers all items horizontally and vertically on the layout Function Toggles on and off guides and markers for example safe area grid and tags Opens Spell Check Number Key Function 25 LOGO Inserts a logo region on the workspace 26 BG Imports a background file The Open dialog opens to allow you to select a file CTRL BG Removes background SHIFT BG Opens background editor 27 SWAP ROWS If one row is selected and another has been copied for swapping swaps the rows SHIFT Copies row for swapping SWAP ROWS Strata Feature Note The Strata Configuration Utility is a purchase option in TitleOne Number Key Function 28 SETUP LINKED Sets up the event as a linked event Each event EVENT must be assigned
189. Inscriber XD 200 Control Panel Use the Inscriber XD 200 control panel to configure your video card Preview Control Panel Detected video Cards This list contains all video cards eee and displavs their status Select EE in table below Eo work with its settings A gt 1 finsemberso 2oo sses624 BA Gan Gna Gina Hor ner 2 2 his one Ja Gra Qma Qun wa es Swapping cards will Force changes to be applied Figure 1 15 Click the Preview Control Panel Button Use the options in the Preview Configuration window to set the resolution of your preview device Inscriber XD 200 Control Panel Preview Configuration Please enter information about your Framebuffer width pixels 1720 Height pixels 576 Frame Rate frames per second E Interlaced Figure 1 16 Preview Configuration Window 4 Click Apply to apply the changes 5 Click Back to close the window and return to the XD 200 Control Panel 6 Click the Close button in the XD 200 Control Panel Chapter 1 Overview 23 TitleOne User Manual 24 Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual Dual Channel Systems Dual channel systems allow you to use the second XD 200 video board for your preview output if you are not using both boards as a program channel Dual channel system l a 000000 000000 Figure 1 17 Two XD 200 Boards I To set one board for preview open the Strata Compositing utility
190. Inseriber xD 200 3876042 Tun Qua Gua Gua Bok Fre run Swap Cards Swapping cards will Force changes to be applied Refresh List Yideo Card Details Card Model Inscriber XD 200 Card Number 4014290 FPGA Version 8401 Saved Configuration General Details Input Output Reference In Mixer Test Pattern Configure Input Output Configure your input and output settings For optimal results use HD SD Downconversion Configuration Input Output Standard Define your configuration Define your standards for broadcasting definition Configure for both input and output High Definition Use key input for live DVE or frame grab 5D Only O Standard Definition O No input required only output Display Standard 1080i 29 97 fps vi Enable ancillary data input output Downconversion Mode Enable timecode input Bypass Video Timing check to enable hardware video bypass relays Adjust the timing of the output video signal Horizontal Delay in us 10 Memory Tuning Vertical Delay in Lines can be negative o Fine tune DDR memory DCM phase shift 365 Help Apply Changes iil lt Figure 1 22 Input Output Configuration Options Chapter 1 Overview 33 TitleOne User Manual 34 Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual 3 In the Configuration section select your configuration options See the following table for details Table 1 6 Configuration Options Option Description Configure for
191. Install the RT Xports application 3 Launch TitleOne The Port object associated with the RT Xports application is now available in the CG Tools palette Add a Port Object In the CG Tools palette right click the Port Clock tool A to the Layout menu appears with a list of the installed RT Xports gE applications If your system has no installed RTXports applications or the Port option is not enabled the Tools palette contains the Clock tool instead of the Port Clock tool and the right click menu shows no ports 2 From the right click menu select the Port object to add 3 Use one of the following methods to add the Port object to your layout e For Port objects that are constrained to a certain size click the CG workspace The Port object is added with its top left corner positioned at the mouse cursor e For unconstrained Port objects click and drag in the CG workspace to define the size constraints of the Port It is added at the size and position you specify Port Attributes Port objects can be designed with custom interfaces If the Port object Chapter 3 CG 145 TitleOne User Guide Port Size 146 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide provides an interface switch to the Attributes tab of the CG Attributes palette The options in the tab allow you to customize the Port Some Port applications allow you to change the scale of Port objects Use the Attributes tab to change the scale of Port objects with unconstrained sizes
192. Is 5 Click the Finish button to add the selected driver to the system and to continue with the database setup 6 In the new dialog enter a name for the data source Select the external data source For Access data click the Choose button In the dialog navigate to and select the database Clear the Read Only checkbox if necessary For Excel data click the Select Workbook button In the dialog navigate to and select the spreadsheet Clear the Read Only checkbox if necessary 8 Click OK in all the dialogs until you return to Windows 9 Create the CG layout that will access the database as described in Create a Tagged CG Layout on page 217 Note You must connect each computer that runs a layout with ODBC tagged fields to the data source separately After making this connection you will not need to go through the procedure again unless the file path to the data source changes Add a Text File to System List Once you set up a text file database add the file to the ODBC system list so the CG can read the text file content Before doing this you must set up a layout with data tags as described in Create a Tagged CG Layout on page 217 To add a text file to the ODBC system list Within CG click the News Edit button on the CG Editor toolbar News Edit opens ifs 2 Click the Configure External Data Source button The Select Text Source dialog opens 3 Select the Text File radio button and click OK
193. L SHIFT I pixels Select invisible CTRL SHIFT A Select none CTRL D pixels remove selection Layers New layer CTRL ALT N Merge layer down CTRL E RapidFire Action Shortcut Shortcut Duplicate layer CTRL ALT D Merge visible CTRL SHIFT E layers Merge layer up CTRL ALT E Action Shortcut Shortcut Function Keys Write Scratch vii layout to playlist Load layout from registry into Scratch vii layout Write Scratch vii F3 Write Scratch vii SHIFT F5 layout to registry layout to working update only directory if Load From Working Directory option is enabled or Media Store if option is disabled See Set the Working Directory on page 64 Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Load layout from Grab a video frame CTRL G playlist into and load it into Scratch vii layout Scratch vii layout Chapter 9 Resources 529 TitleOne User Guide 530 Chapter 9 Resources TitleOne User Guide Action Shortcut Shortcut Load layout from SHIFT F4 working directory if Load From Working Directory option is enabled or Media Store if option is disabled into Scratch vii layout See Set the Working Directory on page 64 Media Store is a purchase option in Number Pad Keys TitleOne Swap contents of Find the next free CTRL program channel I number in the PLUS SIGN and program SEQUENCE channel 2 Switch the output Load layout from ENTER
194. Media Store leaderboards See rows leading EE 118 Learn Mode button Shot Box 384 427 429 legacy ES ve 8 legal color values AEN 501 linear gradient treatments rrrrnrrrnnnnrnnnn 158 WINGS A 133 ine e EE 134 Index TitleOne User Guide ME MIN ses 134 See also paths link external data sources rrranrrrnnnrnnnnnnn 218 list view of search results Media Store 419 List Thumbnail button 419 live video feed CO 199 live video display as DVE 352 354 load CG color palettes siii 172 News Edit Tables 205 A e ae 234 Local collection folios 381 401 Local Disk render option 350 local drives Media Store browse for media files 385 SOUCO ICONS sico dica 376 Local System button 381 401 402 lock animation path 288 object height ic 119 object position coooccconcococnco 190 198 object width oocccoccnccccccccccnnnnos 120 242 lock content cursor rrrrnranennnnnvanennnnnnanennn 121 Log Event Down button 308 Log Event Up button eege geed is 308 DO OPE ae 137 140 add with Media Library 138 178 alpha Channel aus ds 138 Mare 191 insert into text objects 108 DEE EE 139 update logos ooocccoccccccccccoocnconcncnnnnnnnnoss 209 logos Paint cleanup ee 454 EE eege 456 vector based rrrnnrnnanrnnnnevnrrnnanennnnnnnne 456 logos
195. Media window Using Media Store you can quickly find and use media files You can browse for media files or create Media Store databases of media files which can be organized into folios containing related files Searches are based on date keywords title media file number or other attributes You can take a media file to video in real time or add files to the playlist Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Switch to Media You can easily switch between modules using the buttons on the toolbar or Store the options from the Tools menu To switch to Media Store use one of the following methods e On the toolbar click the Media Store i button A e B Lal I I I e Select Tools gt Media Store e Press F9 Interface Overview The Media Store interface has the following components e Media window e Navigation pane e Media Store toolbar e Attributes palette e Shot Box palette e Media Store palette e Playlist e Scrapbook 374 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide e Program Preview palette Playlist Navigation Pane Media Window Media Store Toolbar G Scril e UNTITLED SCRIBELIST C P OGRAM FILES HARRIS GSCRIBE STORE v 1 El GScribe Store S h ot E Configuration Utilities 1 n Previ f Directx fl B i hue E OX a imports Palette Media Store 5 1334 hdtmplt001 large E31335 hdtmplt001 large E31336 hdtmpit001 onebe Palette Image Info Transit
196. One User Guide 348 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Output with a PC Clock Trigger Once you move the playlist online you can start playback When the system time reaches the event in point the event is output to the program channel To go online press CTRL SHIFT 0 You are prompted to save your playlist if you have not saved yet Once all the events are rendered and moved online the Run tab becomes available On the Event Editor tab click the Start Reading arrow beside the Source field The Source field displays the current system time Select the group header containing the events you want to output Switch to the Run tab Click the Run Job button Events are triggered once the system time reaches the event in point Prepare the Playlist for Output Before you output your playlist you have a number of playback options available in Sequencer The playback options allow you to set the following Playlist loop options Event output highlight Event render location Live video display DVE Loop the Playlist After you move the playlist online you can set the playlist to loop during output Sequencer continues to play the job until you stop the output For each loop the playlist restarts at the set start time which is determined by the selected trigger type Switch to Online mode CTRL SHIFT 0 The Run tab becomes available 2 Switch to the Run tab 3 Select the Cycle checkbox During output the
197. PB With animFB Set to have no container Container Null Set the dimensions Width crAnim Width Height crAnim Height Set up Setup GlobCon End With Prepare and show the Animation With crAnim Set the destination FrameBuffer FrameBuffer animFB Set to loop infinitely Loop True Set up and show Setup GlobCon Take End With LK 2K OK OK A OK OK OK OK K K K OK K K OK K K K K K K K OK OK K K K K OK OK K K K OK OK K K K K K Prepare objects for the ContinuousCrawl Define and set up the destination FrameBuffer With crawl FB Set the bounds SetBounds 0 GlobCon Height 200 720 200 Set up Setup crawlCon End With Prepare the ContinuousCrawl With contCrawl Set the destination FrameBuffer FrameBuffer crawl FB Set to use Inscriber RTX data feed UseLegacyDataFeed False Set the speed and direction Speed 4 End With End Sub Private Sub contCrawl_Setup Fill the buffer Normally you would retrieve data from your live feed here You would then create and queue still images and or effects based on the retrieved data Draw new text to crLayer Draw ToLayer Queue the Layer contCrawl Queueltem crLayer Queue the Animation contCrawl Queueltem animFB Draw new text to crLayer Draw ToLayer Queue the Layer contCrawl Queueltem crLayer Queue the Animation contCrawl Queueltem animFB Chapter 9 Resources 541 TitleOne User Guide 542 Chapter 9 Resource
198. PI 9 22 GPI 14 5 GPI 5 14 GPI 8 23 GPI 13 6 GPO 1 15 GPO 5 24 GPI 12 7 GND 16 GPO 6 25 VCC MPU 8 GPO 2 17 GPO 7 26 GPO 10 9 GPO 3 18 GPO 8 Figure 5 21 DB26 Female High Density Connector The GPI inputs are TTL The GPI O device expects TTL transition from HIGH to Low to initiate GPI trigger GPI triggers can be initiated by using passive switch or relay with normally open contacts Chapter 5 Sequencer 341 TitleOne User Guide 342 GPI inputs 9 14 have no internal pull up resistors If passive switching is required for GPI inputs 9 14 the pull up resistors must be added externally as indicated in the following diagram Pin GHD 000000000 10000000000 040000000 iaa To pins that have no pull PTTL SS up resistors Pull Up resistors Figure 5 22 GPI Passive Switch Connection Set Up Your COM Port Trigger To set up a COM port trigger you need to connect the GPI device to a COM port on your system and then select the COM port in the TitleOne Preference dialog Connect your GPI device to the COM I or COM 2 port on the back of your system iS A II COM1 COM Figure 5 23 System COM Ports Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide The following diagram shows the pin closures for the 9 pin COM port connectors Reverse movement is not supported a Forward Figure 5 24 GPI Con
199. R Use the ENTER key on the main keyboard For only database media files you can add notes about files such as the source copyright permissions and history Switch to database mode ensure that the Browse button on the toolbar is not selected 2 Select a folio that contains the file to update Delete Media Files 3 Inthe Media window select the thumbnail 4 In the Attributes palette at the bottom of the window select the Memo tab Key Info Memo Image Info Transition version 2 February 21 2007 version also available in black and white All rights reserved KH Figure 7 22 Attributes Palette Memo Tab 5 Inthe text field enter text to describe the file The window scrolls if necessary 6 On the Media Store palette click the Update Image Info button Update Image Info Button OZ Gp E Z RG JED You can delete files in browse mode or database mode In browse mode you delete the file from disk In database mode you can delete a file from one folio or all folios and can also delete the file from disk Delete a File from Disk You can delete media files from disk when browsing in the Media window Switch to browse mode ensure that the Browse button on the toolbar is selected 2 In the navigation pane select the folder that contains the file to delete 3 In the Media window right click the thumbnail and then select Delete from the menu Chapter 7 Media Store 411 TitleOne U
200. R 1 1978 document for more information Since Paint is a WYSIWYG what you see is what you get paint package you want to make sure your computer monitor is calibrated properly If you create images without calibrating your monitor the images will not appear correctly in video For example if your gamma is not corrected oranges may appear red or yellows may appear orange Computer Monitor Gamma Computer Monitor Brightness and Contrast Environment Variables Calibrating your computer monitor involves several steps You want to set the white point correct the gamma and adjust the brightness and contrast If your monitor allows it set the white point using software or hardware to match the output monitor 6500K You can correct the gamma in TitleOne or using third party gamma correction software To correct your gamma in TitleOne I Import the gamma bmp file located in the Title One PaintExamples folder 2 Select File gt Preferences 3 Adjust the R G and B fields on the General tab until the small color bars virtually disappear You may not be able to get the gray bar to disappear totally You can set the brightness and contrast while viewing the smpte bmp file Import the smpte bmp file from the TitleOne Paint Examples folder The smpte bmp file contains an RGB version of the SMPTE color bar with a Pluge test pattern This image should not be used to calibrate an output monitor since the values on the bottom row can
201. RRIS communications Inscriber Title0ne Alt e gt ket Inscriber TitleOne User Guide Copyright O 2009 Harris Corporation All rights reserved Harris Corporation 26 Peppler Street Waterloo Ontario Canada N2 3C4 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT I NOTICE THIS IS A CONTRACT BY INDICATING YOUR ACCEPTANCE BELOW YOU ACCEPT ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT DECLINE WHERE INSTRUCTED AND YOU WILL NOT BE ABLE TO USE THE SOFTWARE HARRIS CORPORATION IS WILLING TO LICENSE THIS SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT 2 Ownership and License This is a license agreement and NOT an agreement for sale We continue to own the copy of the software installed by this program and any other copy that you are authorized by this Agreement to make the Software Your rights to use the Software are specified in this Agreement and we retain all rights not expressly granted to you in this Agreement Nothing in this Agreement constitutes a waiver of our rights under any copyright law or any other law 3 Permitted Uses 3 01 Right to Install and Use You may install and use the Software on the hard disk drive of any single compatible computer that you own However you may not under any circumstances have the Software installed onto the hard drives of more than one computer at the same time
202. See Axis X Y or Z Y axis See Axis X Y or Z Y Cr Cb Y Cr Cb refers to a component type digital television connector or cable The separate components of the video signal luminance light and chroma color are kept separated by using a 3 wire cable One wire is Y for light or brightness one wire is Cr for red and one wire is Cb for blue Z axis See Axis X Y or Z Glossary 583 TitleOne User Guide 584 Glossary TitleOne User Guide Symbols button Shot BOX ccccooccccccccccccoccnconononnos 384 search operator rarrnrnnnrnnannnrnnnennnnnnnnnre 416 SACO oo ooo 461 EN 8 MU a E 491 MEES adi ta 8 MALNES cami tee 214 Palette files ooocccconnncconnnococnconcnnnos 172 SEDE NES riadas 240 scribe files CG layout ccocoocccccccccnconoccnnnnos 7 Scribelist files cirio a 8 444 templates files ooccccocnccccnncconnno 234 txt files AO KE 69 TU ictericia 213 MP TEXT ven 240 JOB Creator serenata 237 News Edit Tables a aanonnonnonnnnnnnnennennn 205 SUNDES La 241 ER TE 214 search operator ccccoocccccccnccccnncconcccncnononos 416 FRON 209 Numerics 16 9 aspect ratio coocccncicnnicnncccnconnnos 27 492 32 bit images r nrrrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnrnvnnnennnnvennnne 495 3D Effects Animation 297 300 apply effects oooccccocccccccncconcnonanoncnannos 299 Index ODHONS ee 298 299 thumbnail folders a nn 297 time
203. See also Filters Image Resolution The size and color depth of the source file Image Size The actual size of an image Your image size can be larger or smaller than your canvas size If your image size is larger than your canvas size some of the image is clipped If your image size is smaller than your canvas size an empty area appears around the image See also Canvas Size Image Thumbnail A small rendered bitmap representing a layout event or other full size image A thumbnail is used to give a good representation of what a source file looks like without producing a high Quality image Thumbnails are used for preview purposes and image selection In Point Sequencer The point specifying when Sequencer starts the playback of the event Insert Keyframe Before After At Animation An option that determines where a keyframe is inserted in the spline path Before inserts a keyframe before the selected keyframe After inserts a keyframe after the selected keyframe At inserts a keyframe at the current frame as indicated in the Current Frame field on the Preview toolbar Interface The commands and graphical display formats provided by a computer program that allow you to communicate with and use the program Inscriber uses a graphical user interface GUI to provide a picture oriented way of interacting with the program Interlaced Scan A system of video scanning where an image i
204. Select an object 2 Select the element you want to add a sheen to by switching to the Face Edge Depth or Shadow tab 3 If you are adding a sheen to an edge select the edge you want to edit from the Defined Edges list 4 Use the controls in the Sheen section of the tab to define the element s sheen e Select the Apply Sheen checkbox to add a sheen to the element To remove the sheen clear the Apply Sheen checkbox e Click the Color drop down list to select the color for the sheen e Use the Width control to set the width of the sheen e Use the Offset control to set the offset of the sheen Offset determines the sheen s position on the element Higher offset values move the sheen toward the top of the element and lower values move the sheen toward the bottom An offset of zero places the sheen in the middle of the element Chapter 3 CG 155 TitleOne User Guide 156 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide e Use the Angle control to rotate the sheen e If you are adding a sheen to an edge element click the Apply to All Existing Edges button to add an identical sheen to all of your object s edges Figure 3 30 Add a Rotated Blue Sheen to a Graphic Object Element Treatments One treatment can be applied to each element in a layout object These treatments dictate the color image and Active Texture choices available for the elements they are applied to A treatment can also be applied to the layout background See Layout
205. The registry management buttons are all located on the Templates tab Add a Template to the Registry Update Delete Export y y y 1011 X 8 8 i d d Add Rename Import Figure 4 101 Registry Management Buttons If you are working with multiple paths you can include a single path or all paths in one template Make sure you set all the placement shape filter spline and time information for all the paths before you add the template to the registry To add a new template Select the Templates tab on the Attributes Palette Select the path or paths you want to include in the template Press the Add button The FX Template dialog asks whether you are including the selected path or all paths in the new template Add Template 2 Include selected path only Choose No to include all paths Ves No Cancel Figure 4 102 FX Template Dialog 4 Dress Yes to add a single path to the template or No to include all paths Chapter 4 Animation 279 TitleOne User Manual 280 Naming Conventions Update a Template TitleOne User Manual 5 Enter in a name and number for the new template in the Add Template pep Add Template Number 9 Description fade in fade out Figure 4 103 Add New Template 6 Click OK to save the new template in the registry When you add a template to the registry you need to assign a name and number to the template Once in the list on the Templates tab th
206. Track Slider and the name of the path is labeled each path is totally independent of the Track Sliders for other paths in your animation Use the vertical scroll bar to the right of the Track Sliders to see all the paths in your animation Drag the edge of the Track Slider to the right or left to increase or decrease the length of the path You can also enter frame values in the Path Start Frame or the Path End Frame fields See Adjust the Length of a Path on page 286 for details Time Options There are two types of options on the Time tab options that apply to the entire animation and options that apply to the current path only Table 4 36 Time Options Option Effect Total Animation Duration Sets the total number of frames in the animation e Indicates how long the entire animation will take Animation End e Indicates the frame furthest along in time for all paths in the animation Path Start Frame e Sets the start frame of the path Path End Frame e Sets the end frame of the path Path Duration e Sets the duration for the path in frames Locked Paths The Lock Path option locks the path in place in the workspace Once a path is locked you cannot move or edit its attributes or DS position Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Push Pins Delay Zoom In and Out Push pins leave a path on the screen until the entire animation is complete When the push pin is pointing down pinning the path in place the path remain
207. Whenever you need to use a particular color more than once create a color chip Color chips can be valuable when you do not have time to find the right color or you remember using a particular color on a previous project but no longer have the files on your computer If you have defined your colors ahead of time these colors can provide a frame work for creation Palette Files Import Color Chips Export Color Chips Reset to Defaults Use Color Chips with CG Palette files aco are the files containing the color chips Paint comes with three sets of color chips the default subtle and funky palette files The files are located in the Paint Palettes folder You can create your palettes in Paint or import palettes created in Photoshop If you want to import palette files from Photoshop the palettes must be created in RGB color mode Photoshop palettes can specify colors in any color model but Paint can only accurately read RGB colors If the colors are specified in another color model Paint replaces the colors with gray You can also use Paint palette files in Photoshop There are two import options for importing palette files You can overwrite the existing list or you can add the new chips to the existing list To overwrite the existing list select File gt Import Export gt Import Color Chips To add the new chips to the existing list select File gt Import Export gt Import Color Chips Append Paint will remember what c
208. Y a TEAMENE 157 Mand Manage ee 157 Meios PA e N 158 Color TEAMENE ae 158 Sold 960 ee 158 Lear Gade ur 158 Reda G den ua 159 A 160 None TEAMET Vase 161 Image WFC le SING aS 161 Add an Image Treatment to an Obert 162 ANNE MEET 163 iv r nn Ce PA 163 Active Texture Treatment EE 164 Add an Active Texture Treatment to an Obert 164 MOT MACU TEXO as 165 Select Active Texture Transparency anrrrnnnnnnvnvnnnnvnvnnnnvnvnnnnrnnnnnnennnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnennnnnvennnn 166 EE Texture ODIOS are 166 Edge En 166 DOVele a Edge uer 166 TUDO BOG C unne ee 168 The Color Palette Ae att d ee Aa 169 selecta Palette Color ni oli 169 Greate a New CO PR 169 Add Colors to the Color Palette ie 171 MEG Ce k Go suit eo 171 Manage PASS se 172 Me SVIS LIDII ts artos da ads e io sl id 173 Add a Style to the Library ccccoooccncococnnnnoconoconoconconononcnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnenenanens 173 Apply a Style e ER TE EE 174 Setas RE e er 174 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide Change VIEN AA EE EZ EOI 174 SMe He rel TEE 174 ROBY ORM EE A 175 MANGE SVEN AA A A 175 Update EE 175 Reder SES ja 175 Delete Style PPP ed aS eee ee ee aes 175 Global Style Library EE 175 Manage Global Style Libraries ee NdENEEENERNEN EE iii 176 The Media Library isis a ne eee eee ane ER 177 Ada Media e LNR 177 AGA a POR to NLP Here 177 APP META rr A die 178 Ada a Lodo OPE vade 178 Adda UP OE EN 178 Add an Active Te
209. a and then click the Remove from List button Applications List G Scribe 3 Board 1 Figure 2 34 Remove Application Instances 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for each Strata enabled application 6 Click the Next button Configure Channels Program Channels Screen Events can be scheduled and played independently on separate layers without interfering with each other Chapter 2 Output 89 TitleOne User Guide 90 Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide In the Output Assignment area you can review and change the video output board for your virtual channels application instances Output Assignment List Application Virtual Channel ha Figure 2 35 Review Video Board Assignment 2 To adjust the order of the application instance layers on your video boards select an application instance and then click the Up or Down Arrow button Board 1 Layer Assignment Board 2 Layer Assignment Al vi Ale Figure 2 36 Adjust Layer Assignment Note In a configuration of five layers layer one is the top most layer and layer five is the background layer 3 Click the Next button Configure Channels Preview Channels Screen If you designated a video board for previewing on the Assign Outputs screen two channel systems only or have a USB adapter that provides an external video head you must select which applications can use it for preview Note The external video head must be configured during your TitleOne installatio
210. a box containing your logo and drag it to the object Drop the logo in the object The image is applied to ch Menu the object s face To apply an image to an object s face edge depth or shadow without using the Media Library l 2 Select an object in the CG workspace Select the element you want to edit by switching to the Face Edge Depth or Shadow tabs If you are editing an edge select the edge you want to edit from the Defined Edges list Select the Image treatment from the Treatment drop down list If you are editing an edge depth or shadow element switch to the Settings section of the tab Click the Add button and select the image file you want to use The image is applied to the element Align the Image Image files can be aligned to the element in various ways e To re size the image so it completely fills the element select the Fit to Shape option from the Display drop down list e To tile the image instead select either the Tile to Shape or Tile to Layout option from the Display drop down list When an image is tiled to the layout it is positioned relative to the boundaries of the layout Otherwise it is positioned relative to the object s boundaries Set the position of the tiled image with the Position drop down list then refine the position by changing the X and Y Offset values Change the size and transparency of the image with the Scale and Transparency controls Tint t
211. a in ARE e bd 365 Apply Fillers to Frame Grabs tt e led 365 Mage FS ar 365 REPARERT 365 Repeat FIERE EE 366 Interpolate Field T gara A A 366 Table of Contents xix TitleOne User Guide XX ME PAET EEE Eo OE ee 366 AdapUVe e WEE 366 AdapUVe FIGIT AAA PA AP 366 EIGE FET arvede 366 Average Field PS 367 FAOBIZON Meal ie Ge 367 Vereal FIND vasse 367 O 367 sharpen Filter lisas 367 o Ge Re KEE 367 MONO OMG 22 a 367 ME eo 367 Footprint Removal Field 1 oocococccccnccocnoconncocnoconoconnonanonnonocannnnanonnnnonannnnnnonannnnnnonaninnnns 367 Footprint Removal Field 2 o cococcccoccoconcconnoconnconnconnocannononocnononnnonannonnnonannnnnnnnannnnaninanos 368 Set Up Frame Grab and Save Files ooo ooomomomomo 369 carat masta ast nan aetna chant nadia eaten A RE 369 Multiple Board Systems 369 MUZE Ee e EE 370 NENNE NN 370 SAA Ga ee 370 save a Grab Directly to Dis co bis 371 Saved Grab IO TE Clipboard mai ic N 371 Adda Grab tothe ocrapDo0K sa 371 Media SOTO sees rra a a NG 373 Introduction to Media Store 0 o ooocoococoon es 374 SWILCH to Media SOP ctas ST Ne 374 internace O KST 374 MENA NNM seen 375 Navigation Fane usd ii EE 378 Media Store Toolbar and Modes 378 Abe PA NN 381 MENES EP NE 382 BE PEN 383 SE EE 384 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide sje 2 leie leie 385 Program Preview Palen ia 385 Browse Media FIGS ai LMS 385 Export Media Store Media Fil
212. a is expired or no data is available e Select the Don t Show Item option if you do not want to play tagged text that has expired e Select the Show Custom Message option if you want to display a message when the data has expired Enter a custom message in the field Click OK The Select Text Access dialog opens Chapter 3 CG 219 TitleOne User Guide 4 Select Read Data Directly From the Text File and click OK A new dialog opens displaying a list of the layout s data tags allowing you to select a data source for each tag Select Text Sources For the tag Use the text From the file Lacationstt C currently contains Figure 3 64 Choosing Text Files for Your Layout Tags If you used the row column tag naming convention as described in Set Up a Layout with Columns on page 217 only the tags for the text objects in the first row are displayed CG automatically selects tags for the other tagged text objects 5 Click the Choose button for the first data tag A new dialog opens 6 In the new dialog select Local Files Browsing if you want to select a text file on your local computer or select HTTP FTP Files Browsing if you want to select a text file from a server using HTTP or FTP 7 Click OK 8 Ifyou selected HTTP FTP Files Browsing the Internet File Browser dialog opens Complete the following steps a Enter the address of the HTTP or FTP site in the Current Path field the path must start with HTTP
213. a is surrounded by a dotted line Paint offers numerous Selection tools that allow you to select areas of the image Selection Channel Paint The Selection channel is only available when you have made a selection in Paint using the Selection tools and shows you an 8 bit image of the selection Selection Contents Paint An export option that exports the contents of the current selection channel as a bitmap image Sequencer TitleOne module that manages the playlist assigns transitions and applies output controls Sequencer Playlist Sequencer The main workspace in Sequencer that contains the events for the current project You can arrange the event output order view output details and apply output controls Set Folio Media Store A temporary location for holding media files from the most recent Media Store database search Shadow Element CG A color or pattern offset from the face and edge elements by a specific number of pixels Used to add depth to flat 2D objects The shadow element always appears behind all other object elements Sharpen Filter CG Paint and Frame Grab An image filter that mildly sharpens the image with a 3x3 convolution filter Sheen Element CG A band of color that cuts through another element like a focused highlight Shot Box Palette Media Store and Sequencer Selects an event in the playlist when operating in Play mode You can assign the event to
214. a window In each mode the Media Store toolbar provides access to distinct folios For example in database mode there is a folio of all the media files in the current Media Store database Global folio and there are collection folios to which you can assign database files such as files that have the same source or subject To display the media files of a folio in the Media window click the corresponding button on the Media Store toolbar The Browse button on the toolbar allows you to switch between browse mode and database mode If the Browse button is selected the browse mode toolbar displays and the Media window displays browsed media files Global Browse Button Browse Set Button Recent Browse List GS BL Sen EE Files Animations v Build Browse Figure 7 4 Browse Mode Toolbar Note Ifyou use the navigation pane to browse the files in a folder Media Store switches to browse mode For more information see Browse Media Files on page 385 378 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide Use the toolbar to select the media files displayed in the Media window Table 7 2 Browse Mode Toolbar Button List Global Browse button See Figure 7 4 on page 378 Browse Set button See Figure 7 4 on page 378 BI button Scan button Recent Browse list See Figure 7 4 on page 378 Build button Browse button Function Displays all the media you have browsed using the navigation pane Display
215. age 428 e Take media files to video For more information see Take Media Files Using the Shot Box Palette on page 428 Playlist The playlist contains thumbnails of all the events in the current playlist Using the playlist you can quickly add move copy or replace events Every module contains the playlist For more information see Create a Playlist on page 312 and Edit Playlist Options on page 313 In Media Store you can quickly add media files to layouts and then take 384 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide Browse Media Files them to video See Add Media Files to the Playlist on page 425 Scrapbook The Scrapbook can temporarily store layouts images logos and other media items for transfer between modules When you exit TitleOne the Scrapbook is emptied For more information see How Do Use the Scrapbook on page IS Program Preview Palette The Program Preview palette allows you to view the contents of the Program Channels and Preview Channel For more information see How Do I Use the Program Preview Palette on page 13 To browse folders on local removable or network drives use the navigation pane to the left of the Media window In the navigation pane navigate to the folder to browse 2 To view thumbnails of the files in the folder select the folder Media Store displays only the files of the selected folder in the Media window When you display the contents of a f
216. ail of the first event in each group Expand Sequence Display Shows all events and group headers in the current playlist The playlist displays a thumbnail of all the events in the Sequencer playlist Sequencer Attributes Tabs The Sequencer Attributes tabs include the Event Editor Run Effect Settings Audio Mask Renderer and Animation tabs Table 5 2 Sequencer Attributes Tabs Tab Event Editor Run Effect Settings Audio Mask Renderer Animation Description Sets the event name transition in and out points duration board assignment render location and group tri ESEE Outputs the events in the playlist and monitors output activity You must be online to access the Run tab Press CTRL SHIFT 0 to switch to online mode Sets output display options for rolls and crawls including speed timing borders and margins You can also use the Effect Settings tab to select an export option for animation events The animation export option determines how the layout objects are grouped in the Animation Editor Applies an audio file to the selected event Selects an alpha mask to display over the selected event Sets the selected animation event to display in real time when you select the Hardware Acceleration option Sets an animation file to play as a transition with the selected event Chapter 5 Sequencer 309 TitleOne User Guide 310 TitleOne User Guide Scrapbook The Scrapbook is
217. ail previews occcocccccccccccccocncono 375 titles See titles Media Store view transparency cooccccoccnccnncncnncnnnnannnnns 423 Media LEE iii 177 180 add Active Texture treatments 164 178 add clip objects ccoocccocnoc 148 178 add image to face ccooocccccoccnccccncnnoconos 162 add logo objects ooccccccccccccccncnn 138 178 insert media into text objects 109 179 Update el e use 209 media numbers ranernnrnnanrnnnnnvanennnnnnanennn 376 Media range EE 180 Media Store estad or 373 432 OVEMEN ss 374 387 SWIC Ge EE acia 374 See also media files Media Store Media Store button 374 Media Store databases 380 388 405 add browsed files n nnn0nnnnnnennnennnni 389 add files from other applications 392 add files from other modules 00 392 add files in Build set to database 400 add files to existing database 388 add files using Build dialog 390 add frame grabs ooccccoccncccoccnnoconcnnononos 391 add layout RapidFire oooccccoococ 68 Dd nnn 400 Build Media Store dialog 383 391 400 Build set 379 380 383 388 392 check referenced files 422 collection folios occccocccococnccoonno 402 compress IMAGES E 399 Create arrarrnnrrarrarrnnrranrnnrnnnnnnnner 388 401 database mode rrrannnnnnnna
218. ails Input Output ixer i Audio Test Pattern Configure Reference In Mixer Reference In Settings Synchronize with Choose a reference sequence for synchronization should a reference signal fail SDI Input 1 GC Input gt Tri Level Ref In gt Free Run Reference In gt Input gt Free Run Osp Input 2 O Input gt Free Run Reference In gt Free Run Tri Level Reference In O Input gt Bi Level Ref In gt Free Run O Bi Level Reference In O Free Run After loss of reference when signal is restored Maintain the Fallback as reference Revert back to the original signal Mixer Settings Downstream Keying Set the mixer for O Live input Output Fill channel is known as one of the Following Om Koret Shaped Premultiplied Additive Downstream Mixer ix over live inpul O Graphi i O Unshaped Non Premultiplied Multiplicative Downstream Mixer raphics only y LL gt lt Figure 1 23 Reference In Mixer Configuration Options In the Reference In Settings section select the genlock source in your environment SDI Input I SDI Input 2 Tri Level Bi Level or Free Run Note SDI Input I refers to the fill input marked SDI IN on the back of the system SDI Input 2 refers to the key input marked SDI KEY IN on the back of the system 4 Select one of the following options in the Reference In Settings section to set the reference sequence for synchronization if a reference sequence fails For exampl
219. al 4 Type in a name for your configuration in the Save Configuration As field 7 8 Inscriber XD 200 Control Panel Use the Inscriber XD 200 control panel to configure your video card Detected Yideo Cards This list contains all video cards detected and displays their status Select card in table below to work with its settings Card Card Model Serial Number Input 1 Input 2 Refln Timecode Bypass RefIn Sync Inscriber XD 2004014290 Ga Dun Gna Gua ok 501 Input 1 2 lmseriber xD 200 3876042 Gua Gua Gua Gua ox pes pn Swap Cards Swapping cards will Force changes to be applied Refresh List Yideo Card Details Card Model Inscriber XD 200 Card Number 4014290 FPGA Version 8401 Saved Configuration General Details Input Output Reference In Mixer Saved Configuration Work with an existing configuration through the drop down menu or create a new configuration by specifying a configuration name and pressing save Save Configuration As Default Current Configuration Default vw Note Be sure to save the configuration as switching configurations will automatically overwrite the changes Note Saving the current configuration will apply the changes to the cards or lt G Figure 1 21 Save a Configuration Click Save beside the Save Configuration As field to save the current configuration To open a saved configuration click the Saved Configuration button Select a configura
220. allows you to preview and take single events You can also use the palette to monitor your output During playback of a running playlist the Preview palette displays an image of the next layout and the Program palette displays an image of the current layout on the program channel Progressive Scan A system of video scanning where a complete frame is drawn from left to right and top to bottom in one pass This method reduces the flicker of the picture on the television or monitor and results in smoother motion on the screen Compare to Interlaced Scan PRV Button The Program Preview palette button that when selected sets automatic online updates for the Preview channel Push Pins Animation Buttons on the Time tab that when depressed force a path to remain on screen until the entire animation is complete Q Quick Preview A preview of a take made while TitleOne is offline Quick Take A take made while TitleOne is offline Glossary 573 TitleOne User Guide 574 R Radial Blur Filter Paint A distortion filter that blurs an image around a center point RapidFire Tool for quickly loading updating taking and clearing layouts The RapidFire Keyboard option provides a custom keyboard that has additional macro keys designed for fast accurate layout updates in a live environment Raster Image See Bitmap Red Channel Paint The channel that stores all of the red information in the ima
221. ally trigger each event using an external GPI button press You can use two types of GPI triggers e A trigger connected to the GPI O port on your system e A trigger connected to a COM port Set Up a GPI O Trigger To set up a GPI O trigger you need to connect the GPI device to the GPI O port on the back of your system Note The GPI O is enabled during the installation of the TitleOne application by default If the GPI O is not currently enabled on your system you must uninstall TitleOne and then reinstall the software with the U210 option selected Hardware configuration O Please indicate your hardware configuration 4 Program output Video Format XD 200 Y NTSC vi Preview output GPI Trigger No preview device v U2I0 Y Audio setting XD200 Paddle Board v Figure 5 19 U2IO Selected to Enable GPIO Trigger To set up a GPI O trigger connect your device to the GPI O port on the back of your system GPIO gt AERA z ZN e Figure 5 20 GPI O Connection Review the following illustration for the proper pinouts 0000000000 8000000000 2000000001 Pins 1 9 Pins 10 18 Pins 19 26 1 GPI 1 10 GPI 6 19 GPI 10 2 GPI 2 11 GPI 7 20 GPI 11 3 GPI 3 12 GPO 4 21 GPO 9 4 GPI 4 13 G
222. ame on one or both axes Drag the nise keyf d kew the keyf he Y axis D W ei eylrame up or down to skew the eylrame on the Y axis rag Pim left or right to skew the keyframe on the X axis Skew x 0 00 The following table shows the result of applying the skew tool S SS in various ways to a particular axis Table 4 37 Skew Results Axis Affects keyframe X axis Top skews left and bottom skews right X axis right Top skews right and bottom skews left Y axis Right skews upward and left skews downward Y axis Right skews downward and left skews upward Scale resizes an object relative to its original size The values A in the X and Y axis fields are directly related to the amount by dt which object dimensions are increased or decreased For example a value of 0 5 in the X axis and 1 5 in the Y axis will pg 1 r make the object half the original length and one and a half KR times the original width Select the Lock button to modify the X and Y axis values together maintaining the aspect ratio as you scale Clear the Lock button to scale the X and Y axis individually You can only modify the X and Y axis individually by entering a number value dragging the object maintains the original aspect ratio e Drag right or down to increase the keyframe size e Drag left or up to decrease the keyframe size Motion Filters Filters are special effects that you can apply to a keyframe to change the way an object looks over
223. ames between all of the keyframes containing your 3D effect information Render Animation Rendering is the final step in creating an animation but you can render an animation at any point Rendering calculates all placement shape filter time and spline information for every frame in the animation and produces a via file containing the information There are several settings that can affect how the animation is rendered as well as several ways of starting the render Include Paths inthe By default all paths are included in the render You can omit paths from the Render render using the Render Path option This option is useful when you want to render for testing purposes but previewing the animation on the computer screen does not provide enough information You may only want to render the path you are working on The Render Path checkbox is located on the Time tab Each path in the animation has its own Render Path checkbox Click the Render Path checkbox beside the path you want to omit from the render When the checkbox is cleared the path is not included in the render when the checkbox contains an X the path is included in the render Placement Shape Include in render x d S il Exclude from render St gt gt Figure 4 125 Render Path Option Note Keyframes located outside the FX workspace are not included in the render This reduces render time and the amount of RAM consumed but still pro
224. amount of time elapsed for the running playlist the amount of the time left to complete playback and the amount of free RAM currently available Chapter 2 Output 53 TitleOne User Guide 54 Navigate Dialog For Quick event selection and playback use the Navigate dialog The Navigate dialog is available in any TitleOne tool and greatly improves your ability to respond to demanding on air situations Output with the Navigate Dialog Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide To output an event using the Navigate dialog complete the following steps To open the Navigate option press CTRL SHIFT or Playlist gt Navigate If you do not have the Show filename in Job Strip option selected in the Preferences dialog File gt Preferences a message displays Click Yes to enable the option You currently have the Show Filename in Job Strip option off The navigate dialog requires this to be on see Preferences gt General Custom Settings Turn the option on now Figure 2 8 Show Filename Message 2 Inthe Navigate dialog select an event by entering the event number in the dialog Cancel Enter event number Figure 2 9 Event Number in Navigate Dialog 3 Use the keyboard to select output and delete events in the playlist See the following table for details Table 2 3 Navigate Dialog Options Task Shortcut Key Go to event e keyboard ENTER Take event e number pad ENTER De
225. an image using the Move Scale Skew Freeform and Rotate tools Transition Sequencer and Media Store Determines how still events appear on screen When you output the event the event displays gradually using the selected transition Transition types include wipe tile organic dissolve and push See also Animation Transition Transition Direction Sequencer and Media Store The direction a new media file takes as it starts to appear on screen Applies only to wipe tile and push transitions Transparency CG and Paint The amount of background information that you can see through a graphic object text or image An object with 0 transparency is opaque an object with 100 transparency is fully transparent Transparency Filter Animation A motion filter that changes the alpha value of an object over time allowing you to fade an object in or out between keyframes Treatment CG Each object element is assigned a treatment Treatments dictate the color image and Active Texture choices available to the elements they are assigned to Tri Level Sync An HDTV synchronization signal Trigger Type Sequencer Controls how you output your playlist once you go online The trigger type applies to all the events in a group The five trigger types include Manual Timed GPI Time Code and PC Clock Trim Points See Mark In and Mark Out Points Twist Animation A tool on the Shape tab t
226. an specify the image size in pixels and the background color and opacity When you create a new image Paint creates a blank canvas showing 100 alpha Because there are no color tools you must either use the Alpha Subtract tool to add opacity or use the Edit menu to copy another image onto your canvas New Image Image 5ize width 720 Height 466 Background Options O Black CO white 8 Color i Opacity lo OK Cancel Figure 8 7 New Image Dialog Box Import or Open a File To open an existing file or image select File gt Import Export To open a playlist click on the Open button on the toolbar This option only opens a job file in the playlist it does not open image files Import Options When you want to work with an existing image you can transfer it into Paint through the Scrapbook or import it into the Paint workspace using File gt Import Export The following table describes all the import options available in Paint Table 8 3 Import Options Options Import Paint Document Import Image Import Photoshop File Import Image Sized to Fit Layer Import Image as Transformation Import Selection Import Texture Import Color Chips Import Color Chips Append Description Imports a Paint ipt file Imports any bitmap file Imports a Photoshop psd file Imports a bitmap file sized to fit the current canvas size Imports a bitmap file as a transf
227. anager window The Registry Manager opens The left and right sides of the Registry Manager allow you to open two different registry files simultaneously The current registry s templates are automatically loaded into the left side of the window To view a preview of a template click a template in one of the lists It is displayed in a thumbnail at the bottom of the screen Create a New Registry File Select File gt New to create a new blank registry file A templates file is created in the folder you specify and the registry is automatically loaded into the right side of the Registry Manager Open a Registry File You can open a registry file into either the left side or the right side of the Registry Manager window Click the Open button above the list you want to use and navigate to the templates file The file s templates are loaded into the list The drop down list at the top of the list stores the recent registry files for easy access Copy Templates Between Registries You can copy templates from either the left or right lists using the Copy Left and Copy Right button Make sure you have both the source and the target lists opened in the left and right sides of the Registry Manager window 2 From the source list select the templates you want to copy Hold the SHIFT key while clicking to select multiple consecutive templates in the list and hold the CTRL key while clicking to select multiple non consecutive templates
228. and midtones of an image Lightness An element of the HLS color model Lightness determines the brightness or darkness of a color A lightness value of 0 is black a value of 100 is white For maximum saturation lightness must be set to 50 Linked Events Events that are taken to air simultaneously Live Video Sequencer When used with the DVE option you can size and position the live video output See also DVE Live Video Button Frame Grab Switches to the online monitor to view the video signal Local Disk Render Sequencer Renders the event as a file on your local hard drive Image display latency depends on local drive access speed and image size Local Folios Media Store Collection folios associated with an individual Windows user and which cannot be accessed by other users G Scribe checks your Windows logon name to determine which local folios to display in Media Store Contrast with System Folios Local System Toggle Button Media Store Cycles between Local collection folios that are private to each user and System collection folios that can be accessed by all network users Glossary 567 TitleOne User Guide 568 Locked Path Animation A Time tab option that locks a spline path in place and prevents you from editing or moving its position or the position of individual keyframes in the path Log Event Sequencer and Media Store Options from the Playlist menu
229. and position live video input Once you have created your DVE template switch to Sequencer and select it from the drop down list in the Templates tab to preview the DVE Open the DVE To open the DVE Switcher utility select Start gt Programs gt Harris gt G7 Switcher Utility Utilities gt Switcher App Y DVE Switcher File Edit View Window Help DVE Information Current Effect DVE vw Source amp Duration SDI Graphic SDI Graphic Source mm en T Key mim Duration 6 sec Left Width Top Heig 0 EC JEBE 3 v v New Effect New DVE Edit DVE Delete DVE Effect Name Device Source test DVE_2D_1 SDI 2 test2 DVE 3D SDI 1 Y Save DVE Effect A Save changes made to this DVE effect Figure 9 1 DVE Switcher Utility 546 Appendix A DVE Switcher TitleOne User Guide Create a DVE Template Set the DVE Dimensions Set the DVE Source Duration and Z Order To create a custom DVE complete the following steps Click the New Effect button The Add New Configuration dialog opens 2 Enter a descriptive name for the new DVE in the Configuration Name field For example 3D Over SD I Y Add New Configuration bd Figure 9 2 Add New Configuration Dialog 3 Select the new effect from the Effect Name list and click the New DVE button The Add New DVE dialog opens 4 Select 2D DVE I 2D DVE 2 or 3D DVE from DVE Device drop down list Note 3D DVE is only available if
230. ange their layer See Layer Objects on page 192 to learn about layering your objects To stop an object from combining its edges select it and move it up or down a layer The object moves ahead or behind the other objects separating its edges The depth element extends away from an object at an angle giving it the appearance of thickness and depth The depth element can have a sheen applied to it Use the controls on the Attributes palette s Depth tab to change the depth properties of selected objects I Set the total distance of the depth element using the Depth control Chapter 3 CG 153 TitleOne User Guide The Shadow Element 154 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 2 Choose to place the depth inside or outside of the object s outer edges e Click the Inside button to position the depth element inside any outer edges defined for the object The edges surround the depth element e Click the Outside button to position the depth element outside the edges of your object The depth extends outwards from the object edges 3 Select a treatment from the Treatment drop down list The treatment determines the color image and active texture choices available for the depth See Element Treatments on page 157 to learn how to use treatments Create a sheen for the object s depth using the Sheen tab inside the Depth tab See Sheen Elements on page 155 to learn about sheens Figure 3 28 Add Depth to Text Objects and
231. animation Select Go gt Render Animation 2 Press ENTER on the number keypad to take the animation to the program channel Switch to Sequencer and select the animation in the Event List Click the Online toggle button to set TitleOne to online mode Open the Run tab in the Attributes Palette Click the Run Job button to initiate the series of takes I UU BR U Export and Import Files Export and Import options for Animation Editor include importing and exporting templates for the template registry importing FX Scripts for use in other Inscriber products such as RTX exporting the current frame as a still exporting a series of still frames exporting FX scripts and exporting the entire animation The export and import options are located on the File gt Import Export menu Import and Export Templates Open an Existing Animation Export an Animation Export and Import an FX Script Import and Export template buttons are located with the template management buttons on the Templates tab Templates are saved in ifx format at the time they are exported Once imported into the template registry you can update rename and delete templates See Motion Template Registry on page 279 for details Animations are saved in via format at the time of render You cannot add a rendered file to an existing animation in Animation Editor but you can open the rendered file in a new slot in the playlist Switch to CG click an empty sl
232. annrnnnnen 549 CEO ANG cesiones 547 549 Crop DVE arne 548 delete DVE resonantes 549 set DVE dimensions 547 set DVE duration egen 547 set DVE position 548 Set DVE TOl tlon run ide 548 SGD VE SIZE st acc 548 SEL DVE SOUCO Ad 547 set DVE Z order rarrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennn 547 templates Media Store rrrrrrrrnnrrerrnnrre 377 LGG Pane ME 40 text Animation SCA Leser 260 transition settings ooocccconcncconcnnnnncnnnns 259 treat as individual characters 259 text CG NN RR 117 EE EE soror r e 114 DOIG ar 115 Character Map ccccocccccccnccccnccccnnnnnnnos 109 CONS WANING israel dos 120 dOUDIE DVIS r 112 TOMS c EE 114 Halle Sc eed teres ee 115 KENING Varro 118 Elo go RT EE EEE 118 Orient rrrnanonnnnnnnnrnnanennnnnvanennnnnnnnrnnanennn 113 R I Tele 107 OE EE 112 right to left processing ccoooccccccccccncon 119 Select r mmnrrrrunnrvnnnrnrrnenesennene 106 182 183 SMAL CAPS vasse eek 116 Ss ee eeler 126 SVGS He 173 unconstrained rrrrarrrnnrnnnnnvnnrnnnnennnnne 107 Blat Un CC 115 A a A 112 NOT MED sorrera nioa 120 See also fonts styles text objects text Paint add surface texture r rmrerarerrrerrrrrverne 489 apply seamless texture rrarrrrrrrrarernn 488 text file databases rrrrrnnrrnnrrrnrernrerurernren 213 add to system list rrrnnnrrnrnnrrrnnrrnnnnrr 215 column headers sosser 216 COMA Scene sodio colocas 220 GENET
233. apidFire Keyboard on page 532 Chapter 2 Output 71 TitleOne User Guide 72 Set Default The default template loads when you clear the Scratch vii layout Template Open the InsertText dialog using one of the following methods e Press SHIFT AUTO TEXT using the RapidFire keyboard e Click Contig in the RapidFire dialog InsertText Default Layout Load From Working Directory Working Directory C TemplateLayouts Browse Auto Text Strings Figure 2 19 InsertText Dialog 2 In the Default Layout field enter the number of the default template 3 Click OK Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide Overlay Overlay enables real time layering of CG objects independent of content displayed in CG or the playlist Overlay allows clocks timers crawl tickers station IDs and logos to display on one of three independent output layers You can control the display of objects manually in Overlay while any other event sequence is running Use Overlay The Overlay application controls the output and display of clocks logos and other layouts independent of other event sequences running in TitleOne The following steps outline the basic Overlay workflow Create your clock crawl logo or other layout in CG 2 Export the layout as a scribe file File gt Export gt Export SCRIBE File 3 Open Overlay Tools gt Overlay 4 Click the line beside the I button 5 Click the Setup button File Edit Actions Help Previe
234. ary grab the media box containing the media and drag it to the text object 4 Drop the media in the object The media appears at the beginning of the first line of text with the blinking text cursor after it See Insert Media into Text Objects on page 108 to learn how to move and duplicate media within text objects Add Media to the Background To add media to the background of a layout select the media you want to apply and click the Apply to Background button at the bottom of the Media Library Menu Apply to background See Layout Backgrounds on page 199 to learn more about layout backgrounds Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 179 180 Media Range Delete Media Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide By default the Media Library displays only the media for the current layout Within the Media Library select Menu gt View All Media to display the media for all the layouts in the playlist Select Menu gt View Selected Layout s Media to return to the default setting To delete unwanted media right click it in the Media Library and select Delete Media from Library The media is removed Manage Objects CG provides many ways of selecting arranging and organizing the objects in your layouts Objects are selected with the mouse or with the keyboard and they can be easily moved aligned and distributed They can also be grouped in order to maintain their position Use the Layer buttons in the C
235. as many lines of text on each page of subtitles as you require Use a blank line to separate the subtitle pages CG starts a new layout in the playlist whenever it encounters a blank line The following example sets up three pages of subtitles The first page will have one line of text while the second and third will have two lines of text Richards comments on her Italian travels Every trip is a memorable one Of course you can t have all the comforts when you re on the road but the fans are so enthusiastic And that means a lot when you re far away from home Chapter 3 CG 241 TitleOne User Guide 242 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide When CG imports the text it begins to fill the layout from the bottom up so single line subtitles are placed on the bottom line of the layout As an alternative to dividing the text into lines you can enter each page of subtitles into one long line of text Use the Lock the Object Width and Enable Word Wrapping text object properties to break each page into text lines You still need to signal new layout pages with blank lines in your text file Timecoded Text Files You can import text files that contain both subtitles and timecodes These files are the same as subtitle only files except that each subtitle page is separated by in and out time codes The following example shows three pages of subtitles Richards comments on her Italian travels lt 00 37 27 02 gt lt 00 37 30 14 gt
236. as lines CO Treat text as individual characters Maintain grouped objects as a single object Figure 4 84 Animation Transition Settings Export as a Single Grouped Object This option groups every item in the layout into a single object Chapter 4 Animation 259 TitleOne User Manual 260 Work with Text Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Send as Individual Objects This option puts every graphic object and text line on a separate path With this option you can either treat the text as lines or as individual characters By selecting to treat text as individual characters you can animate each character separately If you have text or objects in a layout and you do not select an option the Treat text as lines default setting is applied When you create your layout you need to plan how text and objects work together in your animation For items that will remain static it s good practice to set them to Export as a single grouped object in the Transition Settings dialog Or you might want to fly the characters in one word separately and have all remaining words fly whole In this case you need to Treat text as individual characters for the one word and then Treat text as lines for the remaining words If you want to display large characters in Animation Editor it is best to start out with large characters in CG Editor While you can increase character size in Animation Editor using the Scale tool scal
237. ase vertical image softness These filters generally do not increase visual steps in the image Adaptive Field 1 Modifies the luminance values for each pixel on even numbered scan lines based on the luminance values for the pixels directly above and below The odd numbered scan lines remain unchanged Adaptive Field 2 Modifies the luminance values for each pixel on odd numbered scan lines based on the luminance values for the pixels directly above and below The even numbered scan lines remain unchanged The Adaptive Field filters remove inter field jitter without increasing vertical image softness These filters generally do not increase visual steps in the image The Adaptive Field filters are recommended for general frame grab clean up Average Field 1 Computes new data for even numbered scan lines by averaging each one with the line directly above Average Field 2 Computes new data for odd numbered scan lines by averaging each one with the line directly above The Average Field filters average the two fields to remove flicker In averaging the fields these filters tend to blur motion and slightly soften the image vertically Horizontal Flip Flips the image left to right Vertical Flip Flips the image top to bottom Blur Filter Mildly blurs the image with a 3x3 convolution filter Sharpen Filter Mildly sharpens the image with a 3x3 convolution filter Video Legalize Checks the image for color values tha
238. ased on CG layouts Create a layout in CG Editor then switch to Animation Editor to set up motion paths The Animation Editor interface has the following components e FX Workspace e Preview Toolbar e Attributes Tabs e FX Palette e Right click Menu e Preview Program Palette Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Playlist FX workspace FX palette PX File Ect Go Playlist Tools Help a DA Tools lt Actions A dl Views GE K ve DEE Resetarmiation Onscreen Pre f O n ke S cre e n preview db we BS EX Gel Program bb CLR Path 1 EI Placement Shape Filter 3D Effects Spline Time Templates lt lt Be EII Frame 0001 2 IC ee HARRIS pause 0000 ME a Scrapbook EN Jan 1 480 480 9 ien 5 47 295 a Ready NUM Preview Program palette Attributes palette Preview toolbar Figure 4 75 Animation Editor Interface Chapter 4 Animation 249 TitleOne User Manual 250 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual FX Workspace The FX Workspace is the work area where you can set up motion paths based on the text and objects created in CG Editor This workspace can display every motion path in an animation at once so it s easy to set up parallel keyframe positions and timing The special drag and drop functionality of Animation Editor lets you position objects anywhere on screen using only the mouse am HK 9 i b Br Figure 4 7
239. ast transmission and reception Common standards include NTSC PAL and HDTV Video Transparent Pattern The pattern TitleOne uses to represent video transparency set on the General Preferences tab This pattern is not included in your final rendered images VII Compression Media Store An image compression method especially suited to computer generated images VII compression can give over 20 1 compression and is the fastest method available in Media Store See also Compression VMAXX 10 A brand of frame buffer VMAXX 20 A brand of frame buffer VMAXX 30 A brand of frame buffer VRAM Video RAM on a frame buffer or video card W Z White Point A setting for the output monitor set during calibration Widescreen The term given to picture displays that have a wider aspect ratio than a standard television monitor For example the aspect ratio for a standard television is 4 3 and widescreen is 16 9 See also Aspect Ratio Wildcard Media Store A variable used as search criterion to help you find a range of media files matches a single character matches one or more characters XD 200 Control Panel Configures standard definition and high definition SDI inputs and outputs and reference source The XD 200 Control Panel displays the status associated with different configurations and allows you to view a test pattern to ensure your configuration is working properly X axis
240. ate to and select your animation file 5 Click Open Event Editor Effect Settings Audio Mask Renderer Animation File Mame D hweathertshort via Browse Offset 10 a T m E ET us a pr fe ro E Figure 5 13 Animation Transition Options 6 To delay the animation transition from the start of the event enter the number of seconds in the Offset field During output the animation plays as the transition for the selected event Global transitions allow you to save a set of four transitions as one file and apply the transitions to different events You can apply the transitions to events in any playlist Create a Global Transition File To create a global transition file you need to save the first transition as a trn file After the initial transition is saved you can easily define the three remaining transitions that are automatically saved with the file Select the event in the Sequencer playlist with the transition you want to save 2 Right click on the event and select Set Event As Default Transition gt Transition from the right click menu 3 In the Save dialog save the transition The transition is saved as a Im file After the first transition is saved any transitions set for Transition 2 Transition 3 or Transition 4 are automatically saved with this file 4 Right click on another event with a transition you want to save as Transition 2 Chapter 5 Sequencer 5
241. ate to the directory Click OK 64 Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide Example Workflow 4 Ensure that the Load From Working Directory checkbox is selected Otherwise you cannot read and write layout files in the working directory Click OK The following sections describe a typical workflow using RapidFire Create a New Playlist Using Registry Templates Using the number pad enter the number of the registry item to retrieve for example 101 RapidFire opens automatically If RapidFire does not open ensure that it is enabled on the Tools menu Tools gt RapidFire Press F2 to load the layout from the registry A Scratch vii layout is automatically created and placed in the playlist Template 101 is loaded from the registry and copied to the Scratch vii layout Change the layout if required Using the number pad enter a number to use as a name for the layout for example 213 Press the RapidFire RECORD LAYOUT key or FS on the standard keyboard to write the layout The layout in Scratch vii is written to the playlist Send a Layout in the Playlist to Air In this sample scenario a two channel system is configured with two program channels the first is assigned to video board I for previewing and the second is assigned to video board 2 which is the air channel Using the number pad enter the number of the layout in the playlist to retrieve for example 213 Press F4 to read the layout from the pla
242. ations Configure Applications You control the number of application instances to use for each application The application instances correspond to the output channels available in your application For example if you set up three TitleOne application instances in the Strata Utility three output channels are available in the TitleOne application For some applications such as Overlay only one instance is available I In the Applications area select an application in the Applications List to view the allowable application instances Applications Application Instances Applications List Application Layers G Scribe G Scribe 1 G Sorbe 2 E Serbe 3 G Scribe 4 Add to List Figure 2 32 Available Application Instances 2 For each application instance to use select the instance in the Application Instances area from the Application Layers list and then click the Add to List button 3 Two Channel Systems Only In the Applications List area for each application instance in the Application Layer list select a board to designate the output board On a later screen you will assign the application instances to layers on the video board Note Do not assign application instances to a video board designated for previewing Applications List 3 Scrnbe 1 Board 1 R ha Figure 2 33 Designate Video Board for Application Instances 4 To remove an application instance select it in the Applications List are
243. ay list or job strip and in the Event List in Sequencer Job Creator CG Creates a multi layout playlist using a formatted text file to load and fill existing templates K Key The alpha signal as seen on the video output monitor See also Alpha Keyframe Animation A significant point in an animation that instigates a change in the rotation position or attributes of the current path See also Frame Keyframe Marker Animation Keyframe markers appear as small diamonds on the Track Slider for each path You can change where a keyframe occurs in the path by Glossary TitleOne User Guide clicking on the keyframe marker and dragging to the left or right to change its location Keyword Media Store A descriptive word tagged to a media file used for searching and sorting purposes L Layer CG A level of the CG workspace that allows you overlap text and graphic objects There are 10 main layers with each main layer divided into separate text and graphic planes Text planes always appear on top of their respective graphic planes Paint A level of the Paint workspace that allows you to overlap images Each paint layer is an image layer with its own set of image channels There is no limit to the number of Paint layers allowed Layout CG The overall appearance of an image created in CG consisting of objects which you customize and position Layout Tree View CG Disp
244. ays the database media files in the Media window Note Ensure that the Browse button on the toolbar is not selected If you are browsing files see Browse Media Files on page 385 click the Browse button on the Media Store toolbar so that it is not selected to view database files When you are viewing database files Media Store displays the database mode toolbar See Figure 7 5 on page 380 The buttons on the Media Store toolbar control the folio displayed in the Media window Table 7 8 Database Folios Button Function Global Displays the media files in the current database Set Displays search results from your last database search FI FI2 Collection folios that you can use to organize files To add media to these folios drag thumbnails from the media window to a collection folio button For more information see Collection Folios on page 402 Local System Switches the collection folio buttons FI FI2 between the Local collection folios and the System collection folios For more information see Collection Folios on page 402 For more information on database mode see Media Store Toolbar and Modes on page 378 Chapter 7 Media Store 401 TitleOne User Guide 402 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide Collection Folios You can group media files displayed by the Global button Global folio or the Set button Set folio into collection folios The Set folio contains your most recent search resu
245. b module This means that the output on the channel is not disrupted until you click the Live button For convenience you can set up your system to automatically initialize the board to Live when you switch to Frame Grab Change the FrameGrablnitLive value in Inscribe ini to I instead of the default value of 0 Configuration FrameGrablnitLive 1 Once you have grabbed an image in Frame Grab there are four ways to save it e Save a grabbed image to a file e Grab an image and directly save it to disk e Copy the grabbed image to the Clipboard for use with other applications e Add the grabbed image to the Scrapbook Save a Grab to a File You can save a frame grab as a graphics file that you can use in Inscriber programs or graphics applications Click the Save Grab to File button 2 Navigate to the drive and folder in which to save the file 3 Select a file type for the image file You can save the image as a 24 bit bmp file the key information is lost or a 32 bit vii or tga file Most graphics applications can read tga and bmp image files Other Inscriber programs can read vii files 4 Entera filename and click OK Save a Grab Directly to Disk You can capture a frame and directly save it to disk To capture a frame press CTRL G instead of pressing the Grab button The image is saved in the directory specified by the FrameGrabDirectory entry in the Preferences section of the Inscribe ini file
246. bar Macros Hot key Center Object Ctrl F2 Alt Fi Mew Edge Figure 3 69 The Macro Window What Macros Can The buttons you press in the CG toolbars are recorded as well as any Record shortcut keys and right click menu selections Not everything you do in the CG module can be recorded Keep the following restrictions in mind when recording a new macro e Mouse movements in the CG workspace such as selecting objects resizing objects and moving objects are not recorded 226 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Record Macro e Only changes made to objects within the CG module are recorded e Ifyou record a change to an object s treatment options such as its color and transparency you can only apply those changes to other objects that use the same type of treatment When changing treatment options in a macro include a treatment type change in the macro to make sure the object you apply it to uses the same treatment e Changes to edges are specific to the object s edge number If you play them back on an object with fewer edges you may not see the changes e Changes to layout display options such as showing or editing the safe title area are not recorded Click the Record button in the Macro window to start recording a macro The Macro Control Window opens with options for stopping pausing and canceling the recording Macros Stop Recording Pause Recording Figure 3 70 The Macro Control Window
247. beginning of each minute except minutes 0 10 20 30 40 and 50 DVE Digital Video Effect Sequencer An option that sizes and positions live video during output by applying single channel digital video effects to your events On output the live video plays in two locations the DVE window on top of events and full screen in behind the event Apply an opaQue background to the event in CG so you do not see the live video in behind Glossary 559 TitleOne User Guide 560 DVI Digital Visual Interface This is a high bandwidth video connection that carries digitized picture information The DVI port provides a pure digital video signal to a digital flat panel display to ensure the highest quality picture E EAS Emergency Alert System A broadcast warning system that either interrupts normal broadcasting or displays an alert which crawls across the video picture EAS alerts also contain an audible alert message Ease In Out Animation Settings on the Spline tab that determine the speed of a path coming into or out of a keyframe Edge Element CG An element that completely surrounds the face of an object You can add an unlimited number of edges to an object and they can either overlap the face or extend beyond the face Element CG Every object consists of four different elements a face one or more edges a depth and a shadow In most cases the elements can also include a sheen Apply
248. brary collects and organizes the styles in your layout It provides a Quick and easy way to re use styles within CG without needing to recreate them for every object By building a list of commonly used styles you can apply a standardized look to the text and graphic objects in a layout The Style Library also lets you transfer styles between the layouts in your playlist and your styles can be saved and loaded using the Styles Library Manager To access the Style Library switch to the Styles tab of the CG Libraries palette All the styles display according to your current view settings Hold the mouse cursor over a style to view the style s number name and attributes Add a Style to the Once you have set the attributes and treatments of an object add the Library object s style to the Style Library Select the text or graphic object in the layout 2 On the Styles tab of the CG Libraries palette select Menu gt Add Style to Library The Style Name dialog opens 3 Give the style a number and a name 4 Click OK The style is added to the Style Library Mumber 1 Mame Panel Headings Attributes Font Impact Size 31 pt Alignment left Treatment Solid Color Kerning 0 00 Figure 3 41 Add a Style to the Style Library Chapter 3 CG 173 TitleOne User Guide Apply a Style to an Once you have added a style to the Style Library you can apply the style to Object other objects in the layout Se
249. broadcast transmits a signal with a much higher resolution and a wider aspect ratio than standard NTSC analog television signals The HDTV aspect ratio is 16 9 High Quality HQ Processing Creates smoother curves and diagonal lines for Inscriber font characters at large font sizes in CG HKF Compression Media Store compression method that achieves at least 10 1 compression on 16 and 24 bit images HKF is a loss compression method and you may see some distortion upon decompression 32 bit images lose the alpha channel when HKF is used See also Compression HLS Color Model A color model that describes colors in terms of hue lightness and saturation Hue numbers range from 0 to 359 degrees arranged in spectrum order from red through blue to magenta Saturation determines the brightness of the color with a maximum value of 100 Lightness describes how close the color falls to pure black or white White has a lightness number of 100 and black has a lightness value of 0 Horizontal Flip Filter CG Paint and Frame Grab An image filter that flips the image left to right In Paint the horizontal flip filter is accessed on the Transform tab HSV Color Model A color model that describes colors in terms of hue saturation and value Pure colors hues are Glossary 563 TitleOne User Guide measured in degrees from red at 0 degrees through blue to magenta at 359 degrees Decreasing the saturation wit
250. cccccoccocococcncononcnnononnnnononnnnononcnnnnnnrnnonnnens 417 Search Using Previous Search Criteria occccococcncccocnncccononcccononononanononnannnnnnanononnanonnnnaneness 418 Seele UE 418 Display Al SET EE 418 SelectAll Search RESSURS 419 Set and Browse Set FoliOS ecin i 420 USE Media RINGS o gege de eee eee et 422 Check Media Files ei a eee eee a 422 Check Media File Reference occccoccccccccccocnnocccncconnnonannoconononncnnononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnoncnenanos 422 View Media File Transparency ae 423 Ml E EE 423 Add Media Files tone PAIS eee 425 Add Media Files from the Media Window occccocccccccnccoccnccocncconcnococononnnnnnnonoconnnonnnnnnonnnonos 425 Create a Playlist from Search Results A 426 Create Playlist from FOO sic and dende 426 Add Media Files to the Playlist Using the Shot Box Palette aannnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnsennennnereenennne 426 Take Media Files to Video n0nn00nn0nnnnnnannnnnnannnnnnanrnrrsnrrerrnnrrnrenrrvnrrnrrssnrnrrnnernrrnnrrnrrnrronernrennnrnner 427 Set Up Media Files for Single Click Takes ooooccccconcnconoccnconocononnnnncnnonanonoonanononnnnnnnnnonnnnns 428 Take Media Files Using the Shot Box Palette cocooncccccocccncccoconcnnaconononcnnnonanononnanonnnnns 428 Media Store Preferences 00ocococococo es 430 Change ne Thumbnail Tod o o 430 Set the Default Database Media Sort Order A 431 Set the Default Title and Keywords AA 431
251. cccoccconocooo 108 147 177 CIDEK OM SCS Ha 141 144 closed e EE 133 ME MAN esta odiado 134 Odesa ge 147 collapse Sequencer playlist 308 collection folios 380 381 401 402 color CG color models rrararnnrrnarevnnnnranennnnnvanennn 170 create a NEW color 169 logo objects AEN 139 treatment colors 157 See also color palette CG color Paint background rrrennnnennnnnnanenanennnnnn 459 464 e ss so en 505 507 Index TitleOne User Guide CHS EEE 461 COIOl DICKET Lua 449 458 a D 459 TOFEQIOUING atado ae 459 illegal color values ocooocccconcccnccnco no 502 most recently used E 460 remove from RGB channels 496 reset defaults o cccocnnccccocccnncccononnnnos 459 safe video colors rrrrnnrnrnrnnrnvnrnnnnvnnnnn 501 saturation ceso dba 502 EE 459 165 AEA ee 460 unsafe video Color rrrnnnnnrnnnnennnnnennnnn 502 video legal colors 501 color palette CO 169 172 deiault color ici coto 169 color picker CO 171 color picker Paint cccseceeeeeees 449 458 color tint Animation oooccccconcnnccnncnnnnns 296 CONUS aa 217 220 A erate mea 216 combine edges NEEN 152 NVES AE 193 combine multiple animation templates 278 configure AUIGIO SENGS vasse 38 external data source rrarnrnunnnnnner 215 218 GPI COM port trigger ccccocccnconccnco 342 GPIO TAGER narre 340 INPUL
252. ccoccccco 459 form graphic objects rrrrrnnrrrrrnnrrenrnnrr 136 format external data sources cccoocccco 225 four color gradient treatments 160 WEINS 361 372 Index 591 TitleOne User Guide 592 OVE ION seede 362 364 playlist UNCION arias 13 A eege 369 SEET ebe 362 frame grabs add to Media Store rrrnnrrnrrnnnvnvnnnrennnnn 391 add to Scrapbook cccocccccccccconcccconcncnnno 371 Capture ss 362 364 copy to Clipboard oeri 371 COP IMAGES unicas 364 MESEN EA 365 368 ler a 363 EE 370 save to disk durech 371 frame rate rrrrannrrnannrnnnnrnvannnnnnnennannnnnnnnnnnn 27 interlaced output display o 27 progressive scan output display 27 framebuffers multiple boards oocccoccoccnccocnocanncnnos 369 set up for frame grabs rrrrrnrrrrrnnnrernnnn 369 Frames field Sequencer cccoocccccccncccoc 327 G generic color control rrrrnnrrnrnnrrnnnrrnnnnr 458 Global Browse folio 378 379 Global folio 380 401 Global Style Library ooocccccooccnccnoocooo 175 global dee e EE 328 SPINNE He 337 output with GPI trigger o 343 A EE EE 341 select GPI trigger ooocccccoccoccccoconocos 343 set up COM port GPI trigger 342 set up GPI O trigger coooccocccocconocos 340 grab Lg La o 362 series of frames rrrnrrnrannnnnn
253. cconccccccnccncnno 426 ale EE 418 ISU VEN SR 419 most recent EA 420 Ren E 421 EE 419 thumbnail view 419 selecta in 181 184 lee 193 objects with the Layout Tree View 195 XL ici notas 106 108 183 select keyframes AN 264 Selection Channel Paint occccc 467 selection mode cdas 108 184 selection tool MOVE NES mira a 185 select objects tae io nas 181 selections Paint APIa ee ee 470 creation Options eiii 469 OX DORE ee 468 MADO E 468 RGB Channels unica 495 Select tab buttons 470 send object backward rrrnrrnnnnennnnnnanennn 192 send object to back occcoccccccnccccccncnconcnnos 192 SEQUENCE cocccccnccccnncnccncnnonnnnnnncnnnnnonos 306 360 assign triggers coooccccoccnccnocncnncnnnnncnnnnnos 337 output playlist cocccoccccccnccncnno 355 OVEIVICW rrranernnnnnanennnrnvanennnnnnanennnnnnanennn 306 playlist function oooccccocccncoccccnconaconcnnos 12 te Re EE 306 Sequencer playlist Index TitleOne User Guide add space between events 335 collapse a a 308 Group events o oocccocccnonnocnaniooroconacnariannanns 332 loop during Output rronrrnnnernnrnnnnennnnn 349 playlist vs Sequencer playlist 307 prepare for Output rrrrraranrnnnerrannnnnnre 349 select event render location 349 set event duration cccoccccccnconcccncnconcnnos 334 show all items ia 308 Sequencer playlist create
254. ce if the Keystroke information is Alt 0229 hold down the ALT key and type 0229 on the numeric keypad to type that character when you are in the CG module Copy Characters When you double click a character in the Character Map window it is added to the Characters to Copy field Click the Copy button to copy the characters to the clipboard To add the copied characters to a text object position your text cursor within the object in the CG workspace and press CTRL V The characters are copied from the clipboard into the text object Advanced View Check the Advanced View checkbox to view different character sets change the way the characters are grouped and search for characters by name or by Unicode value Text Path Objects Use the Text Path tool to place text along a complex spline path Select the Text Path tool in the Tools palette 2 Click the CG workspace to place the first point of the text El path Figure 3 7 Place the First Point of a Text Path 3 Click the CG workspace to place the rest of your points The spline is drawn in your workspace and a text cursor appears at the end of the spline Hold the SHIFT key while clicking to make your point part of a curve instead of a straight line Figure 3 8 Add Points to a Text Path 4 Edit the spline path s points as necessary e To move one of your points position the Text Path tool or the Chapter 3 CG 111 TitleOne User Guide 112 Vertical Text Object
255. ce Icon CH File Type and Source Image or layout on local drive Image or layout on network drive Image or layout on removable drive Image included in database Video or animation on local drive Video or animation on network drive Video or animation on removable drive To display a larger preview of a media file hover the mouse pointer over the thumbnail label y 1224 blobsblur 1226 ear2 1225 leaf 20x576 24 09 2007 Local Disk a 1227 leat 11231 pebk Figure 7 2 Large Preview of a Media File To disable the display of large previews Select Media Store gt Hold Over Display Editable template thumbnails display a T icon in the top right corner The T indicates that the file is a template layout E 1155 reg1110 Figure 7 3 T Icon Template Layout Chapter 7 Media Store 377 TitleOne User Guide For information on changing the thumbnail display in the Media window see Update Thumbnails on page 406 Navigation Pane In the navigation pane you can browse local removable and network drives for media files When you select a folder in the navigation pane Media Store switches to browse mode and the Media window displays thumbnail previews of the media files in the folder Media Store Toolbar and Modes Using the Media Store toolbar you can control the Media Store mode browse or database and select the folio a group of related media files displayed in the Medi
256. ch vii layout If the Load From Working Directory option is disabled see Set the Working Directory on page 64 loads the Media Store template layout media number specified in the RapidFire text field into the Scratch vii layout Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Clears RapidFire text field FOCUS Changes focus to the objects on the workspace Chapter 9 Resources RT Xports Code Sample If you purchased the RT Sports option for TitleOne you play custom or third party RTX applications on your Inscriber system For more information on RT Xports see Port Objects on page 145 The following Visual Basic code demonstrates how to create an RT Xports application This application generates a continuous crawl Each loop contains a text layer that is updated each loop and an animation You can use a continuous crawl to display live feed data for example financial ticker or school closings information Force all variables to be declared Option Explicit Initialize the RTXLib by declaring the RTX object for the project Dim myRTX As New RtxLib Rtx Declare an RTXContext variable Dim GlobCon As RtxLib RTXContext Declare a ContinuousCrawl variable with events Dim WithEvents contCrawl As RtxLib ContinuousCrawl Declare a FrameBuffer variable Dim crawlFB As RtxLib FrameBuffer Declare an RTXContext variable Dim crawlCon As RtxLib RTXContext Declare Layer Animation and FrameBuffer variables
257. clips you can set the trim in and trim out times and loop the clip The Duration field displays the clip duration a In the Mark In field enter a new in point for the clip b In the Mark Out field enter a new out point for the clip c To loop the clip select the Loop checkbox 8 On the Media Store palette click the Update Image Info button The Scissors icon displays in the bottom right corner of the media file thumbnail to indicate that a transition has been set for the file E 1036 worldmap Figure 7 30 Scissors Icon The transition information is included with the media file each time you add it to the playlist To adjust the transition use the Sequencer module For 424 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide Add Media Files to the Playlist more information see Apply Transitions on page 325 There are many methods that add media files to the playlist e Drag a media file from the Media window to the playlist e In the Search dialog click the Build Job button to create a playlist using the results of a search e Drag a folio from the toolbar to create a playlist using the media files in a folio e Use the Shot Box palette to quickly add one or more media files to the playlist Add Media Files from the Media Window To add a media file to the playlist drag the media file from the Media window to the playlist Using the buttons on the toolbar display the media to add in the Media window For exam
258. cnconcnnononcnnononnnnononnnnononnnnonanenss 241 lena EE d EE 242 EBU SINE PIES e a 242 Design a Layout Templates ermitas 243 Mporta SUE FE 1 243 Set the Timing Values a Gaddi 245 Ven 1 Le EE 245 ANIMATION TE EN EE EE 247 Introduction to Animation Editor 0 000 n enn 248 Witch 10 Animation EMOL sepultar ais 248 O o e E 248 FN 250 Preview TON NNN 250 ARTILES PANG NNN 251 FSP RR 252 FX Palete 100 SANN 253 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide ROE ME erre 254 Progran Preview Palettes EE 254 Animation Concepts cuisine As aa 255 teen ANA DL AAA EV o O O TS 255 Understand SPINNE PEN Lavard ester 256 me ES 256 Stein RR Be DD 4 257 JENA TOON PS 258 Appi TOOL vg AE 258 AnIMAUON RE d Late EE 259 Transition Settings ae eee 259 Export as a Single Grouped Object occoocccccccnnncoconnnccconnnconanoncnnononnnononnncnnonnnonannnnonannnnonanens 259 Send as NAME NES 1 260 Nok MN TOT suser eres 260 KOVMAMES AEE TERS 261 aa AAA o A ee Ee T 261 IMIS Cr Ko r me Deals DA 262 SOCKS ne 263 Delete RETAMA ine 263 Cut Copy and Paste Keyframes occccocccccocccccccncconcnononononnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenanens 263 MOVE KE ane aa ci a tt ina 264 Select he Position TOOL Kasserer 264 Selectie Key rame o dol TT e e 264 Dr g and ProP Gelee WEE 265 FADS OIUNC POSITIONING eer ee e 265 Determine the Keyframe Order nnnannnnnnnnnnenneosnnnnsnrnrsrnnrornrrrsnrrrssnrersrnrrrrnrrsnrersnrers
259. criber vii file Open the Preferences dialog File gt Preferences On the Project tab select the Write Scrapbook Items to Disk option Click OK to apply the setting and close the Preferences dialog Close the TitleOne application so the setting is applied Open the TitleOne application again Add items to the Scrapbook To save an individual Scrapbook item right click on the Scrapbook and select a Use option The Save As dialog opens where you can save the Scrapbook item as an Inscriber vii file ND Hi BW YN Chapter 1 Overview 17 TitleOne User Manual 18 Set Up Your System for TitleOne Operation Before you start using the TitleOne program you should set up your preview channel program channel and make sure you have the right settings in the XD 200 Control Panel Set Up Your Preview Channel Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual The available preview options depend on your system setup Set Up VGA Preview To use a VGA preview you need to connect your second monitor to your system and set up your preview in Windows I Turn off your system 2 Connect the second monitor to the DVI on the back of the system a ZN zl lt Connect second monitor to DVI for VGA preview Figure 1 7 Connect Monitor to DVI 3 Restart the system 4 On the Windows desktop right click and select Properties 5 In the Display Properties dialog switch to the Settings
260. ct exists only in two dimensions X and Y That s why there is no Z coordinate field for any of the properties on the Shape tab When changing the shape of a keyframe each control and tool button on the palette contains a right click menu The right click Reset Extend Apply to all keyframes menu lets you reset the field values and x 0 00 g Apply to all Forward control how the behavior is applied to the om e Appi to all Previous keyframes e Apply to all keyframes e Apply to all Forward adjusts all keyframes after and including the current one to the end of the path e Apply to all Previous adjusts all keyframes up to and including the current one in the path The Object View right click menu lets you preview your shape adjustments in Flat View or 3 4 View The Object View Slider adjusts the level of object zoom Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual 293 Extend Skew Scale 294 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Extend stretches the keyframe adding an equal amount of area to each side so that the center point does not change A value mer greater than O makes the keyframe wider or taller and a value less than O makes the keyframe smaller You can extend the ae keyframe on both axes one axis at a time y 0 00 e Drag left or right to extend the keyframe on the horizontal or X axis e Drag up or down to extend the keyframe on the vertical or Y axis Skew slants the keyfr
261. ctangular Figure 8 11 Brush Types Single Pixel Brush The Single Pixel brushes are one pixel square but are anti aliased so they cover an area of at least three pixels The degree of anti aliasing depends on the brush style you are using The hard edge brush style offers the most precise single pixel brush Elliptical Brush The Elliptical brushes are the most used brushes in Paint Elliptical brushes are good general purpose brushes For a nice soft brush select an Elliptical brush and change the Softness to 100 Rectangular Brush The Rectangular brushes are good for painting large areas They are also good for creating calligraphic effects and diamond patterns To create a good calligraphy brush change the Angle to 320 and the Aspect to 0 25 Opacity Texture Reset the Brushes Brush Attributes The Opacity field on the Brush tab sets the opacity for the selected tool All image editing color and alpha tools use the opacity setting The Brush Selection tool also uses the opacity setting so you can make selections at less than 100 opacity The Texture field specifies the amount of surface texture applied by the Texture tool and all brush based tools Set the value to 0 if you do not want any texture applied when you paint You need to import an image to apply it as surface texture every time you create or import a new document Select File gt Import Export gt Import Texture and select the image you want to use as
262. cts can only be used if the RTX Ports option is enabled Posterize Filter Paint A color adjustment filter that reduces the number of colors in an image You specify the number of tonal levels brightness values for an image and the filter maps pixels to the level that most closely matches the original value Predefined Media Media Store Media files that you can display by clicking one of the programmable Defined Shot Box buttons They are often used for emergency or test situations because you can Quickly access the media files Preserve Luminance Paint An option with the color balance filter that when selected automatically compensates for changes in luminance caused by increasing or decreasing color values Pressure Sensitivity See Graphics Tablet Preview Board A frame buffer dedicated to the preview channel Preview Button Sequencer A button on the Run tab that loads the current event to the preview channel Preview Channel The video channel used to preview video before it goes live Preview Toolbar Animation A toolbar providing options for viewing your animation on your computer monitor without rendering This toolbar also provides viewing time options See also Time Slider Program Board A frame buffer dedicated to the Program Channel Program Channel The video channel used to send video and events to air or tape Program Preview Palette A palette in TitleOne that
263. cts in other layouts e To learn about object elements see Object Elements on page 150 e To learn about element treatments see Element Treatments on page 157 e To learn about the Style Library see The Style Library on page 173 Layout Types The layout type determines how your work displays on video You can select one of four different layout types depending on the type of layout you are creating To change the layout type select a type from the Title ral Type drop down list in the CG toolbar Table 3 4 Layout Types Layout Type Still Roll Crawl Description Still layouts are static screen images that contain text and graphic objects Some common types of still layouts are lower thirds corner logos and full screen layouts Rolls scroll text and graphic objects up or down the screen Generally rolls are used for credit sequences You can prevent a layout object from scrolling by clearing the Scroll with Crawl Roll checkbox Multiple roll layouts can be combined into a single multi page roll See Create Multi Page Rolls on page 317 for details Crawls display a running line of text such as an announcement or a warning across the screen Crawls are not limited to a single line of text and can be placed anywhere on the layout You can prevent a layout object from moving by clearing the Scroll with Crawl Roll checkbox Multiple crawl layouts can be combined into a single multi
264. cts the object and automatically places a text cursor inside the object Hold the CTRL key and drag the mouse cursor to select a range of text Objects cannot be duplicated with the Selection tool Select Objects with the Mouse Use the Pointer or Selection tool to select objects Select either the Pointer or Selection tool 2 Select an object The object is outlined with a selection boundary Figure 3 43 A Selected Object If you select a text object with the Selection tool a text cursor is automatically placed in the text Ifyou select a spline object with the 182 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Selection tool the control points in the spline are automatically visible Otherwise the entire object is selected To select a range of text within a text object hold the CTRL key and drag the Selection tool over the text you want to select You can also hold the SHIFT key and press the LEFT ARROW and RIGHT ARROW keys to expand the text selection Figure 3 44 Select a Range of Text 3 To select the next object in the layout click the Next Next button in the CG toolbar To select the previous object click the Previous button 4 If you want to select multiple objects so you can AY change their position or attributes simultaneously hold the SHIFT key as you click the objects You can also draw a selection boundary around the objects you want to select Previous Figure 3 45 Select Multiple Items wit
265. current video aspect ratio The current video aspect ratio is set in the Inscribe ini file You need three values to set the video aspect ratio the actual aspect ratio the horizontal resolution and the vertical resolution The formula below gives the correction value that Paint uses This value is used for the views and the Aspect parameter in the Brush tab HorsResolution VertResolution Aspect Vertical Aspect Horizontal Chapter 8 Paint 491 TitleOne User Manual Tools and Aspect Ratio 492 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual The parameters in the formula are taken from the Configuration section of the Inscribe ini file HorsResolution and VertResolution are actual entries that are set in the Preferences dialog The Aspect parameter may or may not be in the ini file The Aspect parameter should be added as follows Aspect x y where x is the horizontal value and y is the vertical value The default aspect ratio for NTSC and PAL is 4 3 The default aspect ratio for HDTV is 16 9 If you need to change the corrected views in Paint make sure the formula above equals the correction you need For example the numbers for NTSC are 720 486 3 4 1 111 If you are creating images for square pixel use such as web graphics and you do not want video corrected views make sure the formula equals I You do not always have to change the ratio when creating uncorrected images since you can adjust the aspect of the brush based tools using
266. d set Build Media Store Start 1000 Titles flag ln Options Image Data Keywords international patriotism Flags Original Res O Size to Fit O Size to Full screen C Include Image Filename c program files harris gscribe samples china lgo flag international c program files harris gscribe samples canada lgo flag c program files harris gscribe samples uk lgo flag international c program filesiharris gscribe sampleslusa lgo flag international c program filestharristascribelsamplesijapan lgo flag international c program files harris gscribe samples ireland lgo flag international c program files harris gscribe samples france lgo flag international current Image v r Options a Y Live Update Title international Keywords Storage Referenced Referenced Referenced Referenced Referenced Referenced Referenced Figure 7 12 Build Media Store Dialog To add files to the Build set click the Browse button In the Open dialog navigate to the files to add Select the files You can preview a file in the preview region in the top right corner of the dialog To add the files click the Open button Add Frame Grabs Documents My Network Look in O Samples v O0 em a Basic_textures clock Samples ICG animations paint Panel Images Gl Abstrwav jpg Bizzy Bee TGA E blobs j
267. d time codes to the subtitles Take the job to video to make sure that all the subtitles are timecoded correctly Remember that a translator will be using the subtitles as source material Make sure the subtitles are of an appropriate length for translating 3 Select File gt Export gt Export Subtitle Text File and export the subtitles The exported file is in the timecoded subtitle format similar to the following Richards comments on her Italian travels lt 00 37 27 02 gt lt 00 37 30 14 gt Every trip is a memorable one Of course you can t have all the comforts when you re on the road lt 00 37 43 01 gt lt 00 37 46 22 gt but the fans are so enthusiastic And that means a lot when you re far away from home lt 00 37 50 22 gt lt 00 37 53 09 gt 4 Give the file to a translator who will translate the subtitles into a different language The translator can edit the file using any ASCII text editor When editing the translator replaces the original text with the translated text leaving the timecodes as they are You can reuse the existing timecodes for each translation Chapter3 CG 245 TitleOne User Guide 5 The translator saves the file in an ASCII DOS or TEXT format and returns it to the studio 6 Import the translated file into CG as described in Import a Subtitle File on page 243 A new playlist is created using the translated text and the timecodes in the text file 246 Chapter 3 CG Titl
268. data click the Advanced Formatting button in the Select Database Items window Select a column from the Column list to determine which column entries in the database table are formatted You can apply special formatting to each column if necessary e To format numeric data select an option from the Thousands Separator Decimal Point and Decimal Places lists These options are only visible when your column contains numeric data e To format date data select an option from the Date Time Format list This option is only visible when your column contains date data e To display a string of text before each column entry during output select the Add Prefix checkbox and enter the text in the text box e To display a string of text after each column entry during output select the Add Suffix checkbox and enter the text in the text box Click OK in all the dialogs to return to CG CG outputs the selected table entries from the data source during playback Chapter 3 CG 225 TitleOne User Guide Macros If you make frequent standard changes to objects in your layouts save the changes in one or more macros Macros record the buttons you press while editing objects in the CG module By assigning macros to shortcut keys you can Quickly repeat these edits on a variety of objects To open or close the Macro window select Tools gt Macros Macros Record new macros and assign Function keys Macros can be edited or removed using the tool
269. de Behavior The size of Text Field objects is not constrained The size and aspect ratio of the text changes to fit the size of the object Increasing the height or width of a Text Constrained Field does not change the size of the text inside the object If the height or width of the object is decreased so that the text can no longer fit inside the text s size and aspect ratio change to fit inside the object The size of Paragraph Field objects is not constrained The size and aspect ratio of the text changes to fit the size of the object The height of a Fixed Width Paragraph field cannot be changed by dragging its handles When the width of the object is changed the text inside will wrap to best fit the inside of the object adding or removing paragraph lines as necessary The size of the text itself does not change Rows To customize the properties of your text objects see Text Object Properties on page 119 Use rows when you need to create tables and leaderboards Rows are specially grouped text objects that can be easily edited and duplicated using shortcut keys and the Row menu Click the Row button in the CG Editor toolbar to access the Row menu Create a New Table Create the first row of your table by aligning several text objects to the same baseline one object for each column You can either nudge the objects into position or align them with the Alignment menu see Align Objects on page 186
270. deo clips There are many different ways of encoding video clips and video clip codecs allow your system to decode particular clip types Computer operating systems come with some pre installed codecs but some specialized codecs must be purchased from third party companies and installed on each system in order to play back those codec types CG supports any codec that is installed on your computer For instance if your computer has access to the codec for playing back a particular type of avi file CG will also be able to play that type of avi CG also supports matte avi files which include transparency information By setting a clip s playback options you can keep or ignore the transparency Add a Clip Object You can add clip objects by either applying a clip to the face of an existing object or by inserting clips with the Media Library To learn how to insert video clips inside text objects see Insert Media into Text Objects on page 108 Chapter 3 CG 147 TitleOne User Guide To add a new full resolution clip to your layout To add a clip object to the face of an existing object l 2 Switch to the Media tab of the CG Libraries palette Libraries Styles Media If the video clip you want to use is not already stored in one of the library boxes see The Media Library on page 177 to learn how to add media to the Media Library Double click the media box containing the video clip A new clip ob
271. derer Animation Status Ready Time Code 00 00 15 14 Bun Job Y Preview stop Elapsed Time 00 00 15 15 Take Y Take m ays Time Left 00 00 00 00 Romber 0000 ae SE Free RAM 260808k Label Group Figure 5 39 Preview Button on Run Tab Take a Single Event Use the Take buttons on the Run tab to take a single event Select the event you want to take Chapter 5 Sequencer 357 TitleOne User Guide 358 Run the Job Stop Playback TitleOne User Guide Switch to the Run tab If you need to press CTRL SHIFT 0 to move online Use one of the Take options to take your event e Click on the Take Down button take on the Run tab to take the current event and load the next event to the preview channel e Select the event in the Sequencer playlist and press the PLUS key on the number pad Pressing the PLUS key outputs the layout and loads the next event in the playlist to the preview channel If you select a new event in the sequence and press the PLUS key the previously setup event will take to air Set up the selected event by pressing the number pad MINUS key Then press the number pad PLUS key to output the event Click on the Take button take on the Run tab to take the current event without loading the next event to the Preview Channel You can also use the ENTER key on the number pad for the same effect Use the Run Job button on the Run tab to run the playlist
272. ditor Effect Settings Audio Mask Renderer Animation Starting off screen Crawl Speed ll Ending off screen Set Speed 200 Crawl left O Set Time 125 Frames Left border 0 0000 04 05 ihhimmissd Right border 0 Border Softness O Global Settings L a i e mT C L Di s ra ES a Dal Figure 5 10 Speed Options 4 To set the amount of time it takes to display the roll crawl select the Set Time radio button 5 Enter the duration of time using one of the follow options e Inthe Frames field enter the duration as a total number of frames e Inthe hh mm ss ff field enter the duration in hours minutes seconds frames 324 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Prepare Events for Output Before you output your events you can apply transitions audio and set the event duration using the Attributes tabs in Sequencer Sequencer also includes real time playback and loop options Apply Transitions Transitions determine how still events appear on screen When you select a transition from the drop down list any related transition options become available For example if you select the Wipe transition the directional buttons display and the duration and softness options also become available Event Editor Effect Settings Audio Mask Renderer Animation nl Figure 5 11 Transition Options The transition options are available on the Event
273. duces the desired effect Chapter 4 Animation 301 TitleOne User Manual Render Options Render Engine Render from Sequencer Render an Animation 302 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual There are three render options available in Animation Editor e Select Go gt Render Animation to render the animation e Select Go gt Take Last Rendered to take the last rendered animation even if changes have been made in the FX workspace since the last render e Press ENTER on number pad to render and take the animation If no changes have been made since the last render it only takes the animation without re rendering it The render engine renders the animation frame by frame As each frame is rendered Animation Editor moves through the timeline and displays a rendered bitmap of each frame in Animation Editor Render time depends upon the complexity length and number of paths in the animation You can render from within Animation Editor or you can wait until you go online to render When you click the Online toggle button in Sequencer the Render Engine launches and renders all previously unrendered animations If your animations are particularly long or complex this can cause a significant delay To avoid this delay when going online render your animations while in Animation Editor After you have set the desired placement shape filter spline and time properties to the motion paths you are ready to render your
274. duration ococccccncnccncnncnnoncncnnnnnnnaos 300 4 color gradient treatments 160 4 3 aspect ratio oooccocccoccconiconicono 27 492 8 bit images EE 495 A Access databaees 212 214 CA 214 Active Texture treatments 148 164 add t0 fACE A ae 165 add with Media Library 164 178 SUGD aa 165 UP 191 Ce E 166 Sheen elements cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 155 transparency cocccocccnncnnnncnnnoccnncnnnnccnnancnnos 166 update Active Texture ooccocccocncocnco 209 Add Default Event button 98 adjust spline paths Animation 284 285 Advanced Formatting button 225 align CG Active Texture treatments 165 A 149 image treatments occcoccccccnccncnnnnnnnnnoss 163 DET suspenso 186 gt EE EE EE E 118 KE ENO EN EE NE 165 186 WOOD OCP EEE 165 186 Index TitleOne User Guide 585 586 to safe title area EE 186 alpha Paint elle 457 TENNENE vs 455 MOMO tege eg 456 457 PAUS see 489 VIG DURON EE 490 alpha channel CO 138 alpha channel view Media Store 423 alpha mask Sequencer ccseeeee eens 331 AND search operator ccccceeeeeeeeeeees 416 angle CG Linear Gradient treatments 159 Ree dE 155 sheen elements rarrnnanrnnnnnvanrnnnnnvanennn 156 Animation Editor cccoccccccnconccnoo 248
275. e if you select Reference In gt Input gt Free Run and the Reference In fails the XD 200 falls back to the live input and if the live input fails the XD 200 falls back to free run mode Note Depending on your configuration some options may not be available 5 Determine how to handle the output of a restored signal by selecting one of the following options Maintain the Fallback as Reference Sets the XD 200 to continue to output the fallback reference in after the signal is restored If the XD 200 falls back to free run during signal loss when the signal is restored you may notice a glitch in the output To avoid any disruption in output you can select this option and continue using the fallback reference in Revert Back to the Original Signal Sets the XD 200 to output the original reference source when the signal is restored 6 Click the Apply Changes button to apply the settings to the current configuration Configure Mixer Set the mixer output and downstream keying type Settings Select a video card in the Detected Video Cards list 2 Click the Reference In Mixer button 3 In the Mixer Settings section select the mixer standard for your environment Select Live Input to output the video signal only for testing or frame grabs Select Mix Over Live Input to output mixed video and graphics for pass through keying internal key Select Graphics Only to output a key and fill signal for downstream keying exte
276. e information CG comes with pre defined digital clocks and digital timers See Clock Objects on page 141 for more information about clocks Chapter3 CG 99 TitleOne User Guide 100 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Table 3 3 Layout Objects Continued Component Description Ports You can install and use RT Xports applications within CG Port objects connect to RT Xports applications allowing you to add sophisticated RTX objects to your layouts See Port Objects on page 145 The Layout The layout background is an object that cannot be Background edited with the Pointer or Selection tool Backgrounds can consist of colored backgrounds images or video clips See Layout Backgrounds on page 199 for more information Move Objects Use the Selection and Pointer tools to select and move your objects You can also group your objects which maintains their spacing when they are moved To learn how to change the position spacing and orientation of your objects see Manage Objects on page 181 Object Appearance Most objects consist of four different elements a face one or more edges a depth and a shadow In most cases each element can also include a sheen Change the attributes of the elements to customize the appearance and shape of the object Create complex text and graphic styles by applying treatments to elements You can store styles in the Style Library and apply them to other obje
277. e user folios and the browsed files You set up access to your databases when you create them See Create a Database Location on page 388 Select File gt Preferences The Preferences dialog opens 2 In the Preferences dialog switch to the Store Paths tab You enter the information for the existing database in the Store Locations area at the bottom of the tab Location Name d Delete Picture Store we Store Defaults Server CA PictureStore Browse Local CA PictureStorelStorelUsert Browse Browse C PictureStorelStore Browse1 Browse Figure 7 20 Access an Existing Database Tel AA LI CH Zij Stor 3 Inthe Location Name field enter a name for the database 4 In the Server field enter the database path or click the Browse button and navigate to the database 5 In the Local field enter the local path for the user folios or click the Browse button and navigate to the local path 6 In the Browse field enter the network path for the browsed files or click the Browse button and navigate to the network path 7 Click the Add button You can now access the database in Media Store 8 To close the Preferences dialog click OK Switch Current Database Media Store supports the use of multiple Media Store databases To access a database that you did not create you must first set up access to the database For more information see Set Up an Existing Database on page 402
278. e 135 SEU e En E oca 135 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide Change Graphic FOM AA oo OO 136 LOGO ODJECE rader or das SLN 137 Adaa Logo ODJECE mere eee 137 Ada Mole AAA E ero O CO O 138 A 139 Sole alocado AAA O e A 139 Ac A 444 139 CIGCK ODJECIS ra al NG 141 O TE 141 Clock Appearance varsler 141 Face NTE NN 141 DEP and NAO EE 142 e ee 142 Digital ClOGK Format aar 143 Dita Timer Format eee eee ett eer eee ee SR o ee 144 POF ODICCIS sperre SN EST 145 Create an RTXports Application oocccccocccccocnnccccncconnnonocncononnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononenos 145 Install an RTXports Application ooccccccccocnccccncocnccncncnnnnnnononnnonnnnnnnconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnncnnnns 145 Add a Port Object to the Layout ccccooccccccccnncococoncnnonnncnnnoncononnncnnonnnnconannnnonannncnonnnnnnannnnonanenns 145 Beieleit pre 145 PROTESIS ERE EEE EEE EE RENT 146 CUP ODJECIS sies eee eee eee be 147 Supported VIdeo UPS Ne 147 Vo DE KO 0 ole A ET EET EE ET ONE EET 147 Olip Playpack ODIOM seisen E 148 Clip Alignment and Transparent re 149 Change VIde AP inaianei ii asis 149 Object Elements musica arsen E 150 MAC Face Element EE 150 Edge Elements iaa 150 Ale e En it AAA Se 151 Editan EE dera 152 REMOVE AN EIE NR 152 Ebel 152 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide vii viii The DEP En EE 153 The Shadow BEENMEN app CO EEE E 154 SMES BENN ed 155 Element KEES Loser 157 FAD DI
279. e 157 to learn how to use treatments Create a sheen for the edge using the controls in the Sheen section of the Edge tab See Sheen Elements on page 155 to learn about sheens Remove an Edge To remove an edge from an object select the edge you want to remove in the Defined Edges list and click the Remove Edge button The edge is removed and the other edges move to fill the gap if necessary Combine Edges By default the edges of objects overlap the faces and edges of the objects beneath them Use the Combine Edges button to bring several objects together onto one layer causing their edges to disappear behind the overlapping faces The Depth Element This is most effective when you have overlapping graphic objects with identical face and edge settings Combining their edges creates the appearance of a composite object with a combined edge A circle placed behind a The circle s edge and the rectangle The rectangle s edge rectangle s edge are now overlaps the circle combined Figure 3 27 Combine Edges To combine the edges of objects select two or more objects and click the Combine Edges button in the CG Or ah de Editor toolbar The edges of the objects disappear where their faces overlap Combining the edges of two or more objects moves them all to the same layer If you need to bring the combined objects forward or send them backward in the layer list be sure to select all of the combined objects before you ch
280. e User Manual Import an image or paint one on the workspace Use filters and Image Editing tools to create a pattern Select an area of interest and crop the image Use the Offset tool to offset the edge pixels to the center of the image Remove the seam using the Clone Smear or Blur tools Export the image Import the image as a texture in CG Select the Tile radio button for text and graphic objects that use the texture Surface Textures Alpha Textures If you are using the texture as a CG background make sure the Size to Fit checkbox is cleared See Fill with a Seamless Pattern on page 80 for details on using seamless texture in the CG Editor You can add surface texture to your images by importing an image to use as a texture File gt Import Export gt Import Texture and applying it with the Texture tool or any other brush based tool The Texture tool applies the imported texture to the current layer using the layer colors Darker areas of the texture image take on more color than lighter areas For example if you have a picture of a yellow flower with green leaves and you apply a texture with the Texture tool the texture appears green when applied to the leaves and yellow when applied to the flower Other brush based tools apply the texture using the current brush tab settings including color for the color tools Lighter areas of the texture image take on more color or are edited more than darker areas The
281. e has it s own tension continuity and bias value By default the Position spline is selected You can only see the Position spline in the FX workspace You have to imagine the other two splines although you can see the effects of a change in any spline at any point in time in the preview Why Change the Animation Editor always tries to create the smoothest path between Spline keyframes anticipating how an object must move in order to arrive cleanly at the next keyframe In most cases a change at one keyframe affects the spline two keyframes before and two keyframes after the keyframe you alter For some properties such as rotation and spin you may not want Animation Editor to anticipate the motion or you may need to slightly adjust the movement into a keyframe You may also want to create abrupt changes in motion such as bounces Change the Spline Properties Each spline consists of three properties tension continuity and bias The values for each property are represented on the Spline tab by a slider bar To change a spline property e Drag the slider bar to the left to decrease the value 282 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual e Drag the slider bar to the right to increase the value e Enter a value for each spline property directly into the number field located beside the slider The maximum and minimum values are 5 00 The result of the value depends on the property you are changing See Tension Conti
282. e illustration below shows the parts of a complete Paint system Frame Buffer Output Monitor Computer Monitor Figure 8 38 Paint System Components The Need for The main goal of calibration is simple you want the images you create in Calibration Paint to look the same in video as they do on your computer monitor To achieve this goal you need to be working on a calibrated system A secondary goal is to be able to use your images on different systems without a huge variation in the output The key to the secondary goal is a set of frame buffers that are calibrated identically In a one system setup the secondary goal may not be as important In this situation you may be able to get away with not calibrating your frame buffer if you create images that look fine on your output monitor However this method is not recommended Order of Calibration The order in which you calibrate your devices is important Unless otherwise stated you should calibrate your system in the following order Frame buffer 2 Output monitor 3 Computer monitor Chapter 8 Paint 505 TitleOne User Manual 506 The Frame Buffer The Output Monitor The Computer Monitor Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual The frame buffer is the most important of the three devices to be calibrated since it actually outputs your images If the frame buffer is not properly calibrated your images may experience shifts in color Calibrating your own frame
283. e is a purchase option in TitleOne Scroll to top of CTRL HOME Search for media F2 Media window in Media window Scroll to bottom CTRL END Find media in F3 of Media window Media window Scroll up one CTRL PAGE UP Find media again SHIFT F3 page in Media in Media window window Sort media in F4 Media window Scroll down one CTRL PAGE page in Media DOWN window Scroll up one line CTRL UP Refresh Media FS in Media window ARROW window Chapter 9 Resources 527 TitleOne User Guide 528 Paint Chapter 9 Resources TitleOne User Guide Scroll down one CTRL DOWN Build media into CTRL B line in Media ARROW Media Store window database Select all media in CTRL A Add media to a CTRL drag media Media window layout Media to layout in Library as a logo playlist Select multiple Hold CTRL or Add media to CTRL ALT SHIF items SHIFT and click playlist as a T drag media to to select background playlist Cut media SHIFT CTRL X Add media to a CTRL SHIFT drag layout Media media to layout in Library as a texture playlist Copy media SHIFT CTRL C Update changes CTRL U Launch Build SHIFT CTRL V Delete media from CTRL D Media Store Media window dialog with media on Clipboard Grab a video CTRL G Add media to SHIFT CTRL A frame and add it Scrapbook to Build folio Action Shortcut Shortcut Selections Select all pixels CTRL A CTRL SHIFT C Select visible ALT CTRL A Invert selection CTR
284. e left to decrease the tension and make the curve much more slack The spline spreads out and is now shaped like a horseshoe Figure 4 109 illustrates the different tension values on a simple three point spline curve Figure 4 109 Spline Tension Changing the continuity of a spline affects the smoothness of the path coming into and out of the keyframe Drag the continuity slider to the left to increase the continuity An increase in continuity creates a swooping effect coming into and out of the keyframe Drag the slider to the right to decrease the continuity A decrease in continuity creates a bumpy effect coming out of the previous keyframes and going into the next keyframe Decreasing the continuity creates a sharp corner or quick change of direction in the spline Figure 4 110 illustrates the different continuity values on a simple three point curve Figure 4 110 Spline Continuity Bias Bias weights the motion coming into or out of a keyframe Animation Editor averages the two values and creates an even motion An increase in bias weights the average toward the motion coming out of the keyframe A decrease in bias weights the average toward the motion coming into the keyframe Figure 4 11 1 illustrates the different bias values on a simple three point curve 5 1 5 Figure 4 111 Spline Bias Ease In and Ease You can adjust the tension continuity and bias in conjunction with the Ease Out In a
285. e rolls ooooonnccconicccncnncnocnnn os 317 palse QUIDUE ee 360 prevent objects from scrolling 190 Start On Off screen oocccccccnccocnnccccnccnnnos 322 A o 50 change Speed on aif coooocccocccccnccncnncncnnncos 50 pause playback A 50 rotate keyframes rrrnrnnnnennnnnrenrnnnnenrnnnnen 291 rotate objects AEN 190 round line Ends rurernnnnranennnnennnrnnanennnnes 134 VOWS une 123 126 cell attributes rrnnrrnnnrrnnrrvanrrnnnvvanennn 124 SWAD va 125 RSS databases See XML databases FR TADOMS sense 145 code sample rrrnnnnnanrnnnrvnnnnvanennnnnnanennn 539 UE 128 Run Job button oocccoccccccnconcccccnconconnnoos 358 run See output S safe title area naa 104 239 lei e SE 186 O AN 239 SNAP Orme 104 239 sale video ee e EE 501 Saturated COIOr orenian a a NA 502 save COLO palettes ii a 172 MOS SE T MACIOS EE 228 media files aaneen 386 DENISE Eee 8 scale Paint Ia er 500 OJOS a 456 transformations 472 scale keyframes rrarrnrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnrannnnnnnen 294 scan folders for updates 379 406 SCISSO FS ICO nidad cc 424 SCAPDOSK ua a 15 16 392 add events to the Scrapbook 310 add frame grabs ooccccoccnccconconoconcnnononos 371 AMS as 15 copy item to Clipboard oocccccccccooccc 16 delete item NG 16 empty Scrapbook rrrnrrrnnnnrnnnrnrannnnnnnennnn 16 A WEE 16 Paste from Clipboard option
286. e system COM port your GPI device is connected to Table 9 4 Sequencer Tab Preferences Option On Line Output Directory Description Sets the folder location for all rendered Sequencer files Leave this option blank to store all rendered files in a subfolder where the SCRIBELIST file is stored Click the Browse button to navigate to and select a folder Store Paths Tab Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Table 9 5 Store Paths Tab Preferences Option Default Title Default Keywords Thumbnail Text Description Automatically assigns the entered title to every media file included in a Media Store database build e To automatically use the filename as the default title select the Auto Use File Name checkbox e To automatically use the network drive name or compact disc volume name as the default title select the Auto Use Volume Label checkbox Automatically assigns the entered keywords to every media file included in a Media Store database build e To automatically use the filename as the default keyword select the Auto Use File Name checkbox e To automatically use the network drive name or compact disc volume name as the default keyword select the Auto Use Volume Label checkbox Sets TitleOne to display either the file name the first keyword or the title on the image thumbnails in the Media window Chapter 9 Resources 517 TitleOne User Guide 518 Chapter 9 Re
287. e table d Click the Add button e If you are using Access assign a name to the table when you create the table 3 Save the table 4 Add the database to the ODBC system list See Add Database to System List on page 214 Create a Text File Database You can use a text file with the ODBC option rather than using an actual database application Set up the text file like a database table by adding multiple columns to the file E TVShows txt Notepad File Edit Format View Help Column Headings gt 3 critical Rescue Column 4 Friends Entries 5 Jamie Kennedy Experiment a california connected E MFL Football Figure 3 60 A Sample Text File Database To create a text file database Open a text editor like Windows Notepad Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Notepad 2 Enter the first column heading 3 Press the TAB key and enter the second column heading You do not need to use tabs as delimiters between the columns You can use commas or a custom delimiter See Add a Text File to System List on page 215 for information about how to set up a delimiter 4 Enter the remaining column headings using the TAB key to move to the next column Press ENTER to move to the second line Add the first entry under the first column heading Press TAB to move to the second column and add the column entry 0 NX On UM Add the remaining column entries using the TAB key to move to the next column 9 Con
288. e template is sorted by number and you need to be able to recognize the contents by its name Naming conventions are especially important if multiple users are sharing a registry Make the name intuitive enough that all users can tell what information the template contains without having to preview it To rename a template simply click the Rename button and enter a new name in the field provided You can also change the order in which templates appear in the list by changing the template number Number 9 Description Fade in From left Rename Cancel Figure 4 104 Rename Template You can make changes to a template s placement shape filter spline and time information after it has been added to the registry To update a template without changing the name I Select the template and make the desired changes in the FX workspace 2 Press the Update button The FX Template dialog opens and prompts you to select Yes or No to determine which paths to include 3 Once selected the Update pop up appears and prompts you to confirm that you want to update the selected template Chapter 4 Animation Delete a Template Adjust a Preset Template 4 Click Yes to update the template 2 Update item 9 Figure 4 105 Update Template If there is a template in the registry that you no longer use just select it and click the Delete button to remove it from the list The Template Manager pop up prompts you to confi
289. e the alpha tools to blend images on different layers together The number of layers you can use is limited only by your system s resources See Work with Layers on page 493 for details Every layer is made up of four channels red green blue and alpha You can paint retouch transform and apply filters to each channel individually See Work with Channels on page 495 for details Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual 443 Work with Files The main thing to remember about working with files in Paint is that Paint files are not saved with the scribelist file Paint has its own file format that contains layer information but when used in other modules Paint images are only composite images they do not contain layer information Paint File Format Create a New Paint File 444 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual The Paint file format ipt is more than just another bitmap file format Paint files contain all image layers opacity settings and alpha values The ipt format also contains the current selection and a bitmap composite of all image layers If you save your image in any other format except lgo you may lose the alpha channel Paint is a single file application This means you can only have one file open at a time However you can use layers as separate files and export visible layers in a bitmap format Igo tga etc You can create a new Paint file by selecting Edit gt Create New Image You c
290. e the following limited warranties from the date you acquired the Software from us or our authorized dealer a Media For a period of twenty 20 days the distribution media and documentation in this package will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use If the distribution media or documentation fail to conform to this warranty you may as your sole and exclusive remedy obtain a replacement free of charge if you return the defective disk or documentation to us with a dated proof of purchase b Interlock Security Device Provided you are in compliance with this Agreement we will replace a damaged or defective interlock security device dongle no matter what the cause of the damage In order to receive a replacement device you must return the damaged device to Harris Corporation 26 Peppler Street Waterloo Ontario Canada N2 3C4 c WARRANTY DISCLAIMER EXCEPT AS PROVIDED ABOVE THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED ON AN AS IS BASIS AND WE DO NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT ITS OPERATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE WE EXCLUDE AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS NOT STATED HEREIN INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so the above exclusion may not apply to you This limited warranty gives you specific legal rig
291. e the item off screen check the Fade Out checkbox Enter the duration of the fade in frames If you want the duration of the fade out to equal the duration of the fade in select the Lock button When you select the Lock button the fade values remain equal d On ki RA UUN File Edit Actions Help Preview Delay Status 4 penalty SCRIBE 0 2 stationlogo SCRIBE 0 newscrawl SCRIBE 0 gt SIGE Crest Ta E eee Source File statiomlogo SCRIBE Logo Setup Fade In Time frames Fade Out Time frames Display Delay o rames Figure 2 25 Fade Item On Off Screen Delay On Air Display You can delay the on air display of any item in the item list Overlay delays the display by the set number of frames I To delay the on air display of an item select the item in the item list 2 Click the Setup button to expand the setup options 3 Enter the number of frames that you want to delay the item in the Display Delay field Chapter 2 Output 79 TitleOne User Guide Loop a Crawl Animation Crawl and animation items include a loop option that loops the item continuously Select the crawl or animation item from the list 2 Click the Setup button to view the setup options 3 To loop the crawl or animation continuously check the Continuous Loop checkbox Overlay Output Overlay includes a number of options for playing your events The following Options table describes the output options available in Overla
292. eOne User Guide Chapter 4 Animation Animate your CG objects in the Animation Editor 248 Introduction to Animation Editor Animation Editor is a special module that enhances the functionality of CG to include animation creation and playback Animation Editor takes the two dimensional 2D text and graphics created in CG Editor and animates them by flying them in virtual three dimensional 3D space Switch to You can easily switch between modules using the buttons on the toolbar or Animation Editor the options from the Tools drop down menu To switch to Animation Editor use one of the following methods e On the toolbar click the FX button e Select Tools gt Animation Editor e Press SHIFT F6 on the main keyboard In order to access the Animation settings you must set the layout type to Animation before switching to Animation Editor From the Layout Type drop down list on the CG toolbar select Animation If you click directly on the FX button on the main toolbar without setting the layout type to Animation TitleOne will confirm that you want to convert the layout to an animation If you select yes the program switches to the Animation Editor module and you are not given the chance to change the transition settings However you can switch back to CG Editor at any time to change the transition settings See Animation Settings on page 259 for details Interface Overview All Inscriber animations are b
293. eates a new Vertical Text Field For single lines of text The field s height is constrained and the text gets smaller to fit the field Pressing ENTER creates a new Vertical Text Constrained Field For multiple lines of text The field expands as text is entered Pressing ENTER creates a new line within the field For multiple lines of text The field s height is constrained and the text gets smaller to fit the field Pressing ENTER creates a new line within the field You can toggle your text objects between horizontal and vertical text l 2 3 Select a horizontal text object Switch to the Attributes tab in the Attributes palette In the Paragraph section of the Attributes tab click the Vertical Orientation button The horizontal text object la changes to a vertical text object To switch vertical text to horizontal text click the Horizontal Orientation button in the Paragraph section of the Attributes tab at You can also toggle the orientation of text objects by right clicking them Chapter 3 CG 113 TitleOne User Guide View the Text Baseline Text Object Attributes 114 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide and choosing Vertical Text Orientation or Horizontal Text Orientation from the right click menu You can choose to show or hide the text baseline for selected text objects The letters in most fonts sit directly on the baseline and the descenders extend below the baseline Text Baseline
294. ect a configuration from the Current Configuration list Click the Load button The configuration settings load in the XD 200 Control Panel You can load an existing video card configuration and make changes to it To open a saved configuration click the Saved Configuration button 2 Select a configuration from the Current Configuration list 3 Click the Load button 4 Make any changes to the configuration of video cards on your system by selecting a video card in the Detected Video Cards list 5 Use the buttons below the Video Card Details to configure the video card 6 To save the updated configuration click the Saved Configuration button 7 Ensure the correct configuration name is listed in the Save Configuration As field If you want to change the name of the configuration enter a new name in the Save Configuration As field 8 Click Save You can delete a video card configuration from the Phoenix Control Panel Click the Saved Configuration button Select the configuration from the Current Configuration drop down list Click the Delete button All of the video card s configuration settings will be removed from your system Chapter 1 Overview 41 TitleOne User Manual 42 Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual Chapter 2 Output Output solutions available in TitleOne 44 Output in TitleOne To give you the playback flexibility you need TitleOne is equipped with several output options that are
295. ect ratio is the relationship between the width and height of an image The shape of the individual pixels determines the aspect ratio Layouts designed in one aspect ratio and output on another can produce undesired effects Enables multiple output boards to work as separate program channels Clear this option to use multiple output boards as a Program Preview system This option is not applicable when working offline Sets TitleOne to avoid sending information to the output board When selected this option disables output functionality on the output monitor Clear this option to allow TitleOne to send information to the output board and enable output functionality Table 9 1 General Tab Preferences Option External Serial Control Disable Text Filtering TT Display Aspect Ratio Line 21 Protected Disable Copy On Open Silent Video Init Video Dither Description Enables serial port trigger functionality in TitleOne Clear this option to disable serial port trigger support when no serial port trigger is used Disables automatic blur and pixel rise time filters applied to text characters Clear this option to apply blur and pixel rise time filters on text Displays workspace image pixels on the computer monitor as a l I ratio instead of a video correct 4 3 or 16 9 Clear this option to set the workspace display to the current aspect ratio Prevents Closed Captioning from being overlapped by graphics
296. ect the Time Code trigger Chapter 5 Sequencer 345 TitleOne User Guide 346 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Select the group header 2 Select the trigger using one of the following methods e On the group header right click on the current trigger and select TimeCode from the right click menu e On the Event Editor tab select TimeCode from the Trigger Type drop down list Output with a Time Code Trigger Once you move the playlist online you can start playback When the time code device reaches the event in point the event is output to the program channel To go online press CTRL SHIFT 0 You are prompted to save your playlist if you have not saved yet Once all the events are rendered and moved online the Run tab becomes available On the Event Editor tab click the Start Reading arrow beside the Source field The Source field displays the current time code Event Editor Effect Settings Audio Mask Renderer Animation Cut v closing credits C Local DISK 50 i Remote l 00 16 12 00 a 00 17 16 00 bal 00 01 04 00 Program a 00 00 06 07 Start Reading button Figure 5 27 Start Reading TimeCode Source Select the group header containing the events you want to output Switch to the Run tab Click the Run Job button Events are triggered once the time code device reaches the event in point Offset Timecode When you use the Time Code trigger you can of
297. edia Resolution Title Media Type User Name Number 17 11 2006 A 28 09 2006 12 09 2006 173x271x32 173x269x32 172x270x32 C Auto Suggest Auto Thesaurus C Wildcards On Find Cancel Figure 7 24 Find Dialog 3 Add attributes to the Key Search Criteria field For more information see Set Up a Simple Search on page 414 or Set Up an Advanced Search on page 415 4 Click the Find button The dialog closes and Media Store selects the first media file matching the search criteria in the Media window 5 To select the next file matching the search criteria select Media Store gt Find Again Find a File Using the Shot Box Palette In the Shot Box palette you can access a media file using its media number For general information about the Shot Box see Shot Box Palette on page 383 On the Shot Box palette click the Store Play toggle button to read Store If the button reads Play the Shot Box searches for playlists Media window Using the buttons on the toolbar display the media to search in the In the Shot Box Number field enter the media number To quickly set the focus to the Number field press the FI2 key Chapter 7 Media Store 417 TitleOne User Guide 418 Search Results Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide 4 To select the media file click the Find button on the Shot Box palette or press the ENTER key on the main keyboard not
298. een layouts or as moving textures on CG objects The Clip option also allows you to import media objects to a layout and then animate the objects in the Animation Editor See Clip Objects on page 147 to get started with clips Other video clip functionality is discussed throughout the CG chapter Feature Note Strata is a purchase option in TitleOne A TitleOne utility that allows unlimited layers per channel and each layer can support stills graphics videos text and animations Open Strata by selecting Start gt All Programs gt Harris gt Inscriber Strata Utility gt Inscriber Strata Utility See Strata Configuration Utility on page 84 for more details Table 1 2 TitleOne Features Feature Overlay ViaBuilder Description A TitleOne utility that allows you to easily insert and hide clocks timers still or animated logos bugs channel IDs lower thirds and more You can control three additional layers of graphics on top of your current output in the Overlay utility Open Overlay by selecting Tools gt Overlay See Overlay on page 73 for more details A TitleOne utility that creates animations from a series of individual animation frames created with an external animation program When exporting your animation save the frames as 32 bit tga files and ViaBuilder will maintain the animation s alpha Import via animations into TitleOne to use in your CG layouts as media objects or moving textur
299. elen en D er vaare 476 EAN Tut re LEET 477 Mage AE GUNG TOONS are een 477 a cee ee eee E ee 478 AMT ME NNN 479 Work with Clone Tools 0occcccoccc nn enn unne 480 DENIA Sure POMO 480 VEERE e ia 481 Use the CTRL Key and Align Checkbox AAA 481 TUE CNEEKDOX ai o 482 Clone Fill TOOL saa 482 Work WIIN FIELS sazonar ARA ATA AEE 483 INSENDET FIRES A 483 Recent ENES BR 485 elek 485 APPIV Fill rs 16 Seeds eames ammeter ant vee Ud 485 He NNN 485 MF NN 485 ENIA Panty Eller daa oa 486 DENE Filter ee 486 Delete Filter Folders cocine eiibai sa 487 View Folder Status ya 487 Alpha anad Ard Fary FIESTA 487 PROWOSROD SIE 487 Create Textures aa Nede aes 488 SCEAMESS TEXTOS arves Speer 488 SUE TEU eee 489 Al el WE E 489 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide Zoom au 490 EN 490 VEN FEBS re 490 view Checkboxes iaa 491 GIPS er 491 CUST OP ONS vred 491 Video Safe Title Area vrede seeren 491 VITE ASDECURA eee 491 TOOL NA Ar 492 Work with Lavers sica ss e EE 493 Vew a Layer JPP 493 Namea Layer eoe Ei E E EEA EEE EATE SEE gassed dest NE 493 Change Layer Opacity saa 493 Create New EE 493 Duplicate a LE NE 493 Delete ille 494 Rearrange ayers sad 494 MEN Layers eli 494 Work With Channels a E A AAA 495 Paint ele ele TECH Eine 495 Remove Color from Individual Channels ooccccoccnccccncconcnccccnnconcnnnonnncnononononnnonnnnononnnonnnononenononos 496 Manipulate the Alpha Channel noticia alas rei Ge
300. en Latency is caused by the time required to read rendered files from disk or from a remote location the time to decompress files and the time to transfer files to the frame buffer card Display latency varies from system to system and with network activity level Display Options Animation Options on the Go menu or Animation palette that change the view of the FX workspace Display options include All Paths Text Outline Snapshot of All Objects and Snapshot of Selected Object Distort CG An effect that changes the face shape of individual text characters along the X and Y axes Available with all type styles except Classic Inscriber Distortion Filters Paint Inscriber filters that let you apply special effects to your images to give the impression of distortion or a different medium Dither Filter CG and Frame Grab A filter that removes contouring in imported graphics with a generalized noise filter Dodge Tool Paint An image editing tool used to lighten an image by moving pixel color values towards their maximum Downconvert The process of converting a higher resolution image or input signal to a lower resolution For example a high definition 1080i signal is downconvert to standard definition 480i Drop Frame A method of adjusting the 30 fps frame per second NTSC timecode to approximately 29 97 fps This correction drops 108 frames per hour by skipping frame counts 0 and I at the
301. en select Pop Back from the menu After you click the Pop back button the currently selected DVE template is applied to all events in the group during output The default template is full screen Cut 00000 E C Local DISK D rames Remote A 00 00 00 00 4 00 00 00 00 D Program p l 0 00 00 00 4 Loop 1 E Es DVE button Figure 5 32 Pop back DVE Button 3 To change the size and position of the DVE window right click on the Pop Back icon in the group header and select Edit from the menu Figure 5 33 Select Edit to Access the DVE Options Chapter 5 Sequencer 353 TitleOne User Guide 4 In the Pop back Templates dialog do one of the following e Select another template that represents the size and position of the DVE you want from the list TitleOne ships with preset templates e Reposition the DVE window by dragging the DVE window in the preview panel of the dialog box 5 Resize the DVE window by holding down BOTH the right and the left mouse buttons and then dragging the window Pop back Templates Default A Over Shoulder Large Top Right Over Shoulder Large Top Left Over Shoulder Large Bottom Le Over Shoulder Large Bottom Ri Over Shoulder Small Top Right Over Shoulder Small Top Left Over Shoulder Small Bottom Lef Over Shoulder Small Bottom Ric Live Feed Top Right Live Feed Bottom Left Three Quarter Top Left 3 Three Quarter Top Right Three Quart
302. enlarge the cropped image too much Table 6 1 Image Cropping Advantages and Disadvantages Cropping Advantages Eliminates the ragged edges on some frame grabs Only saves the relevant area of the image Produces smaller images by eliminating unneeded image areas 364 Chapter 6 Frame Grab TitleOne User Guide Cropping Disadvantages Scaling images back to full size may visually degrade image Quality Cropped areas are permanently lost Use the Image Filters Video signals contain two interlaced fields slightly offset in time This offset causes grabbed frames to flicker Decoded NTSC and PAL signals may have a certain amount of degradation or color distortions You can apply filter options to minimize flicker and clean up any distortion Apply Filters to You can apply filters to the current grab and to new images Frame Grabs To select and apply filters Click the Filter button to open the Filter and Clean up Options dialog Filter 2 Select the filters to apply to your grab by selecting the appropriate checkboxes and then clicking OK For a complete Filter and Clean up Options Repeat Field 1 Repeat Field 2 description of each filter see Image Feet Filters on page 365 interpolate Field 2 Adaptive Field 1 3 Select the Filter checkbox to apply the P selected filters The selected filters are F Javerage Field 1 applied to the grab as soon as you select H vsrage Field 2 the Filt
303. ent Editor Effect Settings Figure 5 12 Transition List 4 Set the options that are available for the selected transition Table 5 7 Transition Options Option Description Directional buttons Determines where the event starts to appear on the screen Look at the button to see how the transition displays on screen The event will appear in the dark area first and spread to the light area For example the directional button y will start the transition in lower left corner and spread diagonally to the upper right Available for wipe tile and push transitions Note The available buttons change depending on the selected transition Numbered buttons Determines which transition effect is applied to the selected event Available for organic transitions Frames field Sets how many frames it takes to display the entire transition Available for all transitions Soft field Sets how blurred the edges of the transition appear on output Increase the value to increase the softness Available for wipe tile and organic transitions Apply an Animation Transition The Animation tab allows you to select an animation file to play as your transition during output I Select an event in the Sequencer playlist for your animation 2 Switch to the Animation tab Chapter 5 Sequencer 327 TitleOne User Guide 328 Use Global Transitions TitleOne User Guide 3 Click the Browse button 4 Inthe Open dialog navig
304. ent depending on how your system is configured On a two channel system you can assign one board to be a preview channel and the other a program channel or both to be program channels Assign your Strata enabled applications to video boards The application instances correspond to the virtual output channels available in your application For example if you set up three TitleOne application instances in the Strata Utility three output channels are available in the TitleOne application For some applications such as Overlay only one instance is available You can assign multiple instances to the same video board and assign instances to both video boards on a two channel system 4 Arrange the layers for each video board Note In a configuration of five layers layer one is the top most layer and layer five is the background layer 5 If you designated a video board for previewing on a two channel system or have a USB adapter that provides an external video head select which applications can use it for previewing 6 Click the Finish button to save your configuration Create your layouts If you set up multiple application instances in Strata assign events to channels Output channels in your application correspond to application instances in Strata For example output channel I in your application corresponds to application instance I e In the TitleOne Sequencer module select a channel by clicking a Program button on t
305. ent than the options available for other objects Select the Image treatment from the Treatment drop down list then click the Add button and select the image file you want to use The image is applied to the background Figure 3 54 An Image Treatment Applied to the Background Align the Image To align the image in the background click the Size As radio button to re size the image so it completely fills the background or click the Tile the 200 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Image radio button to tile the image at its original size The image is aligned to the upper left corner of the layout Image Transparency Set the transparency of the background image s regions with the Transparency controls Select the background region you want to set the transparency for e Select All from the Transparency drop down list to set a uniform transparency for the entire background e Select Top Half to set the transparency for the top half of the background e Select Bottom Half to set the transparency for the bottom half of the background 2 Set the region s transparency by dragging the Transparency slider or enter a value in the Transparency field 0 is completely opaque and 100 is completely transparent 3 Set the angle of the transparency by changing the value in the Angle field Remove a To remove a background from a layout click the Background button on the Background CG Editor toolbar and uncheck the Show Background opti
306. ents rrrrrnnnnennnrnrnnnnnn 161 164 background objects 200 UP 191 update images EN 209 images Frame Grab See frame grabs images See media files Media Store import Animation Eeg EN 303 templates inicias 279 303 304 import CG CADETES sr 240 subte NE vu 243 EU NES Are 240 import Paint channels iaa 497 COLO elle ia 461 image as transformation 472 OPUONS sausen 445 palette files 00 00nnnannnannnannnennnennnnannne 461 selections ul 447 468 EE e 446 479 import files into databases Media Store 392 in point set event start time Sequencer 335 input CONFIQUIE csasanaconanana niae 33 Inscribe ini automatically initialize board 370 grab frames on multi board systems 369 set current aspect ratio o ccoo 491 Inscriber color control ooccooccconcooc 458 INSENDET MOS ud 208 insert keyframes a 261 263 motion templates ooccccccccocncoccncnoos 277 insert CUISOP rranennnnnnanrnnnnnnnnrnnanennnnnnanennn 120 insert media into text objects 108 179 inside depth varsam 154 interlaced output display ooocccoooo 27 invert field order 148 166 ANGST ee 115 J JOD Creator micro cnc 236 238 jobs See playlist STO e baad 118 K Co WE 118 Key Fill option WEE 363 Key Info tab Media Store 381 409 410 432 key information in frame orale 363 keyframes EEN 261 266 absolute position
307. ents and change the event order Create a Playlist You can add events to the playlist from CG or Animation Editor Once you add events to the playlist use the options in Sequencer to prepare your events for output Table 5 4 TitleOne Tools and Playlist Functionality TitleOne Tool Playlist Function CG Adds stills rolls crawls and animations to the playlist Select an empty slot in the playlist and then create your layout in the CG workspace The current layout fills the selected slot in the playlist Selecting a new slot clears your CG workspace and allows you to add a new layout to the playlist Animation Editor Adds animation effects to the layout you created in CG After you create the animation layout in CG select the layout in the playlist and switch to the Animation Editor to animate the layout Name Events Once you add events to the playlist switch to Sequencer to start organizing the playlist for output To help identify events in the Sequencer Playlist use the Event Editor tab to name your events In Sequencer select the event line in the Sequencer playlist 2 Switch to the Event Editor tab 3 In the Name field enter a name for the event 312 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide 4 Press ENTER to apply the name The name displays on the event line Name displayed on event line FS Eile Edit Playlist Tools Help l Local nrs Remote H a Program Manual Name
308. eo input e Enter a horizontal timing value in the Horizontal Delay field The value is measured in microseconds where I is approximately I microsecond e Enter a vertical timing value in the Vertical Delay field The value is measured in lines where I is approximately I line Chapter 1 Overview 35 TitleOne User Manual IO Click the Apply Changes button to apply the settings to the current configuration Configure Synchronize your devices by selecting your genlock source and a backup Reference In reference sequence for synchronization The Detected Video Cards list at the top of the control panel displays the status of the reference signal 3 36 Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual Green Signal is genlocked to the source Yellow Signal is present N A gray Signal is not available Select a video card in the Detected Video Cards list Click the Reference In Mixer button Inscriber XD 200 Control Panel Use the Inscriber XD 200 control panel to configure your video card Detected Yideo Cards This list contains all video cards detected displays their status Select card in table i to with its setting 5 Eoaea e e Retin a e TT eoo 194 Jo Qu om OG o 2 Jinscriber xD 200 3876042 Gua Gua Dra Gua ok Freerun Swapping cards will Force changes to be applied Yideo Card Details Card Model Inscriber XD 200 Card Number 4014290 FPGA Version 8401 Saved Configuration General Det
309. er Bottom Right Y Registry Management Video Coordinates OK Add Rename ie I 720 Cancel O OD JO RMN D Figure 5 34 DVE Window 6 Save the template position and size e To save your changes in the same template click the Update button e To save your changes as a new template click on the Add button In the Add Item dialog enter a name and number for the DVE template Add Template Number Figure 5 35 Add New DVE Templates 354 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Output in Sequencer TitleOne includes a number of global output options that are available in every TitleOne tool For details on the global output options see Global Output on page 46 The information in this section describes the output options available in Sequencer Move Online The Run tab includes the output options for Sequencer and is only available after you move the playlist online When you switch to Online mode Sequencer renders your events and prepares them for output After all the events are rendered the Run tab becomes available Move Online To move online e Click the Offline Online toggle button on the toolbar e When you click the Offline button TitleOne moves the current playlist online and the button changes to read Online You can click the Online Offline button again to move offline EA 2 7 onm Figure 5 36 Offline Online Toggle Button e Press CTRL SHIFT 0 Move Offline To move of
310. er checkbox horizontal Flip Wertical Flip Blur Filter Filter Sharpen Filter Video Legalize Note When the Filter checkbox is SE Dither selected the filters are automatically applied to new frame grabs Footprint Removal Field 1 Footprint Removal Field 2 es Experiment with the filters to see the kind of effects you can achieve with them The Flip and Monochrome filters usually provide the most noticeable effects Image Filters The following filter effects are available in Frame Grab Repeat Field 1 Duplicates the odd numbered scan lines replacing the even numbered ones The image appears to shift down Chapter 6 Frame Grab 365 TitleOne User Guide 366 Chapter 6 Frame Grab TitleOne User Guide Repeat Field 2 Duplicates the even numbered scan lines replacing the odd numbered ones The image appears to shift up The Repeat Field filters successfully remove field flicker without blurring the image However because they completely remove one of the fields they tend to add visual steps in the image Interpolate Field 1 Computes new data for even numbered scan lines from the scan lines directly above and below The odd numbered scan lines remain unchanged Interpolate Field 2 Computes new data for odd numbered scan lines from the scan lines directly above and below The even numbered scan lines remain unchanged The Interpolate Field filters remove inter field jitter but incre
311. er of the media file assigned to it For files that are not assigned to a Shot Box Defined button you can take the files using the Shot Box Number field on the Shot Box palette Using the buttons on the toolbar display the media to take in the Media window On the Shot Box palette click the Store Play toggle button to read Store If the button reads Play the Shot Box searches for playlists On the Shot Box palette ensure that the LRN Learn Mode button is not selected Select the folio containing the media file to take The media files display in the Media window In the Shot Box Number field enter the file s media number The media number for a file is displayed below its thumbnail in the Media window To quickly set the focus to the Shot Box Number field press the FI2 key To output the file on the active output channel click the Take button on the Shot Box palette or press the ENTER key on the number pad not the ENTER key on the main keyboard Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide 429 Media Store Preferences Setting the Media Store preferences allows you to control the Store behavior e Display options for the Media window e Default title and keywords for database media files e Date format Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne To update the default values use the Preferences dialog File gt Preferences Inscriber Preferences Default Title Thumbnail Text 5
312. ered Mark In and Mark Out Points Sequencer and Media Store The points that mark the first and last frames of a clip to be played in a sequence Marquee Paint The dotted line that denotes a selection boundary See also Selection Media File Attributes A list of characteristics about a source file such as its resolution file size name and keywords Media File Thumbnail A small rendered bitmap representing a layout event or other full size media file A thumbnail is used to give a good representation of what a source file looks like without producing a high quality image Thumbnails are used for preview purposes and media file selection Media Library CG A collection of images video clips clocks and Ports Used to quickly transfer media between layouts and to create a collection of common layout items Media Number Media Store A unique number assigned to each media file when it is browsed or added to a Media Store database Media Store Module that is a searchable database of still images clips and animations that can be used in other modules Media Window Media Store The window displaying thumbnail images from the Media Store folios Merge Paint Composites or combines selected layers in an image into a single layer Merge Up and Merge Down merge the current layer with the one above or below it Merge Visible merges all layers currently visible on screen Merge All merg
313. eriment some footage of everyday objects that seem to have saturated colors was shot with a camcorder Import the realworld tga file in the TitleOne Paint Examples folder On the Color tab switch to the HLS color model Select the Color tab Color Picker tool and drag it around the image As you drag the Eye Dropper look at the colors being selected Notice that the saturation values for the colors are fairly low This shows what the real world looks like when viewed by a video camera Chapter 8 Paint 503 TitleOne User Manual RGB Color Gamut and Gamma 504 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Figure 8 37 Real World Saturation Device gamuts describe the available colors that can be displayed on a particular device The RGB color gamut describes the available colors in video and on the computer Orange and yellow colors are in limited supply in the RGB gamut which makes it difficult to select variations of yellow and orange Understand the Calibration Process In order to create stunning video legal images easily you should calibrate the three components you need to create view and output your images The three components are Frame Buffer Output Monitor and Computer Monitor Providing complete step by step instructions for the calibration process is beyond the scope of this manual but this topic introduces the concepts and the general steps involved in setting up your system for creating the most usable Paint images Th
314. erlapping If you try to enter aligned text that will overlap the text in another tab stop the text is automatically adjusted to prevent the overlap 4 To allow your text to overlap clear the Text may Not Overlap on the Tab Stops checkbox 5 Click the Close button to close the Tab Editor Delete a Tab Stop Delete tab stops in your text objects either by dragging them off the CG Ruler or by using the Tab Editor To delete a tab stop with the CG Ruler Select a text object 2 Select a tab stop in the CG Ruler and drag it off the edge of the ruler To delete tab stops with the Tab Editor Click the Modify Tab Stops button in the CG Editor toolbar then select the Modify Tab Stops button The Tab Editor opens In the Tab Editor select the tab stop you want to delete in the Tab List Click the Delete button The tab stop is deleted from the list Click the Close button to close the Tab Editor Show Tabs Modify Tabs Stops A Se Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 129 130 Graphic Objects Graphic objects are used to add colorful broadcast Bound Comer elements behind text such as lower thirds and panels Oval Rectangle wedge Spline Use the graphic tools in the Tools palette to create simple shapes such as ovals rectangles wedges and arcs The polygon and spline tools allow you to create LA el e E Le more complex objects that consist of multiple bezier curves Rectangle Round Arc Polyg
315. ers and print pixels are sQuare Pixel shape may seem obvious but it is important because in the world of video and television pixels are usually nof square Video pixels are actually slightly rectangular so when you output images to video your circles become ellipses and your squares become rectangles Pixel shape is determined by the aspect ratio Pixel aspect ratio is defined as the relationship between the width and height of a pixel Computer monitor pixel aspect ratio is 1 1 Television and video output ratios are not 1 1 The output picture aspect ratio depends on the standard NTSC PAL or HDTV you are creating the image for Some older frame buffers let you define the output resolution separately The picture aspect ratio for NTSC and PAL is 4 3 width height For HDTV the picture aspect ratio is 16 9 Paint automatically corrects your images for the current video aspect ratio so your images do not appear distorted when output to video Paint provides a group of video legal filters on the Filter tab These filters allow you to identify illegal colors and provide several ways of converting them to video safe colors for NTSC or PAL See Work with Filters on page 483 for details Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual 501 Understand Video Color When you are working with graphics it is sometimes difficult to tell which colors in your image may be illegal The result of illegal colors is not as severe as it used to be
316. es Open ViaBuilder by selecting Start gt All Programs gt Harris gt TitleOne gt Utilities gt ViaBuilder For information on using ViaBuilder select Help gt Contents in the ViaBuilder utility Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual 5 Work with Files in TitleOne TitleOne allows you to save individual layouts or entire playlists as a single file optimized for video output Any image video and font files used in your layouts are saved as referenced files When you save your working files in TitleOne the path to any image or video files is saved rather than a copy of the image or font file Since TitleOne uses referenced files it is important that you setup your system properly before you start creating playlists and layouts in TitleOne Make Transferring Setup your system before you start working in TitleOne to ensure that Layouts Easy transferring TitleOne layouts or playlist files to another system is easy Since TitleOne references all image and video files used in your layout you should save all of your resources in a central folder on your DA drive If you move the file to another system you must place the folder on a drive with the same letter in this case the DA drive Use My Computer or Windows Explorer to navigate to the DA drive on your TitleOne system 2 Select File gt New gt Folder to add a new folder to your DA drive You should store all your image and media files used in your layouts in the n
317. es all the layers in the image Monochrome Filter CG Paint and Frame Grab A color adjustment filter that performs a luminance conversion Images are converted to 8 bit grayscale See also Grayscale Monochrome Logo An export option in Paint to save a monochrome I bit logo Mosaic Filter Animation A motion filter that makes an object appear more pixelated or less pixelated over time This filter is often used to blur out a person s face to disguise their identity Mosaic width and height numbers range from 0 to 100 Motion Path Animation A sequence of points along a spline that an object goes through to create movement Motion Template Animation Preset motion effects that you can apply to any text or graphic object Motion templates include position filter spline and timing information for each keyframe in the path Motion Template Registry Animation A library of preset motion effects that you can apply to existing paths Multiple Board System A system with more than one frame buffer Multi Page Crawls A single crawl created from multiple events The output plays as a smooth continuous crawl but each page is actually an individual event in the Sequencer Playlist Creating multi page crawls requires both the CG and Sequencer tools Multi Page Rolls A single roll created from multiple events The output plays as a smooth continuous roll but each page is actually an individual e
318. es for controlling output Manual Timed GPI Time Code and PC Clock Table 5 8 Available Trigger Types Trigger Description Manual Waits for an operator to press the SPACEBAR to trigger the next event The current event remains on screen until the next event is triggered Timed Plays each event sequentially for the set duration Once Sequencer reaches the event in point the event is triggered The Timed trigger starts the clock at 00 00 00 00 GPI Trigger Waits for an operator to press the external GPI button to trigger the next event The current event remains on screen until the next event is triggered Time Code Uses an external time code source to trigger events When the time code source reaches the event in point the event is triggered PC Clock Uses the system clock to trigger events When the system clock reaches the event in point the event is triggered Chapter 5 Sequencer 337 TitleOne User Guide Trigger Type Menus You can select a trigger from the Trigger Type drop down list on the Event Editor tab or the group header right click menu Trigger Type right click menu Effect 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 11 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 GPI Trigger v om Special Segment cu ar Program op Event Editor Run Effect Settings Audio Mask Renderer Animation Cut 01000 Special Segment E toca DISK Fr Soft 50 remote M 00 05
319. es od 386 Mee 386 Media Store Databases c occococcocccccnc ee es 388 Create a Database o o nnnn ias 388 create a DataDase OCA OI ati ltda 388 AGO Browsed TES ads eee Strict ter Mora oie 389 Ada FAME GPS en et nee Ee Ne Ae BROT ekte 391 Add Files trom Other leie 392 Add Files from Other Applications 392 View Files Selected for Build EEN 392 Set Tes aNd KOM sanere 393 SC CHSC KEM sca ee 394 ME UUS 395 SEU Medi Ee e EE 398 Bukta Database NN 400 VEN Database FIES Lua 401 Collection FS va 402 Se Upan Elie RRE le 402 SWIICA C rrent Database ananas 403 Fx Database NS NENNE 404 REDI a Database Lura eee 404 Recovera Dalaba SS vene ea 404 Update ThumbnailS oia rs Aia 406 Scan Res TOT E ele EE 406 Resize TND ee ee eege 407 SOA Media FIS se 407 EIRENE A SI E EE 408 Database OOS EE 408 eler TE SN 408 EL Te e EE 409 PSN 410 Decio Media FIGS a a Sd 411 Delete a Flem DISK A a lI a eh O 411 Delete a Media File from a Database ccoocconccocccocccocccocnnococonnnnnnononnnnnncnoncnnnrnnnronaronnncnnncnnnnnns 412 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide XXi Search for Media cosa a id da 413 lo e eE E E Ne 413 Set Up a Simple Search rnrannnonnnnnrnnnnnvnnnnnvnnnnvnnnnnnnanevnnnnsnnanennnnnennnanennnnnsnnnnssnnnnrnnanennnnnnnse 414 SCL Upan Advanced Search a ic 415 RS je 116 01 e AAA o A E muae ENEE ER 416 Date TE 416 Find a File Using the Shot Box Palette ccoooc
320. essing SHIFT ALT click sets just the selected eye as the clone source As you paint only the eye is cloned Remember to clear the selected area before you begin cloning The CTRL key and Align checkbox on the Brush tab change how the clone destination is set Enabling the Align option prevents a new destination point from being set each time you begin painting with the Clone tool allowing you to stop and resume painting while creating a seamless clone If the Align option is not enabled pressing the CTRL key as you begin cloning has the same effect For example if you are cloning an eye but realize your brush is too big you can stop painting and resize your brush Then as you begin to paint with the Clone tool again hold CTRL to continue the clone where you left off If Align is selected holding CTRL temporarily disables the Align option This lets you set a new destination point for your clone without having to clear the Align checkbox Chapter 8 Paint 481 TitleOne User Manual Tile Checkbox Clone Fill Tool 482 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual The Tile checkbox forces Paint to tile the clone source information throughout the layer For example if you have selected a beetle and set it as your clone source cloning with the Tile option enabled clones the beetle over and over again as you drag the Clone tool throughout the layer If you are using an entire image or layer as your clone source Paint tiles the image
321. et the edge s transparency Depth and Shadow Switch to the Depth and Shadow tab within the Attributes tab to change the appearance of the clock s depth and shadow Set the size and angle of the clock s depth property using the Depth field and the Angle field 2 Select the depth s color from the Color drop down list and drag the Transparency slider to set the face s transparency 3 Set the offset and angle of the clock s shadow using the Shadow Offset field and the Angle field 4 Set the shadow s blur with the Blur control 5 Select the shadow s color from the Color drop down list and drag the Transparency slider to set the shadow s transparency Scale Clock In the Attributes tab change the width and height of the clock using the Width and Height fields Clear the Maintain Aspect Ratio checkbox to change the width and height of the clock independently You can also select a constraint method These methods determine how your clock object behaves when its size is changed Table 3 14 Clock Constraint Methods Button Description The clock content is sized to fill the object The object becomes the size of the clock content Table 3 14 Clock Constraint Methods Continued Button Description Maintaining the object s current width the lower boundary 77 of the object moves to fit the clock content Maintaining the object s current width the upper boundary GH of the object moves to fit the clock content Mainta
322. ew folder 3 Give the folder a meaningful name like TitleOneLayoutFiles When you start working in TitleOne you should save all your resource files in this folder If you setup your system with a central folder for storing all of your layouts playlists image files and media files you ensure that transferring layouts to other systems is easy The following graphic displays a sample central folder located on the system DA drive fr TitleOneLayoutFiles File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back d Ki p Search Er Folders HEN Address B D TitleOneLayoutFiles Name Size Type Date Modified File and Folder Tasks A Animations File Folder 6 7 2006 11 47 AM 3 Mile a mme fidir images File Folder 6 7 2006 11 46 AM Layouts File Folder 6 7 2006 11 46 AM d dea this folder to the Logos File Folder 6 7 2006 11 47 AM E Share this folder Playlists File Folder 6 7 2006 11 46 AM Textures File Folder 6 7 2006 11 47 AM Video File Folder 6 7 2006 11 47 4M Other Places A Figure 1 2 Sample Central Work Folder 6 Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual Saving Files If you reference media files from various locations on your system rather than from a central folder it becomes difficult to ensure all of your referenced files will transfer with your layout or playlist Transfer Your Central Folder to a New System To move the central folder complete the following steps Navigate to your central TitleOne resource fo
323. ext object with the Selection tool you are be automatically placed in Edit Mode In Edit Mode a text cursor is placed within the text object allowing you to select and edit the text inside the object Press the ESC key to switch to Selection Mode It can be useful to insert logos and video clips into text objects Inserted media adopt the style and size of the object text and they stay within the text as the object is moved Feature Note You can use video clips only if you have the Clip option enabled on your system Select the Selection tool in the Tools palette You must use the Selection tool to insert media into text objects If you use the Pointer tool instead the media is applied to the face of the text object See Image Treatment on page 161 to learn about adding a logo to the face of an object and see Active Texture Treatment on page 164 to learn about adding a video clip to the face of an object Character Map Select the text object you want to insert the media Libraries into A blinking text cursor appears inside the object ses Media Switch to the Media tab of the CG Libraries palette Je 7 If the media you want to use is not already stored in RK one of the library boxes see The Media Library on gt A page 177 to learn how to add media to the Media l e Library Pai Grab the media box containing your media and drag it to the text object v de E Menur Drop the media in
324. eyboard not the number pad ENTER key Note If you press the number pad ENTER key the layout plays on the program channel The number pad ENTER key immediately outputs the selected layout 7 Use one of the following methods to preview or play the event e To preview the event click the Preview button on the Shot Box palette e To play the event click the Take button on the Shot Box palette Program Preview Palette The Program Preview palette controls output to individual channels A thumbnail of the currently setup event displays on the Preview palette A thumbnail of the currently playing event displays on the Program palette Note The preview channel is not available in TitleOne Offline You can use the Program Preview palette to complete the following actions Table 5 3 Program Preview Channel Actions Action Preview Output Clear Screen Content Description To preview the selected event drag the event to the Preview palette To output the selected event drag the event to the Program palette You can also press ENTER on the number pad To clear the program channel or preview channel click the CLR button above the palette Chapter 5 Sequencer 311 TitleOne User Guide Organize the Playlist Use the TitleOne tools to add events to your playlist and then use Sequencer to organize your events into a sequence for output When you organize the playlist in Sequencer you can name events add new ev
325. f 28 your object from black and white to color or to change the object from one color to another between keyframes Tint jo E Minimum and maximum values for Tint Hue and Hue o e Saturation o Saturation are 255 Luminance adjusts both the brightness value and the contrast value of an object over time You can use BES e Luminance as a lighting effect where the light seems to move from one letter to another or one object to another pati over time Contrast jo gt 3D Effects 3D Effects apply pre defined motion effects to your animation The 3D effects are located on the 3D Effects tab and include the following motions Squish Flop Peels Curls Blinds Twist Shatter Ripple Torus and Blackhole The 3D Effects tab displays thumbnail folders of the available motion effects Placement Shape Filter 3D Effects Spline Time Templates Start Over End y Al SES EE Remove Effect Figure 4 120 3D Effects Tab Figure 4 121 Motion Options Each 3D effects folder contains individual thumbnails showing a variety of motion options To view the animated variations for a particular 3D effect simply select that folder gt Split LR op Bottarn a we Figure 4 122 Animated Thumbnails Chapter 4 Animation 297 TitleOne User Manual 298 3D Effect Options Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Before you apply 3D effects to your animation you need to select the options that de
326. ference In Mixer y lo Test Pattern Configure Audio Input Mixer Output Use Discrete AES input Live input only Discrete AES O Use Embedded input O Mix software audio over live input O Embedded Discrete AES C Enable audio capture O Software audio only O No output Secondary input mix mode O No output Monitor Level 1 100 1000 Embedded Audio Status Discrete AES Input Status Channel Formatting ok Group 1 GNA AES Input 1 2 Organize 8 channels into ox Group 2 CONIA AES Input 3 4 4 Stereo Pairs CDNA AES Input 5 6 5 1 Surround 1 Stereo Pair CONIA AES Input 7 8 7 1 Surround Live input audio will come from the discrete AES audio input jacks The live input will pass through the mixer unchanged Output from the mixer will be sent out the discrete AES outputs Embedded audio will pass through Apply Changes Figure 1 24 Audio Configuration Options In the Input section use the options to select where you are receiving the audio Discrete AES input or Embedded input To capture incoming discrete or embedded audio from the XD 200 select the Enable Audio Capture checkbox Depending on the capabilities of your capture application you can route this audio through Phoenix or capture it to disk Select the Secondary Input Mix Mode checkbox to mix all audio inputs and output them on audio output I For example if your system is configured with 4 stereo pairs stereo inputs 2 3 and 4 will be mixed with s
327. ferently than other channels when you select it With RGB and selection channels the red green blue or selected portions of the image appear white in the selected channel thumbnail and are surrounded by the selection marquee when you close the Select Channel dialog When you select the alpha channel the opaque areas of your image are selected not the transparent areas If this is confusing for you you can invert the selection with the Invert Channel checkbox in the Select Channel dialog or with the Invert button on the Select tab Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual 499 Understand Video Images When editing any image you need to take many variables into account including the constraints and benefits ot the medium you are working in Computers have two general image types vector and bitmap each with their own limitations Video like any other medium has its peculiarities and design challenges Vector Based Images Raster or Bitmap Images Resize Bitmaps Design Challenges Vector based images describe objects mathematically In many well known vector based programs like CorelDRAW and Adobe Illustrator you can tell when an object is vector based by the aliased edges CG differs from these packages because the text and graphic object edges are always anti aliased even though they are vector based Raster images also known as bitmaps describe objects by pixels These pixels are arranged in a grid or ra
328. field Edit Playlist Options You can access the playlist edit options in the following locations e Playlist menu e Playlist toolbar e Playlist right click menu Chapter 5 Sequencer 313 TitleOne User Guide e Sequencer toolbar e Sequencer right click menu Playlist menu Sequencer toolbar File Edit Playlist Tools Help Fh LORDA ADD O EEE ES 27 coe Manual Se 00 00 DO Undo Cut Copy Paste Alt 5hift Z Take Event NumPad Enter Clear Ctrl Shift NumPad Enter Setup Event Take Event Clear NumPad Minus Key ad Enter Ctrl Shift NumPad Enter Log Event Down CtrlHL Log Event Down Cl Log Event Up CtrlH Shift L CtrlH Shift L Log Default Event Ctrl Left Click or Ctrl Shift G Log Default Event Ctrl Shift G Change Render File Name Ctrl J Change Render File Name d Navigate CtrlH 5hift 1 i Chi CtrlHShift 3 lavigate Renumber All Render File Names Cut Event Alt Shift x z Copy Event Alt Shift C 2 bl il 100 00 00 00 100 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 Paste Event Alt 5hift V crawl text crawl text crawl tCul SE DE sg 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 EE Producer cu Paste Special 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 Insert Group Header Cla Delete Group Heade Ctrl U Ctrl T 00002 Next Event Alt PgDn Previous Event Alt PgUp First Event Alt Home Alt End Ctrl Q Ctrl Select Al
329. filled in Chapter 8 Paint 463 TitleOne User Manual Use the Background Color 464 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Table 8 10 Color Tools Tool Name Description Linear e Fills the selection with a linear gradient BS Gradient using foreground and background colors CH Radial e Fills the selection with a radial gradient Gradient using foreground and background colors N Line e Draws a line e Line width is specified in the Width field The gradient tools are the only tools that use both the Foreground and Background colors All other tools use only the Foreground color You can temporarily switch these tools to the Background color by holding the ALT key while you paint Holding the ALT key when you apply the gradient tools reverses the gradient direction Make Selections In Paint you can edit an entire layer at once or you can specify which areas of the layer you wish to work on To work only on a particular area of an layer you must first select it Once you have made a selection you can import export modify and move the selection outline or you can modify transform and apply filters to the selection contents Select Tab You can make complex selections using the Add Subtract and Intersect Selection options on the Select tab You can invert a selection add or remove edge pixels change the degree to which pixels are selected or select only the pixels around the edge of the selection See Modify Selec
330. fline e Click the Offline Online toggle button on the toolbar When you click the Online button TitleOne moves the current playlist offline and the button changes to read Offline You can click the Online Offline button again to move online FRE GR Wun Figure 5 37 Offline Online Toggle Button e Press CTRL SHIFT O Chapter 5 Sequencer 355 TitleOne User Guide Select Events 356 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Online Folders When you move online TitleOne renders your events first and then displays the rendered file on output The rendered files are saved in a folder that uses the name of your playlist For example if your playlist is called MorningShow scribelist the online folder is called morningShow OnlineFiles The online folder is placed in the same location as your scribelist file You can use the Preferences dialog to change the default location for your online files Am Q N Select File gt Preferences In the Preferences dialog switch to the Sequencer tab Click the Browse button below the On Line Output Directory field In the Select On Line Output Directory dialog select the new folder for your online files and click OK The new folder displays Click OK in the Preferences dialog to apply the change Inscriber Preferences Selected Text Unselected Text Selected Postage Border Unselected Postage Border Group 1 Background Color Group 2 Background Color Group 3 Background Color Gro
331. from the background Figure 3 38 Beveled Edges with Bevel Values of 0 50 0 and 0 50 In the Settings section of the Edge tab select the bevel colors for your selected edge a Click the first Color drop down list to select the first color for the edge The first color is applied to the inside of the edge closest to the face b Click the second Color drop down list to select the second color for the edge The second color is applied to the outside of the edge c Use the first Color slider to set how far from the inside of the edge that the color gradient begins d Use the second Color slider to set how far from the outside of the edge that the color gradient ends 2 Enter values in the Transparency fields to set the transparency of the first and second colors 3 Use the Bevel control to set the apparent curvature of the bevel Lower values make the bevel appear to be concave and greater values make the bevel appear convex Chapter 3 CG 167 TitleOne User Guide Tube Edge The Tube treatment gives edges a rounded appearance The edges appear to be tubes surrounding the object s face Figure 3 39 Tube Edges with Bevel Values of 0 50 0 and 0 50 In the Settings section of the Edge tab select the tube colors for the selected edge a Click the first Color drop down list to select the first color for the edge The first color is applied to the middle of the edge b Click the second Color drop down list
332. fset the timecode for your Time Code group This feature is helpful if you see a slight delay between the system output and the timecode input Select Edit gt Set Timecode Offset The TimeCode Offset dialog opens 2 Enter the amount of time you want to offset the events in hh mm ss ff Entering a time value adds the time to the timecode For example if you enter 00 00 30 00 30 seconds are added to the timecode MM TimeCode Offset Timecode Offset 00 00 30 00 Forward OK Cancel Figure 5 28 TimeCode Offset Dialog 3 To remove decrease the time from the timecode enter the time in hh mm ss ff and click the Forward button to read Reverse When Reverse displays the time is removed from the timecode For example if you enter 00 00 30 00 30 seconds are removed from the timecode Use the PC Clock The PC Clock trigger uses the internal clock on your system to trigger each Trigger event Time is measured in 24 hour format Events are triggered once the system clock reaches the event in point Select the PC Clock Trigger Use the options on the group header or the Event Editor tab to select the PC Clock trigger Select the group header 2 Select the trigger using one of the following methods e On the group header right click on the current trigger and select PC Clock from the right click menu e On the Event Editor tab select PC Clock from the Trigger Type drop down list Chapter 5 Sequencer 347 Title
333. g Description The Shot Box palette is available in Sequencer and Media Store and allows you to select and output single events or media files For details see Shot Box Palette on page 56 Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne The RapidFire feature is available in CG and Sequencer and allows you update and take layouts with the speed you need for live coverage For details see RapidFire on page 60 The Overlay utility controls the output of CG objects saved as scribe files Overlay displays the objects on their own layer over the current running playlist For details see Overlay on page 73 The Strata utility plays what appears to be separate channels as one channel on output This enables real time compositing of multiple virtual channels into a single physical channel Use Strata to schedule and play events independently on separate layers at the same time For details see Strata Configuration Utility on page 84 Chapter 2 Output 45 TitleOne User Guide 46 Global Output The global output options are always available in TitleOne whether you are working in CG Sequencer Media Store Animation Editor Frame Grab or Paint Look through the options to find the best output solution for you Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne TitleOne Output The following table describes the global output options available in Options TitleOne
334. g on the alpha channel with non alpha tools you can only add opacity There is no place to specify a value for the color you paint on the alpha channel so Paint always paints with white The results are the same as if you were painting with the alpha tools Understand Channels in Paint Channels add an extra dimension to Paint and are used for a variety of tasks In Paint each layer contains four channels Red Green Blue and Alpha What are Channels Visualize Channels How Does Paint Use Channels The Select Channel Dialog Images are made up of a series of channels red green blue and sometimes alpha Each channel is an 8 bit image that represents a different part of the full image For example the red channel contains all the red pixels in the image When you add the three 8 bit RGB channels you get a 24 bit full color image Most image editing applications work with 24 bit RGB images In Paint you add a fourth channel alpha The alpha channel contains all the transparent pixels When you add alpha to an RGB image you are adding 8 more bits so you get a 32 bit image Channels can be represented by a grayscale image For example if you open a 32 bit image in Paint and select the Alpha radio button on the View tab to view the image alpha channel it appears as a grayscale Black represents full transparency while white represents full opacity Anything between these two extremes is represented by a shade of gray Pai
335. g the following e Title e Keywords e Key information such as file type and size e Memo database media files only e Transition information type direction and duration e Default output channel e Video clip information mark in and mark out points duration and loop setting The metadata for browse mode is distinct from the metadata for database mode so you can set different attribute values for a media file in the two modes The metadata file is created in the same directory as the corresponding media file The metadata filename is the same as that of the media file with an xm_scribe file extension For example if you browse or add to a database the file imagel bmp Media Store creates a metadata file named imagel bmp xm_scribe The metadata file is updated if you edit the attributes of a media file in browse mode or database mode so the metadata is always up to date To create a metadata file for a media file in an existing Media Store database edit the file attributes for example append a new keyword to the keyword list You can easily recover a lost or corrupt database by recreating the database and adding your media files Media Store uses the metadata files to recover the Attributes palette settings for all your files For more information see Fix Database Issues on page 404 Chapter 7 Media Store 387 TitleOne User Guide 388 Media Store Databases A Media Store database is a searchable collection
336. ganize events into categories and to apply the trigger information for the events in the group The trigger applies to all the events in a group Select the first event you want included in the new group 2 Select Playlist gt Insert Group Header CTRL T The group header is inserted above the selected event Group headers Effect Options w e pe O foon osx oo om00 00 segment rtro w w po M ETICA fest guest ke mm fo O ooo orm ges fusreente ke steil ro BY Oomonomo0 om000000 00002101 4 beondget a po O ooo amer egene Cut Still Fr O 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 i i Default Group Timed WW 00 05 00 00 00 11 12 00 00 06 12 00 gt fem em fo A CIT Go bent ke sm bn mss 0000 000000 Crawl 0 00 06 08 00 00 11 12 00 00 05 04 00 Page Formatted Rol ro Manual Y 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 aa ka III RH TT ca ka O ocn om000000 o0000400 ca Ro _ foco omom0000 00 00 0000 ca kr O ooo omo000 00 00 00 0400 Figure 5 15 Group Headers in Sequencer Playlist All the events that fall between the new group header and the next header belong to the same group Name Groups To help identify your groups you can name your groups using the options on the Event Editor tab Select your group header 2 Switch to the Event Editor tab 3 Enter the group name in the Label field Effect 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 I 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 04
337. ge See also Channel Redraw Updates the screen display Complex layouts or images may take longer to redraw than simpler ones You can force a redraw by pressing CTRL D Reduce Flicker Filter Paint A video clean up filter that blurs the image in the vertical direction This reduces flicker caused by sharp changes in luminance between pixels in the vertical direction Referenced Media File Media Store A media file that is referenced not included in a Media Store database Media Store creates a pointer to the media file location The Glossary TitleOne User Guide location can be on disk network volume or compact disc When you display the media file Media Store will locate the file or prompt you to load the disk or compact disc Registry Manager CG A utility that helps organize registry template files It can create new registries manage existing registries and copy templates between registries Registry Motion Template See Motion Template Registry Registry News Edit See News Edit Registry Registry Templates See Template Registry Relative Position Animation A template option that uses the current placement of the selected keyframe as the starting point for the motion template Remote Render Sequencer Renders the event to a remote location during output Image display latency depends on network or CD ROM access time and image size Remove Flicker Filter Paint
338. ge file See Set Media Options on page 398 You can edit the title and keywords assigned to a media file after you build it into a database You can also add a memo to a database media file For more information see Update Thumbnails on page 406 Spell Checker When you are building media into a database use the Spell Checker functionality to verify the spelling of the title and keywords By using correct spelling you can more easily find files in the database To open the Build Media Store dialog click the Add to the Store button on the Media Store palette The Build dialog lists all the files in the Build set See Figure 7 11 on page 390 and Figure 7 12 on page 391 In the Build Set area select a file To verify the spelling of text in the Title or Keywords field click the Spell Checker button beside the field Y If any text is unrecognized the Suggestions dialog opens Suggestions Unknown Word Ignore Replace Suggestion Suggestion List Add to Default Options Quit Checking Figure 7 15 Suggestions Dialog 4 Using the Suggestions dialog review all unrecognized words e To replace the unknown word with the word in the Suggestion field click the Replace button e To replace the unknown word with a word in the Suggestion List click the replacement word and then click the Replace button e To add the unknown word to the dictionary click the Add or Add to Default button e To update h
339. ging it up or down in the list 8 To replace an item with another scribe file select the item you want to replace from the list click the Choose button and then select the new file in the Open dialog 9 To remove an item from Overlay select the file from the list and then click the Delete key on your keyboard Save a Set of Items Once you have multiple layouts opened in Overlay you can save the list of items as a single overlay file Saving the list allows you to group related files together When you open the overlay file all the scribe files open in Overlay Add your three items to Overlay by selecting a line clicking the Setup button and then choosing a file 2 To save the list of items as one file select File gt Save Set and save the list in the Save As dialog Load a Set of Items After you save a set of items in Overlay you can load the overlay file for output I To load a list of items select File gt Load Set 2 Open the overlay file in Open dialog You can use the options in Overlay to delay the output of an item advance or delay the clock time fade items on off and loop crawl or animation items Fade Item On Off Use the Fade options to fade an item on and off screen By default items cut on and off Select an item from the list Click the Setup button to expand the setup options To fade the item on screen check the Fade In checkbox Enter the duration of the fade in frames To fad
340. gram CLR 01001 local crawl iW oaos rames o j sofe so S Remote A 00 05 00 00 a 00 10 04 00 a 00 05 04 00 Program E nol j Timed In Point field Duration field Out Point field Figure 5 17 Event Timing Fields 3 Enter an end time for the event in the Out Point field Time is measured in HH MM SS FF The timing fields update in the playlist 4 Continue setting the duration for each event in the group The timing fields update on the event lines and in the group header The options in Sequencer do not allow for spaces between events Once the event out point is reached during playback the event is removed from screen and the next event displays To add a space between events you can use a blank event Select the event in the playlist that will come before the blank event Chapter 5 Sequencer 335 TitleOne User Guide 2 Right click on the event and select the Log Event Down CTRL L option A blank event is added below the selected event 3 Select the blank event and switch to the Event Editor tab 4 If you are using a time based trigger use the In Point and Out Point fields to set the duration of blank event Time is measured in HH MM SS FF 336 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Select a Trigger for Output Trigger types control how you output your playlist once you go online The trigger type applies to all the events in a group Trigger Types TitleOne includes five trigger typ
341. grounds are images used behind CG text Collages combine and blend multiple images into a single composition Collages can be used for many purposes such as backgrounds and over the shoulder graphics The selection tools make it easy to edit parts of images To edit a certain area of an image simply make a selection around the area You can also import and export selections for later use See Modify Selections on page 469 for details You can apply transformations to an entire image or to selected areas of an image Paint has five transformation tools Move Scale Skew Rotate and Freeform See Work with Channels on page 495 for details Create Textures and Patterns Apply Filters and Create Effects Work with Layers Work on Channels Textures and patterns can accentuate text and graphics in CG and can also be used as backgrounds You can use the image editing tools to create seamless textures for use in CG See Create Textures on page 488 for details Paint s image filters let you adjust image color and create a variety of effects You can clean up frame grabs colorize black and white photographs or legalize image colors for display to video You can apply filters to an entire image or layer to selected areas of an image to imported files or images transferred into Paint from the Scrapbook See Work with Filters on page 483 for details You can create complex and stunning images with layers For example you can us
342. h Show Filename in Job Strip Open the Most Recently Used Job on Launch Write Scrapbook Items to Disk Description Sets the path order that TitleOne uses to search for layout media TitleOne searches this path when looking for referenced materials in layouts Displays the rendered image filename in the playlist instead of the event number Clear this option to display event numbers in the playlist You must check this option to use the Navigate dialog Opens the most recently used playlist when you launch TitleOne Allows you to save individual Scrapbook items to disk Character Generator Tab Option Scale Type Warn Layout Changes Default Sample Strings Language Dictionaries Table 9 3 Character Generator Tab Preferences Description Sets the type of scaling for layouts opened in a different resolution than they were created in e Letterbox fits the layout into the new workspace without any change in aspect ratio e Crop scales and centers the layout to fill the workspace cropping the outside edges e Size To Fit adjusts the aspect ratio of the layout to fill the new workspace Sets TitleOne to warn you before you select a new template in CG The warning reminds you that the new template deletes the existing CG content in the workspace You can copy text from the existing layout to the new template Clear this option to avoid the new template warning Sets the default text strings dis
343. h a Selection Boundary In large layouts with overlapping objects it is sometimes easiest to select objects with a tree view See The Layout Tree View on page 194 for more information Select Objects and Text with the Keyboard Use the ARROW keys and the TAB key to quickly navigate between objects in a layout Chapter 3 CG 183 TitleOne User Guide Position Objects Select an object with either the Pointer or the Selection Pointer tool Tool 2 Use the ARROW keys to navigate between objects or to navigate within paragraph objects N h e If the entire object is selected press the DOWN ARROW key to select the next object in the layout Press the UP ARROW key to select the previous Selection object in the layout Tool e If the text cursor is within a paragraph object press the DOWN ARROW key to move down through the paragraph lines and press the UP ARROW key to move up through the lines When the cursor is on the last line press the DOWN ARROW key to move to the next item in the layout Pressing the UP ARROW key when the cursor is on the first line selects the previous item in the layout To select text within a text object hold the SHIFT key while pressing the ARROW keys A range of text is selected 3 Use the TAB key to navigate between objects Switch the Selection Mode before using TAB to navigate between text objects otherwise a tab stop is added to your text a When your text cursor is blinking in a text objec
344. hat adjusts the shape of an object by twisting it around either the x or y axis U V Upconvert The process of converting a lower resolution image or input signal to a higher resolution For example a standard definition 480i signal is upconverted to a high definition 1080i signal Value The shade of a color Increasing or decreasing the value of a color is like adding or removing black pigment Value must be 100 for a color to be fully saturated When value is 0 the color is completely black Vector Based Image See eps file Vectorscope A device used to adjust the color vectors when calibrating the frame buffer Vertical Blanking Interval VBI The period of time when the video signal is at the blank level causing the electron beam not to appear when it sweeps back from the bottom to the top of the screen A VBI occurs almost instantly Glossary 581 TitleOne User Guide 582 Vertical Flip Filter CG Paint and Frame Grab An image filter that flips the image top to bottom In Paint the vertical flip filter is accessed through the Transform tab VGA Video Graphics Array A computer video adapter which can display 16 colours at a resolution of 640x480 or 256 colours at 320x200 via Format See via file ViaBuilder TitleOne utility that creates an animation from a series of individual animation frames created with an external program You can import via animations into G Scribe to use
345. he Event Editor tab Mz 3 4 Program Figure 2 27 Program Buttons on the Event Editor Tab e Inthe TitleOne CG module select an event in the playlist and select a channel in the Program Preview palette e In Automation Interface the available channels are listed for each event If the layers are listed by letters A corresponds to layer one B corresponds to layer two and so on 9 Output your layouts Output displays on the corresponding layers of the assigned video boards a Click the Online toggle button on the toolbar to go online When the button is selected you are online b On the Run tab in Sequencer click the Run Job button to run your job from the selected event Use the SPACEBAR to trigger the next event d To stop output click the Stop button on the Run tab Use Strata to The following sections describe how to use the Strata Utility to configure Configure Output your output Chapter 2 Output 85 TitleOne User Guide 86 TitleOne User Guide Welcome Screen The Welcome screen provides an overview of the Strata Utility Read the overview 2 Click the Next button Detect Installs Screen Strata automatically detects your Strata enabled applications and the video boards on your system In the Applications Detected area verify that all your applications are listed Application Detected Figure 2 28 Detected Applications If an application is not listed refer to your manual for tips on t
346. he Grab button Grab The captured image is displayed in the Frame Grab window Note The video stops playing on your video monitor after you perform a grab See Switch from Still to Live Video on page 363 Switch from Still to Live Video Key Information Filters After you grab an image the video stops playing on your video monitor Frame Grab displays the captured image You can change the display on your TV monitor between live video and the last grabbed frame e To receive live video click the Live Video button Live Video e To display the last grabbed frame click the Still Graphic button Still Graphic ih You may need to do this to compare your grab to the input signal when you are trying to decide whether the grab is okay or whether you need to change the filter options When you capture frames you can exclude the key transparency information To capture only fill information e In the External Key Capture Option area of the Attributes palette select the Fill Only option CO Fill Only External Key Capture Option To capture key and fill information Okey Fill e In the External Key Capture Option area of the Attributes palette select the Key Fill option A frame is composed of two interlaced fields separated by 1 50th or 1 60th of a second Essentially the input signal contains the even numbered scan lines followed by the odd numbered scan lines If any object in the image moves during
347. he Image Tint the color of the image by mixing it with a linear gradient Linear gradients shade from one color to another along a straight line To configure the linear gradient and tint settings use the controls in the Tint section of the tab Select the settings for the linear gradient d Click the first Color drop down list to select the first color for the gradient By default the first color is applied to the top of the element Click the second Color drop down list to select the second color for the gradient By default the second color is applied to the bottom of the element Use the first Color slider to set how far from the top of the element the gradient begins Use the second Color slider to set how far from the bottom of the element the gradient ends Increase the number of Gradient Steps to make the gradient repeat one or more times on the element This creates a bar effect when the gradient repeats Use the Angle control to rotate the gradient Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 163 Active Texture Treatment 164 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 2 Change the mix between the image and the linear gradient by entering a value in the Mix field 1 00 shows only the image and 1 00 shows only the linear gradient The Active Texture treatment applies a moving image to text or graphic objects Active Textures are usually looped video clips which add texture and motion to several objects in a layou
348. he Position amp Size options To set the DVE position use one of the following options e Slide the X Pos or Y Pos faders e Enter a value in the X Pos and Y Pos fields e Click the up or down arrows To set the DVE size use one of the following options e Slide the Width and Height faders e Enter a value in the Width and Height fields e Click the up or down arrows To crop the DVE frame use one of the following options e Slide the Left Width Top and Height faders e Enter a value in the Left Width Top and Height fields e Click the up or down arrows Click the Save Effect button above the options to save your settings Rotate the DVE If you purchased the 3D DVE option you can rotate the DVE To rotate the DVE complete the following steps 548 Appendix A DVE Switcher TitleOne User Guide Expand the DVE Effect in the Effect Name list by clicking the button beside the name Delete the DVE Apply the DVE Template in Sequencer 2 Select the DVE Device in the expanded list 3 Click the Edit DVE button to enable the Perspective options 4 To set the DVE rotation use one of the following options e Slide the X Rot or Y Rot faders e Enter a value in the X Rot and Y Rot fields e Click the up or down arrows 5 Click the Save Effect button above the options to save your settings You can delete a single DVE device or the entire effect e To delete a single DVE device expand the DVE Effect and select
349. he layout must have a path set between it and the data source Use the ODBC Administrator to connect your CG and data source Create a Database You can use any database compatible with the Microsoft ODBC database protocol including an Excel spreadsheet or a text file with CG If the database uses an MS Office application you can use external data sources without an MS Office setup on your computer if you install MDAC Microsoft Data Access Components With this package you can view run and edit a layout but you cannot make modifications to the database Chapter 3 CG 211 TitleOne User Guide 212 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide You must have access to the correct database application to modify the tagged fields within a layout or change the data source For example if the database was created using Access 2000 your computer must also use Access 2000 If the database is on a different system and the database computer is shut down CG cannot access the database For best results the database should reside on the same computer that you are using for output To create a text file database see Create a Text File Database on page 213 To create a database with a database application Using your database application enter data into the database table 2 Give the table a name e If you are using Excel complete the following steps a Highlight all the table data b Select Insert gt Name gt Define c Enter a name for th
350. he layouts for aesthetic quality when converting between the 4 3 SD aspect ratio and the 16 9 HD aspect ratio Select how your graphic elements are scaled when you convert layouts from SD to HD I In your Inscriber HD product select File gt Preferences Switch to the Character Generator tab Select one of the following Scale Types Letterbox Crop or Size To Fit e Letterbox SD 4 3 to HD 16 9 Scales and centers the SD image to fill the height of the new workspace without changing the 4 3 aspect ratio This results in black bars on the left and right of the SD image in the HD frame e Crop SD 4 3 to HD 16 9 Scales and centers the SD image to fill the width of the new workspace without changing the 4 3 aspect ratio This results in cropping the top and bottom of the SD image in the HD frame e Size To Fit SD 4 3 to HD 16 9 Scales the SD image to fit the new workspace by pulling or stretching the image to fill the HD frame This results in a slightly distorted image e Size To Fit SD 16 9 to HD 16 9 Scales the SD image to fit the new workspace by zooming the image to fill the HD frame without changing the aspect ratio This results in a slightly lower quality image as the pixels increase in size to match the larger frame 4 Click OK to save your preferences and close the dialog Conversion Limitations 5 Open your SD template or playlist A message indicates that the file will be converted and then displays
351. he mask click the Reset All to Default button Note For the mask effect to display on screen you must output from Sequencer The Renderer tab includes a hardware acceleration option for animation events The option allows you to broadcast your animations in real time without having to render them to a via file first Feature Note Hardware acceleration is a purchase option in TitleOne Switch to the Renderer tab 2 Select the Use Hardware Acceleration checkbox Chapter 5 Sequencer 331 TitleOne User Guide Loop the Animation Group Events 332 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide When you take your layout your animations will be broadcast directly to air If your animation is particularly complex it may not playback smoothly in real time Note Some filters and blur effects from the Animation Editor may appear differently than what you are used to if you select the hardware acceleration option You can set your animation events to loop during playback When you loop your animation the animation event repeats the set number of times before the next event plays Select your animation event in the Sequencer playlist 2 Switch to the Event Editor tab 3 Enter the number of loops for your animation in the Loop field The Loop value represents the total number of times that the animation will play For example if you want your animation to play 3 times enter the number 3 You can use groups to or
352. he update DER File Edit Actions Help Preview Name Delay Status 4 penalty SCRIBE 0 a o L e playerName Brad Parker Figure 2 24 Update Tagged Lines in Overlay 4 Click the Render button to update the text The yellow line returns to white indicating the updates are complete Add Remove Items The Overlay application loads and outputs CG objects saved as scribe files The scribe file contains information on how the layout item looks the position of the layout item and other formatting options I Uh W NH After creating your objects in CG save the layout as a scribe file File gt Export gt Export SCRIBE File If you are saving an animation layout save the layout in the Animation Editor as a via file File gt Import Export Animation Open Overlay Tools gt Overlay Select the line beside the I button label Click the Setup button Click Choose and open the scribe file The file loads in Overlay Select the line beside the 2 button label Chapter 2 Output 77 TitleOne User Guide 78 Prepare Items for Output Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide 7 Click Choose and open the scribe file You can open up to three scribe files at one time The preview window displays all opened scribe files in order from top top of the list to bottom bottom of the list The top layout overlaps any layouts below You can change the top to bottom order by selecting an item and drag
353. hin the field For multiple lines of text The field s width is constrained and the text gets smaller to fit the field Pressing ENTER creates a new line within the field For single lines of text on a complex path See Text Path Objects on page III for more information Chapter 3 CG 105 TitleOne User Guide Table 3 5 Text Object Tools Continued Icon Description Vertical Text For vertical text fields containing characters that are stacked on top of each other See Vertical Text Objects on page 112 for more information about vertical text To create a new text object in a layout Select the appropriate text tool from the Tools palette 2 Use the tool to add a text object to the CG workspace e When using an unconstrained text tool like the Text Field or Paragraph Field tool click the CG workspace to create the text object e When using a constrained text tool like the Text Constrained Field or Fixed Width Paragraph Field click and drag in the CG workspace to place the text object and define its length The new text object is added to the layout The object contains a blinking text cursor NN Figure 3 1 A New Text Constrained Field Edit Text Objects Use the Selection tool to edit the text inside text objects Select the Selection tool in the Tools palette ho 2 Click a text object to place a text cursor inside If the object already contains text you can select a range of text by holding do
354. hips are imported from session to session You can export all color chips by selecting File gt Import Export gt Export Color Chips You can reset the color chips to the defaults by clicking on the Reset button You do not have to worry about changing or deleting the default palette file default aco since the defaults are built into Paint Paint comes with two images containing colors from the palette files You can use these files in CG to select the same colors in both CG and Paint These files are color default amp subtle tga and color funky tga in the PaintPalettes folder To use these colors in CG import the palette file as a logo using the Logo tab Create a logo and select the palette file image as the logo Define Style Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Use the Color Chip Cursors 462 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Chips using the desired palette colors and delete the logo when you are done with it Save the layout as a template in the Templates Registry You can select add replace and delete color chips from the list The cursor changes to show you what action you are performing The following table describes how to perform each action Table 8 9 Color Chip Cursors Cursor Name How to Select cursor e Select a color click the desired ra color chip Add cursor e Adda color hold the SHIFT key and click in the last row in the color chip list Replace an existing color hold the
355. horizontally so de their right boundaries are evenly spaced Chapter 3 CG 189 TitleOne User Guide 190 Prevent Objects from Rolling or Crawling Rotate and Flip Objects TitleOne User Guide Table 3 22 Distribution Options Continued Option Description Selected Objects Bottom The objects move vertically so WI IT their bottom boundaries are evenly spaced Selected Objects Top The objects move vertically so their top boundaries are evenly spaced Selected Objects Horizontal Center The objects move eg vertically so their horizontal centers are evenly spaced Selected Objects Vertical Center The objects move n horizontally so their vertical centers are evenly spaced Lock Objects You may want to lock the position of certain objects to prevent them from being moved accidentally To lock the position of an object right click the object in the CG workspace and select the Lock Position option Unlock an object by choosing the Unlock Position option You can also lock objects using the Layout Tree View See The Layout Tree View on page 194 for more information If you want a selected object to stay motionless on a roll or crawl layout select the object switch to the Attributes tab and clear the Scroll with Crawl Roll checkbox This option is only available for objects that are completely on the first page of the layout For more information about layout types see Create Layouts on page 229
356. hout changing the image chrominance values Lightens or darkens the images based on the imported texture Third Party Filters Paint Filters not packaged with TitleOne Some third party filters can be used in Paint but they may only affect the opaque areas of the image and not the alpha channel You should test third party filters in Paint to determine how they perform See also Filters and Photoshop Filters Three Dimensional Space 3D Animation Workspace that incorporates height width and depth Objects created in the two dimensional CG workspace height and width are editable in 3D when brought into Animation Thumbnail See Media File Thumbnail Timecode Sequencer An indexing method that uniquely identifies each frame of frame based media Glossary 579 TitleOne User Guide 580 Denotes hours minutes seconds and frames elapsed for the medium HH MM SS FF Timecode Source A device usually a video playback device like a VCR that generates time codes Timecode Trigger Type Sequencer group trigger type Uses an external time code source to trigger events When the time code source reaches the event in point the event is triggered Timeline Animation A horizontal bar on the Time tab that gives a visual representation of the length of a motion path and which allows you to manipulate the amount of time an individual spline path takes to display The time is measured in frames
357. hout changing the value is the same as adding white pigment to a pure color Decreasing the value without changing the saturation is the same as adding black pigment to a pure color Hue A numeric representation of a pure color in a particular color model illegal Colors Paint Colors that force a color system to go outside its normal bounds Usually these are the result of electronically painted images rather than direct video outputs For example removing the luminance from a high intensity blue or adding luminance to a strong yellow may produce illegal colors Illuminator Pro A brand of frame buffer 564 Glossary TitleOne User Guide Image CG Images can be used as logos textures and backgrounds Media Store Any image browsed imported captured or residing in a Media Store database Animation You can fly images around in 3D space Frame Grab You can grab an image from a video feed Paint You can add alpha to an image or create a new image Image Alpha See Alpha Channel Image Attributes A list of characteristics about a source file such as its resolution file size name and keywords Image Capture See Frame Grab Image Channel See Channel Image File Format The particular storage format for image information TitleOne can import images stored in most common bitmap formats Image Filters Filters that operate on the alpha and color channels of an image
358. hts and you may also have other legal rights which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction 6 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT SHALL WE BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFITS REVENUE DATA OR DATA USE OR MACHINE USE INCURRED BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT EVEN IF WE HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OUR LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ANY LOSSES SHALL NOT EXCEED THE GREATER OF 500 AND THE AMOUNT YOU ORIGINALLY PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE Some jurisdictions do not allow these limitations or exclusions so they may not apply to you 7 United States Government Restricted Rights The enclosed Software and documentation are provided with Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government or any agency or instrumentality thereof is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision c I ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at 48 C ER 252 227 7013 or in subdivision c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights Clause at 48 C F R 52 227 19 as applicable Contractor Manufacturer is Harris Corporation 26 Peppler Street Waterloo Ontario Canada N2 3C4 8 Termination This license and your right to use this Software automatically terminate if you fail to comply with any provisions of this Agreement destroy the copies of the Software in your
359. ibutes tab Figure 3 12 Resize Text Objects with Grab Handles To change the size of an object with its grab handles Select one or more text objects in the CG Pointer workspace Tool Select the Pointer tool or the Selection tool from the Tools palette le h Click and drag one of the grab handles to resize the object Use the midpoint grab handles to resize only the vertical or horizontal dimension of the Selection object and use the corner grab handles to change Tool both the height and width When you release the mouse button CG redraws the object to the new size The handle opposite to the one you dragged remains anchored To maintain the object s aspect ratio hold the SHIFT key while dragging the grab handle To keep the object centered while changing its size hold the ALT key while dragging the grab handle Chapter 3 CG 121 TitleOne User Guide To change the size of an object with the Attributes tab Select one or more objects in the CG workspace 2 Switch to the Attributes tab in the Attributes palette 3 Click the Text Object Properties section of the tab 4 Change the values in the Height and Width fields The object formats your text depending on the constraints of its text object properties Table 3 10 Default Text Object Behavior when Resizing Object Text Object Type Text Field Text Constrained Field Paragraph Field Fixed Width Paragraph Field 122 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Gui
360. ich recognize the logo s transparent areas To learn about adding embellishments to your objects see Object Elements on page 150 Tint the original color of the image by mixing it with a treatment The tint options for logo objects are on the Face tab Select a logo object 2 Switch to the Face tab of the Attributes palette 3 Select a treatment in the Treatment drop down list For more information about treatments see Element Treatments on page 157 4 Set the color and sheen for the object s face 5 Change the mix between the logo image and the face color by dragging the Mix slider You can also enter a value in the mix field 0 shows only the logo image and 100 shows only the face color Figure 3 23 A Logo Image Mixed with a Radial Gradient Treatment You can change a logo s image by adding a new image file on the Attributes tab or by right clicking the logo and choosing the Change Image option An object s Constraint method sets the way a logo image is placed within the object s boundaries and how it behaves when the object is resized Use the Attributes tab to change the Constraint method I Select the Logo tool in the Tools palette 2 Click and drag in the CG workspace to place size and orient the empty logo object 3 Switch to the Attributes tab of the Attributes palette 4 In the Logo Constraints section of the tab select a Constraint method These methods determine how the logo object behave
361. ick the Online Offline button again to move online E E gt A G ONLINE Figure 2 6 Offline Online Toggle Button e Press CTRL SHIFT 0 Chapter 2 Output 51 TitleOne User Guide 52 Preview an Event Take a Single Event Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide You can use the Preview button on the Run tab to preview the selected event Select the event you want to preview 2 Ifyou need to press CTRL SHIFT O to move online and access the Run tab 3 Switch to the Run tab 4 Click the Preview button The event displays in the Preview palette and on your preview monitor Event Editor Run Effect Settings Audio Mask Renderer Animation Status Ready Time Code oo o0 15 14 Run Job Y Previews Stop Elapsed Time 00 00 15 15 Take Y Take aer Live Update Time Left 00 00 00 00 Number 0000 Te Live Playlist Free RAM 260805k Label Figure 2 7 Run Tab Use the Take buttons on the Run tab to take a single event Select the event you want to take 2 Ifyou need to press CTRL SHIFT O to move online and access the Run tab 3 Switch to the Run tab 4 Use the one of the following options to take your event e Click the Take Down button take on the Run tab to take the current event and load the next event to the preview channel You can also use the PLUS key on the number pad for the same effect e Select the event in the Sequencer playlist and press the PLUS
362. ics Systems Harris Broadcast Communications Division 610 Technical Support TitleOne User Guide
363. igure 7 18 Modify User Thesaurus Dialog 2 To add a new category of synonyms complete the following steps a In the Categories area click the Add button The New Category dialog opens Chapter 7 Media Store 397 TitleOne User Guide 398 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide 5 6 b In the Category field enter the category name New Category The category name is automatically added as a synonym Word Class r 8 Noun in the category GE c In the Word Class area select the GER dverb mE part of speech for the category E d Click OK To add a synonym to a category complete the following steps a In the Categories area select the category to add the synonym to b In the Synonyms area click the Add Word button c In the New Word dialog enter the new synonym Click OK New Word Figure 7 19 New Word Dialog To remove a synonym from a category complete the following steps a In the Categories area select the category to remove the synonym from b In the Synonyms area select the synonym to remove c In the Synonyms area click the Delete Word button To remove a category remove all its synonyms To save your changes to the user thesaurus click OK Set Media Options In addition to the mandatory title and keyword for each file you can specify media storage options for image files To open the Build Media Store dialog click the Add to the Store button on the Media Store palette The Bu
364. ild dialog lists all the files in the Build set See Figure 7 1 on page 390 and Figure 7 12 on page 391 2 3 In the Build Set area select a file To include the file in the database select the Include Image checkbox only image files can be included To create a reference to the file in the database clear this checkbox Including files ensures that they are available and provides fast retrieval but requires a potentially large amount of disk space on a single drive In the Image Storage area select the image size option for the file Table 7 6 Image Size Options Option Description Original Res Use default file size If the image is larger than the screen it is cut off when displayed Size to Fit Image always displays at largest size possible but maintains aspect ratio no distortion Size to Full Image fills the screen which may distort the Screen image If you include a file you can apply compression to it to reduce disk requirements In the Image Storage area select the compression option for the file Table 7 7 Image Compression Options Option Description LZW e Photographic images achieve 25 50 compression e Suitable for all files e Slowest compression method Chapter 7 Media Store 399 TitleOne User Guide 400 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide Table 7 7 Image Compression Options Option Loss Description HKF Yes e VII O Best No e Lossless mur e e O
365. in one or more News Edit Tables These tables are stored within TitleOne s template registries To learn more about registries see Template Registries on page 234 By default the Content list displays the items stored in the first News Edit Table within the current template registry This table is called O Import Text and is where text is automatically stored when you select the Import News Edit Table option You can select a different News Edit Table by selecting a different source from News Edit s Source drop down list The items in the selected News Edit Table become available in the Content list Content Source Source O Import Text h O Import Text 1 Names h Figure 3 56 Select a News Edit Table Source Create a News Edit Table Use the Template Manager to create a new News Edit Table in the current template registry Select File gt Template Manager gt News Edit Tables The Template Manager opens and displays all the News Edit Tables available for the currently selected template registry If you want to work with a different template registry click the Open button and navigate to the templates file you need to use See Template Registries on page 234 for more information about registries 2 Click the Add button to add a new News Edit Table to the template registry The Add News Edit Item dialog opens 3 Enter a number and name in the Add News Edit Item dialog and then close the dialogs
366. in your CG layouts as media objects or moving textures Video Aspect Ratio The relationship between the width and height of an image when it is sent to video The aspect ratio is different for computers and video monitors so a correction is made when images are taken to video The video aspect ratio is set in the Inscribe ini file and controlled by three values the actual aspect ratio the horizontal resolution and the vertical resolution The aspect ratio for NTSC and PAL is 4 3 the aspect ratio for HDTV is 16 9 Video Bug See Corner Logo Video Clean up Filters CG Paint and Frame Grab Inscriber filters that smooth fielded images captured from video into Glossary TitleOne User Guide non interlaced images by removing odd or even numbered scan lines Video Frame An interlaced image consisting of two separate fields odd and even numbered scan lines taken from a video signal See also Field and Interlaced Scan Video Legalize Filter CG and Frame Grab A legalize filter that performs a simple NTSC or PAL legalize depending on the settings in the General tab of the Preferences dialog to prevent out of range values See also Legalize Filters Video Safe Title Area The area of the video screen where images are legible on a standard television screen This generally includes the center 80 of the total screen area Video Standards Standards that specify the protocol for television broadc
367. ing device into a graphics file for the purposes of electronic transmission or modification A scanning device or scanner resolves the image into elements of color light and shade Scrapbook A temporary holding place for layouts frame grabs styles library items and other TitleOne elements Use the Scrapbook to transfer objects between TitleOne tools or to transfer layout styles and elements between CG layouts Scrapbook items are not saved when you close TitleOne Scrubber See Preview Toolbar SDTV Standard Definition Television Digital television format that includes 480 line resolution in both interlaced 480i and progressively scanned 480p formats Glossary TitleOne User Guide Seamless Texture Paint A small texture image that can be tiled endlessly without a visible edge Some seamless textures may have features that make the repetition obvious but no image edge is ever visible Search Complex See Complex Search Search Key Media Store A particular attribute of a media file to search for in a Media Store search Search keys include keywords resolution title media type media number date and user name Search Results Media Store The list of media files that meet the search criteria in a Media Store search Search Simple See Simple Search Search String See Additive Search String Selection Paint The area of an image that you wish to work on The selected are
368. ing methods e Click the arrow beside the Alignment button in the CG E Editor toolbar to open the alignment menu By clicking d directly on the Alignment button you can also Quickly align objects using the last used alignment type r e If at least one of the selected objects is a graphic object switch to the Attributes tab of the Attributes palette There are alignment controls in the Alignment section of the tab 3 Select the type of alignment you want to use e Select the Align to Object radio button to align the objects to their own horizontal and vertical boundaries e Select the Align to Layout button to align the objects to the safe title area boundaries See Video Safe Title Area on page 104 for information about displaying and modifying the safe title area 4 Click an alignment button Table 3 20 Align to Object Options Button ao E O o Co Table 3 21 Button a E D Description Align Left to Object The objects move horizontally so their left boundaries are aligned with the leftmost object Align Center to Object The objects move horizontally so their center axes are aligned with the center of the selection Align Right to Object The objects move horizontally so their right boundaries are aligned with the rightmost object Align Top to Object The objects move vertically so their top boundaries are aligned with the topmost object Align Middle to Object The objects move vertical
369. ing up can produce degraded character quality In order to maintain the best Quality start out with larger characters in CG and then scale them down in Animation You can change the font and style attributes of your text and objects at any time but you have to switch back to CG Editor to do so In CG you can change add or delete your text and objects When you switch back to Animation Editor all existing paths are preserved and the rendered bitmap shows the updated text and objects All new objects are placed on a separate path and all deleted objects are completely removed Keyframes Keyframes refer to the significant events that make up the path along which the object moves such as the start and end points A path with only one keyframe is the same as a static display For movement you need a minimum of two keyframes Insert Keyframes There are three places to insert a new keyframe before the selected keyframe after the selected keyframe or at the current frame in time To add a keyframe before or after a keyframe I Select the keyframe you want to add a new keyframe to 2 Select Edit gt Insert Keyframe gt Before Selected Keyframe to insert a new keyframe before the current keyframe Or 3 Select Edit gt Insert Keyframe gt After Selected Keyframe to insert a new keyframe after the current keyframe When you insert a keyframe before or after the number of frames in the entire motion path increases by I second
370. ing used as Active Textures the alignment and transparency of video clips become more important See Align the Active Texture on page 165 and Select Active Texture Transparency on page 166 to learn how to change the alignment and transparency of a clip Use one of the following methods to change the video clip assigned to a clip object e Select the clip object and add a different video clip using the Face tab in the Attributes palette e Select the clip object and click the new video clip in the Media Library e Right click the clip object and select the Change Media option Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 149 150 Object Elements Every object in your layout consists of four different elements a face one or more edges a depth and a shadow In most cases the elements can also include a sheen Edge Sheen Face Depth Shadow Figure 3 24 Object Elements Customize the appearance of these elements by adjusting their settings and applying treatments to them When you change the size of an object the size of the object s depth edges and shadow remain constant Select the Relative Embellishments checkbox on the Attributes tab to scale an object s embellishments as its size changes Since Relative Embellishment sizes are set according to the object s size they are generally much smaller than they are when Relative Embellishments is cleared The Face Element The face is the actual shape of the object It
371. ingle animation frame 304 templates rrrrrrrrnrernnrrnanernn 279 303 304 transition settings ooocccconncccccnnnnnnnnnns 259 export CG Scribe files Hanssens anden 240 Subtitle files cooooccccoccccccnnncconnos 245 export Paint COLON elle are 461 NES sad Fe 446 layers as separate files 444 aide 446 palette leucocitosis 461 selections ccrcisucabcncseeiscwcctarrosncenivens 447 468 export media files Media Store 386 extend keyframes A 294 external data sources CG 211 225 add to system list ccoooncccnnnncno 214 eil 218 create databases rrrarernnnnranevnnnnvanennn 211 OMA o 225 link directly to text files 219 link to layouts sikisini 218 No Data Available option 219 read ONY saved 214 select table text oooccconciccnccncnoconnnos 222 SOM aa 223 SQL statements ooocccccccccncccoccnccconnncnnn 224 text file databases coconcccccnccccncncconcnos 213 When Data Expires option 219 XML databases cccocccccccccncncocccnncncnncnnns 221 External Key Capture options 363 F ELE TOMOS aa 380 401 face elements oocccccocnccncncccccnncnnnnnnacnnnnnnnos 150 add Active Texture treatments 165 add Image E 162 TOR COCKS mea 141 RACE 150 fade keyframes in out rrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnennnnre 295 Ee Dee E
372. ining the object s current height the right boundary Ms of the object moves to fit the clock content Maintaining the object s current height the left boundary of el the object moves to fit the clock content Digital Clock Switch to the Digital Clock Format tab within the Attributes tab to set the Format display options for the selected digital clock Table 3 15 Digital Clock Format Options Option Hour Format Time Format Display Leading Zero Separator Description Select the 12 Hour Clock option to display the clock in 12 hour format or select the 24 Hour Clock option to display the clock in 24 hour format Sets the format for the clock The default clock format is hours minutes seconds hh mm ss Select to always display the hour with two digits For example if the current time is 9 14 the clock displays 09 14 Sets the separator for the clock The default separator is a colon Chapter 3 CG 143 TitleOne User Guide Digital Timer Format 144 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Table 3 15 Digital Clock Format Options Continued Option AM Position AM Symbol PM Symbol Description Sets where the AM PM text appears The default position is Right Select the AM symbol from the drop down list Select the PM symbol from the drop down list Switch to the Digital Timer Format tab within the Attributes tab to set the display options for the selected digital timer Table 3 16 Digital Timer
373. ion Title HDTMPLTOO1 BLUEBAR LEFT SIDE TGA Keywords C PROGRAM FILES HARRIS GSCRIBE SAMPLES IMAGES Date 1 e t Show Alpha Resolution Threads Running Marker Key Numbiff Folio 0 0 done Program Preview Palette Attributes Palette Scrapbook Figure 7 1 Media Store Interface There are two modes in Media Store browse mode and database mode which control the media displayed in the Media window and the buttons on the Media Store toolbar Media Window The Media window displays thumbnail previews for the media files in the current folio For information on folios see Media Store Toolbar and Modes on page 378 Non graphic files such as text and executable files do not display For video clips and animations the thumbnail displays the first frame Note To refresh the Media window when viewing a network path that does not update automatically press F5 Chapter 7 Media Store 375 TitleOne User Guide 376 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide Media Store lists descriptive information for each file below its thumbnail e Source icon e Media number assigned by Media Store Source e gt S e Filename without extension by Icon tea default 1 Media Filename You can display the file s title or Number first keyword instead of the filename For more information see Change the Thumbnail Text on page 430 Table 7 1 Media File Source Icons Sour
374. ion see Set Up a Simple Search on page 414 or Set Up an Advanced Search on page 415 2 Click the Search button e If the Auto Build Set Folio checkbox is selected the Search dialog closes after the search with the search results displayed in the Media window The search results are assigned to the Set or Browse Set folio For more information on these folios see Set and Browse Set Folios on page 420 e If the Auto Build Set Folio checkbox is cleared the search results are displayed at the bottom of the Search dialog You can view the results as thumbnails or a text list To switch views click the List Thumbnail toggle button in the top right corner of the Search Results area Search Time O ms List lt 1119 gt 173x271x32 snowtablet lgo c program files harris gscrib snowtablet lgo B tt lt 1120 gt 173x271x32 suntablet lgo c program files harris gscribe sa suntablet lgo utton Found 2 Select All Set Folio Build Job Cancel Figure 7 25 Search Results List View Search Time 0 ms E Thumbnail Do em wn v Found 2 Select All Set Folio Build Job Cancel Figure 7 26 Search Results Thumbnail View To display the search results in the Media window and assign the results to the Set or Browse Set folio click the Set Folio button For more information on these folios see Set and Browse Set Folios on page 420 When you click the Set Folio button the
375. ion in reverse starting at the last keyframe and moves backward in time to the first a keyframe Play from Plays the animation starting at the current frame in time Current Frame and moves forward to the last keyframe and then resets back to the current frame Play and Stop Function The green Play button previews the animation from the beginning While the preview is running the Play button turns into a red Stop button You can click the Stop button to stop or pause the preview at any point along the path To continue the preview from the current paused frame click the Play from Current Frame button The preview starts from the paused frame plays to the end and then resets back to the paused frame If you click the Play button again the preview starts back at the first frame plays the entire animation and then resets back to the paused frame Chapter 4 Animation 271 TitleOne User Manual Preview Options 272 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Use the buttons on the Preview toolbar to run a preview in the FX workspace Use the Preview options to change how the preview is displayed Select Go gt Go Options to access to preview options ee Playlist Tools Help 30 Cirl H Go Options Selected Object Only Show Trails Display l Clip to Screen Field Dominance Render On Screen Fender Animation Take Last Rendered Preview Current Frame Ctrl F Take Current Frame Constrain Smart Templates
376. ions in Sequencer to run the playlist Use the Animation Editor to animate the CG layouts in the playlist After adding an animation layout to the playlist in CG you can switch to the Animation Editor and add motion effects to the layout objects How Do I Use the Program Preview Palette Table 1 4 Playlist Functionality TitleOne Tool Playlist Function Frame Grab The Frame Grab tool does not work directly with the playlist You can output the frame directly from Frame Grab or transfer the grabbed frame to CG using the Scrapbook See How Do I Use the Scrapbook on page I5 for details Paint option The Paint tool does not work directly with playlist You can transfer the Paint layout to CG using the Scrapbook See How Do I Use the Scrapbook on page 15 for details The playlist uses drag and drop functionality which allows you rearrange layouts by dragging them to a new location in the list The options located directly below the playlist allow you to control the placement of layouts and provide options to output your layouts See Create a Playlist on page 312 and Edit Playlist Options on page 313 for more details The Program Preview palette allows you to preview your layouts and to view the current layout playing on the program channel When you output the playlist the Preview palette displays an image of the next layout and the Program palette displays an image of the current layout on the program channe
377. is the top element of the object unless it is overlapped by one or more inside edges Use the Face tab to change the appearance of selected objects e Select a treatment from the Treatment list The treatment you select determines the color image and active texture choices available for the face See Element Treatments on page 157 to learn how to use treatments e Create a sheen for the object s face using the Sheen section of the tab See Sheen Elements on page 155 to learn how to create sheens Edge Elements Edge elements completely surround the face of the object You can add up to ten edges to your object and they can either overlap the face or extend beyond the face Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Use the Edge tab to add edit and remove edges for selected objects By combining edges you can turn multiple objects into a complex shape with one or more continuous edges Edges cannot be added to Port objects Add an Edge Each edge in an object can either overlap or extend beyond the face and each edge can have its own sheen element The object s edges are displayed in the Edge tab s Defined Edges list The edge at the top of the list is the innermost edge and the edge at the bottom is the outermost edge Attributes Face Edge Defined Edges Treatment Add Innermost Solid Color Edge Edge Linear Gradi Radial Gradi I Remove Outermost d Color Grad T Edge Edge Figure 3 25 The Defined
378. it Off Force stereo shuttering Un Gamma correct antialiasing Un Single display performance mode Compatibility performance mode Multiple display performance mode Figure 1 13 Quadro FX 1500 4500 Option Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual IE 21 22 e If you have a Quadro FX 4600 select the Multi Display Mixed GPU Acceleration feature and then select Single Display Performance Mode as the setting Global Settings Program Settings i Global presets Custom wi Settings Feature Setting i IATA Antialiasing Transparency Off Conformant texture clamp Use hardware Enable overlay Un Error reporting Un Extension limit Off Force stereo shuttering Un Single display performance mode ke ulti dizplapmixed GPU acceleration Single display performance mode Compatibility performance mode Stereo Enable Multiple display performance mode Stereo Display mode Figure 1 14 Quadro FX 4600 Option 7 Click Apply to save the settings 18 Restart your system Configure VGA Preview After you set up your VGA preview you can configure your preview settings in the XD 200 Control Panel Open the XD 200 Control Panel Start gt Programs gt Harris gt TitleOne gt Configuration Utilities gt Phoenix Control Panel Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual Near the top of the window click the Preview Control Panel button
379. itable layout information ODBC connections and transitions They save a referenced file path to any media and fonts used in the layout and they also save animation data To export a layout as a scribe file select File gt Export gt Export CG Layout Import Text Files Text files are imported into the selected line at the current cursor position CG understands end of line markers unless you are importing text into a crawl layout Imported text files must be in plain text format ASCII ANSI MS DOS text etc Subtitles CG creates subtitles by importing text files using one of three file formats subtitle only timecoded subtitles and EBU format You can also use the CG subtitle features to do versioning Subtitle File Types You can use three different subtitle file types in CG Table 3 28 Subtitle File Types File Type Description Subtitle Only A text file containing subtitle text only A blank line separates each subtitle page Timecoded A text file containing subtitle text and timecode Subtitles information Time in and out codes separate each subtitle page EBU Format A text file containing subtitles and timecode using standard EBU NI9 formatting conventions Prepare Subtitle Only Files Use any text editor or word processor to create a subtitle only file Save the file as DOS ASCII or plain text These files have a txt extension To create a subtitle only file enter the text in a text editor You can put
380. itor you must be in CG Editor to delete a single keyframe You can cut copy and paste the selected keyframe s by using one of the following options e Edit gt Cut Edit gt Copy or Edit gt Paste e Select Cut Copy or Paste from the right click menu e Use shortcut keys CTRL X cut CTRL C copy or CTRL V paste If you have an Animation layout with only one keyframe you must switch to CG to remove it There are several paste options on the right click menu in Animation Editor e Paste Replace replaces the current keyframe with the one from the clipboard Note that the timing of the keyframe does not change e Paste New creates a new keyframe from the clipboard before after or at the selected keyframe depending on the Edit menu default setting e Paste At inserts the clipboard keyframe at the current frame in time regardless of the selected keyframe Chapter 4 Animation 263 TitleOne User Manual Move Keyframes Once you have added keyframes for each item in your animation you need to reposition and assign attributes for each keyframe to create the desired spline path To move a keyframe Select the Position tool from the Placement tab or from the Tools palette 2 Select the keyframe to be moved 3 Drag the keyframe to the new position or enter a number value in the XYZ axes on the Position tab Select the Position Tool Before you start selecting dragging and dropping keyframes oF you need
381. ity 360 MOVE online rrannnnnrnnanennnnnnanennnnnnanennnnen 355 prepare events for output oo oo 325 prepare playlist for output 349 preview events rrrrararnrrrrarernnrrnanennnnnn 357 run the playlist oooocoonccconcnccnoocnco 358 select event render location 349 select trigger type ooooccccocccconcccnoncnnnnos 337 set event duration rararnnnrranennnnnnanennn 334 set real time animation playback 331 SOP OULD UN Ans 358 take a single event ooccconcccnnnnccono 397 OULOUL ODIONS sp 44 92 GloDal OUNDUE NE 46 Navigate dialog output cee 54 Overlay UP titan 73 RapidFire Output cooccccccccncccccnncncncnanono 60 Sequencer Output rrrnrarnnrnnnenrannnnnnnen 51 Shot Box palette A 56 Strata GUP vasene 84 output problems Memory Tuning 35 output crawls adjust crawl borders cccoocccoccccccnccncnno 322 adjust crawl Speed rrrrrernnrrranernr 323 359 output Options 322 pause multi page crawls oo 360 pause Output cece eeeeeeece eee eeeeeeees 360 Start on off screen rrrranrrrnnrerrnnrernnnen 322 output rolls adjust roll borders rrrrrnrrnvnnnrnnnnnnnnnrr 322 adjust roll Speed rrrrnrrrnnrnnanernr 323 359 Index TitleOne User Guide output Options 322 pause multi page rolls
382. ive Image display latency depends on local drive access speed and image size Remote Renders the event to a remote location during output Image display latency depends on network or CD ROM access time and image size Remote rendering occurs only when you setup or run the event If images or fonts are not available at that point the rendering process may fail or give unexpected results The advantage of Remote rendering is that your hard drive space is not used to store the rendered events Assign Events to If you have a dual channel system you can send your layouts to channel I or Different Channels channel 2 Use the playlist the Program palette or the Event Editor tab to select the channel The Program Preview palette controls two program channels when you have a dual channel system On output the event plays on the selected channel e Playlist Use the Channel drop down list to select the channel for the event e Program palette Use the Channel buttons on the Program palette to assign a channel to the selected event e vent Editor tab Use the Channel buttons on the Event Editor tab to assign a channel to the selected event Assigned channels Channel list Channel buttons Channel buttons Figure 5 30 Dual Channel Options Note You can output two events simultaneously See Output Two Layouts Simultaneously on page 48 for details
383. ject is added to your layout with the video clip applied to its face Select an object in your layout Switch to the Face tab in the Attributes palette Ta TEE When you apply a clip to the face element of an object all the other elements will adopt the clip as well Select the Active Texture treatment from the Treatment drop down list In the Color section of the tab click the Add button and select the video clip you want to use The clip is applied to all of the elements in your object Clip Playback Options Use the Face tab s Texture section to set how your clip is played 148 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Enter a Start Delay for the clip to prevent the clip from playing until the delay has elapsed Select the Ignore AVI Transparency checkbox to ignore an alpha channel in matte avi media files Select the Invert Field Order checkbox to invert the field order of your clip You may need to do this if your clip appears jerky when you play the layout When the display time of the layout is longer than the clip length the clip automatically loops To stop a clip from looping once it has finished playing clear the Loop the Playback checkbox Change Video Clip Clip Alignment and Transparency Since clips are usually full resolution objects it is not usually necessary to change the clip object s alignment or transparency By default clips are aligned to the object s face and 100 opaque When video clips are be
384. k the Open button The media is added to the library You can add Port objects to the Media Library by dragging them from the CG workspace and into the library You can also select a port and select Menu gt Add Selected Port to Library Chapter 3 CG 177 TitleOne User Guide 178 Apply Media Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Add a Logo Object Logos are special graphic objects that mix a face color with a bitmap image They are commonly used for station identification images corporate logos or product logos To add a logo object to a layout with the Media Library grab the media box containing the logo and drag it to the CG workspace The logo object is added to the layout You can also double click a library box in the Media Library to add a full sized logo object to the layout See Logo Objects on page 137 for information about adding embellishments tints and constraints to logos Add a Clip Object Clip objects are commonly used to add full resolution uncropped video clips to layouts To add a new clip to a layout with the Media Library grab the media box containing the clip and drag it to the CG workspace The clip object is added to the layout You can also double click a library box in the Media Library to add a full sized clip object to the layout See Clip Objects on page 147 for information about setting clip alignment transparency and playback options Feature Note You must have the Clip Op
385. ker lors z o Tal b g 5 Current Cr Clear The following table describes the functions of the Paint attributes palette tabs Table 8 1 Paint Attributes Palette Tabs Tab Description View Sets the workspace display options such as Zoom RGB or Alpha Grid Cursor and Video Safe Title Area Brush Contains all the brush options including Tool type Shape Style Opacity Texture and Brush attributes Color Contains Color Picker options Foreground and Background colors a list of the six most recently used colors Color Chips and a Color Tester Select Contains the Selection Tools and Options Transform Controls the transformation of your selection such as Move Scale Skew Rotate Flip Horizontally and Flip Vertically 436 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Table 8 1 Paint Attributes Palette Tabs Tab Description Layers Contains a thumbnail view of all the layers in your Paint image You can add delete duplicate rearrange and merge layers in this tab Filter Contains the filters available to enhance you image such as Alpha Adjustment Color Adjustment and Distortion including sharpen blur and pixelize Tools Palette The Tools palette contains all of the tools available in Paint The palette includes the General Transformation Selection Alpha Color and Image Editing tools Many tools share one Tools palette button Multi tool buttons are indicated by a small triangle on
386. king the Template Manger button in the CG toolbar You can also open the Template Manager by choosing File gt Template Manager gt CG Layouts or by pressing the CTRL SHIFT R key 2 Click the Add button to add the current layout to the Template Manager The Add dialog opens 3 In the Add dialog number the template and include a name or description When numbering the template make sure you do not overwrite other templates by using an existing number 4 Click the Add button to close the Add dialog Your new template is added to the template list 5 Click the Close button to close the Template Manager To access the new subtitle template click the Template drop down list in the CG toolbar Click the template in the drop down list to load it into the CG workspace Before you import a subtitle file make sure you select the subtitle layout template from the Template drop down list in the CG toolbar Choose to import the subtitle file Chapter3 CG 243 TitleOne User Guide e To import a text based subtitle file select File gt Import gt Import Text File In the Open dialog select the Subtitle Format radio button Look in 3 Subtitles vw e g E Arts Alive English txt i Interview Eet My Recent Documents E Select this GJ rem radio button Mu Network Files of type Text Files txt Ar when importing 2 Subtitle Format Text Formatted Text Plain 0 Job Creator subtitles Figure
387. l Preview Play Single Layouts You can take an individual layout by dragging the layout to the palette e To play a layout immediately on the program channel drag the layout from the playlist to the Program palette e To preview a layout immediately on the preview channel drag the layout from the playlist to the Preview palette Chapter 1 Overview 13 TitleOne User Manual Clear the Preview Program Channel Use the Program Preview palette to clear the contents of the program or preview channel e To clear the program channel press the CLR button above the Program palette e To clear the preview channel press the CLR button above the Preview palette Clear preview channel Clear program channel Preview da CLR Program CLR Figure 1 5 Clear Program and Preview Channels Dual Channel Systems If you have a dual channel system the Program Preview palette controls the two program channels You can use the Channel buttons on the Program palette to assign the selected layout to a channel Use buttons to select channel Program 44 g Live CLR CLR Figure 1 6 Program Palette with Dual Channel System 14 Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual How Do I Use the Attributes Palette How Do I Use the Scrapbook The Attributes palette is available at the bottom of the workspace and includes options for the current TitleOne tool Use the options on the Attributes palette to edit the selec
388. l Clap 00003 1 v HEM veur Poon achor Mchele Peters EE Preview KI CLR Progra ive ar Event Editor Run Effect Settings Audio Mask Renderer Animation iW Local nrs Remate Ready Playlist toolbar Playlist right click menu Sequencer right click menu Figure 5 2 Playlist Edit Options Add New Events You can add a new event to your playlist using the Log Event Up and Log Event Down options Select the event in the playlist 2 Add a new event either above or below the selected event e To add an event above click the Log Event Above button e To add an event below click the Log Event Below button TitleOne adds the default event to the playlist which is generally a blank event Note In CG you can update the default event by adding your images and graphics to the default event and then clicking the Update button in the Template Manager CTRL SHIFT R 314 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Delete Events Arrange Events Use the Cut Event option to delete an event from the playlist When you cut an event the event is removed from the playlist You can paste the event in a new location or leave the event deleted from the playlist To delete an event select the event in the playlist 2 Right click the event and select the Cut Event option To move events in the playlist use the cut copy and paste options or drag the events to a new
389. l when you start a new playlist Open Launches the Open dialog where you can select an existing playlist scribelist file to open When you click the Open button you are prompted to save the current playlist TitleOne switches to the CG tool when you open a playlist Save Opens the Save As dialog where you can save the current playlist to your central working folder or in another location See Make Transferring Layouts Easy on page 6 for details on working folders 10 Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual Table 1 3 Main Toolbar Button Cut Copy Paste Undo Redo CG Sequencer Animation Editor Frame Grab Description Makes a copy of the selected object and removes the object from the workspace You can paste the object in your workspace Available for CG Animation Editor and Paint Makes a duplicate of the selected object leaving the original object in the workspace You can paste the duplicated object in the workspace Available for CG Animation Editor and Paint Places the cut or copied object into your workspace Available for CG Animation Editor and Paint Cancels the last action you made Recreates the canceled action Switches to the CG tool To switch to the CG tool you can also select Tools gt CG or press the F6 key Switches to the Sequencer tool To switch to the Sequencer tool you can also select Tools gt Sequencer or press the FII key Switches
390. lacing it in the clipboard Pastes the row at the bottom of the table Pastes the row at the top of the table Chapter 3 CG 125 TitleOne User Guide Spell Check Text Tabs in Text Objects 126 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Table 3 11 Shortcut Keys for Row Management Continued Shortcut Key Behavior CTRL SHIFT UP Moves the row up and swaps it with the row ARROW directly above CTRL SHIFT DOWN Moves the row down and swaps it with the ARROW row directly below Unmake Rows To ungroup the cells in a table right click in a cell and choose Unmake Row from the right click menu The cells in your table break apart into separate text objects To spell check the text in a layout right click the CG workspace and select Spell Check from the right click menu You can also spell check a specific object by right clicking it and choosing Spell Check from the menu To help you position and Humle align text all text objects l I 1 I E I I LE I I ad I I except Text Paths can contain tab stops The CG Ruler above the CG workspace displays the tab stops for your currently selected text object Left Centered Right Aligned Aligned How your text cursor behaves when you press the TAB key depends on the text object s attributes and the way the tab stops are configured See Text Object Properties on page 119 for information about Text Object Properties If the text object is set to create a new object
391. lay Button on Shot Box Palette 56 Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide 7 Enter the layout slot number in the Shot Box Number field Note When you enter the layout slot number TitleOne selects the layout in the appropriate playlist slot For example if you enter 5 TitleOne selects the layout in slot five If you move the layout or place a new layout in slot five TitleOne selects the new layout 8 To select the layout press ENTER on the main keyboard not the number pad ENTER key Note If you press the number pad ENTER key the layout plays on your program channel The number pad ENTER key immediately outputs the selected layout Select Media Store Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Files To select a media file from Media Store you can enter the image thumbnail number in the Shot Box Number field Entering the image thumbnail number selects the appropriate media file in the Media window In TitleOne switch to Media Store Tools gt Media Store e On the Shot Box palette click the Store Play toggle button to read Store gt Store Play button gt D oun Da EEE MEN HAE Defined ajej Ea E e Figure 2 11 Store Play Button with Store Selected e When the button reads Store TitleOne selects media files in Media Store e When the button reads Play TitleOne selects playlist layouts 2 Select the Browse or Build folio containing the media files you want to selec
392. lays all of the objects in a layout and allows you to select them change their z order lock them duplicate them and delete them Leading CG The space between lines of text in a layout Leading is measured from baseline to baseline Learn Mode Sequencer and Media Store A function that automatically creates a playlist from the media file numbers that you enter into the Shot Box palette Number field You can switch to learn mode by clicking the LRN button on the Shot Box palette Legal Colors Paint Video safe colors for NTSC or PAL that contain RGB values that fall in the middle of the O to 255 range Legalize Filters Paint Inscriber filters that convert illegal colors image colors outside the broadcast range to legal colors colors within the broadcast range If colors are not legalized before they are broadcast as an NTSC or PAL signal they will produce inferior results and possibly even technical problems See also Video Legalize Filter Length of Path Animation The number of frames that an object takes to complete the spline path Level Curves Filter Paint A color adjustment filter that adjusts the tonal range of an image at any point along a 0 255 scale This allows for smoother adjustments to the tonal value of an image replicating high end color correction systems Levels Filter Paint A color adjustment filter that makes gradual adjustments to the brightness contrast
393. ld folio also called the Build set by clicking the Build button on the Media Store toolbar Build List Media Store The list of image files in the Build dialog waiting to be added to the Store database Glossary 555 TitleOne User Guide 556 C Cache A specialized area of memory that improves a computer s performance by storing frequently accessed information Calibration The process of matching the output on your computer monitor to your video output so that colors look the same on both monitors Canvas Size Paint The size of your painting area Your canvas size can be larger or smaller than your image size If your canvas size is smaller than your image size some of the image is clipped If your canvas size is larger than your image size an empty area appears around the image See also Image Size Capture Frame Grab An action that allows you to capture a frame from a video feed Center Cut A method used to crop the original 16 9 widescreen image so it will fit a standard 4 3 television monitor As a result the left and right sides of the image are cut off and only the center is visible CG Title One module that acts as a full featured character generator allowing you to create still roll crawl and animation layouts for display to video CG layouts can also be exported to FX for 3D effects Channel Paint The storage location for color and transparency information in a
394. lder located on your DA drive In the previous example you would navigate to D TitleOneLayoutFiles Right click on the folder and select Copy Navigate across your local network to the new system Open the DA drive on the new system Select Edit gt Paste nA UN You must place the folder on a drive with the same letter as your original system in this example drive DA After you place the folder on the DA drive of the new system open the layout or playlist in TitleOne All referenced files should display properly Note You can also transfer the folder using a CD ROM or jump drive by placing the copied working folder on the external device Then you can move the folder from the CD ROM or jump drive to the new system You can save individual layouts or save the entire playlist Save Individual Layouts You can save individual layout files as scribe files To save your layout as a scribe file select File gt Export gt Export CG Layout from the CG module The layout saves with a scribe file extension The scribe file is your working layout file Generally you will save all of your layouts as scribe files which include the following features e Saves all of your layout information e Saves a referenced file path to any media and font files used in the layout e Contains animation data Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual 7 8 Legacy Files Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual Save the
395. le if you select REPORTER Equals Janet Murphy the result is any table entries with Janet Murphy in the REPORTER column Column Operator value Selection Criteria Selected Database Evening News Information REPORTER LOCATION Table Entry Janet Murphy City Hall Victor Atlas Community Center Kim Le City Hall Jade Engeline Reese Middle School Result Sam Lord Placid Creek Layout Location Reporter 1 City Hall Janet Murphy Figure 3 67 Set Specific Table Entries for Playback c To clear all the information in the Selection Criteria section click the Clear button 5 To view the data selected for output click the Refresh button The Results area displays the table entries sorted for output 6 You can customize the SQL statement by clicking the Edit Query button 7 If you do not want to apply special formatting to specific table entries click OK on all the dialogs to return to CG CG outputs the selected table entries from your data source during playback Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Format Specific Data If you do want to apply special formatting see Format Specific Data on page 225 The Format window allows you to apply special formatting to specific words or numbers in your table Format Data Formatting Column 1 LOCATION 2 REPORTER Lei Add Prefix Reporting From add Suffix Figure 3 68 Add a Prefix with the Format Window To start formatting
396. lect the objects you want to apply the style to and use one of the following methods e Click the style in the Style Library e Right click the style in the Style Library and select Apply Style e Within the Style Library select Menu gt Apply Style e Drag the style from the Style Library and drop it on the object This method works if you have only one object selected Set as Default Style If you want all new objects to be created with a specific pre made style set that style as the default style Within the Style Library right click a style and select Set as Default Style All new objects are created with the default style Change View Style Thumbnails Settings Click the Thumbnails button to view the styles as a series of numbered thumbnails Click the List View button to view the styles as a list of smaller thumbnails with style number and style name information included Libraries Libraries Styles Media Styles Media Mo 1 L Panel Headin Mo 110 Logo Style ho 100 Panel Style No 2 Info Box ho 3 Panel Subhe E Figure 3 42 The Style Library s Thumbnail and List Views 174 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Manage Styles Global Style Library Style Range By default the Style Library displays only the styles for the current layout Within the Style Library select Menu gt View All Styles to display the styles for all the layouts in the playlist Select Menu gt View Selected Lay
397. lete event e DELETE key Close Navigate dialog e ESC key Chapter 2 Output 55 TitleOne User Guide Shot Box Palette You can use the Shot Box to quickly select playlist layouts or Media Store files Once you locate the layout or media file you can assign the item to a Shot Box button for quick recall or output the selected item The Shot Box palette is available in the Sequencer and Media Store tools Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Select Playlist To select a playlist layout with the Shot Box you can quickly enter the Layouts layout number in the Shot Box Number field Entering the layout number selects the layout slot in your playlist For example if you enter 3 TitleOne selects the layout in slot three Select File gt Open to load your playlist All playlists have a scribelist file extension Select File gt Preferences to open the Preferences dialog Switch to the Project tab and clear the Show Filename in Job Strip checkbox When this checkbox is cleared the layout numbers display in the playlist rather than the file names Click OK to close the Preferences dialog Switch to Sequencer Tools gt Sequencer On the Shot Box palette click the Store Play toggle button to read Play e When the button reads Play TitleOne selects playlist layouts e When the button reads Store TitleOne selects files in Media Store gt Store Play button BB ou E Dan Figure 2 10 Store P
398. ll Crawl Playback You can pause the playback of rolls and crawls using the PAUSE key During the roll crawl output press the PAUSE key to pause the output 2 Press the PAUSE key again to resume output Sequencer Output Sequencer is a powerful TitleOne tool that allows you to prepare events for output prepare the playlist for output select trigger types for output and run the entire playlist The following instructions describe how to output your playlist in Sequencer You can find these instructions and information on all the Sequencer options in the chapter Sequencer on page 305 Move Online Offline The Run tab includes the output options for Sequencer and is only available after you move the playlist online When you switch to Online mode Sequencer renders your events and prepares them for output After all the events are rendered the Run tab becomes available Move Online To move online e Click the Offline Online toggle button on the toolbar EA 2 J onm Figure 2 5 Offline Online Toggle Button When you click the Offline button TitleOne moves the current playlist online and the button changes to read Online You can click the Online Offline button again to move offline e Press CTRL SHIFT 0 Move Offline To move offline e Click the Offline Online toggle button on the toolbar When you click the Online button TitleOne moves the current playlist offline and the button changes to read Offline You can cl
399. location in the playlist Move Events Use the cut and paste options to move an event to a new location in the playlist I To move an event to a new location select the event in the playlist 2 Right click on the event and select the Cut Event option The event is removed from the playlist 3 Select the event in the playlist that will proceed the pasted event 4 Right click on the event and select the Paste Event option The event is WEE Label 00000 Group 1 HEADLINE Setup Event NumPad Minus Key Setup Linked Event Shift NumPad Minus Key Take Event NumPad Enter Clear Ctrl Shift NumPad Enter SI Log Event Down Ctrl L Log Event Up Ctrl Shift L Log Default Event Ctrlt Left Click or Ctrl Shift G Change Render File Name Ctrl J Navigate Ctrl Shift I Cut Event Alt Shift Copy Event Alt Shift C Paste Event Alt Shift v Paste Special Insert Group Header Ctrl T Figure 5 3 Cut Event Option pasted below the selected event Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide 315 316 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Duplicate Events Use the copy and paste options to duplicate an event in the playlist h Ud ND To add a duplicate of an event in the playlist select the event Right click on the event and select the Copy Event option Select the event in the playlist that will proceed the pasted event Right click on the event
400. lor Pickers There are two color pickers in Paint one on the Tools palette and one on the Color tab While you can use either tool to select colors they behave slightly differently The Tools palette Color Picker remembers the last six colors selected and displays them on the Color tab The Color tab Color Picker does not have memory it s main use is for quickly selecting a color without having to switch tools You can use the Color tab Color Picker to select a color from anywhere on your computer monitor The Tools palette Color Picker tool only selects colors from the Paint workspace See Work with Color on page 458 for details on the Color tab Color Picker Chapter 8 Paint 449 TitleOne User Manual 450 Work with Brush Tools The Brush tab contains all the options for working with brushes There are sixteen default brushes but at any point you can redefine the shape and characteristics for any brush Select a Brush Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual View Brush Color Select Transform Layers Filter Spacing 2 E Softness 15 0 Opacity mi Texture 10 e angle 0 0 Aspect 0 84 n Jejm Reset Speed 75 LI UD E D aL Cc Li Cc oO L e Gi L m EL Figure 8 10 Brush Tab In the Brush tab click on the image of the brush type you want to use There are three brush types Single Pixel Elliptical and Rectangular Olla Single Pixel Elliptical Re
401. lts You can group media using any criteria you choose for example by client playlist or contents Ensure that the Browse button is not selected on the Media Store toolbar and then click the Global Database button or the Set button 2 To place a copy of a file into a folio drag the its thumbnail from the Media window to a collection folio button FI FI2 on the toolbar You can add a media file to more than one folio Organizing your media files in folios allows you to group related media files e To organize your media files into categories that are available to only you ensure that the Local System button reads Local before dragging thumbnails to the FI FI2 buttons e To organize your media files into categories that are available to all users ensure that the Local System button reads System before dragging thumbnails to the FI FI2 buttons Note Media files added to a collection folio remain in the source folio they are not deleted 3 To view the media files in the folios click the FI FI2 buttons e To view media files available to only you ensure that the Local System button reads Local before clicking a toolbar button e To view media files available to all users ensure that the Local System button reads System before clicking a toolbar button Set Up an Existing Database You can access Media Store databases that you did not create To set up access specify the location of the database and set the locations for th
402. lude a name or description When numbering the template make sure you do not overwrite other templates by using an existing number Click the Add button to close the Add dialog The new template is added to the template list Click the Close button to close the Template Manager 232 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Update a Template If you want to replace an existing template with an updated layout Open the updated layout in CG 2 Open the Template Manager by clicking the Template Manager button in the CG toolbar ea E 3 Select the template you want to update i 4 Click the Update button The current layout information replaces the selected template Manage Templates Use the Template Manager to keep the templates organized in the registry In the Template Manager dialog e Click the Delete button to delete the selected template e Click the Rename button to rename or renumber the selected template e Add a text memo to a template by selecting it and entering a note in the Memo field Create Playlists with the Template Manager The Template Manager allows you to build an entire playlist using either the keyboard or the mouse You can immediately select a template by typing its number in the Template Manager s Quick Pick field The corresponding thumbnail is highlighted immediately and the template is selected You can load an event in three ways using the Template Manager e Click the Load button to load the
403. ly so their center axes are aligned with the middle of the selection Align Bottom to Object The objects move vertically so their bottom boundaries are aligned with the bottommost object Align to Layout Options Description Align Left to Safe Title Area The objects move horizontally so their left boundaries are aligned with the left edge of the safe title area Align Center to Safe Title Area The objects move horizontally so their center axes are aligned with the center of the safe title area Chapter 3 CG 187 TitleOne User Guide Table 3 21 Align to Layout Options Continued Button Description Align Right to Safe Title Area The objects move horizontally so their right boundaries are aligned with the right edge of the safe title area Align Top to Safe Title Area The objects move vertically so their top boundaries are aligned with the top edge of the safe title area Align Middle to Safe Title Area The objects move vertically so their center axes are aligned with the middle of the safe title area Align Bottom to Safe Title Area The objects move vertically so their bottom boundaries are aligned with the bottom edge of the safe title area CH O Align Left to Center of Safe Title Area The objects move horizontally so their left boundaries are aligned with the center of the safe title area opo Align Right to Center of Safe Title Area The objects move Al horizontally so their right boundaries a
404. ly to all Forward you reset the field values and control how vjo EI Apply to all Previous the behavior is applied to the keyframes e Apply to all keyframes e Apply to all Forward adjusts all keyframes after and including the current one to the end of the path e Apply to all Previous adjusts all keyframes up to and including the current one in the path You can rotate any keyframe around the X Y or Z axes h individually or in any combination of the three Select the ski E Orientation tool then drag left right up or down to get a combination of rotation on the X Y and Z axes You can KR x also enter the rotation degree in the X Y or Z fields You JEN can rotate a keyframe up to 359 on each axis If you want more than one full rotation use the Spins control Spinning a keyframe forces it to tumble end over end around a L particular axis Select the Spins tool then click the keyframe to Ao spin and drag up to create a clockwise spin or drag down to create a counter clockwise spin You can also enter the number E of spins in the X Y or Z fields l Note When you set a spin the spin occurs before the keyframe on the spline leading into the keyframe so make sure you have the right keyframe selected The number of spins you enter will be evenly divided across the number of frames between the keyframe you use to spin and the preceding keyframe Chapter 4 Animation 291 TitleOne User Manual
405. ly what the fully rendered object will look like at a particular frame and in relation to other objects Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual 267 Display All Paths Display All Paths shows every path in an animation Use this option if your paths are fairly simple with minimal overlap Otherwise the display can get complicated and you may have a hard time figuring out which path or object is selected When this option is not enabled you only see the selected path enc Gaa 8 Figure 4 92 Display All Paths Display Text Display Text Outlines provides only a wireframe view of your objects Select Outlines this option instead of Snapshot of Current Object or Snapshot of All Objects for a less cluttered display You will not be able to see the CG formatting of your images Pratt pe 9 98 i Figure 4 93 Display Text Outlines 268 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Snapshot of Current Object Snapshot of All Objects Snapshot of Current Object provides a fully rendered snapshot of the current frame in time for the selected path only Use this option to view the rendered snapshot so you can see what your objects will look like at a particular frame Rendering on the fly slows down your display slightly and does not represent the true time it takes for the objects to travel along the path For optimal speed performance do not select this display option Evening News ET Fig
406. m Le victor Atlas City Hall Figure 3 57 Update Layout Text You can also update text by selecting a text object and double clicking a text entry in the Content list 204 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Manage Content Sources Append All To insert the entire Content list of items into the currently selected text object click the Append All button Each term appears on a new line within the text object You can maintain multiple News Edit Tables for layouts which require different names and phrases The News Edit Tables are stored within one or more template registries See Template Registries on page 234 for information about loading and saving registries Import a News Edit Table Sometimes it s easier to import a News Edit Table than it is to add each Content item individually News Edit Tables can be created in a simple text editor like Windows Notepad Enter a list of terms in a text editor To open the Notepad text Era RET editor in Windows select Start zi i John Clarkson Reporting gt Programs gt Accessories gt sue Ho Reporting Tina wilson Reporting Notepad Greg Randall Reporting Chris Parker Reporting George stanley Reporting file Jill white Reporting 2 Save the list of terms as a txt 3 In CG select File gt Import gt Import News Edit Table 4 Import the txt file The Template Manager opens after you import the file The 0 Import Text News Edit Table
407. m the Auto Text file associated with your playlist I Place your cursor in the text line of your CG layout where you want to insert the text 2 In RapidFire use the number pad to enter the number of the text string to insert To view the Auto Text strings available for the playlist perform one of the following actions e Press SHIFT AUTO TEXT using the RapidFire keyboard e Click Config in the RapidFire dialog 70 Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide RapidFire Keyboard Option The InsertText dialog lists the Auto Text strings InsertText Default Layout Load From Working Directory Working Directory C TemplateLayouts Browse Auto Text Strings 53 Elbowingid 54 Fightingid 55 High Stickingid 56 Holdingid 57 Hookingid 56 Interference d 59 Goaltender Interferenceld 60 Roughingid 61 Slashingid 62 Spearingld 63 Trippingid Figure 2 18 List of Available Auto Text Strings 3 Insert the Auto Text using one of the following methods e Press the RapidFire AUTO TEXT key e Click Auto Text in the RapidFire dialog The specified Auto Text string is inserted at the cursor position in the text line of your CG layout If the Auto Text string ends in n the cursor drops to a new text line directly below the current line If you purchased the RapidFire Keyboard option for TitleOne you received the custom RapidFire keyboard designed for sports and live event coverage For information on the RapidFire keyboard see R
408. me that is yellow remains yellow the method they use to represent those colors may differ See also RGB Color Model Color Picker Paint and CG An eye dropper tool that copies colors from anywhere on the screen Complex Search Media Store A Media Store search using multiple keywords and operators See also Simple Search Glossary 557 TitleOne User Guide 558 Component Video Video comprised of multiple signals It is usually taken to mean that there are separate signals for chrominance and luminance RGB is also a component signal with separate signals for red green and blue pixel numbers Composite Image Paint An image where all of the information is placed on a single layer and cannot be separated You can create images with multiple layers but they are converted to composite or single layer images when you take them into another TitleOne module See also Merge Composite Video Video comprised of a single signal for luminance and chrominance numbers Compression Media Store Reduces the size of a database image typically by removing redundant information Some types of compression can affect the Quality of the compressed file See also Best Lossless Compression HKF Compression LZW Compression and VII Compression Continuity Animation A spline property that refers to the smoothness whether sharp or exaggerated of the spline path as it moves from one keyframe to an
409. me name it uses the first one found Select a Plugin Directory Look in 3 Photoshop Brushes Calibrate Duotones Palettes Patterns Plugins Prefs PshpGIFs QRegFiles 5 Samples C Adobe Photoshop Figure 8 31 Filter Plugin Directory To specify the folders click on the Browse button on the Filter tab and select the folder where the filters are located in the Select a Plugin Directory dialog This dialog will only show folders not the actual filters 486 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Delete Filter Folders View Folder Status Alpha and Third Party Filters Photoshop Filters Chapter 8 Paint themselves so do not worry if the folders appear empty If you know the folder path you can enter it directly in the Folder field Once you have selected a path you can tell Paint to search all subfolders in that folder by selecting the Include Subfolders checkbox Click on the Add button to add the new path to the list of remembered paths To delete a folder select the appropriate path from the list in the Filter Directories section of the Filter tab and click on the Trash Can icon You can tell whether Paint searches subfolders in the defined filter folders by looking at the Subfolder Inclusion Status icon located above the Trash Can If the icon displays two folders subfolders are included for the selected path If the icon displays only one folder only filters located in
410. mn naming convention for the tags in a column CG will automatically link up all the rows within the column Note To create a layout with multiple rows and columns the text objects need to contain placeholder text This text is replaced by your database content when you take the layout to air Chapter 3 CG 217 TitleOne User Guide First use text objects to create text placeholders in a table Create text placeholders for as many rows and columns as you want to display Team Vin Loss Win Team Wir _o Win Figure 3 62 A Table Containing Placeholder Text Label each placeholder with a tag using the row column naming convention l 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 and so on Figure 3 63 Tags Added to the Text Objects When you link the database to the layout as described in Link Layout to Database on page 218 you only need to link the sources for the first row of text objects in this example just 1 1 1 2 1 3 and 1 4 CG automatically links the data for the remaining rows Link Layout to To link ODBC sources text files and XML files to the tagged Database layout click the News Edit button in the CG Editor toolbar then ei click the Configure External Data Source button within News Edit The Select Text Source dialog opens Link to ODBC Database Before linking to an ODBC database you must first add it to the ODBC system list as described in Add Database to System List on page 214 218 Chapter 3 CG
411. model is an additive model where the amount of red green and blue are added together to determine the final color HLS Hue Lightness and Saturation Unlike HSV the HLS color model represents saturation and lightness as independent values You can specify both a foreground and a background color at the same time Most color tools use only the foreground color but the Linear Gradient tool Radial Gradient tool and certain filters also use the Background color You can quickly switch any color tool to the Background color by holding the ALT key With gradient tools holding the ALT key switches the direction of the gradient This shortcut works for the color tools and alpha gradient tools Set the Foreground and Background Colors The default Foreground color is black and the default Background color is white You can reset the Foreground and Background to the defaults at any time by clicking on the Reset Colors button OM lt Switch Colors y Reset Colors M WEI rs Current i When you use the Color tab or Tools palette Color Picker tools the color you select Chapter 8 Paint 459 TitleOne User Manual Switch Colors Most Recent Colors Color Chips Color Tester Color Correction Filters 460 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual becomes the Foreground color You can use the Color Picker tools to select the Background color instead by switching the Foreground and Background colors To d
412. multiple search keys such as title date keywords and media number e Search for all the files that match your search criteria For more information see Perform a Search on page 413 e Find the first or next file that matches your search criteria For more information see Find a File on page 416 e Reuse search criteria to search for and find files more quickly For more information see Search Using Previous Search Criteria on page 418 When searching you can display or select the search results e Display only the files that match your search criteria in the Media window For more information see Display All Search Results on page 418 e Select the files that match your search criteria in the Media window but display all the files in the searched folio For more information see Select All Search Results on page 419 Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Perform a Search After selecting a folio to search you specify search criteria based on the following search keys Keywords Media resolution Title Media type User name Media number Chapter 7 Media Store 413 TitleOne User Guide 414 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide e Date Additive Search String Clear After Search Clear rent p Key Search Criteria Clear After Search Clear Si 26 09 2006 El Available Dates Recent Searches 12 09 2006 A AND 6 09 2006
413. n I In the Applications List area select the checkbox for each application that will use the video board external video head for preview Applications List Board Figure 2 37 Select Applications for Preview 2 Click the Next button Note The preview functionality provides only still previews Summary Screen Review the Strata configuration before you close the Strata Utility and save the configuration For each video board verify the order of the layers in the Layer Assignment area Layer Assignment Board 1 Board 2 G Scribe 2 G Seribe 3 G Scribe 4 Figure 2 38 Review Layer Assignment Chapter 2 Output 91 TitleOne User Guide 2 Confirm that the correct applications can use the video board external video head designated for preview Layer Assignment Board 1 Board 2 G Seribe 1 G Scribe 2 Preview Board Figure 2 39 Review Applications for Preview 3 Click the Finish button The configuration is saved and the Strata Utility closes 92 Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide Chapter 3 CG O Create layouts with the CG module Introduction to CG CG is a full featured character generator that creates still roll crawl and animation layouts for display to video Create layouts by adding objects to the CG workspace customizing the object attributes and setting their position and layering Layouts can be created from scratch or can be based on pre made templates S
414. n be edited as a bitmap in Paint The Paint interface has the following components e Paint Workspace e Attributes Palette e Tools Palette e Right click Menu e Status Bar e Scrapbook e Preview Program Palette 434 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Playlist Paint workspace Tools palette Y File Editf Select Layers View Playlist Tools Help JM S DA AQBRHe Status Bar LZ Go 624 fy 490 Zoom 100 0 Brush tool Alt uses the background cehilor Program Preview palette Attributes palette Scrapbook Figure 8 1 Paint Interface Paint Workspace The Paint workspace is restricted to the boundaries of the image you are working on You cannot work outside the image area Use the Color tools to paint an image the Alpha tools to manipulate image alpha the Selection tools to select the parts of the image to work on the Transformation tools to transform a selected area or the Image Editing tools to edit the image Paint offers a variety of filters and supports Photoshop compatible plug in filters Paint also has unlimited layers so you can easily create complex graphics Chapter 8 Paint 435 TitleOne User Manual Attributes Palette The Attributes Palette contains tabs for easy access to all of Paint s options such as View Brush Color Select Transform Layers and Filter Click on the tab name to display the contents of the tab Wu Gin E Bo E Figure 8 2 Paint Attributes Palette Tabs
415. n image Each layer in an image has four channels red green blue and alpha Each channel stores information about one aspect of the image The red green and blue channels store all of the color information for the image The alpha channel stores all of the transparency information for the image Individual channels are represented by monochrome images Character Generator See CG Chroma Antialiasing Filter Paint A video clean up filter that smooths image features that cause flickering bands of false color due to color signal encoding in NTSC during broadcast Chrominance Amount of pure color Chrominance works in conjunction with luminance which is the shade or value of the color For example when you look at a red ball your eyes do not see it as having many colors but as having many shades of red The red you see is the chrominance of the ball and the shades of red are the different luminance values Clean up Paint The process of using Paint tools and filters to add alpha and make other corrections to a logo or image Glossary TitleOne User Guide Clip Art Images commonly available from third party sources that can be Quickly inserted into an image Clip Objects CG Full resolution uncropped video clip objects You must have the Clip Option enabled on your system before you can use clip objects Clock Objects CG Pre defined RTX applications you can use to add digital clocks and digi
416. n paint with O red you are removing red from the channel The whole process gets more complicated when you are painting on two channels If you are painting white over black 0 O 0 on the red and green channels you are actually painting with yellow 255 255 0 Green and blue make cyan 0 255 255 red and blue make magenta 255 O 255 Table 8 19 Add Color to Channels Painting White on Black Resulting Color Red channel Red 255 O 0 Green channel Green 0 255 0 Blue channel Blue 255 O 0 Red and green channels Yellow 255 255 0 Red and blue channels Magenta 255 O 255 Green and blue channels Cyan 0 255 255 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Remove Color from Individual Channels Manipulate the Alpha Channel 496 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual When painting black 0 O 0 over white 255 255 255 on a single channel you also get initially confusing results In this case you are actually changing the image color by removing color from a specific channel For example if you paint black over white on the red channel you are creating cyan 0 255 255 Table 8 20 Remove Color from Channel Painting Black on White Resulting Color Red channel Cyan 0 255 255 Green channel Magenta 255 0 255 Blue channel Yellow 255 255 0 Red and green channels Blue 0 O 255 Red and blue channels Green 0 255 0 Green and blue channels Red 255 0 0 When you are only workin
417. n templates oocccccccoccncccnconcnnnnoos 273 PINS FR 272 TOOL Dueto daros 250 270 286 Preview button Shot BOX oo cocoo 384 preview channel clear content emnes a 14 COME ee 18 25 90 in dual channel systems rrrnnrrnnnrrnnnnr 24 VORAPENEN saa 18 preview media file Media Store 375 376 Previous button 183 program channel clear output sarie E 14 eo 1 0 UE 89 configure video board rrrrnnnenrnnnernnnen 30 view test pattern rranrnnnrnnanrrnnnnnanennnnnr 40 See also XD 200 Control Panel Program Channel buttons Shot Box 384 Program Preview palette 13 clear preview channel oooccccccccccccccncnos 14 clear program channel ooccccoccccnncnncnooo 14 display two program channels 14 dual channel system rarrnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnn 14 IN Sequencer rrnrannrnrarsonnnnenrannnnnnnnnnn 311 play single layout rrrrrnnnnnrnnnnrevnnnrnnnnrr 13 preview single layout ssensnenenenenernen 13 progressive scan output display 27 PUSH PINS Gan 289 Push transition 326 R radial gradient treatments 159 160 BE 01 0 Ip I gt ace 60 72 PUTE re 69 default template oocccconcnccccnccccnnnno 72 Index TitleOne User Guide Keyboard option 532 538 Media Store template layouts 68 shortcut keys EE 529 working directory rrrnrnrrn
418. n the Time tab If you select the Clip Length button the Length field is unavailable You cannot edit this field until you clear the Clip Length button If you wish to adjust the length without clearing the Clip Length button you can change the value in the End field on the Time tab Sets each path to start a set number of frames apart in time Available only if applying the template to more than one path Each template has a preset order in which keyframes appear To reverse the preset order select the Reverse checkbox This option is useful if the effect in the template is set to fly on screen but you really want the effect to fly off screen or vice versa Chapter 4 Animation 277 TitleOne User Manual 218 Combine Multiple Templates Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual You can combine multiple preset templates to create your own custom template Use the Append Insert and Timing options to determine how the combined templates work together in the new animation path The preset templates take the text and graphic objects created in CG Editor and make a path for each object based on the information in the template Since the templates include all placement shape filter spline and time information for a path you can create complex custom paths using only a single keyframe or object For example when you insert a template at the beginning or end of the original single keyframe or object additional keyframe
419. n to copy them to either registry See Template Registries on page 234 for more details about using the Registry Manager The Media Library Use the Media Library to create a standardized collection of images video Libraries S r clips clocks and Ports The Media Library makes it easy to re use media within CG without needing to repeatedly import media files It also allows you to quickly drag media objects into your layout into existing layout objects or into layout backgrounds You can use the Media Library to transfer media between the layouts in a playlist When you save a layout the Media Library is saved with it To access the Media Library switch to the Media tab of the CG Libraries palette The stored media is displayed according to the current view settings Hold the mouse cursor over a media box to see the file location name and type of the media Feature Note You must have the Clip Option enabled on your system before you can add video clips to layouts or the Media Library Add Media to the Library Add a Port to the Library Add image files and video files to the Media Library using one of the following methods e Right click a library box and select Add Media to Library e Click the Plus button at the bottom of the Media tab e Within the Media Library select Menu gt Add Media to Library When the Open dialog appears select the image files or video files you want to add and clic
420. nannnnnvnnnnnanennn 380 default file title and keywords 431 default sort order rrrrnnnnrnnnennannnnnnnene 431 delete files ooccooccconnconnccocncconnon o 411 edit file Keywords rrnrrnnnnnnnrnrnnnnennnnnre 409 edit file titles are 408 TOOS se eger 378 380 402 420 image compression options 399 Index 595 TitleOne User Guide 596 image size OPTIONS rrrrrrnnnrrrnrrernnrrnnnn 399 location of files senisoos s 388 MEMOS Free 410 metadata 404 organize EE 402 read layout from RapidFire 68 CO der 404 COVE ee Ee 404 search results most recent 420 search See search Media Store set build options for files 398 set keywords for files 393 set titles for files is id 393 set up access to other databases 402 sort thumbnails 408 431 source icon for included images 376 Spell Checker 394 switch current database ooccoccconccoccc 403 RE Ee DEE 395 LOOM AL sa 380 MEW NES ae 401 404 Media Store palette 375 382 Media Store toolbar 375 378 381 Media window 375 385 406 407 420 Memo tab Media Store 381 411 memos for templates occccoocccccccncccncncno 233 merge layers Paint o cccococnncoconnnos 494 Metadata ana 386 404 Microsoft Data Acce
421. navailable option nnnannannoenneannn 219 database mode See modes Media Store databases CG ACCESS mennene 212 add to system list rrrrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrn 214 As A NE 211 e EE 212 EA ME eea a 213 See also external data sources databases media See Media Store databases date format CG Lara 225 date format Media Store o 431 decimals text formatting o moo 225 default color CG ouside 169 default keywords for files Media Store 431 default style CO 174 default template CO 231 default title for files Media Store 431 define a clone source point ssann01nnn 480 Defined buttons Shot Box 58 384 428 defined edges list ccoooococccoononncos 151 AGNES ua 213 216 depth elements oocccoccconiccicococono 153 154 o vr 142 depth perspective ocoocccocccocccocnconiconononos 476 Ree e WEE 153 desaturated color rrrrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnn 502 digital clocks Lunner 141 digital ime S ita slo 141 display options Animation 267 269 display options CO 102 MASH 227 right click Menus n n 96 lee 206 Dissolve transition oocooocccocnccccnconnncnnnss 326 distribute objects uk 189 double byte text cooccccocccccnccocnocannnos 112 dual channel systems assign event to channel for output 47 assign events to different channels
422. nce All Channels Grayscale RGB Channels Red Channel Green Channel Blue Channel and Alpha Channel Selecting Luminance All Channels combines the red green blue and alpha channels You can also invert and tile the selected channel The Scale and Offset settings let you scale and offset the selected channel The Scale values are factors and the Offset values are measured in pixels The Options settings let you specify how to use the selected channel with the existing selection or transformation The default setting is to use the selected channel as a new transformation but you can also add the selected channel to the existing transformation subtract the selected channel from the existing transformation or intersect the selected channel with the existing transformation These options allow you to create interesting effects Select Channel Thumbnails Selected Channel Source Scale Luminance All Channels Scale x 1 00 gt Grayscale RGB Channels Scale y 1 00 O Red Channel Green Channel L_ Size To Fit Blue Channel Alpha Channel Offset rum Invert Channel From Top E e Tile Channel From Side 0 y Options New Selection Add to Selection Subtract From Selection OK Intersect with Selection Figure 8 35 Select Channel Menu 498 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Alpha Channel as a Special Case You may have noticed that the alpha channel appears dif
423. nces Option Live Update Directories list Defaults Clear Add Delete Description Displays the folders that the Media window will not automatically update with file changes when the folder is currently selected in browse mode BI folio If the folder is not currently selected file changes are updated in the Media window the next time you select the folder Sets TitleOne to ignore the default folders Clears all folders from the list Adds a new folder to the list Deletes the selected folder from the list Chapter 9 Resources 519 TitleOne User Guide Cache Tab Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne The Cache tab allows you to set the amount of RAM available for performing functions in the Media window The Record Cache improves scrolling through image thumbnails with smaller databases The Node Cache speeds up searches and improves very large database access Once your system is configured you should not have to change these settings Table 9 8 Cache Tab Preferences Option Max Size field Bytes Used field Hit Rate field Hits field Misses field Defaults button 520 Chapter 9 Resources TitleOne User Guide Description Enter the amount of RAM you want available for each cache Reports the amount of data currently stored in the available RAM Reports the effectiveness of the cache For example if TitleOne retrieves information from the cache 1 3 of the
424. ncy coocccoccccnnccnncnnnncnnnannnncnnnnnnnns 158 tube treatments ccccccsseesseeeeeeeeees 168 trigger types E 337 348 GPU aca 337 340 342 Manual mate 337 338 PC GIOCK testi latas 337 347 TimeCode aca 337 344 TIMO cocoa 337 339 tube treatments occooccccccncccnccocncnannnannnnons 168 two channel systems assign event to channel for output 47 assign events to different channels 351 output two layouts simultaneously 48 preview option occccccccccnccncccccnccncnonanonos 24 Program Preview palette display 14 set primary program channel 25 U unconstrained Text 107 underline text ocooocccoccococncccncconnncanonnnnss 115 MAE 96 UNO r rara idriees 193 unsafe video colors 502 Update Image Info button 382 411 update tagged objects oocccoccccccnccoccnnoo 207 Update to Current Style option 175 UETT DSN ari dia 214 215 V vector based Images rrrnnrrrrnnnennnrrennnnen 500 vector based logos cccooccccocccconcnccnncnnonanoss 456 VErSIOMNE seanser seeren 245 vertical guides EE 103 vertical text objects ooooccco o 112 114 VGA preview coccocccccccccccncnccncnnonacnncnnnnonncnononos 18 ViaBuilder described rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnne 5 video calibration 505 507 configure video board cccocccccccccccccncncon 30 live video DVE rrrnnnrrnrnnnonnrnnnvnnnnn 352 354
425. nd Create Objects Add text and graphic objects to layouts by selecting the appropriate tool placing the object in the layout and defining its contents and appearance Logo and clip objects can also be added to your layout using the Media Library See The Media Library on page 177 Table 3 3 Layout Objects Component Text Objects Graphic Objects Logo Objects Clip Objects Clocks Description Text objects contain the text in your layout You can constrain a text object to keep its size constant or allow it to grow as more text is added Paragraph text objects can contain multiple lines of text You can also create text paths and vertical text You can attach data tags to text objects Data tags allow you to quickly update objects and to attach objects to external data sources See Text Objects on page 105 to learn more about text objects Graphic objects are shapes such as rectangles and circles Use the graphic object tools to create simple shapes polygons lines and splines for your layout See Graphic Objects on page 130 to learn more about graphic objects Logos are a special class of objects They display imported images that can be tinted and can contain alpha transparency See Logo Objects on page 137 for details on understanding and using logos in your layouts Use clip objects to add full resolution uncropped video clips to layouts See Clip Objects on page 147 for mor
426. nd Ease Out values to create very dramatic transitions into and out of the keyframe Adjust the Ease In value to increase or decrease the speed into the selected keyframe Adjust the Ease Out value to increase or decrease the speed coming out of the selected keyframe Adjusting these values increases or decreases the number of frames between keyframes Click the Reset button to set the default frame value back to 50 Ease IN to Keyframe Ease OUT of Keyframe 3 CET mm ls Reset Reset Figure 4 112 Spline Ease In and Out of Keyframes Chapter 4 Animation 285 TitleOne User Manual Motion Timeline Since time is measured in frames the timing of your animation depends on the number of frames in each path You can adjust the length point in time at which the path runs amount of time between keyframes or the start and end frames of the path The Time tab provides a track view of every path in an animation The Track Sliders represents where the motion occurs on the track Evening Ne v Placement Shape Filter 3D Effects Spline Time Templates Frame po00 Zi a 0035 Ir Pause ll anoc 4 0016 lt Path Start Frame 14 0076 4 lt Path End Frame 0061 lt Path Duration lt Total Animation Duration lt Animation End 0076 5 ES P End 0076 Track Sliders The Appearance of Time Adjust the Length of a Path 286 Chapter 4 Animation Ti
427. nectors 2 Once you connect your GPI device to the COM port open the Preferences dialog in TitleOne File gt Preferences 3 Switch to the Sequencer tab in the Preferences dialog 4 From the GPI Port drop down list select the COM port that is connected to your GPI device 5 Click OK to save the setting and close the Preferences dialog 6 Close TitleOne and restart your system Select the GPI Trigger Use the options on the group header or the Event Editor tab to select the GPI trigger Select the group header 2 Select the trigger using one of the following methods e On the group header right click on the current trigger and select GPI from the right click menu e On the Event Editor tab select GPI from the Trigger Type drop down list Output with a GPI Trigger Once you move the playlist online use an external GPI button press to manually trigger each event To go online press CTRL SHIFT O You are prompted to save your playlist if you have not saved yet Once all the events are rendered and moved online the Run tab becomes available Chapter 5 Sequencer 343 TitleOne User Guide Select the group header containing the events you want to output Switch to the Run tab Click the Run Job button to start the output Press the external GPI button to trigger your event The event plays on the program channel Ga BK UN 6 Continue to output the remaining events using one of the following methods e T
428. nels on page 495 for details on manipulating individual channels and View Your Image on page 490 for details on viewing the alpha channel RGB Alpha Image Channels Channel All Channels Figure 8 15 Image Channels In Paint the alpha channel is actually made up of two channels the Real alpha channel and the Displayed alpha channel The alpha tools work on the displayed alpha channel while all other tools work on the real alpha channel The displayed alpha channel is unique to Paint and acts like a mask on the real alpha channel which is the original alpha channel of the image The real alpha channel is affected by all of the other Paint tools You need to understand this because the alpha tools remember the previous values by looking at the real alpha channel The Alpha Memory tool cannot restore alpha when you use the image editing color or transform tools because they affect the real alpha channel the same channel the Alpha Memory tool uses as its memory Real Alpha Channel ry Displayed Figure 8 16 Alpha Channels Chapter 8 Paint 457 TitleOne User Manual Work with Color In Paint there are several different ways of finding the color you want The Color tab offers the standard Inscriber Color Picker options Foreground and Background colors a list of the six most recently used colors Color Chips and a Color Tester You can also use the Color Picker tool on the Tools palette to select colors Current C
429. nnennansnnnnnene 12 playlist e E 312 add layouts from CG 312 add new events rrrrnnrrnnrrnnanennnnnnanennn 314 delete events rrrarrrnnnrrnnrnnannrnnnnnanennn 315 drag events to new location 316 duplicate events rrrrnrrrnnrrnanrrnnrnvanennn 316 MOVE events EE 315 DIAVIISE CUISOM sicher ear 316 use Animation Editor with playlist 312 playlist SAVE consensos od 8 DIUGSN Te SA 487 pointer tool move objects EE 185 select objects NEEN 181 points See paths CG DON GONE satse Greer 132 closed beziers rrrarrnnnnnnnnrnnanrvnnnnnanennn 133 GUNES sesiones 133 See also paths CG PON ONE i 145 add to Media Library oooccccocnco 177 lee 141 edge elements AE 151 DOSHION Bt e EE 185 position keyframes oocooccccccoccnccnoccnnonononoos 264 Preferences dialog A 512 DFOWSCR taD Ge 519 Cachetab JA 520 Character Generator tab 515 Folios tab oo eecececeececeeeeeeeeeneees 430 519 General tab occcooccccccccccccnccncnncnannnnnons 512 Project tab re 514 Sequencer tab rrrnrarnnrnnnenvannrnnanennnnne 516 Store Paths tab rrrrnnnrnnnnnnnnvnnnnnr 430 517 prefix text formatting ooocccoocccconcncnoo 225 preset animation templates 278 preview EIER eebe 357 Index 599 TitleOne User Guide 600 CEST CONO rasene 14 SINGS AO sie 46 preview Animation MOON DANS vade 270 motio
430. nnnnannnnnnnen 364 gradient steps ooocccconcccoon 159 160 163 gradients Index TitleOne User Guide o ER 455 transparency EE 455 lgl ee Lee 130 136 ASPECT de sd 135 CEO ANG carita 130 MP NS 131 191 L I an 136 ME Je 133 PO MENT EE 137 DOIV ONS vade 132 relative embellishments 135 Se ee Een EN EE ee 135 SPINES vestida laa 133 See also objects Lo O e 103 gro ps CG A eee 193 groups Sequencer delete group headers oooccccocccccncnnonoo 333 Group events o oocccocccnnonncononooronorinnanianranas 332 group headers EEN 332 NAME groups vansker 333 select trigger type E 337 VASER 103 H HD SD overview 27 29 aspect ratio ccoonccccnccocncconcconncnanonnnnss 27 conversion considerations 27 conversion limitations 29 conversion Options oocccocccoccccocncnnnnnnnnss 28 frame rate EE 27 native resolution 27 15 6 5 better ebe ees 216 highlight event during output 349 HKF image compression rrrrrrrnrrrvnnrennnn 400 HE voss 170 horizontal guides rrrrnnrrnnnrrrvnnrrnnnvrennnr 103 HV ve 170 ignore avi transparency s 148 166 illegal color values rrrrnnrrrnnnrrnnnnrrnnnnnnnnr 502 image filters Frame Grab 365 368 Image Info tab Media Store 381 image insertion commands CG 208 image Size Paint rrrnrrrnrnnrnernnnnre 447 500 image treatm
431. nnnnnne 230 TitleOne configure audio cooccccccocccnccnncnncnnncnnononons 38 configure video rrrrrrrnnrrrrrnnrnenrnnrrennnnnr 30 configure your system rrrrnnrrnnnnrn 18 41 Modules a a 2 OULDUL ODUONS ae 44 92 OOS ee teas 2 workspace Overview rrrrrrrarernnrnvanennn 2 41 TittleOne workspace Attributes palette A 15 MAIN ele e E 9 GLE rd 12 Program Preview palette 13 SChADDOOK svare nad 15 workspace Overview rrrrrrrarannnrnvanennn 9 16 titles Media Store default for database files 431 COIE tele outs Eee Ar 408 set for database files ooo c 393 tools Animation c oooccnccccccnnccnncnnnnnacnnnnnos 253 tools Paint lie EN tenn 454 457 brush based rrrarrnnnrrvanannanennnnnn 450 453 clone and clone fill 480 482 COIOM PICKER see 449 Index TitleOne User Guide Jeeves 449 image editing oo 477 478 transformation 472 473 Tools palette CG rrrrrnnnrrnrnnnrrnrnnnnrnrnnnrr 97 Tools palette Paint 437 440 transfer files between systems 008 6 transformations Paint absolute corner position o 474 flip horizontal vertical 474 IMPOR tan cas a 472 OPA oia 476 perspective variadas 476 Transition tab Media Store 381 424 transitions global
432. nnnnrnnnnn 108 SIEMENS amistad 150 156 depth elements 153 edge elements EN 150 RA 150 Shadow elements a nn 154 Sheen elements n 155 treatments ura iatda 157 embellishments DIO DIETT Lunner 138 relative embellishments 117 135 Index TitleOne User Guide end time En CR 335 event list See Sequencer playlist events Sequencer coccccccoccnnccnncnncnnnconnnnos 312 add blank event occcoccccccccncnccocnnconnnos 308 add space between events 335 apply alpha mask cccocccccccccccccccnconcnnos 331 SPP AUTO skades 330 apply transitions cccooccccccccconccocnconcnnos 325 assign to different channels 351 cut copy paste events rrrrrnrrrarrnnrr 308 Group events r rarrernorvonvoranrernvvnnerrasverne 332 highlight during output rrrnnrnnnrnrnnnre 349 log event down 308 IDG event UP iman aa 308 output with Program Preview palette 13 prepare for output rrrrrnrerrnnrrrranvnnnnre 325 select event render location 349 select events by label 356 select events by number 356 Ser AUNT e 334 SEU I PO LS 335 set OUl PO ua 335 Excel databases rrannunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 212 214 read ON ads 214 expand Sequencer playlist 308 expired datan illa 219 export Animation FA SPS ee 303 OPE ae 259 260 series of animation frames 304 s
433. nnrnnnnrernnrrnnnnr 64 raster Images EE 500 read data directly from the text file 220 rebuild Media Store databases 404 Recent Browse list Media Store 378 379 record 227 recover Media Store databases 404 CP Ee 36 Registry Manager occocccccncccconcncnnocos 234 236 Global Style Library 175 relative embellishments 117 135 Remote render option occcoccccccnconcncoo 350 removable drives Media Store browse for media files 385 SOUICE ICONS tales 376 remove color from RGB channels 496 render animations 270 301 302 render location events ccceeeseeeeeeee ees 349 Resize to Fit Texture button 165 restore alpha values Paint 456 457 RBI a 170 RGB Paint channels e ed 495 Color AMT ia idad 504 VIEW DION sitas 490 MG DEVUSULY EN Aae 118 right click menu IN ANMAUON astuta 254 NES suksesser 96 in Media Store rrrrrrnnrnnnnennnvnnnnnn 411 423 NM PAN EE 441 IN Sequencer rrrnnnnrannrnnnnennannennanennnnne 314 right to left text rrrnnrrrrrnnrarvrnnrrernnnnnen 119 el Me Gs EE 101 adjust borders 322 adjust multi page timing 318 adjust output Speed rrrarrrnnrernrrvanennn 359 adjust speed rrrranernnrrranernnrvvanennnnvanennn 323 create multi page rolls 317 multi pag
434. not reproduce negative voltages The Pluge test pattern is what you want to look at the area at the bottom right of the image Adjust the brightness and contrast until the dark gray bars disappear When calibrating the output and computer monitors remember that environment variables such as office lighting and glare from windows affect how you perceive the images You usually want to make sure light levels are consistent from one day to the next You also want to minimize glare on the monitors Chapter 8 Paint 507 TitleOne User Manual Shortcut Keys In Paint one of the main ways to speed up your work is to use the shortcut keys You can use shortcut keys for selecting tools and using Paint functionality Table 8 21 Paint Shortcut Keys Tool Shortcut Key Shortcut Key General Tools Color Picker CTRL SHIFT ALT 1 CTRL SHIFT ALT Z Scroll CTRL SHIFT ALT H CTRL ALT Z Transformation Tools Move CTRL SHIFT ALT V CTRL ALT T Rotate CTRL T CTRL SHIFT T Scale CTRL SHIFT ALT T i Color Tools Brush CTRL SHIFT ALT K Airbrush CTRL ALT K Pencil CTRL SHIFT K Eraser CTRL SHIFT ALT G Alpha Tools Alpha Add CTRL SHIFT ALT Alpha Linear Gradient CTRL SHIFT ALT P Alpha Subtract CTRL ALT Alpha Radial Gradient CTRL ALT P Alpha Memory CTRL SHIFT ALT R Image Editing Tools Clone CTRL SHIFT ALT 0 Clone Fill CTRL ALT 0 Offset CTRL SHIFT ALT Q Smear CTRL ALT Q 508 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Table 8
435. now contains the imported text 5 In the Template Manager click the Add button to create a new News Edit Table The Add News Edit Item dialog opens 6 Enter a number and name for the list in the Add News Edit Item dialog and click the Add button The new News Edit Table appears in the list It contains the contents of the O Import Text table Rename a News Edit Table To rename or renumber a News Edit Table select it in the Template Manager list and click the Rename button Chapter 3 CG 205 TitleOne User Guide Delete a News Edit Table To delete a News Edit Table select it in the Template Manager and click the Delete button Use Tags In CG tags are used to label objects They allow you to give names to objects and to quickly edit and change their content using only News Edit Tags also allow you to connect objects to data sources and to the Automation Interface application Tags Figure 3 58 Tags Added to Two Text Objects The tag labels do not appear when you output the layout They appear in the CG workspace for your reference only View Hide Tag Labels Use the Display Options menu to show or hide the tag labels in a layout Click the Display Options button on the CG toolbar The Display Options menu appears W 2 Select the News Tags option to show tag labels h 3 Clear the News Tags option to hide tag labels Add Tags Tags are added to text objects with either News Edit or the Layout Tree View
436. nre Reese dere 496 Understand Channels in PaiMt ococococccoo ee 497 hare Channels tia 497 Visualize Channel E 497 How Does Paint Use Channels rrannnnnnnnrnnannrnnnnrnnnnennannnnnnnrnnansnnnnnennnansnnnnnennansnnnnnennanennunsnnnnee 497 The Seed Channel Dialog Hare 497 Alpha Channel as a Special Case jr NNN 499 Understand Video Images 0 0 0 cece eee narre 500 Vector Based IMAGES Jaa 500 Raster or Bitmap Mages Hardee 500 KOSE PIMP sr 500 Design Challenges EE 500 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide xxvii xxvii Pre Sie A o e o Ge 501 PENN NN 501 VEN ee 501 Understand Video Color 0occoccccccc vnr ann 502 Kom Your CODES sa 502 KOMT OUR TOOS ura acia 502 Ingredients for Illegal Colors 502 SAUNA A ee 503 Satura ton inte REAL VON ads 503 ROB Color Gamutand Gam SSN 504 Understand the Calibration Process 00000 vu var ee ees 505 The NEST TOF Cabo He 505 Order of CANE saa 505 The Frame Bune vid A AE AA da A dt xe 506 TRE OUIDULMORINOR Lua 506 TRE Computer MONIOF errar eee 506 Computer Monitor Gamma sia acia 507 Computer Monitor Brightness and Contrast oocccccocccnccnnccnccnncnnconanoncnnnnononnnnononnnnnnnnnarincnnnnnnnnnos 507 Environment Ee WEE 507 SNOMCUT CE ENE e a 508 gr ales al EEE RE EET RE NE EEE EET EEE EEE ER 509 REOSQuUICOS ai tras ee dee a AL ne ee ea 511 Preferences Dialog rar ghia FANE owes 512 SENT DE 512 EE TEE 514 Charter Generator Tab NN 515 e
437. nrrrrnrrsnrrrnene 203 Add Items to the Content List neresna neni neee n a a aa aa 204 vpadate layout ENE ERE EE na eno 204 TAN NN 205 Manage Content S Quest EE 205 IMHO a NEWS Edit able see 205 Rename News Edit Table iii a a E dt 205 Delete NOwWs Edit Fable ui A att dai 206 USE Tags EE 206 View Hide Tag Label sporene das A added A ii 206 AT NER 206 Update Tagged be o ee dd 207 Update Objects WIIK News Ear 208 Image iserti n Commands asap 208 Change Tag Label Appearance rrrrnnrrnnnnrnrnnnnrnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnsnennrnnsnennnnsnennnnsnennnnsrensnnsnennnn 209 External Data SourceS 0 eer EE A 211 General eg ae EE eee ao 211 created Database EE 211 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide Create a text Fle Database sa sansene ansees 213 Add Database to System List occcconnncccconnncoconnnconononcnconnnnononnnnononnnnononnnnonannnnonannncnnannncnnanannss 214 Add a Database to System BEE 214 Add a Text File to SystentkisSt E 215 Create a Tagged CO Ee EE 217 Se Upa Layout wittt COlumnis isa 217 Link Layout 10 Database vasse A EA 218 Emkto ODBC Database iii E occas eee ve nena eae eee 218 Link Directly to a Text File Luse 219 LDK 10 30 AME SOUNGE La 221 Select Table Text for OULU vase 222 Format opece Dala a clic 225 WMACIOS tha chia ee NT 226 What Macros Can Record EE 226 KR TNS 227 PAUSE Record asisti 227 Stop and Save Macro 228 EMO eee eee 228 LENE eo ENE TEO E ENE EEE O NE EE 228 Bo
438. ns Most of the time you will need to resize your logos to get them to the size you need for video output You will get better results if you start with a large image 720 NTSC or PAL and scale it down later If you are scanning a logo scan it in at 200 to 400 of the image size to give yourself more detail to work with Scale your logo to the size you need when you finish editing it or when you import it into CG Once you ve cleaned up your logo you can export it from Paint and add it to the Logo Map in CG to use it as a text or graphic object See Logo Objects on page 137 for details on using logos in CG You can also import images from Paint to use as backgrounds or textures for text and graphic objects In Paint you can only work on a single image at a time but each image can have multiple layers Each layer has four channels Red Green Blue and Alpha Paint Image Image Layers Layer Channels Layer 6 Alpha Layer 5 Red Layer 4 Green Layer 3 Blue Layer 2 Layer 1 Figure 8 14 Image Layers and Channels Image Channels Alpha Channel in Paint The color channels define the color portion of the layer while the alpha channel defines the visible portion of the layer You can edit the channels individually and view the alpha channel separately from the color channels In Paint the alpha channel is represented by a grayscale image Fully opaque areas are white and fully transparent areas are black See Work with Chan
439. ns all video cards card Card Model E ven dees Gen a JET Sen gt 1 inscriber xD 2004014290 Oa low om om oor SDI Input 1 2 lmseriber xD 200 3876042 Gua Gua Gua Gua ox Freerun Swap Cards Swapping cards will Force changes to be applied Refresh List Yideo Card Details Card Model Inscriber XD 200 Card Number 4014290 FPGA Version 8401 Saved Configuration General Details Input Output Reference In Mixer Test Pattern Test your configuration by selecting and sending test pattern to the designated output ensuring the desired display results view pattern 1 O View pattern 3 a O view pattern 2 O view pattern 4 Ear lt gt Figure 1 25 Test Pattern Options 3 Select one of the test pattern options 4 Click View The test pattern you selected is sent to your output device so you can test your configuration 5 Click Stop to stop the output of the test pattern You can save the current configuration settings Click the Saved Configuration button 2 Type in a name for your configuration in the Save Configuration As field 3 Click Save beside the Save Configuration As field to save the current configuration Load a Configuration Edit a Configuration Delete a Configuration After you have saved your XD 200 video and audio settings you can load the configuration from the Current Configuration list I To open a saved configuration click the Saved Configuration button Sel
440. nt the alpha channel contains all of the details on the video transparency of the image See also Transparency Alpha Adjustment Filters Paint Inscriber filters that allow you to manipulate the video transparency of your images Alpha Background Pattern See Video Transparent Pattern Alpha Channel Paint The channel that defines the visible and transparent areas of images used in TitleOne Paint allows you to modify the image alpha channel Glossary TitleOne User Guide Alpha Mask Sequencer Uses a video file or image as a mask over the event during output The event displays through the alpha of the selected file Alpha Memory When you edit a file in Paint the original alpha channel is not destroyed when you modify the alpha information Using the Alpha Memory tools you can restore all or a portion of the original alpha channel Alpha Memory Tool Paint Tool that allows you to restore all or a portion of the original alpha channel of an image This is possible because the original alpha channel is not destroyed when you modify alpha information in Paint Alpha Texture Paint A type of texture applied to the alpha channel instead of to the image Alpha Tools Paint Tools used to add alpha to an image Tools include Alpha Add and Subtract Alpha Fill and Alpha Gradient Anamorphic Process that horizontally squeezes a 16 9 HD image so that all the pixels are visible in the 4 3
441. nt also creates a selection channel when you make a selection Switch to the Select tab and draw a selection The thumbnail sketch on the Select tab is a grayscale image representing the current selection channel White represents fully selected areas black represents fully unselected areas and shades of gray represent areas that are partially selected Channels mask out areas of an image If you select only the red channel you are masking out the green blue and alpha channels so that only the red channel is available for editing Similarly the selection channel acts as a mask on the unselected pixels so that only the selected pixels are available Paint uses the Select Channel dialog when you need to select channel options Call the Select Channel dialog from the Image As Selection or Layer as Selection buttons on the Select tab whenever you want to select a specific channel This dialog is also called whenever you import a selection The Image thumbnail shows a sketch of the source file The Selected Channel thumbnail shows a sketch of the current channel as determined by the Source radio buttons Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual 497 The dialog displays four groups of channel settings Source Scale Offset and Options The Options settings only appear when there is an active selection in the image The Source settings determine which source image channels you use as the selected channel The available channels are Lumina
442. nt to the selected Fill pixel with alpha based on luminance values of the image e The Tolerance value specifies the range of luminance values for pixels to be filled in Alpha Tolerance e Fills all pixels adjacent to the selected En Fill pixel with alpha based on tolerance hue values of the image e The Tolerance value specifies the range of hues for pixels to be filled in ag Alpha Linear e Performs a linear gradient on the Gradient alpha channel e Image appears to fade to video R Alpha Radial e Performs a radial gradient on the o Gradient alpha channel e Image appears to fade to video These tools are brush based Alpha Gradients Alpha gradients make creating layer effects easy Use the alpha gradient tools when you want your image to have layers fading into each other Chapter 8 Paint 455 TitleOne User Manual Restore Alpha Vector Based Logos Scale and Resize Logos Use Paint Images in CG The Paint Image 456 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Memory is a characteristic specific to the alpha tools No matter what alpha tool you use to manipulate the alpha channel the Alpha Memory tool can restore it Some logos are stored in vector based file formats such as eps or Illustrator files Paint cannot use vector based files so you need to convert these files to raster based images such as bmp or jpg Programs like Illustrator and Photoshop are capable of making these conversio
443. nuity and Bias on page 284 for details Tension loose taut Up K Continuity concave convex Hl gt J 0 00 Bias anticipate overshoot f UR 1 50 Spline sliders Figure 4 108 Spline Sliders Reset to Defaults There are three ways to reset the Tension Continuity or Bias values back to the default e Double click the slider e Click the reset button to the right of the slider e Double click the Tension Continuity or Bias number field Chapter 4 Animation 283 TitleOne User Manual Tension Continuity and Bias Every spline has three properties Tension Continuity and Bias To make a change to any spline you must first select the correct spline Then you can adjust the Tension Continuity or Bias values for the selected spline The best way to understand these properties is to experiment with your own spline paths A change in any of these properties is most obvious on a keyframe that is between two other keyframes Tension Continuity 284 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Tension adjusts the rigidity of the spline allowing you to tighten or loosen the curve The default tension is set to 0 00 so you have to adjust this value up or down to change the tension Drag the Tension slider right to increase the tension on the curve thereby tightening the spline The spline curve effectively turns itself inside out when you drastically increase the tension Drag the slider to th
444. nvsnnnnranvernansanne 505 507 CANVAS SIZE vasene ASA 447 capture frames occccoccnccncnnoconcconnnnnnnncnononos 362 cells See rows center Luse 118 OE EE EEE 93 246 OVOIVIOW 94 playlist function oocccocccccccccnncccncnnnnnnon 12 SWi tch tO PO OCRE on See Ae 94 EE E 128 CG workspace coccocccccnccnccncnnconcnononnncnncnnnononos 95 right click Menus rrrnnrrnrnrrnvnnrrnnnrrnnnnnen 96 Ll O tie i Ti teed 104 change keyframe shape 06 293 294 channels Paint lei EE 495 EA EE atc tna neat oaes 495 Index 587 TitleOne User Guide 588 SEIECTON tee 495 channels dual assign event to channel for output 47 assign events to channel Sequencer 351 output two layouts simultaneously 48 preview option enes 24 Program Preview palette display 14 set primary program channel 25 Character Map passar 109 clean up logos Paint occcccocccnccncccncnno 454 CP ele TE EE 147 149 Active Textures ccoocccccccoconcconnonanocannnnons 148 add with Media Library 148 178 susen edit 149 change media A 149 COALS ici 147 insert into text objects rrrrrnrrrrnnrrnnnn 108 lOO OE 148 playback options oocccccccoccccccnconcnnnonos 148 supported files oannnannnannnannnannnenannni 147 IANSDANGNCY ora as 149 clip option Active Texture treatments 164 179 described EEE ino a 4 video clips oocco
445. o erase CUISOF coooccooccncccncncncncncnnnnonnonnnos 121 Automation Interface rarrnnnnnnnnnnnr 207 209 axis Keane Korset 290 NN Le 257 B BT TOO NE 379 background color Paint 459 464 background objects CG 199 201 add media with Media Library 179 image treatments AE 200 backgrounds add Media Store 426 backgrounds use Scrapbook 15 DASCIING ee 114 Best Lossless image compression 400 Eiere EE eebe eg 168 beveled edge treatments rrrnrrrnnnennnnn 166 TANSDALSNCY idad 167 ale 133 266 pIMapIMAdes surta ieee 500 ALO Li EE 296 DOIA TOKT ee eebe Eege 115 bring object forward rrrrrnnnnrrrnnrnrvnnnnnnn 192 bring object to front serrant saraa 192 Browse button 379 381 browse files Media Store 385 scan for updates rrrrrnrrrrannnrannnnnnnen 406 Sie e surre 379 browse mode See modes Media Store Browse Set folio 378 379 421 brush preview cursor occocccccccocccoconos 453 491 build databases See Media Store databases Build Media Store dialog 383 391 400 Build set See folios Media Store butt line ends rrranrrnnrvvanennnnnvanennnnnnanennn 134 C calibrate computer MOnitor rarrrnnrrrarennnrevnnnnnre 506 frame buffers oocccocccccccncccccnccocnnnoncnonos 506 output monitor 506 system errannernrrannern
446. o immediately play the next event press the external GPI button The current event is cleared from screen and the next event plays e To clear the screen before playing the next event click the CLR button above the Program palette or press CTRL SHIFT ENTER Press the external GPI button to play the next event Use the Time Code The Time Code trigger uses an external time code source to trigger each Trigger event Events are triggered once the time code source reaches the event in point Set Up Your Time Code Source To set up your Time Code source you need to connect the time code device to your system and check that the time code is enabled Connect your time code device to the LTC input on the XD 200 paddleboard located on the back of your system a a LTC input gt 600000 Figure 5 25 Connect Time Code Device to the LTC Input 344 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Open the XD 200 Control Panel from the Windows Start menu Start gt All Programs gt Harris gt TitleOne gt Configuration Utilities gt Phoenix Control Panel In the XD 200 Control Panel click the Input Output button and ensure the Enable Timecode Input checkbox is selected Note If you do not have a timecode signal connected to the card make sure the checkbox is cleared Inscriber XD 200 Control Panel Use the Inscriber XD 200 control panel to configure your video card De
447. o tga If the object already has an image assigned to it you can use another image file in the same folder by entering a relative file path For example ZXYLogoSmall tga e Ifthe image file is in the Media Library reference it by number for logo objects text objects that contain inserted images and objects that contain image treatments or Active Texture treatments The Media Library number follows two number symbols For example if the image is number five in the Media Library enter HHS e To insert images by file path within text objects use the command followed by the image path enclosed in double quotes For example C lmages Flags Canada tga Team Canada e When updating layouts with Automation Interface you can also specify a new image file path using any command that allows you to modify tag contents within a layout Note Video clips will display as stills if they are applied to logo objects Change Tag Label Appearance Use the News Tag Editor to change the appearance size and y location of tag labels Click the Display Options button on the CG toolbar and select Edit News Tags from the drop down list Sala The News Tag Editor opens Chapter 3 CG 209 TitleOne User Guide 210 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Use the controls in the editor to change the color transparency size and location of the tag labels News Tag Editor Define the tab attributes of the news tags Text Color k
448. o this click on the Switch Colors arrow You can also set the Foreground and Background colors by clicking on the Foreground or Background color swatch and selecting a color from any of the Color tab color selection areas You can switch the Foreground and Background colors by clicking on the Switch Colors arrows You can also temporarily switch colors on certain tools by holding the ALT key while you paint Paint displays the six most recently selected colors This is a handy feature when you need to use several colors repeatedly Color chips are handy for defining colors for specific projects such as working within station logos You can define replace delete select import export and reset the color chips See Use Color Chips on page 461 for details Reset The color tester can be used to generate colors that complement each other It can also be used as a cloning source or destination giving added flexibility when using the Clone tools ester kK Clear You can use all tools in the color tester but there are a few restrictions The undo commands filters selection actions and selection options do not work To deselect in the color tester you need to select the Rectangular Selection tool and click without dragging Although there are no color correction options on the Color tab there are color correction filters in Paint See Work with Filters on page 483 for details Use Color Chips
449. o yellow or from red to yellow may be a problem Colors with high chrominance and low luminance also lean towards illegal so dark saturated colors can be problems as well Again do not be afraid of using these colors just use good judgement when using them For example if you are working with an image that has detailed areas with light greens yellows or reds make sure the details are not just created with changes in color Details in these areas must be created by a difference in luminance as well A difference in luminance implies contrast Following this guideline is a good idea no matter what colors you are working with Saturation and Video Saturation in the Real World To understand which colors look good in video you need to experiment with saturation Colors that look quite different on your computer monitor may appear very similar if not the same on video You should try using more than just different saturation values Compelling images often have a good range of saturation luminance and chrominance Open the saturation ipt file in the Title One PaintExamples folder and take the image to video Notice how the difference in saturation is more noticeable on your computer monitor than on your output monitor With this example you can see that you often do not need to use highly saturated colors for video images Figure 8 36 Video Saturation In the real world colors are much less saturated than they seem As an exp
450. objects Figure 3 50 Send a Semi Transparent Logo Object Backward The background object is always on the bottom layer but the other objects in a layout can be moved forward and backward with the Layer buttons and the right click menu When you select one or more objects and click a Layer button in the CG Editor toolbar the objects move forward or backward according to the button selected Table 3 23 Layer Buttons Button Description Bring to Front Moves the selected object in front of all the Lh objects in the layout Bring Forward Moves the selected object in front of the object currently ahead of it Send to Back Moves the selected object behind all the di objects in the layout You cannot move an object behind the layout s background Send Backward Moves the selected object behind the object currently behind it 192 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Group Objects You can also move objects by right clicking them and choosing Bring to Front or Send to Back from the right click menu When the edges of objects are combined all of the combined objects move to the same layer To change the layering of combined objects while still maintaining their edge appearance be sure to select all the combined objects before changing their layer See Combine Edges on page 152 to learn more In large layouts with overlapping objects it is sometimes easiest to change object layers in a tree view See The Layout Tree Vie
451. occcn es 448 AECA TOO se eee Der 448 Tools Palette and Flyout Tools Menu ENEE 448 Gere PT 449 GOD Guer EE 449 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide xxiii Work with Brush Tools 0000 cee ee 450 EBA 450 SNE PL BS asian retador 450 EPA B US EE 450 FN NS 450 o EEE Te RE RER NERE RR REPR 451 FEE re 451 FETE BIN on 451 SCH E 451 VEN 452 SPA PS 452 SONNOSS sa 452 ASPEN SAS GE 452 MA 452 SPE RE 453 DUST PTEVIEW YVINOOW ss 453 Brush Preview QUESO st e en io 453 Work with Alpha Tools and Logos 0ccoccoccoccc es 454 Understand ADNA a a e 454 MANN ee 454 EV OG MURO O GLE EEE CE E o REED DREPER EEE 454 PIPA GENESE 455 FRES Ol Ce AIDING ane dio kk 456 AAS OG pe ro sed Ee RE EE EE acne oe a Petar re ee ka eer er 456 SG dle Ree NSD 456 Use Pan Images TL Gave 456 A ER 456 image e EE 457 pe Channel IR Eeer 457 Work WIN COlO sustraerse eee sxe re 458 Color Piker Alea asset 458 Foreground and Background Colors 459 Set the Foreground and Background Colors occccooccnccnnccnccnnccnconononconononnonononnonancnnonancnnonanennos 459 EE ENEE ee 460 MOSERECENt COILS Ne 460 A o 460 xxiv Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide Color Tester seneste knea eden 460 Hot o ee 460 Use Color EIDA ee as rada di 461 Palete FOS ect ici 461 Mor e PP PP a E 461 eebe O A o ee 461 Resetto elle Ion cas 461 BEE CO MIDS VING EE 461 Use the Color Chip Cursors user 462 Patan Images cia li cee hae
452. of simply referenced are always available View Media File Transparency You can view the transparency levels of the media thumbnails in the Media window To preview the media file transparency levels right click a thumbnail in the Media window Select Show Alpha from the right click menu The thumbnail displays the transparency levels of the file e Black indicates completely transparent areas e White indicates completely opaque areas E 1123 worldmap e Shades of gray indicate different levels of transparency To view the original full color preview right click the thumbnail and then select Show Alpha to remove the checkmark You can set default transition effects for a media file including trimming and looping video clips In the Media window select the thumbnail Chapter 7 Media Store 423 TitleOne User Guide 2 In the Attributes palette at the bottom of the window select the Transition tab Key Info Image Info Transition Mark In 00 00 00 0141 Mark Out 00 04 51 04 Duration Loop a Frames a Program D Clip Options Figure 7 29 Attributes Palette Transition Tab 3 Select a transition type such as Wipe or Dissolve from the list 4 Select a transition direction by clicking one of the buttons below the transition type list 5 In the Frames field enter the duration for the transition 6 To set an output channel click one of the Program buttons For video
453. og Docked RapidFire Dialog When the RapidFire dialog is docked use the RapidFire Menu button to access key RapidFire functionality In the RapidFire dialog click the Menu button Take Enter Read F4 write FE Transfer o to Layout Delete Layout Read Tmpi Fz Write Tmpl F3 Clear Output Clear Layout Auto Text hi Ki N Elk w Load From Working Directory Ft a Grab Ctra Ready Menus Position ER E T ES le Figure 2 15 RapidFire Dialog Menu 2 From the menu select a RapidFire command Undocked RapidFire Dialog The undocked RapidFire dialog provides single click access to key RapidFire functionality In the RapidFire dialog click a button Read EA Clear Output Write FS Clear Layout Read Tmpl F2 Write Tmpl F3 Transfer Auto Text Contig Go To Layout Figure 2 16 Undocked RapidFire Dialog Perform a RapidFire Operation You can perform most RapidFire operations with a single keystroke if you purchased the RapidFire Keyboard option shortcut key or mouse click To perform some operations you must specify a layout template or other item for the operation for example a template to read from the registry For these actions complete the following two steps Specify an item for example a layout or an Auto Text string e Enter the item number in the RapidFire text field using the number pad 2 Specify an operation using one of the following methods e Pre
454. oint to a new position To delete a point position the Polygon tool or the Selection tool over the point until it becomes an arrow then double click the point Closed Beziers To remove the fill from a polygon switch to the Attributes tab of the Attributes palette and change its form to Closed Bezier The Polygon becomes an outline To return the fill to the polygon change its form to Filled Bezier Use the Spline tool to add lines and splines to a layout l 2 3 Select the Spline tool in the Tools palette e Click the CG workspace to place the first point of the spline Click the CG workspace to place the rest of the points The spline is drawn in the workspace Hold the SHIFT key while clicking to make the point part of a curve instead of a straight line To change the curvature of a point position the Spline tool or the Selection tool over the point until it becomes an arrow then hold the ALT key and drag the point s control handles This creates convex and concave curves on either side of the point You can continue to select and move the control points as long as you hold the ALT key Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 133 134 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 5 To move one of the points position the Spline tool or the Selection tool over the point until it becomes an arrow then drag the point to a new position 6 To delete a point position the Spline tool over the point until it becomes an arrow then
455. older in the navigation pane Media Store switches to browse mode DG DA 125 5 O NA BL EES Files Harris GScribe Samples v p FileServicePrinter GScribe 4 Configuration Utilities amp DefaultLocalStore H Directx E ImageRepository 3 imports A Microsoft Windows Media 9 3 Organic 8 3 91110 clouds 9 1111 canada 91112 china 9 1113 cloudsgood WR 3 Basic extures 3 Clock Samples E ICG animations amp I1115 france ES 1116 ireland amp 91117 japan amp 391118 raintablet 9 1120 suntablet amp 1121 uk amp 1122 usa amp 31123 worldmap paint C Panel Images E Shaders Spell H E STORE DP lt Figure 7 9 Use Navigation Pane to Browse Folders The buttons on the Media Store toolbar control the folder or folio displayed Chapter 7 Media Store 385 TitleOne User Guide Export Media Store Media Files Metadata 386 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide in the Media window Table 7 5 Browse Folders and Folios Button List Function Global Browse Displays all the media you have browsed using the button navigation pane Browse Set button Displays search results from last browse mode search BI button Displays the contents of the folder selected in the navigation pane After you have browsed several folders click the Global Browse button to display all the media files in the folders browsed Recent Browse list Displays a list of the las
456. olor drop down list to select the second color for the gradient By default the second color is applied to the bottom of the element c Use the first Color slider to set how far from the top of the element the gradient begins d Use the second Color slider to set how far from the bottom of the element the gradient ends 2 Enter values in the Transparency fields to set the transparency of the first and second colors 3 Increase the number of Gradient Steps to make the gradient repeat one or more times on the element This creates a bar effect as the gradient repeats 4 Use the Angle control to rotate the gradient Radial Gradient Use the Radial Gradient treatment to apply a two color radial gradient to an element Radial Gradients shade from one color to another within a growing circle Figure 3 33 The Radial Gradient Treatment The controls for the Radial Gradient treatment are in the Settings section of the Edge Depth and Shadows tab They are in the Color section of the Face tab Chapter 3 CG 159 TitleOne User Guide 160 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide I Select the colors for the radial gradient a Click the first Color drop down list to select the first color for the gradient By default the first color is applied to the center of the element b Click the second Color drop down list to select the second color for the gradient By default the second color is applied to the perimeter of the element c U
457. olors cker d I If olor Tester Color Pi Figure 8 17 Color Tab Color Picker Area The Color Picker area on the Color tab offers a second Color Picker tool in addition to the one on the Tools palette The Color tab Color Picker lets you quickly pick a color from anywhere on your computer monitor without having to switch tools To use it the Color tab Color Picker click on the Color Picker tool and drag it to the color you want to select When you release the left mouse button the color under the cursor will be selected Color Selector Color Slider Color Model List vas Fields Color Selection Box Color Picker r Pic Figure 8 18 Color Picker Area The Color Picker area on the Color tab supports three color models RGB HSV and HLS In all three color models color definitions are the result of 458 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Foreground and Background Colors three values When you modify one value the range of possible colors that can be achieved using the other two values changes so the color display changes Use the Color Selector and the Color Slider to get close to the color definition that you want and then change the three values numerically until you reach the specific color Table 8 8 Color Models Color Model Description HSV Hue Saturation and Value This model describes colors in terms of hue tint saturation tone and value shade RGB Red Green and Blue This
458. on Chapter3 CG 201 TitleOne User Guide Update Layouts News Edit lets you Quickly update layout text and logos You can update text without having to type it in each time so you don t have to worry about formatting or spelling Logos can be updated using commands sent by Automation Interface By adding tags to layout text you can link text objects to external data sources You can also use tags to allow TitleOne operators to edit text objects without being able to modify the rest of the layout Use News Edit 202 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Mews Edit Select a text box and give it tag name to quickly change content Content Victor Atlas Display PTR A Victor Atlas City Hall Park Central The Annex Weather Bureau mito I Tell Content Source Configure External Data Source Reporter Figure 3 55 News Edit The options in News Edit let you Quickly update the text in a layout Open News Edit Click the News Edit button on the CG Editor toolbar News Edit Wa opens in a separate window and remains on top of your CG N interface until you close the window Use the Content section of the tab to add display and manage the names and phrases that you want to use in the layout Use the Tags section of the tab to label and quickly update the objects in the layout See Use Tags on page 206 for more information about tagged objects Select News Edit Tables The names and phrases you define are stored
459. on To add a graphic object to your layout use the Rectangle appropriate tool from the Tools palette In most cases you add graphic objects to a layout by selecting a tool and drawing the object in the CG workspace Simple Shapes Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide CG provides a variety of simple shapes that can be quickly added to your layout You can create rectangles wedges arcs ovals round rectangles and round corner rectangles Table 3 12 Simple Shape Tools Rectangle Oval e il E Wedge Round Rectangle To create a new simple graphic object in a layout Select the appropriate graphic tool from the Tools palette 2 Click and drag in the CG workspace to place size and orient the graphic object e To center the graphic where you clicked in the CG workspace hold the ALT key while dragging Otherwise the point you clicked becomes one of the graphic s corners e Hold the SHIFT key while dragging to constrain the graphic s aspect ratio to 1 1 This ensures that circles and squares are perfectly constrained e To change the horizontal or vertical orientation of the graphic drag the selected handle through the opposite boundary of the graphic The graphic flips in the direction you drag Figure 3 16 Add a Rectangle to the Layout Corner Trim You can set the corner trim percentage for Round Corner and Clipped Corner Rectangle objects Larger values create larger corners Figure 3 1
460. on To quickly hide all the items on the program channel click the All Off button To reset the items on the program channel to the first frame check the Reset checkbox and then click the Take button Each item resets to the first frame and resumes playback Output Timers You can easily output times in Overlay using the output options and run buttons This topic describes the output options for timers only For information on playing other items see Output Items on page 8l Click on the numbered button beside the timer so it is yellow A yellow number marks items that display during output A flashing indicator beside the number indicates the item s show hide state has changed The indicator stops flashing the next time you take the item Click the Take button The Take button applies any changes to the show hide state e Since you set the timer to display in step one clicking Take displays the timer on the program channel The timer displays at the first frame but doesn t start counting until you click Play e If you had set the timer to hide in step one clicking Take would hide the item on the program channel Click the Play button to start the timer counting up or counting down Click the numbered button beside the timer to hide the item and then click Take Overlay hides the timer Click the numbered button again and then click Take Overlay displays the timer The timer is still running Click the Pause button
461. on Buttons Button Name Description ES Single Selection e Creates a new selection every time d you draw a selection Add to Selection e Adds a selection to the current selection e Has the same effect as using the SHIFT key with the Single Selection button selected Subtract from e Subtracts new selections from the Selection current selection e Has the same effect as using the ALT key with the Single Selection button selected RB Intersect Selection e Intersects any new selections with the current selection so that only areas common to both selections remain selected e Has the same effect as using the SHIFT and ALT keys with the Single Selection button selected ES Move Selection e Moves the current selection Chapter 8 Paint 469 TitleOne User Manual 470 Selection Buttons Selection Fields Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual The selection buttons on the Select tab affect the current selection Table 8 13 Selection Buttons Button Description Image e Opens the Select Channel dialog in order to select a channel on all layers Layer e Opens the Select Channel dialog in order to select a channel on the current layer All e Selects all the pixels in the current layer None e Clears all selected pixels and ends a transformation Visible e Selects all visible pixels in the layer all pixels that at least 1 opaque Invisible e Selects all invisible pixels in the layer
462. ons to select where the image will be located on the new canvas For example the Top Left button aligns the top left corner of the image with the top left corner of the canvas 3 Click OK Image amp Canvas Size Eg Current Size Width 720 Height 486 Sizing Options width 900 Height 520 Resize Image OK Cancel Figure 8 8 Image and Canvas Size Dialog Box Chapter 8 Paint 447 TitleOne User Manual 448 Work with Paint Tools Paint uses six types of tools general transformation selection alpha color and image editing tools Most of the alpha color and image editing tools are brush based That is they edit the image as if you were using a paint brush on canvas Most of the color image editing and alpha tools along with the Brush Selection tool are all brush based These tools act on the image in ways similar to a paint brush using attribute settings from the Brush tab Paint has sixteen default brushes but at any point you can redefine brush shapes and characteristics See Work with Brush Tools on page 450 and Brush Attributes on page 451 for details Select a Tool Tools Palette and Flyout Tools Menu Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual You can select any tool by clicking on a Tools palette button or by using the right click menu You can select a brush based tool alpha color and image editing from the Tool menu on the Brush tab The Attributes palette tabs contain
463. ooccnccccccnnccnocnncnnos 41 AO vet 30 Index TitleOne User Guide save configuration 40 view system details rrrrnnnrnnnrrrvnnnennnnrr 32 view test pattern 40 XML databases r rnaurrnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnvnnnnvnevnennr 221 Y YS NA 257 265 Z T R ea 257 265 290 293 EE A E 104 z order set for DES 547 Index 609 TitleOne User Guide Technical Support If you require technical support contact your dealer first Since your dealer helped you configure your system your dealer is also the best resource for your system configuration issues If your dealer is unable to resolve your technical support problems consult the BCD Customer Support Portal at https support broadcast harris com The portal provides 24 hour access to technical support for any Harris hardware or software product allowing you to Access technical information from a vast Knowledge Base Locate technical solutions and information quickly via the Advanced Search Engine Enter service requests and track the progress of those requests online Request a Return Merchandise Authorization RMA and view status online Download the latest software updates Stay current on all the latest service and safety bulletins If you cannot find the information you need at the support portal contact Inscriber Graphics Systems technical support Email graphics support Qharris com Web http broadcast harris com products broadcastGraphics Inscriber Graph
464. open the Preferences dialog File gt Preferences deck 2 Switch to the Folios tab in C Date 3 Select a new sort order None Number Date 5 O keyword Keyword Title Resolution or User E Title 4 Click OK CO Resolution E User For more information on sorting see Sort Media Files on page 407 di D A default title and default keywords are automatically assigned to every media file included in a Media Store database build You can enter the default title and keywords on the Store Paths tab in the Preferences dialog Open the Preferences dialog File gt Preferences l 2 Switch to the Store Paths tab 3 Inthe Default Title field enter the default title 4 In the Default Keywords field enter the default keywords Separate entries with a space character Enter multiple word keywords using quotation marks flags international Canadian flag patriotism 5 Click OK Media Store supports three date formats DD MM YYYY MM DD YYYY and YYYY MM DD The format is controlled by the Date Format option Media Store date fields for example the file date on the Key Info tab use the format specified by the Date Format option Also if you define a search using the Date search key you must use the current Media Store date Chapter 7 Media Store 431 TitleOne User Guide 432 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide format To change the Media Store date format use the Preferences dialog l 2
465. or aspect ratios If your Port object s size is unconstrained change the width and height of the object using the Width and Height fields If its aspect ratio is unconstrained clear the Maintain Aspect Ratio checkbox to allow the Width and Height to be changed independently You may also be able to select a constraint method These methods set how the Port object behaves when its size is changed Table 3 17 Port Constraint Methods Button Description The Port content is sized to fill the object The object becomes the size of the Port content Maintaining the object s current width the lower boundary 77 of the object moves to fit the Port content Maintaining the object s current width the upper boundary GH of the object moves to fit the Port content Maintaining the object s current height the right boundary BE of the object moves to fit the Port content Maintaining the object s current height the left boundary of el the object moves to fit the Port content Clip Objects Use clip objects to add full resolution uncropped video clips to layouts Video clips can also be applied as Active Textures to existing objects in your layouts See Active Texture Treatment on page 164 for more information Feature Note You must have the Clip Option enabled on your system before you can use clips and Active Textures Supported Video An appropriate codec must be installed on your system before you can play Clips vi
466. or the layout lt Use drop down list to select channel Figure 2 1 Channel Drop Down List e Program palette Use the Channel buttons on the Program palette to Chapter 2 Output 47 TitleOne User Guide assign a channel to the selected layout Use buttons to select channel Figure 2 2 Channel Buttons Output Two When you have a dual channel system you can output two layouts Layouts simultaneously One layout plays on channel and one layout plays on Simultaneously channel 2 To output the linked layouts simultaneously Select the first layout in the playlist and assign the layout to channel I 2 Press SHIFT MINUS key on the number pad to setup the event 3 Select the second layout in the playlist and assign the layout to channel Ze 4 Press SHIFT MINUS key on the number pad to setup the event 48 Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide 5 To take both events press the ENTER key on the number pad The first layout plays on channel and the second layout plays on channel 2 M Eile Edit Playlist Tools Help JM 28 OA ALR e L Plyisttems 300 200 100 1 00 C Y 8 Zoom Fyll Sere Y 9 OFFLINE Y 00 70 N Default Tamnlate 00 00 i Set first layout to play on channel 1 DASS od VANA OGGE lt F z E S fy gt Set second layout to play on channel 2 KKK
467. ords date file type and database storage information Kew Info Image Info Transition Title L3TMPLTO4 LOGO TGA Keywords C PROGRAM FILES HARRIS GSCRIBE SAMPLES IMAGES pate AT v enge Data E Imag Figure 7 6 Attributes Palette For database media files the Attributes palette contains the Memo tab on which you can enter notes for the file For database image files the Image Info tab shows whether the file has been added to the database instead of referenced and if so any compression algorithm applied to the image For information on updating media file titles keywords and memos see Chapter 7 Media Store 381 TitleOne User Guide Update Thumbnails on page 406 Media Store Palette The Media Store palette provides quick access to functions PIE ay Y E d ech gt g Figure 7 7 Media Store Palette Table 7 4 Media Store Palette Buttons Button Function Saves the updated information for a media file Searches for media files For more information see Gn _ Search for Media on page 413 Finds a media file For more information see Find a File or on page 416 Ay Finds the next media file matching the find criteria For lex more information see Find a File on page 416 Sorts the thumbnails in the Media window For more information see Sort Media Files on page 407 a 382 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide Table 7 4
468. ore The layout is copied to Scratch vii and opened for edit 4 Change the layout if required 5 Using the number pad enter a number to use as a name for the layout for example 214 6 Press the RapidFire RECORD LAYOUT key or FS on the standard keyboard to write the layout The layout in Scratch vii is written to the playlist Write a Layout to Media Store as a Template Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Create a layout 2 Ensure that the Load From Working Directory option is not selected in the RapidFire menu See Figure 2 17 on page 64 If the RapidFire dialog is undocked click its Config button and then ensure that the Load From Working Directory checkbox is cleared in the InsertText dialog 3 Using the number pad enter a number to use as the media number for the template in Media Store for example 2001 Update a Layout with Auto Text 4 Press SHIFT RECORD LAYOUT on the RapidFire keyboard or SHIFT F5 on the standard keyboard to write the layout to Media Store The layout in Scratch vii is written as a layout scribe file in the working directory For information on controlling the directory in which layout files are created see Set the Working Directory on page 64 Use the Auto Text feature to update your layout with commonly used text from a text file The text file contains text entries and determines where the cursor moves after you insert the string Create an A
469. ormation in the current image Once you clear the transformation you can no longer move it separately Imports a bitmap file as a selection once you clear the selection you can no longer move it separately from the image Imports an image to use as a texture for any brush based tools Imports a palette file aco and overwrites the existing color chips Imports a palette file aco and adds it to the existing color chips Chapter 8 Paint 445 TitleOne User Manual Import a Texture You can import a surface texture to be used by the Texture tool or other brush based tools Select File gt Import Export gt Import Texture In the Select Channel dialog you can set the texture size and which image channels you want to use for the texture Use the Texture field on the Brush tab to set the amount of texture each tool paints with See Work with Brush Tools on page 450 and Edit an Image on page 477 for details Export or Save a When you want to save an image in Paint you have to export it If you select File the Save button on the toolbar TitleOne saves the current playlist not the Paint image If you save your image as an ipt or Igo file the alpha channel is retained when you use the image elsewhere in TitleOne If you save your images in any other format you may lose the alpha channel Export Options The following table describes all of the export options available in Paint Table 8 4 Export Options Option
470. ormation tools Hold the ALT key to paste a copy of the selection contents while you are transforming Hold the CTRL key to paste a copy when the mouse button is pressed You can use several methods to exit a transformation Table 8 16 Exit Transformations Method Outcome SHIFT ESC ESC o Mone Z Select a new tool Exits the transformation without applying it Applies and exits the transformation Applies and exits the transformation This button is located on the Select tab Applies and exits the transformation Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual 473 Use the Transform Tab The Transform Tab provides options for more precise control over your transformations You can adjust the opacity flip your selections and add depth and select relative or absolute transformations Transformation Type 474 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Flip Horiz Flip vert Opacity mE Apply Reset wm Tools i fe mW E Figure 8 21 Transform Tab You can modify your transformations based on three frames of reference Relative 2D Transform Relative Corner Offsets and Absolute Corner Position Select your frame of reference from the Type drop down list on the Transform tab The main difference between the frames of reference is in the way Paint measures the movement across the workspace Relative 2D Transform This frame of reference finds the center point of your transformation and
471. ot in the playlist and select File gt Import gt Import Animation You cannot edit a rendered animation file To make changes you need to locate the source scribelist file where the animation was created You can make changes in Animation Editor then re render the via Switch to Sequencer to set time code and trigger information When you render an animation a via file is created The Export Animation option located under the File menu in Animation Editor produces the same results as rendering except that you can select a specific location for the animation file using the export option Select a location and name for the file then click OK The Render Engine launches and the animation is rendered frame by frame Rendering Frame 18 of 76 Figure 4 126 Export Animation When you export an FX Script the file is saved in ifx format You can then edit the script in any text editor import the file into CG or use it in Animation Editor Chapter 4 Animation 303 TitleOne User Manual Export a Series of Frames Export a Single Frame 304 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual You can export each frame in an animation as a single bitmap format file The Export All Frames option saves the animation as a series of still images in the selected file format Formats include hkf bmp vii Igo tga and pict Each frame is saved in the specified folder in sequential order The series of images are named sequentially
472. other See also Spline Glossary TitleOne User Guide Control Point CG Point on a polygon or spline that changes its shape A single spline or polygon can contain up to 64 control points Polygon control points define its boundaries while spline control points define tangents to the curve Corner Logo A logo found in a corner of the screen generally for the purposes of corporate identification or program rating Corner logos are also known as video bugs Crop Filter Animation A motion filter that cuts off or reveals a percentage of an object over time You can set a different crop number for each side of an object D Database Mode Media Store The Media window displays media files from the current Media Store database The Media Store toolbar provides access to folios containing media files from the database Contrast with Browse Mode Defined Shot Box Buttons See Predefined Media Delay Animation A set number of frames an animation stops and holds its position at the current frame before continuing along the path Set in the Pause field to the left of the Animation tabs Also known as Pause Depth Element CG An element that extends away from the object at an angle giving it the appearance of thickness and depth DigiMix A brand of frame buffer Digital Store See Media Store Display Latency The lag time between first accessing a rendered file and having it appear on scre
473. ou can switch to the Run tab to monitor your output activity The Run tab displays the current time code the amount of time elapsed for the running playlist the amount of the time left to complete playback and the amount of free RAM currently available Chapter 6 Frame Grab AN Capture frames from a video signal in Frame Grab Introduction Frame Grab allows you to capture a single frame from an incoming video signal and save it as a still image Frame Grab includes special tools to crop ragged edges from the grab filters to apply to the grab and a variety of methods to save the image as a graphics file Frame Grab is not available on all supported frame buffers Switch to Frame Grab Attributes Grab an Image 362 Chapter 6 Frame Grab TitleOne User Guide To switch to Frame Grab from other TitleOne modules use one of the following methods On the toolbar click the Frame Grab weg O button A lt Q ei KE Si Select Tools gt Frame Grab k Press F7 Frame Grab is a simple module All the Frame Grab tools and options are located in the Attributes palette at the bottom of the window and on the Frame Grab Edit menu Frame Grab Grab Live Video Save Grab to File siter Still Graphic Save Grab to Clipboard Sn E Gen 6 Fill Only KC H O Key Fill D mn to fi m LL Figure 6 1 Frame Grab Attributes Palette The video plays in the Frame Grab window To capture an image Click t
474. out s Styles to return to the default setting You can update reorder and delete the styles in the Style Library Styles can also be added to the Global Style Library which contains a library of styles for your current template registry Update a Style To update a style stored in the Style Library select an object with the new style attributes right click the style you want to update and select Update to Current Style The style changes in the library to reflect the new attributes Updating a style does not affect any objects in your layout that use the old style attributes Reorder Styles Styles can be dragged to new positions within the Style Library When you grab a style chip and drop it in another position the style moves to the new position The style chip s number does not change when it is moved Delete a Style To delete an unwanted style right click it in the Style Library and select Delete Style from Library The style is removed Use the Global Style Library to build a collection of styles that you need to use with a particular template registry Template registries are collections of templates and styles which are used to create layouts By adding templates and styles to template registries you can better organize and share styles within different projects For more information about registries see Template Registries on page 234 To add a style to the Global Style Library right click the style in the Style
475. ow select the thumbnail Edit Keywords 5 6 In the Attributes palette at the bottom of the window select the Key Info tab Kew Info Image Info Transition Title L3TMPLTO4 LOGO TGA Keywords C PROGRAM FILES HARRIS GSCRIBE SAMPLES IMAGES mM L3 ro AE Image Figure 7 21 Attributes Palette Key Info Tab In the Title field edit the title To save the changes press ENTER on the main keyboard You can also edit multiple titles by appending the same text to the existing titles or replacing the existing titles with the same text Ensure that the Browse button is in the correct position selected to update a browsed file not selected to update a database file Select a folio that contains the files to update To select multiple thumbnails in the Media window use the SHIFT or CTRL key In the Attributes palette at the bottom of the window select the Key Info tab In the Title field edit the title To append the entered text to the existing titles press CTRL ENTER Use the ENTER key on the main keyboard OR To replace the existing titles with the entered text press SHIFT ENTER Use the ENTER key on the main keyboard Keywords are descriptive words assigned to media files Once you assign keywords to a media file you can search for the file using keywords You can edit the keywords assigned to a browsed media file or a database media file For a browsed media file the default keyword
476. ow the Spell Checker selects misspelled words click the Options button and then select the options to enable Spell Options C 1 Ignore words with numbers e g Wing2 13 Ignore capitalized words e g Inscriber 3 Ignore words in all caps e g CPU C 4 Ignore words with mixed case e g WinNT 5 Case sensitive 6 Match case in replacements 7 Report double words e g had had 13 Allow ad hoc concatenation of words e g for German 9 Look for two word suggestions e g acar gt a car 10 Typographical Suggestions 11 Phonetic Suggestions 112 Split contracted words 13 Split hyphenated words Figure 7 16 Spell Options Dialog e To close the Suggestions dialog before reviewing all unknown words click the Quit Checking button 5 For each file in the Build set repeat steps 2 4 Thesaurus When you are building media into a database use the Thesaurus functionality to find synonyms or antonyms to use in the title or keyword list By adding synonyms you can more easily find files in the database Chapter 7 Media Store 395 TitleOne User Guide I To open the Build Media Store dialog click the Add to the Store button on the Media Store palette The Build dialog lists all the files in the Build set See Figure 7 11 on page 390 and Figure 7 12 on page 391 2 Inthe Build Set area select a file 3 To search for synonyms or antonyms of text in the Title or Keywords field click
477. own merges the current layer with the one below Al e Merge Visible merges all visible layers those that have the View Layer Toggle selected e Merge All merges all layers in the image 494 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Work with Channels Every layer is made up of four channels Red Blue Green and Alpha channels In Paint you can paint retouch transform and apply filters to any combination of channels or to each channel individually If you do not fully understand RGB color theory you may get confusing results when you work on less than all four channels at once You should take time to experiment with the channel toggles if you want to work on individual channels Paint on Individual Channels All individual channels can be represented by grayscale images The gray values range from 0 to 255 When working on individual RGB channels these values are set using the Color Picker section of the Color tab Select the RGB color model to set the values to paint with A value of 255 means you are painting with the full color of the channel white A value of O means you are painting with the none of the specific color black If there is currently color in the specific channel and you are painting with a value of 0 you are actually removing the specific color from the image For example if you select only the red channel and fill it with 127 red and then paint with 255 red you are adding red to the channel If you the
478. pace Elements ccccccccceeeceececeeeccsceceueeceecaeeceueesueeesaueesaeecsueesaeessusenseessaeesaass 104 TEXt ODIGCIS iaa daa EE 105 Create TEXT ODICCIS garri an a Ee 105 Edit PES NNN 106 Change the Selection Edit le TEE 108 Insert Media into Text Objects sara anden Rda 108 Character MaD EE EEE NN EE lo 109 ele e 110 AAVanced VIEW a A A needed naa 111 Ferran EE 111 giles iS 10 AAA R 112 VIEW NE TEN DAS IN es 114 Fet Ope ADS avse 114 FEL SSN 114 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide vi FONS E a E nen eee 116 Relative EMDelSAaMents EE 117 FET MITTE EA PRES A a 117 TET EI 118 TET EN lee WEE 118 RIONEtO CT Text NES Je 119 Text Object Properties eege eege 119 Lock the Object Height A cease eid 119 Lock the Object Width c1n08 2iicinctitity dacs pewhectliteciav erties ee eee 120 Create New Text Object with Enter AAA 120 Create New Text Obert With TaD vadere 120 CUSTER ee a baie deen Ate ae pees Aleve actin 120 As O Eo A ERE E 121 Eech 123 Create a New Table coo diia 123 ERT 124 AE NATTENS 124 MADRE 125 Manage e EE 125 UNMAKE ROWS uses 126 Sjel KO ge Td dt ds ld EN 126 Tabs in TOT ODICCIS ripio las 126 Snow or Hide Tab OOPS E 127 Adda TD SOP 127 Moda Tb SN 128 Overlapping Tab SOP ae da 128 Delete a Tab SD n 128 GrapniG ODICCIS escasa be 130 Simple Shapes He 130 ET 131 ENE E 132 Closed BEE ee bee 133 knes and SNE old 133 LIE NA EE 134 PIE es Fs AA APP a aa 134 Change Graphic ODDEN SIZO verdenen
479. page crawl See Create Multi Page Crawls on page 319 for details Chapter 3 CG 101 TitleOne User Guide Display Options 102 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Table 3 4 Layout Types Continued Layout Type Description Animation Animation layouts allow you to turn a CG layout into an animation in the FX module See Animation on page 247 for details See Create Layouts on page 229 for more information about layouts and layout types Templates Templates allow you to save and reuse standard layouts These layouts can be used over and over again and are ideal for those situations where you have a basic layout with one or two elements that change frequently Once you have created a standard layout you can save it as a template The next time you need to use the layout select the template from the Templates drop down list in the CG toolbar make any necessary changes and save the modified layout Templates include anything you put in a layout from a simple lower third definition to a complex layout full of logos and other graphic objects See Templates on page 231 for details Use CG markers and guidelines to help place your text and graphic objects The Display Options menu shows or hides guides and markers in the CG workspace Guides and markers do not appear when layouts are output Click the Display Options button on the CG toolbar The Display Options menu appears Y 2 Select a menu option
480. pand the view to individual filters click on the symbol next to each filter type e fl Recent 2 8 Inscriber a Alpha Adjustment SBS Color Adjustment ME Brightness amp Contrast Select About Opacity 100 E En DA ZS E En EL Figure 8 29 Filters List The Filters list contains three main headings Inscriber Plug ins and Recent While all of the available filters are listed under Inscriber and Plug ins Recent contains a list of the last ten filters used This gives you Quick access to your most frequently used filters without having to navigate through the Inscriber list To apply a filter select it from the Filters list and either double click on the filter name or click on the Select button Some filters bring up a dialog with filter options and a thumbnail preview of the filtered image You cannot apply filters to selections but you can create a new layer from a selection and apply the filter to the new layer See the procedure Work with Layers on page 493 for details Before applying a filter you can set the filter opacity in the Opacity field on the Filter tab This lets you create more subtle effects than applying a filter at 100 opacity For example if you want to desaturate an image set Opacity to 10 and apply a monochrome filter If you do not like the effect of a filter after you ve applied it you can always undo it The Undo command is especially important when you are work with
481. parts of layouts backgrounds are special objects that cannot be selected with the Pointer or Selection tools Use the Set Background dialog to edit backgrounds To open the Set Background dialog click the Background button on the CG Editor toolbar and select the Set Background option You can also BES open the Set Background dialog by right clicking a the CG workspace and choosing the Change Background option Mo Background Within the Set Background dialog select the treatment you need to use from the Treatment drop down list Treatments dictate the color image and Active Texture choices available for the background Chapter3 CG 199 TitleOne User Guide The Solid Color treatment adds a single color to the background The Linear Gradient Radial Gradient and 4 Color Gradient treatments add a mix of colors to the background The Image treatment adds an image file to the background The Active Texture treatment adds a moving image to the background The None treatment makes the background completely transparent Once you have chosen a treatment use the controls in the Set Background dialog to customize the treatment s appearance The controls for background treatments are similar to those described in Element Treatments on page 157 with the exception of the Image treatment Image Treatment Use the Image treatment to apply an image file to your background The options available for image backgrounds are slightly differ
482. pens configuration dialog which lists all Auto Text strings for current playlist Opens the Auto Text file for the current playlist in Windows Notepad If the file does not exist RapidFire can create it For more information see Create an Auto Text File on page 69 Plays the first predefined transition via file before displaying the active event or event called by RapidFire Plays the third predefined transition via file before displaying the active event or event called by RapidFire Number Function i D lt 40 VIA TRANS 2 Plays the second predefined transition via file before displaying the active event or event called by RapidFire SHIFT Plays the fourth predefined transition via file VIA TRANS 2 before displaying the active event or event called by RapidFire Number Key Function 4l Writes layout to playlist specified in LAYOUT RapidFire text field from Scratch vii SHIFT If the Load From Working Directory option is RECORD enabled see Set the Working Directory LAYOUT on page 64 writes the Scratch vii layout to the working directory as a layout filename without extension specified in the RapidFire text field If the Load From Working Directory option is disabled see Set the Working Directory on page 64 writes the Scratch vii layout to Media Store as a template layout media number specified in the RapidFire text field RapidFire Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne
483. pg E blobsblur jpg E blue river TGA E Blue Deep TGA 53 Blue Ink BMP A Blue Wash BMP E Blue_Wash TGA E BubbleGum TGA Recent N BurnMetal BMP E Burnmetal TGA E Canada lgo N candyfloss BMP E candyfloss TGA E China lgo E Clouds vii 2 cloudsgood lgo E cloudtablet Igo E clue TGA N curtans BMP 3 darkice BMP Diblue8 tif UN DizzyBlue BMP DizzyBlue TGA E DizzyRed TGA A Foil_Rain BMP France lgo E Ireland Igo E Japan lgo Ei long pill crome tga MetalGlintblur jpg E MetalGlintHarsh jpg E moonlight TGA N morning BMP i Mostwanted TGA E north Sky TGA E palm2 TGA Ei pill clock tga E pill clockBLUE tga gt File name Canada lgo Files of type All Formats You can add frame grabs to the Build set as images vi Open v Cancel If you need to adjust any frame grab options such as filters switch to the Frame Grab module and update the options You Available Titles 600x300x16 3 16 9 can grab frames in either the Frame Grab module or the Media Store module Chapter 7 Media Store To grab a frame press CTRL G The image is added to the Build set 391 TitleOne User Guide 392 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide Add Files from Other Modules You can add media files from other modules to the Build set Grab an image in Frame Grab create a layout in CG or create a logo in Paint
484. played for the styles in the Style Library Opens the Lexicon Selection dialog to customize the languages and dictionaries available in TitleOne Check one or more Languages and User Lexicons dictionaries as needed Clear Languages and or User Lexicons that you don t need access to Click Close to return to the Preferences dialog Chapter 9 Resources 515 TitleOne User Guide Sequencer Tab Table 9 4 Sequencer Tab Preferences Option Default Colors Reset Reset All Default to Group Headers Default to Non Keyed Cuts Default Trigger GPI Port 516 Chapter 9 Resources TitleOne User Guide Description Customizes both the text and background color of the Sequencer playlist e Select a display option from the list e Select a text color with the Text color chips e Select a background color with the Background color chips The Sample Text area shows you what the color combination looks like The Sample Text area is located below the list Resets the selected object in the list to its default color Resets all the objects in the list to their default colors Inserts a group header each time you add an event to the current playlist Sets the keying type for cut transitions to a full screen 32 bit cut by default Clear this option to set cuts to 32 bit for the center 512 scanlines and a wipe for the rest of the scanlines Applies the selected trigger type to new group headers Selects th
485. ple to display Media Store database files click the Global Database button 2 Drag a thumbnail from the Media window to the playlist You can insert the file above below or as a replacement for the active playlist event The cursor indicates where the file will be inserted Table 7 11 Media Insertion Cursor Cursor Description re Inserts the new event above the active event k Replaces the active event with the new event Inserts the new event below the active event Chapter 7 Media Store 425 TitleOne User Guide 426 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide To set the file as a logo texture or background use the following key combinations when you drag the file e CTRL drag adds the file to the playlist as a logo e CTRL SHIFT drag adds the file to the playlist as a texture e CTRL ALT SHIFT drag adds the file to the playlist as a background Create a Playlist from Search Results You can create a playlist from your search results In the Search dialog define search criteria For more information 2 see Set Up a Simple Search on page 414 or Set Up an Advanced Search on page 415 3 Clear the Auto Build Set Folio checkbox Click the Search button The search results are displayed at the bottom of the Search dialog 5 To create the playlist click the Build Job button Media Store prompts you to save the current playlist before placing the search results in a new playlist Note This operation
486. position for the transformation When you move the transformation the final coordinates are based on each corner s initial position If you move your transformation without skewing it each corner has the same final coordinates since each corner has moved an equal distance from its initial location 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 116 296 116 77 99 77 99 213 296 21 77 99 77 99 Absolute Corner Position Relative Corner Offsets Figure 8 23 Absolute and Relative Transformation When you adjust a corner with the fields on the Transform tab only the selected corner of your transformation is moved With Relative Corner Offsets the new corner position is measured from its initial position With Absolute Corner Position the new position is measured from the top left corner of the workspace Chapter 8 Paint 475 TitleOne User Manual Flip Horizontally and Vertically Add Depth Transformation Opacity 476 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual The Flip Horiz button flips your image horizontally around the vertical y axis The Flip Vert button flips your image vertically around the horizontal x axis The horizontal and vertical depth fields allow you to add depth or perspective to your transformations Depth Horiz skews transformations left to right so they recede into the background Depth Vert skews transformations top to bottom so they recede upward or downward Initial transformation
487. possession or voluntarily return the Software to us Upon termination you will destroy all copies of the Software and documentation Otherwise the restrictions on your rights to use the Software will expire upon expiration of the copyright to the Software 9 Miscellaneous Provisions This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Province of Ontario and not by the 1980 United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods as amended This is the entire agreement between us relating to the contents of this package and supersedes any prior purchase order communications advertising or representations concerning the contents of this package No change or modification of this Agreement will be valid unless it is in writing and is signed by us 10 Quebec Transactions If you reside in the Province of Quebec Canada you agree to the following The parties hereto have expressly required that the present Agreement and its Exhibits be drawn up in the English language Les parties aux presentes ont expressement exige Que la presente convention et ses Annexes soient redigees en langue anglaise If you have any Questions about this Agreement write to us at Harris Corporation 26 Peppler Street Waterloo Ontario Canada N2J 3C4 or call us at 519 570 9111 Table of Contents Introducing TitleOne 0oococccco es 1 Titlene OVEIVIEW 2 5 E EE EE E E EE caras bees 2 A ve 2 Addi
488. possible ascender in the next line The value in the Leading field in the Paragraph section of the Attributes tab represents the number of scan lines used between lines Text Kerning The kerning value determines how much space is used between pairs of characters Kerning is measured as the number of pixels added to or subtracted from the normal character spacing for the current font Kerning lets you adjust the spacing between one or more letters which is useful for displaying characters with very wide ascenders or descenders Text Object Properties Kerning can also be used to achieve special typographic effects Normal Kerning Adjusted Kerning To change the kerning after a single character select the character and change the value in the Kerning field To change the kerning between all of the characters in a text object change the value in the Kerning field with no characters selected Right to Left Text Objects To assign right to left text processing for a text object check the Text Direction is Right to Left checkbox The CG module automatically detects the regional text entry method of your Windows setup but checking this checkbox adds additional processing to the object such as right to left punctuation Use the Text Object Properties options to customize your text object behavior Select a text object 2 Switch to the Attributes tab in the CG Attributes toolbar and click the Text Objects Properties section
489. pter 3 CG 207 TitleOne User Guide 208 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Table 3 27 Tagged Object Update Methods Continued Method Description Inscriber MOS With the Inscriber MOS interface option Journalists in a newsroom pool can update tagged objects within their newsroom computer system clients If you are using Inscriber MOS see the Inscriber MOS User Guide for more information Update Objects with News Edit When objects are tagged you can quickly change their content using only News Edit Click the News Edit button in the CG Editor toolbar News Edit opens Ter Select the tag of the object you want to change in the Tags list In the Content list select the content item you want to use The item appears in the Content field where you can edit it if necessary To add new items to the Content list type new information into the Content field and click the Add button Click the Display button The object updates to display the information in the Content field You can also update an object by selecting a tag and double clicking an item in the Content list Image Insertion Commands Use image insertion commands to apply new image files to layout objects These commands can be used with all tagged object update methods e For logo objects and objects that contain image treatments or Active Texture treatments enter the full file path to the image you want to apply For example C lmages ZXYLog
490. put the other channel in HD Start gt All Programs gt Harris gt G Scribe gt Configuration Utilities gt Phoenix Control Panel See page 35 for details on the Down Conversion option Since SD and HD layouts have different formatting SD layouts cannot be used when working in an HD program output and vice versa In order to use SD layouts in an HD program the SD layout must be converted to match the HD format prior to creating the program output The same is true if you want to use HD layouts in an SD program output Conversion Native Resolution and Frame Rate are two important criteria to consider when Considerations converting between SD and HD formats Native Resolution refers to the resolution at which a TV or monitor is designed to display images Image signals higher or lower than a specified native resolution must be converted to be displayed accurately For example the native resolution of an SD image is 720x480 and must be upconverted to display on an HD monitor which has a native resolution of 1920x1080 or 1280x720 Although TitleOne outputs SD in both 4 3 and 16 9 aspect ratios the native resolution is the same 720x480 When the lower resolution SD image is upconverted to match an HD format 1920x1080 or 1280x720 some of the sharpness of the original image is lost as the pixels are increased in size not in number to fit the larger display In contrast downconverting from HD to SD results in a sharper image Quality as mo
491. quality graphic and output tools Use TitleOne to create animate manage and output your on screen layouts The flexibility of TitleOne allows you to use the software tools in a way that fits your specific work environment D Fie Edit Playlist Tools Help Playlist Items J k 28 90 4 IW zoom Full Screen Y 30 52 560 600 4 240 A ES a SC o 0 Default layout e Still v Su t 40 80 120 160 200 2 280 320 250 400 440 DODY OISIIS PENALTY A EE L 00 00 00 0 o Eag oro y ES H RT SED AKG BS Preview Op Program Attributes Face Edge Depth Shadow Formatting Width 106 Height 18 Rotation 0 CLR Form rectangle v Maintain aspect ratio Relative Embellishments TitleOne Tools Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual Figure 1 1 CG Tool Open in TitleOne The TitleOne tools work together to provide a complete graphics solution See the following table for details on the tools Table 1 1 TitleOne Tools TitleOne Tool Description CG Creates still roll and crawl layouts for video output Use the extensive text effects to create unlimited custom looks for your layouts See CG on page 93 for details Table 1 1 TitleOne Tools TitleOne Tool Animation Editor Sequencer Frame
492. r displays the image size cursor coordinates zoom level and any modifiers for the current tool You can view this information on various tabs but the status bar provides a summary in one easy location 1704 x 2272 1272 Yi1306 Zoom 25 Brush Selection tool Selects areas using the current brush Figure 8 5 Paint Status Bar 440 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Right Click Menu You can access all the Tools by positioning the cursor anywhere on the Paint workspace and pressing the right mouse button General Tools Selection Tools Paint Tools Pencil Alpha Tools K Brush Image Tools Airbrush Transform Tools Eraser Fill Luminance Fill Tolerance Fill Linear Gradient Radial Gradient Line Figure 8 6 Right Click Menu Scrapbook You can use the Scrapbook to move Paint layers or composite images to and from other Title One modules without importing or exporting them This lets you use your images without saving them as separate files as the images are saved in your scribelist file instead However this method uses a lot more memory If you transfer an image to the Scrapbook all layer information is lost Program Preview Palette The Program Preview palette allows you to see how events look on the preview channel before sending them to the program channel Chapter 8 Paint 441 TitleOne User Manual 442 Paint Concepts Paint provides alpha tools color tools image editing tools
493. ransformation Tools Import Images as Transformations Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Selections define the areas to be transformed If you haven not made a selection the entire layer is transformed when you use a transformation tool or apply a transform option Many of the options on the Transform tab act like transformation tools but are not true tools The values on the tab mimic the transformation tools as closely as possible but may not always produce the expected results The Transform tab also includes several transformation options that are not accessible through the transformation tools The five transformation tools available on the Tools palette are described below You can also alter the move scale skew and rotate values from the Transform tab Table 8 15 Transformation Tools Tool Description Move e Moves the selection ng Scale Be Skew A Freeform Scales the selection Skews the selection Transforms individual points of the selection 5 Rotate e Rotates the selection You can import an image as a transformation into the current Paint document This is the method the Scrapbook uses to place images in Paint To import an image as a transformation select File gt Import Export gt Import Transformation and navigate to your image location Transformation Modifiers Exit Transformations There are two modifier keys you can use when you apply transformations with the transf
494. rd path displays the effect 5 frames later and so on The Stagger option is unavailable until you enter a number greater than I in the count field because this option only applies to an animation with more than one path in it Remove an Effect Select the Remove Effect button to easily remove the effect from your animation Go Back Select the Go Back button to return to the main 3D Effects folders Select a path by using one of the following methods e Use the Selection tool to select an object in the FX workspace The entire path is automatically selected e Select the path name from the drop down menu located to the left of the Attributes Palette ca 2 Frame ood Pause 0000 Pi of 0031 a PI 0029 5 Figure 4 124 Path Selection 2 Switch to the 3D Effects tab 3 Select an animated 3D effect thumbnail to display the pre defined animated variations Chapter 4 Animation 299 TitleOne User Manual 300 Adjust Effect Duration Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Select the Start Over or End to determine the position of the effect along the path You need to set these display options before selecting the 3D variation Click on an animated variation to apply the 3D effect to the path Click on the Onscreen Preview button below the Tools palette to preview the effect When you apply a 3D effect to your path additional keyframes that contain the 3D effect information are added to the pa
495. re aligned with the center of the safe title area Align Bottom to Middle of Safe Title Area The objects move vertically so their bottom boundaries are aligned with the middle of the safe title area Align Top to Middle of Safe Title Area The objects move vertically so their top boundaries are aligned with the middle of the safe title area O O 188 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Distribute Objects Use the Distribution menu or the Attributes tab to automatically adjust the spacing between objects in a layout anet Murphy Weather at 6 15 Wfonther st 4 15 Objects before distribution Objects after Selected Objects Top distribution Figure 3 47 Distribute Objects To distribute objects in a layout Select the objects you want to distribute in the CG workspace 2 Access the distribution controls using one of the following methods e Click the arrow beside the Distribution button in the CG Editor toolbar to open the Distribution menu You can also Ge quickly distribute objects using the last used distribution option by clicking directly on the button e Switch to the Attributes tab in the Attributes palette The distribution controls are in the Distribution section of the tab 3 Select a distribution option Table 3 22 Distribution Options Option Description Selected Objects Left The objects move horizontally so POP their left boundaries are evenly spaced Selected Objects Right The objects move
496. re looking G fa for is not visible in the Tools palette hold 4 dy the left mouse button on the visible tool When the flyout menu appears click the tool you want to use vertical Fixed Width Paragraph Table 3 2 Text and Graphic Tools Selection Logo Text Field Vertical Text Field Text Constrained Field ER Vertical Text Constrained Field A Paragraph Field EN Vertical Paragraph Field a Fixed Width Paragraph ae Vertical Fixed Width Chapter3 CG 97 TitleOne User Guide 98 Work with Layouts Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Table 3 2 Text and Graphic Tools Continued Oval Clock mi g La Rectangle _ Horizontal Guide Round Corner Rectangle Vertical Guide In most cases add objects to your layout by selecting a tool and either clicking in the CG workspace or drawing boundaries for the object A layout consists of all the components of an output screen In CG you combine various objects to create layouts These layouts are then output to video Create new layouts by pressing the Add Default Ge Event button at the bottom of the Playlist Your Hr ENN eur CG workspace shows the new layout When you launch TitleOne a default layout is already created for you Layout Objects Layouts contain objects that display customized text and graphics CG offers six basic object types for you to use in your layouts text objects graphic objects logo objects clocks ports and a layout backgrou
497. re of the speed of data transmission between computer and other devices measured in bits per second Typically the baud settings of two devices must match if the devices are to communicate with one another Best Lossless Compression Media Store A compression option that tries both LZW and VII methods and then applies the one with the best compression or no compression The result is the smallest possible image size without losing data See also Compression LZW Compression and VII Compression Bias Animation A spline property that refers to the spline path coming into or out of a keyframe Adjusting the bias makes motion more dependent on one direction than the other See also Spline Bitmap An image file format that describes the position and color number of each of its pixels These pixels are arranged in a grid or raster Since a bitmap is defined by the number of pixels it contains increasing its size can distort the image Bitmaps are also known as raster images Bitrate The speed at which bits are transmitted or processed measured in bits per second bps The higher the bitrate the more data that is processed and typically the higher the picture resolution Blue Channel Paint The channel that stores all of the blue information in an image Blur Filter CG Paint Animation Editor and Frame Grab A distortion filter that mildly blurs the frame grab object or texture it is applied to
498. re pixels fill a smaller display It is good practise to start with a larger 1920x1080 image and scale it down to 720x480 rather than scale up a smaller image Frame Rate refers to the number of frames per second fps that are displayed on a TV or monitor The frame rate is 30 fps NTSC and 25 fps PAL There are two output displays available e Interlaced SD 720x480 480i NTSC SD 720x576 576i PAL and HD 1920x1080 10801 e Progressive Scan HD 1280x720 720p In Interlaced a frame is divided into two fields with each field containing half Chapter 1 Overview 27 TitleOne User Manual 28 SD to HD Conversion Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual the number of scanning lines of a complete frame For NTSC the second field is scanned 1 60th of a second after the first field for PAL the second field is scanned I SOth of a second after the first field These two fields are displayed in rapid succession on a TV or monitor In progressive scan the complete frame is scanned every 30 fps NTSC and 25 fps PAL Interlaced is the most common output for HD 10801 as it has higher native resolution However progressive scan 720p provides better picture Quality when editing with filters and effects that affect motion including rotating a frame or compositing live action video with special effects You should create archives of all your SD and HD Inscriber layouts before conversion You might need to edit t
499. reas that are 100 selected and shades of gray show areas that are only partially selected Seeing these differences is very helpful when you are using the Brush Selection tool to select pixels at less than 100 opacity The Selection Channel thumbnail helps you keep track of how changes will be applied to your selection Pixels that are 100 selected will be affected differently than pixels that are 50 selected when you edit them SS Fully unselected Is lt j Fully selected sm Partially selected Ip I 1 VM Image Layer pi ON All Mone Figure 8 20 Selection Channel Pixels can be selected at a range of values from 1 to 100 The level of selection of the pixels determines the degree to which changes are applied when you edit the selection For example if you select an area at 50 then apply a filter the filter is applied to the selection at 50 opacity Only the Brush Selection tool selects pixels at less than 100 opacity Like all brush based tools you set the opacity level for this tool in the Opacity Chapter 8 Paint 467 TitleOne User Manual 468 Import and Export Selections Import and Export Selection Contents TitleOne User Manual field on the Brush tab When you make your selection the Selection Channel shows the varying levels of selection of the pixels as a grayscale image You can import and export selections to give you greater control over your work To export a selec
500. rent video shows through It is often necessary to add alpha so that the video signal shows through only in certain areas For example if you are cleaning up team logos for the basketball games aired on your station you want to be able to paint with alpha to clean up edges on the logos Alpha Tools Paint provides eight alpha tools Alpha Add Alpha Subtract Alpha Memory Alpha Fill Alpha Tolerance Fill Alpha Luminance Fill Alpha Linear Gradient and Alpha Radial Gradient The alpha tools have two special characteristics they manipulate only the alpha channel and they remember what the alpha values were before you manipulated the image alpha For example if you import an image and paint it with the Alpha Add tool it may appear as though you are erasing the image If you paint over the newly created transparent areas with the Alpha Memory brush the alpha values in the image are restored to their original values It is important to remember that if you use the Eraser tool instead of the Alpha Add tool to add transparency the Alpha Memory brush cannot restore the alpha values 454 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Table 8 7 Alpha Tools Tool Name Description aj Alpha Add e Paints with alpha adds S transparency ay Alpha Subtract e Removes alpha adds opacity aj Alpha Memory e Restores alpha to its original levels H Ga Alpha Fill e Fills the image or selection with alpha Alpha Luminance e Fills all pixels adjace
501. rm that you want to delete the selected template Template Manager l Delete item 9 Figure 4 106 Delete Template If you delete a template the remaining templates are not renumbered so there may be a gap in the numbering To change the numbers click Rename and change the number for each remaining template For each preset template in the list all Animation Editor options were set when the template was added to the Registry A template may be close to but not exactly what you want To adjust a preset template Select and apply the desired template 2 Make any changes to the placement shape spline time and filters in the FX workspace 3 Press the Add button to include the template in the list under a new name Chapter 4 Animation 281 TitleOne User Manual Spline Path A spline is a curve that determines how an object moves from one keyframe to the next When you add keyframes a series of frames connects the keyframes The sum of the frames from the first keyframe to the last keyframe defines the spline Tension loose Laut Hd gt elonm Continuity concave convex Hd gt elonm 8 Position Bias anticipate overshoot 2 3 Rotation O Shape Ease IN to Keyframe Ease OUT of Keyframe 9 DN dats H Me Figure 4 107 Spline Tab Spline Curves In Animation Editor there are three spline curves for every path the Position spline the Rotation spline and the Shape spline Each splin
502. rnal key Chapter 1 Overview 37 TitleOne User Manual 38 Configure Audio Settings Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual 4 In the Downstream Keying section configure the output fill channel by selecting either the Shaped or Unshaped option Overall performance is better when Shaped is selected You should only select the Unshaped option if you use an older keyer that only accepts unshaped input 5 Click the Apply Changes button to apply the settings to the current configuration Use the Audio button to access the audio options for the XD 200 where you can configure your audio settings When you select an option in the Input Mixer or Output section details are provided in the description box near the bottom of the control panel I Select a video card in the Detected Video Cards list 2 Click the Audio button Inscriber XD 200 Control Panel Use the Inscriber XD 200 control panel to configure your video card Detected Yideo Cards This list contains all video cards detected card Card Model Serial SEN er A ra 2 neste RefIn Se gt 1 mseriber xD 200 4014290 G Jo Jon lou loo SDI Input 1 2 inscriber xD 200 3876042 Gua Gua Gua Gua ox FreeRun Swap Cards Swapping cards will force changes to be applied Refresh List Yideo Card Details Card Model Inscriber XD 200 Card Number 4014290 FPGA Version 8401 Saved Configuration General Details Input Output Reference In Mixer Re
503. rnerrenrerne 266 Bezier CUVE S Je 266 DISDIay ODUONS EE EEE EE dal ae EE 267 BS EG ESTE EE 267 Ree TR as 268 Display TET OE PP 268 SPS NE PE 269 Snapshotot AL Ob ES SE 269 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide xiii XIV Preview Motion Raths annann 270 On the Computer Screen NEE 270 Preview 100100 o A e o o A 270 TE TME SIGO seer 270 A o 271 AA a EE O 272 MOON Templates Lasses ask A A AA aes ed 273 Selecta Rn ei 273 Preview A En E Se 273 PAA TENNER see 274 Apply to Individual e Eet 274 APP GADE PG 274 APP TO MUP P JE 275 Stagger a EE Me EE 275 Template ODHONS 3245 02244 a aa Re ea eed 276 A EE 276 MAN HE 276 EIER 277 TONNS pre 217 Reverse Prese e 217 Combine Multiple Templates oooccccocnoncccnnccccnncconcnoconnnonacnnonnnonnnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonannnnnnnnns 278 Motion Template Registry 0000 cee enerne 279 Add a Template to the Registry AEN 279 Naming Sonen ae 280 WCE a Template una eee een 280 PeEEE Templie sa 281 Adjust a Preset Template er 281 Spline Path ia e ati a 282 EN 282 Way Change the SANE Le 282 Change the Spline Properties ii o els 282 PROSE 10 DENS PP asin ose ee incl as wg 283 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide Tension Continuity and Bias aanuaua narr r es 284 Tenor er 284 ETA 284 2 2 EEE EN RE ENER EEE e 285 Ease IN andreas OP 285 MOON Leger o oa a AA ARA eech 286 The Appearance O TIME sa Geek 286 Adj st the Leng Ola Palestinian
504. roubleshooting 2 In the Outputs area verify that all your broadcast quality video boards are listed Outputs List of physical outputs detected Physical Output Board D 200 5410897 D 200 5415934 Figure 2 29 Detected Video Boards Chapter 2 Output 3 In the Designate Audio area select the audio board to use for audio output if your system has an audio board Designate Audio Please designate your prefered audio card to control pour audio output AD 200 5410697 Stereo O w Figure 2 30 Designate Audio Card 4 Click the Next button Assign Outputs Screen Two Channel Systems Only If your system has multiple video boards you can use both for outputting program broadcasts or assign one for previewing and one for outputting program broadcasts I For each video board on your system select Preview or Program to designate its use On a two channel system you can designate at most one preview channel Output Designation List of physical outputs detected 1 Dp 200 5410897 Figure 2 31 Designate Program and Preview Channels Note A video board designated for preview provides only still previews and is not available for program output 2 Click the Next button Note Designated output is supported with G Scribe and G Store products Chapter 2 Output 87 TitleOne User Guide 88 Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide only This setting has no effect on TitleOne Overlay or other applic
505. rs Figure 8 26 Clone an Image Once you have defined a source point you can paint anywhere in the current layer Wherever you click in the layer the Clone tool copies the source point If you drag the Clone tool around the source point moves to match your cursor movement However each time you release the mouse button and click again the Clone tool returns to the originally defined source point This means you can make several copies of the source point at different locations throughout the layer Use the SHIFT Key Use the CTRL Key and Align Checkbox You do not have to clone the same layer or image the source point was set from You can select another layer close the current image and import a new one or work on a blank canvas Paint remembers the image data from the previously defined source point The SHIFT key changes how the clone source is set depending on whether there is an active selection in the layer If you press ALT SHIFT click to set the source point when there is no selection Paint copies the entire layer and uses the copy as the clone source This allows you to paint over the source point without losing the original clone source data When there is an active selection and you press ALT SHIFT click instead of ALT click to define the source point Paint takes a copy of the selection contents and uses that as the source image For example if you have a picture of a face and a selection around one eye pr
506. rt and end frames you can simply click the center of the Track Slider hold down the left mouse button and drag it to the left or right The entire path moves along the timeline while the number of frames in the path remain the same The numbers in the Path Duration and Total Animation Duration frame fields remain the same as you shift the path but the Animation End will change according to the new path position Keyframe markers appear as small diamonds on the Track Slider for each path You can change where a keyframe occurs in the path by clicking on the keyframe marker and dragging to the left or right to change its location As you drag the marker the number in the Frame field to the left of the timeline identifies the current frame Changing where a keyframe occurs in the path does not change the duration of the path but it does change the number of frames between keyframes Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual 287 288 Timeline Controls All controls for setting the timing of motion paths are located on the Time tab The controls are the Track Sliders Path Start Frame Path End Frame Path Duration Total Animation Duration and Animation End Track Sliders The timeline of an animation consists of Track Sliders for each object in the animation The length of a Track Slider is measured in frames By default Animation Editor adds one second 30 frames between inserted keyframes Each path in an animation has its own
507. rtical or horizontal dimension of the rectangle or use corner handles to resize both the Selection horizontal and vertical dimensions When you Tool release the mouse button CG redraws the object to the new size The corner or midpoint opposite to the one you grabbed remains anchored To maintain your object s aspect ratio hold the SHIFT key while dragging the grab handle To keep your object centered while changing its size hold the ALT key while dragging the grab handle If you want more precise sizing use the controls in the Attributes tab l 2 3 Select a graphic object in the CG workspace Switch to the Attributes tab of the Attributes palette In the Formatting section of the tab use the Width and Height controls to change the height and width of your graphic Relative Embellishments By default the size of your object s embellishments edge depth and shadow remain constant as the object s size changes Select the Relative Embellishments checkbox on the Attributes tab to scale your object s embellishments as its size changes Chapter 3 CG 135 TitleOne User Guide Change Graphic Once you have created a graphic object you can change its form using the Form Attributes tab Select a graphic object 2 Switch to the Attributes tab of the Attributes palette 3 Use the Form drop down list to select a new form for the graphic object 136 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Logo Objects Logos are commonly
508. s Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Selection tool over the point until it becomes an arrow then drag the point to a new position e To delete a point position the Text Path tool or the Selection tool over the point until it becomes an arrow then double click the point e To change the curvature of a point position the Text Path tool or the Selection tool over the point until it becomes an arrow then hold the ALT key and drag the point s control handles This creates convex and concave curves on either side of the point You can continue to select and move the control points as long as you hold the ALT key Figure 3 9 Edit a Text Path s Control Points 5 Enter your text on the spline path Figure 3 10 Add Text to a Text Path Vertical text objects are used mainly for double byte languages such as Chinese Japanese and Korean but they can be used with any language and any font They allow you to enter characters from top to bottom and left to right on a layout To add a vertical text object to your layout use the appropriate vertical text tool from the Tools palette Table 3 6 Vertical Text Object Tools Icon Tool He I 4 a Vertical Text Field Vertical Text Constrained Field Vertical Paragraph Field Vertical Fixed Width Paragraph Field Description For single lines of text The field expands as text is entered with the text itself remaining a fixed size Pressing ENTER cr
509. s TitleOne User Guide End Sub Private Sub contCrawl Waiting Fill the buffer Normally you would retrieve data from vour live feed here You would then create and queue still images and or effects based on the retrieved data Draw new text to crLayer Draw ToLayer Queue the Layer contCrawl Queueltem crLayer Queue the Animation contCrawl Queueltem animFB End Sub Private Sub Start Click Set up and show contCrawl Setup crawlCon contCrawl Take LKK 2K OK K K K K K K K K K K K K OK OK OK OK OK K K K Form Maintenance Disable the Start button Start Enabled False End Sub Private Sub Stop Click Stop immediately contCrawl Stop Set LayerCount to 0 LayerCount 0 LKK OK 2K K K ak OK OK OK OK K K K K K K OK OK OK OK K K K Form Maintenance Enable the Start button Start Enabled True End Sub Public Sub DrawToLayer Increment LayerCount LayerCount LayerCount 1 Draw new text to crLayer With GlobCon Clear the contents of the current Layer crLayer Layer Clear Draw text Movelo 10 30 DrawString Layer 4 LayerCount End With End Sub Chapter 9 Resources 543 TitleOne User Guide 544 Chapter 9 Resources TitleOne User Guide Appendix A DVE Switcher N Details for creating DVEs DVE Switcher The DVE Switcher utility allows you to create custom DVEs or use the preset templates You can use the DVE Switcher to size
510. s Description Export Paint Document e Exports the current image as an ipt file e Saves all alpha and layer information Export Image e Exports current file as a bitmap image e Flattens the image into a single layer e Alpha information may be lost Export Current Layer as e Exports the current layer as a bitmap Image image e Alpha information may be lost Export Selection e Exports selection outline as a bitmap image Export Selection e Exports selection contents as a bitmap Contents Export Color Chips e Exports the current color chips as a palette aco file 446 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Import and Export Selections Change Image and Canvas Size Importing and exporting image selections gives you greater control over your work If you create a selection you know you are going to need later you can use the File gt Import Export menu options to export the selection and import it again when you need it You can change the image or canvas size by selecting Edit gt Image and Canvas Size Resizing the image scales the image while resizing the canvas crops or adds canvas space without scaling the image To resize an image Enter the new image size in pixels in the Width and Height fields 2 Click on the Resize Image button 3 Click OK To resize the canvas Enter the new canvas size in pixels in the Width and Height fields 2 Select one of the nine positioning butt
511. s Tag Editor CG and Overlay Take Outputs a rendered image or event file Take Button Sequencer Outputs the current event without loading the next event to the preview channel Overlay Applies any changes to the show hide state If you set an item to display clicking Take displays the item on the program channel If you set an item to hide clicking Take hides the item on the program channel Take Down Button Sequencer Outputs the current event and loads the next event to the preview channel Template CG Pre defined layouts which are stored in template registries Creating layouts from templates ensures that the layouts use standardized colors styles and media Tension Animation A spline property that refers to the rigidity of the spline path You can increase the tension to tighten the curve or decrease the tension to add slack to the curve See also Spline Text Object CG An object containing one or more lines of text Text objects can be constrained in various ways to keep their lengths constant Texture CG An effect that simulates a pattern or tactile surface on a CG object such as marbling or basket weave Paint A graphic image pattern that can be applied to objects and images Textures simulate a tactile or three dimensional surface Paint has three types of textures seamless paper and alpha Texture Tool Paint A tool that paints a surface texture wit
512. s are the words in the file Chapter 7 Media Store 409 TitleOne User Guide 410 Add a Memo Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide path For a database media file you must assign at least one keyword when you add the file to a database To edit the keyword list of a file complete the following steps 5 6 Ensure that the Browse button is in the correct position selected to update a browsed file not selected to update a database file Select a folio that contains the file to update In the Media window select the thumbnail In the Attributes palette at the bottom of the window select the Key Info tab See Figure 7 21 on page 409 In the Keywords field update the keyword list To save the changes press ENTER on the main keyboard You can also add keywords to multiple files or replace the keywords assigned to multiple files Ensure that the Browse button is in the correct position selected to update a browsed file not selected to update a database file Select a folio that contains the files to update To select multiple thumbnails in the Media window use the SHIFT or CTRL key In the Attributes palette at the bottom of the window select the Key Info tab In the Keywords text field enter the keywords to add To add the keywords to the selected files press CTRL ENTER Use the ENTER key on the main keyboard OR To replace the existing keywords with the entered keywords press SHIFT ENTE
513. s from the templates are automatically added to create an animation path To combine multiple templates Select the keyframe or path from the FX workspace 2 Select a template from the Templates list 3 Select Append The Overwrite option deletes all information in the selected path except the object itself and applies the template instead 4 Select Relative to maintain the selected keyframe s start position Absolute applies the template s default start position 5 Select Beginning or End for the placement of the template in the path Click Apply The attributes from the applied template are now stored in your animation path 7 Select another template from the list and apply it to the beginning or end of the same path 8 Continue selecting and applying preset templates until you have created the desired effect It is good practise to use the Template Preview window before you apply the template to see how it will look in the animation path See Motion Timeline on page 286 to adjust the timing of you animation See Motion Template Registry on page 279 for information on saving your custom templates Motion Template Registry The motion template registry is designed to make it easy to manage frequently used effects Instead of using the preset templates you can add your own templates to the registry You can import and export templates as you need them You can also adjust the preset templates to make them fit your needs
514. s on screen until the end of the animation When it is pointing sideways the path disappears when it reaches its last frame All paths are pinned by default Figure 4 115 Push Pins Adding a pause between keyframes forces Animation Editor to stop and hold at a keyframe for a set number of frames before the path continues on to the next keyframe Select a keyframe then add the number of frames to pause in the Pause field The number in the Animation End and Total Animation Duration frames fields change because the number of paused frames is added to the total length of the path Evening Ne ze od 2 Frame 0047 Pause 0000 17 Se o 0031 I Wal a e 9 1029 y Figure 4 116 Keyframe Pause The Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons can make editing the a tele timeline easier For example if you are working with long paths that contain hundreds of frames there is not enough space to display the entire timeline at once and you will have to use the horizontal scroll bars to see the entire timeline Instead click the Zoom Out button Animation Editor reduces the amount of space filled by the timeline on the Time tab Using these options does not affect the length of a path Chapter 4 Animation 289 TitleOne User Manual Adjust the Keyframe Axes When you rotate spin or offset an object you are really adjusting the behavior of the keyframe on a particular axis The controls for all of these properties are located on
515. s search results from last browse mode search For more information see Search for Media on page 413 Displays the contents of the folder selected in the navigation pane Browse folio After you have browsed several folders click the Global Browse button to display all the media files in the folders browsed Sets up folders to monitor for updates For more information see Scan Files for Updates on page 406 Displays a list of the last ten folders browsed Displays media in the Build set files to be added to the Media Store database in the next build For more information see Create a Database on page 388 Clicking this button switches Media Store to database mode Stops browsing files on drives and switches to database mode so that you can view files in a Media Store database To switch to database mode click the Browse button on the Media Store toolbar so that it is not selected The database mode toolbar displays and Chapter 7 Media Store 379 TitleOne User Guide the Media window displays the media files in the current Media Store database Global Button l l Collection Folio Buttons Set Button 7 Local Browse Figure 7 5 Database Mode Toolbar The Media Store module opens in database mode For more information on databases see Media Store Databases on page 388 Use the toolbar to select the media displayed in the Media window Table 7 3 Database Mode Toolbar Button Function
516. s split into odd and even numbered horizontal scan lines which are transmitted in rapid succession as two separate fields slightly offset in time Compare to Progressive Scan Interpolate Field Filters CG Paint and Frame Grab Video clean up filters that compute new data for even or odd numbered scan lines based on the scan lines directly above and below Interpolation Animation Determines intermediate numbers between existing numbers Interpolation occurs from one keyframe to the next as the program determines the smoothest or most accurate path coming out of the first keyframe and into the second keyframe Invert Color Filter Paint A color adjustment filter that inverts the value of each component HSV RGB or HLS of the colors in your images The new values are equal to the full scale value of each component minus the original value Invert Key Filter Paint An alpha adjustment filter that reverses the opaque and transparent areas of your image For example if an area is 80 opaque and 20 transparent it becomes 20 opaque 80 transparent Glossary 565 TitleOne User Guide 566 Ittest exe A program provided with TitleOne that allows you to use the Inscribe ini settings to verify whether TitleOne should be seeing the time codes J Job The entire scribelist file including all transition and effect events trigger and timing information The current job is always displayed on the Pl
517. s the objects below the currently selected object Paste Replace Replaces the currently selected object with the copied or cut object This option is not available when multiple objects are being copied or cut Lock Objects Use the Layout Tree View to lock the objects in the layout Locked text Chapter 3 CG 197 TitleOne User Guide 198 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide objects can still be selected and edited but they cannot be moved Locked graphic objects cannot be selected edited or moved To lock one or more selected objects right click the Layout Tree View window and select Lock Position The objects are locked and display a lock icon in the Layout Tree View list Delete Objects Menu y To delete an object in the Layout Tree View select an object from the list and click the Delete button The object is deleted Layout Backgrounds Layout backgrounds are video transparent by default but you can use a color image or Active Texture treatment to block the video signal Video transparent areas in layouts are marked by a fill pattern In the example below all of the areas filled with the grey checkered pattern are transparent when the layout is taken to video The pattern is not included in the final rendered image it simply shows you where the live video feed appears while you work on the layout Set a Layout Background Figure 3 53 A Layout Without a Visible Background Treatment Unlike other
518. s when you apply an image file to it Chapter 3 CG 139 TitleOne User Guide Table 3 13 Logo Constraint Methods Button Description The logo image is sized to fill the object The object becomes the size of the logo s image file Maintaining the object s current width the lower boundary SS of the object moves to fit the image file Maintaining the object s current width the upper boundary Gi of the object moves to fit the image file Maintaining the object s current height the right boundary DS of the object moves to fit the image file Maintaining the object s current height the left boundary of amp el the object moves to fit the image file 5 In the Logo Details section of the tab click the Add button and select the image file you want to use for the logo The image is applied to the logo object according to the Constraint method 6 If you change the size of the logo object selecting a Constraint method changes the object boundaries or the image size accordingly 140 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Clock Objects The clock objects that come pre defined with TitleOne were created with RTX development tools Use these clock objects to create digital clocks and digital timers in your layouts Feature Note If you purchased the RT Xportss option you can use other custom clocks created with the RTX development tools See Port Objects on page 145 to learn how to use RTX applications in TitleOne
519. se the first Color slider to set how far from the center of the element the gradient begins d Use the second Color slider to set how far from the perimeter of the element the gradient ends 2 Enter values in the Transparency fields to set the transparency of the first and second colors 3 Increase the number of Gradient Steps to make the gradient repeat one or more times on the element This creates a bull s eye effect when the gradient repeats 4 Color Gradient Use the 4 Color Gradient treatment to apply a four color gradient to the element Four color gradients shade between four colors with one color in each corner of the element VIE AST ll ed e Figure 3 34 The 4 Color Gradient Treatment The controls for the 4 Color Gradient treatment are in the Settings section of the Edge Depth and Shadows tab They are in the Color section of the Face tab To set the colors and transparencies for the four corners of the element follow these steps for every region None Treatment Image Treatment From the Region list select the region of the element that you want to apply a color to Region Region 1 2 The first region is in the upper left corner of the element the second is in the upper right corner the third is in the lower left and the Region Region fourth is in the lower right ee 4 2 Click the Color drop down list to select the color for the region 3 Use the Transparency slider to set the transparency
520. select variations of yellow and orange Gaussian Blur Paint A distortion filter that softens an image by applying a weighted average along a Gaussian or bell shaped curve of the pixels where significant color transitions occur GIF Graphics Interchange Format A computer graphics file format for compressing graphic images GIF compression is lossless supports transparency but allows a maximum of only 256 colors Global Browse Folio Media Store The folder that contains all the media files from all the directories you have Glossary TitleOne User Guide browsed It can be accessed through the globe icon on the Media Store toolbar in browse mode Contrast with Browse Folio Global Folio Media Store The folder that contains all the media files in a Media Store database and that is available to all users on the network After you create a database the Global folio is the default folio when launching G Scribe You can access the Global folio through the globe icon on the Media Store toolbar in database mode GPI General Purpose Interface Trigger Sequencer A simple electro mechanical cueing trigger that uses a contact closure GPI Trigger Type Sequencer A group trigger type Waits for an operator to press the external GPI button to trigger the next event The current event remains on screen until the next event is triggered Gradient CG and Paint blend from one color to another
521. selected template into the current playlist event You can also press ENTER or ALT L e Click the Load Down button to load the selected template into the next available playlist event You can also press SHIFT ENTER or ALT W e Click the Load More button to load the selected template into the next available playlist event and then keep the Template Manager open so you can continue selecting and loading templates You can also press CTRL SHIFT ENTER or ALT E Chapter 3 CG 233 TitleOne User Guide Template Registries 234 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Select a Different Template Registry To change the current template registry click the Open button in the Template Manager and navigate to the templates file you want to use The drop down list at the top of the Template Manager window stores the recent registry files for easy access CG has a default template list or registry file called inscribe templates This file is located in your TitleOne application folder You can use more than one registry file when working with CG The Registry Manager is a utility that helps you organize registry files It allows you to create new registries manage existing registries and copy templates between registries Open the Registry Manager To open the Registry Manager first open the Template Manager window by pressing the Template Manager button in the CG Cl E toolbar then click the Registry Manager button in the Template M
522. selection tools transformation tools and filters for fast editing of the images you need to get online Clean Up Logos and Add Alpha Paint an Image Retouch Images Create Backgrounds and Collages Make Selections Apply Transformations Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual If you use logos frequently cropping and removing image information from around logos or objects may be one of the most important reasons to use Paint This task is often called logo clean up The sophisticated alpha tools in Paint make cleaning up logos easy You can add alpha to small areas of your image or make whole areas of your image transparent These images can then be saved as Inscriber ipt format files and imported into CG as logos See Work with Alpha Tools and Logos on page 454 for details You can create a series of artistic brush stroke styles and paint an image from scratch using the color tools See Paint an Image on page 463 for details You can retouch images or remove unwanted objects or artifacts such as telephone poles or scratches from your images to make them more presentable on air You can also selectively copy and offset areas using the Clone and Offset tools and you can edit the luminance values of your image You can also apply color correction filters to adjust the image color contrast or levels See Edit an Image on page 477 for details Backgrounds and collages can be used in a variety of situations Back
523. ser Guide 412 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide 4 In the confirmation dialog click OK Delete a Media File from a Database You can delete a media file from a Media Store database folio without deleting the file from the database I Switch to database mode ensure that the Browse button on the toolbar is not selected Otherwise you will delete the file from disk 2 Select the folio to delete the file from 3 In the Media window right click the thumbnail 4 From the right click menu select Delete The file is deleted from the folio You can also delete a media file from a database The file is removed from all folios I Switch to database mode ensure the Browse button on the toolbar is not selected Otherwise you will delete the file from disk Select the Global folio In the Media window right click the thumbnail From the right click menu select Delete N NK 0 N In the confirmation dialog you can select whether to delete the source file from disk e To delete the file from the database but leave the source file on disk click No e To delete the file from the database and disk click Yes Search for Media You can scroll through media files in Media Store databases or browse drives and folders using the navigation pane to find a file If you have many media files this is a tedious process To find media files Quickly use the Find and Search dialogs Search criteria can be simple or combine
524. shair CH ra Large Crosshair A Di i Line Spacing HE Video Safe Title Area Figure 8 33 View Tab Paint offers several zoom levels at intervals from 12 5 to 3200 Either select the desired zoom level from the Zoom drop down list on the View tab or use the Zoom tool on the Tools palette To zoom in with the Zoom tool click on the image To zoom out hold the ALT key and click on the image All zoom levels are corrected for the current video aspect ratio While zoomed in on an image you can move around the image using the Scroll tool The Scroll tool is useful when you are making selections while zoomed in on your image You can also use the scroll bars on the right and bottom edges of the Paint workspace You can hold the SPACEBAR to quickly switch to and use the Scroll tool while using another tool The View radio buttons change the views between the RGB channels and the alpha channel With RGB selected the image is seen as full color With Alpha selected alpha channel is seen as a grayscale image representing the transparency levels for the visible layers To view the alpha channel for a particular layer make sure it is the only visible layer and select the Alpha radio button See Work with Channels on page 495 for details on channels View Checkboxes Grid Options Cursor Options Video Safe Title Area Video Aspect Ratio The View checkboxes let you select a variety of options including grid view cur
525. sor view and video safe title area To enable an option select the checkbox To disable an option clear the checkbox The grid provides a guide to manually align images selections or brush strokes To view the grid select the Grid checkbox on the View tab Then select the line color and line type from the drop down lists and enter a line spacing value The View tab offers three cursor options Brush Preview cursor Small Crosshair and Large Crosshair Each option is enabled or disabled by selecting the appropriate checkbox on the View tab The Brush Preview cursor previews the current brush tool It lets el you see the size shape opacity and other attributes before you start painting This option is enabled by default Small Crosshair replaces the standard cursor with a fine crosshair You can also access the small cursor by pressing CAPS LOCK E The small cursor is useful when you need to edit an image pixel by pixel Large Crosshair extends the crosshairs to the edge of your image This is useful for finding the precise corners on square objects Tt just line the crosshair up with the object edges The Video Safe Title Area option displays the video safe area defined in CG The video safe area is the portion of the image normally visible when viewed on an output monitor or television To edit the Video Safe Title Area you must switch to the View tab in CG All views and initial brush settings are corrected for the
526. sources TitleOne User Guide Table 9 5 Store Paths Tab Preferences Option Date Format Case Insensitive Location Name Server Local Browse Description Sets the date format used in Media Store DD MM YYYY MM DD YYYY or YYYY MM DD The format is controlled by the Date Format option Media Store date fields for example the file date on the Key Info tab use the format specified by the Date Format option Also if you define a search using the Date search key you must use the current Media Store date format Sets TitleOne to perform case insensitive searches Names the location for the reference files Media Store creates when you view images in the Media window By default the location is named Default and the following fields Server Local and Browse set the locations for saving the referenced files Sets the location for storing image reference files Store creates the reference files when you view images in the Media window Click the Browse button or enter the path in the fields to set the location Folios Tab Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Table 9 6 Folios Tab Preferences Option Default Sort Description Sets the default order for the image thumbnails in Order the Media window The default sort order is None which sorts the files by media number Browser Tab Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Table 9 7 Browser Tab Prefere
527. space area select the On Selected option e To zoom so that your layout fills the entire visible CG workspace area select the Full Screen option e Select 100 to return your layout to the normal zoom level Drag the scrollbars on the edges of the CG workspace to view layout areas that are off the edge of the workspace Move Workspace Elements To move a toolbar or palette to a new position click the edge of the workspace element and drag it to a new position in the workspace Drag elements back to their original locations to snap them back into place Text Objects CG offers a variety of text objects suited to specific needs in your layouts Text objects can be constrained to keep their lengths constant and they can contain multiple lines of text You can also create text paths and vertical text Create Text Objects Use the appropriate text tool from the Tools palette to add a text object to a layout Table 3 5 Text Object Tools Icon Tool Text Field Text Constrained Field Paragraph Field Fixed Width Paragraph Field Text Path Description For single lines of text The field expands as text is entered Pressing ENTER creates a new Text Field For single lines of text The field s width is constrained and the text gets smaller to fit the field Pressing ENTER creates a new Text Constrained Field For multiple lines of text The field expands as text is entered Pressing ENTER creates a new line wit
528. ss Components 211 mixer settings st 37 modes Media Store oonccccoooncncccom m 378 browse 378 385 browse toolbar rurrnrennnrunnnnenernunnnnenene 378 browse vs database toolbar 3 8 381 database ococcoccconcncnconcncnccncnnnnonanos 378 380 database toolbar ocoooccoccccncconconncoconos 380 SWIC BE 378 380 385 modules switch to Animation Editor 248 SWEN OC EE 94 Index TitleOne User Guide switch to Frame Grab 362 switch to Media Store 374 switch to Paint EE 434 switch to Sequencer rrrrrrnnnenrannennnnene 306 modules described ccccoocccoccnoconococonnnnos 2 monitor Calibration 507 monitor output activity cco oo 360 A tee aa ra ced toe Sener ee 208 MOSAIC MM bio 296 most recently used colors Paint 460 motion filters save 295 296 motion templates combine multiple templates 278 delete from registry ccccooncccccccccncons 281 insert OPTIONS ooccoccccnccccncnnonnncncnnoncnnnnnos 277 NAME prest 279 EVEN se 273 co 279 281 VES tico Ee 217 E 273 TIMING Kei Le CC 42 217 UP ea 281 motion timeline 286 287 move CG GROWS da dde 193 ODJECIS cedida id lo 100 185 II ss 128 move keyframes 264 move transformations 472 Multi page Crawls E 317 adjust timing cccooccccoccncnncnnnnncncnnnnnnnnnnos 321 create EE 319 PAUSE OUTPUT EA 360 multi page rolls
529. ss a shortcut or RapidFire keyboard key e Click a command in the RapidFire dialog For a complete list of RapidFire shortcut keys see RapidFire on page 529 For a complete list of the RapidFire keyboard keys see RapidFire Keyboard on page 532 Chapter 2 Output 63 TitleOne User Guide Scratch Layout RapidFire automatically creates a layout at the bottom of the playlist called Scratch vii that is used for all RapidFire operations For example layouts are read into the Scratch vii layout whenever a read operation is performed and the contents of the Scratch vii layout are used for write operations Set the Working You can specify the working directory in which RapidFire reads and writes Directory layout files Open the InsertText dialog using one of the following methods e Press SHIFT AUTO TEXT using the RapidFire keyboard e Click Config in the RapidFire dialog Iinserilext Default Layout 101 Load From Working Directory Working Directory CiTemplateLayauts Browse Auto Text Strings 53 Elbowingid 54 Fightingid 55 High Stickingid 56 Holdingid 57 Honokingid 56 Interferencetd 59 Goaltender Interference 60 Roughingid 61 Slashingid 62 Spearingid 63 Tripping Figure 2 17 InsertText Dialog 2 Specify the directory in which to read and write layout files scribe files using one of the following methods e Enter the path in the Working Directory field e Click the Browse button and then navig
530. ster Since a bitmap is defined by the number of pixels it contains increasing its size can distort the image Programs like Microsoft Paint PaintShop Pro MetaCreations Painter and Photoshop manipulate raster images Unlike these applications Paint is designed specifically for the video and broadcast industry In CG logos textures and backgrounds are bitmap images In Paint Animation and Frame Grab all objects are bitmaps including text Generally you should not size an image or part of an image much beyond 20 in any application that manipulates bitmap images including Paint CG Animation Frame Grab and other paint programs Every design medium has its particular challenges In print graphics you need to understand CMYK color space color separations and the difference between image size and image resolution In web graphics you have to be concerned with file size and web colors In video graphics you do not have to worry about image resolution or file size Image resolution is the size of the image and file size is limited only by free hard drive space and installed RAM Dealing with pixel shape different aspect ratios and video legal colors are part of the challenge of creating graphics for video Paint has tools and features that are designed specifically for creating images for video 500 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Pixel Shape Aspect Ratios Video Legal Colors In the world of comput
531. switch to the database see Switch Current Database on page 403 and then add the files to the Build set and build the files into the database steps 2 5 Create a Database Location The default Media Store database location is in your product installation folder It is recommended that you store all databases on a network drive Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide The first step in creating a database is to set the locations for the database the user folios and the browsed files Select File gt Preferences The Preferences dialog opens 2 In the Preferences dialog switch to the Store Paths tab You enter the information for the new database in the Store Locations area at the bottom of the tab Location Name d Delete Picture Store we Store Defaults Server CA PictureStore Browse Local C PictureStore Store ser Browse Browse C PictureStorelStore Browse1 Browse Figure 7 10 Store Paths Tab Store Locator Area ES CU I eLo Stor 3 Inthe Location Name field enter a name for the new database 4 Inthe Server field enter the network path for the database or click the Browse button and navigate to the network path 5 In the Local field enter the local path for the user folios or click the Browse button and navigate to the local path 6 In the Browse field enter the network path for the browsed files or click the Browse button and navigate to the network pa
532. t Figure 3 11 Change a Text Object s Font 5 Click the Style buttons in the Paragraph section of the Attributes tab to apply different font styles to your text Table 3 7 Font Styles Button Description Click the Bold button to switch to the bold variation of your B selected font If the font does not have a bold variation CG automatically thickens the text for you Click the Italic button to switch to the italicized variation of F your selected font If the font does not have an italicized variation CG automatically slants the text for you Click the Underline button to underline your text Chapter3 CG 115 TitleOne User Guide 116 TitleOne User Guide Table 3 7 Font Styles Continued Button Description Click the Small Caps button to apply small caps to your text Se All lower case letters in your selection change to upper case letters displayed at a percentage of the normal upper case size Upper case letters numbers and punctuation symbols are not affected Font Size You can change the size of the text inside your text object and you can also change its aspect ratio to make it wider or narrower Select a text object To select only some of the text in your object select the k Selection tool in the Tools palette hold the CTRL key and drag your cursor over the text you want to select 2 Switch to the Attributes tab of the Attributes palette 3 In the Formatting section of the tab use
533. t You can only apply one Active Texture to each object and you are not able to use any other treatments on the object Feature Note You must have the Clip Option activated on your system before you can use Active Textures and video clips in your layouts Add an Active Texture Treatment to an Object You can apply an Active Texture to an object with the Media Library or the Face tab To apply an Active Texture to an object using the Media Library Select the Pointer tool in the Tools palette You must use the Pointer tool to apply an Active Texture k treatment to text objects If you use the Selection tool instead the Active Texture is inserted into the text object See Insert Media into Text Objects on page 108 to learn about inserting Active Textures into text objects 2 Select the object you want to edit Libraries 3 Switch to the Media tab of the CG Libraries palette Styles Media If the Active Texture you want to use is not already stored in one of the library boxes see The Media Library on page 177 to learn how to add media to the Media Library 4 Grab the media box containing the Active Texture and drag it to the object 5 Drop the Active Texture in the object The Active Texture is applied to all the elements in the object Menu Y To apply an Active Texture to an object using the Face tab l 2 Select an object in the CG workspace Switch to the Face tab in the Attribu
534. t Luminance 296 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Crop cuts off or reveals a percentage of an object over time You can set a different crop value for each side of e Pivi an object Crop values on all sides range from 0 to 100 If you set a crop on more than one side the values po can bump into each another Select the Lock button to og modify all sides at once Select a combination of individual Lock buttons one for each side to crop specific sides at the same time Clear each Lock button to modify sides independently al o Mosaic creates a resolution reduction effect which transforms objects into large blocks In turn the blocks ag are made somewhat transparent which blurs them slightly The Mosaic effect is often used to block out and a li Eli E person s face on video to hide their identity Blur o Glo 38 The Blur effect creates a soft blur transforming all hard edges into softened edges The more Blur you apply to edges the softer the edges become You can set Blur on an object s width independent of its height one pixel at a time Or you can increase or decrease blur on both the width and height of an object at the same time using the Lock button Select the Lock button to blur the width and height together Clear the Lock button to soften object edges independently Tint adjusts the color values of an object over time This effect allows you to gradually change the saturation o
535. t Media Store 2 Select the Browse or Build folio containing the media files you want to add to the Shot Box button The folio s media files display in the Media window See Set and Browse Set Folios on page 420 for details on folios 3 Drag the media file to one of the available yellow buttons on the Shot Box labeled I 4 Defined buttons Figure 2 13 Defined Buttons 4 In the message dialog click Yes to confirm that you want to assign the media file to the button 5 To output the media file click the Shot Box button The program channel plays the selected media file immediately Output Selected The Shot Box palette allows you to quickly output your playlist layouts and Items Media Store files To preview the selected item click the Preview button on the Shot Box palette To output the selected item click the Take button on the Shot Box palette Chapter 2 Output 59 TitleOne User Guide 60 RapidFire RapidFire allows you to perform layout operations with the speed you need for live event coverage You can operate RapidFire with keyboard commands to quickly take clear recall and update your layouts To make output even easier use the Auto Text feature to insert commonly used text with greater accuracy and speed The RapidFire Keyboard option provides additional keys that perform standard commands allowing operators to work more quickly and effectively Key Features You can use RapidFire to quickly perform la
536. t The folio s media files display in the Media window Chapter 2 Output 57 TitleOne User Guide 58 Assign a Media File to a Defined Button Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide See Set and Browse Set Folios on page 420 for details on folios 3 Enter the media thumbnail number in the Shot Box Number field 4 To select the media file press the ENTER key on the main keyboard not the ENTER key on the number pad The number pad ENTER key performs the following actions when the Store Play toggle button reads Store e If the Shot Box LRN button is not selected the number pad ENTER key outputs the selected layout If a Shot Box palette program channel button is selected the layout outputs to the selected channel If no program channel button is selected the layout outputs to the program channel specified for the file on the Media Store module Transition tab Figure 2 12 Program Channel Buttons on Shot Box Palette e If the Shot Box LRN button is selected the number pad ENTER key adds the selected layout to the playlist Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne You can assign media files from the Media window to a Defined button on the Shot Box for immediate output There are four available defined buttons that are labeled I 4 You can click on the button at any time to output the media file in real time on the program channel I In TitleOne switch to the Media Store tool Tools g
537. t press the ESC key to switch to Selection Mode Your text cursor is removed from the text object b Press the TAB key to move to the next object in the layout and press the SHIFT TAB key to move to the previous object in the layout c If you want to edit a selected text object press the SPACEBAR to enter Edit Mode A text cursor appears in the text object allowing you to edit the text There are several ways to position and orient the objects in a layout They can be moved with the Pointer and Selection tools the keyboard the Position fields or the Nudge buttons Their spacing relative to each other or to the layout can be changed with the Alignment and Distribution menus 184 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Move Objects Move objects in the CG workspace with the Pointer and Selection tools the keyboard ARROW keys and the Nudge buttons You can also select an exact position for your objects by entering values in the Position X and Position Y fields Use the Pointer and Selection tools to quickly drag selected objects within the layout Enter new X and Y coordinates for selected objects by typing values in the EE EN Position fields in the CG Editor toolbar If more than one object is selected the coordinates are based on the top left object in the selection The Position X value is the distance from the left edge of the layout Position Y is the distance from the top edge of the layout Use the Nudge bu
538. t Tree View 196 COLUMN savnes 218 ele BE 236 tags Overlay tag text for updates ooccccocccccccccconcnnnnos 74 update tagged text ooccccccccoccccoccccannnos 76 Take button Shot BOX rrrrrnrrrrrnnrrrnnnnn 384 take events Sequencer rrrnnrrrnrnnnrennnnn 357 See also output take files to video Media Store 427 set up single click takes Shot Box 428 using Shot BOX sorres 428 Template Manager create News Edit Tables 203 create playlists AAA 233 create templates rrrrnrrrarernnrrranevanennn 232 News Edit Tables nannannnnnnannnnnnennnnnne 205 save a template oocccoccccccncoccccncncnncnnns 243 switch template registries 234 update templates occoocccccconncocncos 233 template registries See Registry Manager templates Animation add template effects to path 276 PN a o ree Ie 274 import export occcccccccccccnccno 279 303 304 motion templates oocccoccccocnconcncnooo 273 overwrite OPTIONS oocccoccccccncccncnncncnanonos 276 SlAG OG Ii arrasadas 275 299 templates CO 231 238 create playlists with cococcccooc 233 default template ooccccocccccncnccoocns 231 JOD Greater vuelos 236 Index TitleOne User Guide SCIEGCD EEE EEE HE EEE 231 SUNE sr une 243 templates DVE Switcher apply in Sequencer rrrarrnrnrenr
539. t ten folders browsed For more information on browse mode see Media Store Toolbar and Modes on page 378 You can export media files displayed in the Media window Select a media file in the Media window Use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to select multiple thumbnails 2 Select File gt Export gt Export Selected Store Images 3 In the dialog select a file type and location and then click OK Media Store names the files numerically If you save multiple files the files are saved sequentially by number Metadata is data used to describe a media file including transition information and keywords Because all users in a multi user environment share the same metadata the attribute settings for each media file are synchronized without using a central database For example if you update the keyword list for a media file all other users see the change Using metadata you can also easily recover the Attributes palette settings see Attributes Palette on page 381 for all the media files you browse or add to a Media Store database If you edit the attributes of a media file in browse mode Media Store creates a metadata file for the media file Also Media Store creates a metadata file for every media file you add to a database using the following methods e Browsed media files e Frame grabs captured by pressing CTRL G The metadata file contains all the media file information from the Media Store Attributes palette includin
540. t the Load From Working Directory option is selected in the RapidFire menu See Figure 2 17 on page 64 If the RapidFire dialog is undocked click its Config button and then ensure that the Load From Working Directory checkbox is selected in the InsertText dialog 3 Using the number pad enter a filename for the layout for example layoutl 4 Press SHIFT RECORD LAYOUT on the RapidFire keyboard or SHIFT F5 on the standard keyboard to write the layout to the working directory The layout in Scratch vii is written as a layout scribe file in the working directory For information on controlling the directory in which layout files are created see Set the Working Directory on page 64 Chapter 2 Output 67 TitleOne User Guide 68 Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide Create a New Layout Using a Media Store Template Feature Note Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne Ensure that the Load From Working Directory option is not selected in the RapidFire menu See Figure 2 17 on page 64 If the RapidFire dialog is undocked click its Config button and then ensure that the Load From Working Directory checkbox is cleared in the InsertText dialog 2 Using the number pad enter the media number of the Media Store template layout to retrieve for example 1001 Note Media Store displays a T icon in the top right corner of template layout thumbnails 3 Press SHIFT F4 to load the template layout from Media St
541. t the selected card displays in the Video Card Details section Inscriber XD 200 Control Panel Use the Inscriber XD 200 control panel to configure your video card Detected Yideo Cards This list contains all video cards detected and displays their status Select card in table below to work with its settings Card Card Model Serial Number Input 1 Input 2 RefIn Timecode Bypass RefIn Sync gt 1 fInserber xD 200 4014200 Sa Gna Gna Gua ox 501 Input 1 2 Jinseriberxo 200 3876042 Gua Gua Gua Gua Pok Jeep Swap Cards Swapping cards will force changes to be applied Refresh List ideo Card Details Card Model Inscriber XD 200 Card Number 94014290 FPGA Version 8401 Saved Configuration General Details Input Output Reference In Mixer Test Pattern General Details Applications Detected Status Log Running Applications Time m d h m Signal Status Solo 02 12 10 59 Fallback from Input 1 to Reference In on card 2 02 12 10 59 Fallback from Input 1 to Reference In on card 1 02 12 10 59 Fallback from Reference In to Free Run on card 2 02 12 10 59 Fallback from Reference In to Free Run on card 1 Help Apply Changes Close I lt i 3 Figure 1 20 XD 200 Control Panel 30 Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual Create a Configuration View information about your Inscriber applications and the current signal status in the General Details section Click
542. t to be sure that your layout will be properly displayed on all types of TV monitors To display the video safe title area click the Display Options button on the CG toolbar In the Display Options menu select Show 4 3 Title Safe Area If you are working on a 16 9 layout you k can choose to display either a 4 3 or a 16 9 video safe title area If the Snap to Title Safe Area option is checked in the Display Options menu objects in your layout snap to the video safe title area when they are moved Edit the Video Safe Title Area Select Display Options gt Edit Video Safe Area to change the size and color of the video safe title area TitleOne User Guide 239 240 Work with Layout Files Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide The Video Safe Area Editor dialog opens allowing you to change the color and size of both the 4 3 and 16 9 safe title area Video Safe Area Editor Set the video safe areals 4 3 Title Safe Area Color ET hl Margins k 16 9 Title Safe Area Color E we Margins ao Figure 3 73 Video Safe Area Editor CG lets you import text files News Edit tables Subtitle ebu files scribe files and animations You can also export images sequence text files subtitle text files scribe files and Subtitle ebu files All the import and export options are found in the File gt Import and File gt Export menus Import and Export CG Layouts CG Layouts are scribe files which contain ed
543. t to the existing selected path All previously set information including keyframes remains intact Append behavior depends on whether you select the Beginning or End option If you select Beginning the template effect is added prior to the first keyframe If you select End the template effect is added after the last keyframe 276 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Insert Options Timing Options Reverse Preset Order Insert options affect where the template is inserted into the current path The options are Beginning and End and the results they produce are dependent upon the entire original path rather than on the selected keyframe If you select Beginning the template is inserted before at the beginning of the original path If you select End the template is inserted after at the end of the original path You can also set timing options for the template including the Start frame the Length of the path and whether you want to Stagger the template Table 4 35 Timing Options Option Start Frame Length Clip Length button Wei Stagger Result Starts the path at a particular frame in time Similar to shifting the entire path forward in time using the slider on the Time tab Sets the duration for the path in frames before you click Apply If you change the length after applying the template keyframes are added Forces the length of the path to match the value set in the End field o
544. t will result in out of range values after an encoding process Illegal colors are corrected to legal colors with an algorithm that attempts to maintain luminance values Monochrome Performs a luminance conversion converting images to 8 bit grayscale Dither Removes contouring in imported graphics with a generalized noise filter Footprint Removal Field 1 Applies the average field filter to the field I followed by an adaptive field filter to field 2 Chapter 6 Frame Grab 367 TitleOne User Guide Footprint Removal Field 2 Applies the average field filter to the field 2 followed by an adaptive field filter to field I 368 Chapter 6 Frame Grab TitleOne User Guide Set Up Frame Grab and Save Files Set Up As long as your frame buffer is configured correctly TitleOne automatically does all the setup required for a frame grab as soon as you switch to the Frame Grab module All you have to do is start the input feed Frame Grab requires an encoder on the frame buffer board It does not work on the VMAXX 10 board On other systems frame grabs are saved as 16 or 32 bit image files but transparency is lost When you switch to Frame Grab TitleOne sets your frame buffer to video passthrough so that you can see the incoming signal on your video monitor If you have trouble check the following items Table 6 2 Set Up Troubleshooting Problem Possible Solutions No Input Signal Check the cable connections and the setup op
545. tal timers to layouts CLR button A Program Preview palette button that clears the current channel CMYK An acronym for Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black All printed images are a combination of these four colors CMYK is not relevant to video display but computer generated images must be converted to CMYK if they are to be printed Collage Paint An image technique that combines and blends multiple images into one smooth composition Color Adjustment Filters Paint Inscriber filters that alter image color by mapping new ranges of pixel values over existing ranges Color Balance Filter Paint A color adjustment filter that adjusts the color range of an image s shadows midtones and highlights one at a time Color Chip CG and Paint A small colored square on the Color amp Texture tab in CG or the Color tab in Paint that identifies a selected color Color Correction Paint A means of adjusting the color of an image Paint has several color correction filters that let you perform complex adjustments to the color of an image Color Emboss Paint A distortion filter that makes an image appear embossed by adding highlights and shadows based on the edges in the images while retaining color information Color Model A mathematical representation of the full set of colors available for NTSC or PAL encoding such as the RGB HSV or HLS color models While the colors they represent remain the sa
546. tart Roll Crawl On Screen or Off Screen 322 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Roll and crawl layouts have border options that set the output area of the layout Use the Effect Settings tab to set the borders for the current event 6 Select the roll or crawl in the Sequencer playlist Switch to the Effect Settings tab Click on the Global Settings button and then check the Show Borders checkbox Adjust the border settings for your layout e Roll Layouts Adjust the values in the Top and Bottom fields in the Global Settings dialog e Crawl Layouts Adjust the value in the Left and Right fields in the Global Settings dialog Enter a number in the Softness field to add a fade area to your roll or crawl layout For example if you add a softness value to your roll borders the roll will fade in from the bottom border and fade out into the top border To hide the border markers clear the checkbox You can set whether your roll or crawl starts on or off screen l 2 Select the roll or crawl event in the Sequencer playlist Switch to the Effect Settings tab and click on the Global Settings button 3 Select the Start Off Screen or Start On Screen radio button Crawl Settings Oset speed 1 50 CO Start OFF Screen a 8 Set Time 120 frames 2 Start On Screen A 00 00 04 00 hh mm ss FF Accelerate over Frames L pag Use Layout Spacing Default Page Margins O lo Before First me 100 ly Eeler ee
547. te Manager Create a Formatted Text File Open a text editor like Windows Notepad 2 On the first line enter template and the number of the template you want to use for example template 10 You can use the Template Manager within CG to verify the template number 3 On the second line enter the tag you want to fill followed by an equals sign and the text you want to fill it with For example Reporter Janet Murphy 4 Repeat step 3 on subsequent lines for any more tags you want to fill in the layout For example Location City Hall 5 To create another layout press ENTER twice and then enter the template number tags and replacement text again 6 Repeat step 5 to create more layouts Make sure all the layouts have spaces between their entries This is what the finished text file looks like in our example Chapter 3 CG 237 TitleOne User Guide 238 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide template 10 Reporter Janet Murphy Location City Hall template 10 Reporter Victor Atlas Location Community Center template 10 Reporter Kim Le Location Miller Park Pagoda 7 Save the text file Import the Formatted Text File In CG select File gt Import gt Import Text File and navigate to the folder where you saved the formatted text file Select the text file and select the Job Creator radio button at the bottom of the Open dialog When you click the Open button CG creates the playlist based on the instructions in the te
548. tected Yideo Cards This list contains all video cards Lon and displays their status Select card in table to work with its settings Card Model AA SE RefIn Sync 1 sober xD 200 5415934 CT TE Inscriber XD 200 5471086 Da Dra Gra Gua ok FreeRun Swap Cards Swapping cards will Force changes to be applied Refresh List Yideo Card Details Card Model Inscriber XD 200 Card Number 5471086 FPGA Version 7307 Saved Configuration General Details Input Output Reference In Mixer Test Pattern Configure Input Output Configure your input and output settings for optimal results Configuration Input Output Standard Define your configuration Define your standards for broadcasting definition Configure for both input and output O High Definition Cluse key input for live DYE or frame grab SD Only Standard Definition O No input required only output Display Standards NTSC 486i 29 97 fps C Enable ancillary data input output Ori timecode input Bypass Yideo Timing To stop all graphics compositing and ensure that the Adjust the timing of the output video signal output video is identical to the input video check this box to enable bypass Horizontal Delay in us mm Bypass Vertical Delay in Lines can be negative fr y lt a Figure 5 26 Enable Timecode Input Checkbox 4 Click Close Select the Time Code Trigger Use the options on the group header or the Event Editor tab to sel
549. ted object in the workspace and to apply options specific to the current TitleOne tool The Scrapbook is temporary holding place for layouts frame grabs styles library items and other TitleOne elements Use the Scrapbook to transfer objects between TitleOne tools or to transfer layout styles and elements between CG layouts Scrapbook Options Right click on the Scrapbook to view the Scrapbook menu The available menu options change depending on the selected object and the TitleOne tool you are working in Table 1 5 Scrapbook Menu Option Function Add Copies the selected item and places it in the Scrapbook Use Available in Paint Places the selected Scrapbook item in the workspace Use Available in CG Background Copies the selected item to the background layer of the current layout replacing the existing background If you cannot see the background Right click on the CG workspace and select Change Background 2 Inthe Set Background dialog decrease the values in the Transparency fields Chapter 1 Overview 15 TitleOne User Manual 16 Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual Option Use Texture Use Layout Title Use Logo Delete Clear All Copy to Clipboard Paste from Clipboard Info Table 1 5 Scrapbook Menu Function Available in CG Places an image of the selected Scrapbook item on the selected graphic object Select the graphic object in the CG workspace 2 Select
550. tely converted to a page formatted roll You can only insert roll events into the Page Formatted Roll group Figure 5 5 Select Page Formatted Roll in Sequencer When you output the playlist all events in the Page Formatted Roll group are rendered to disk and then played back as one smooth continuous roll Note If your roll events have backgrounds the background from the first event is used as the background for the whole Page Formatted Roll group The Equalize Timing option on the Effect Settings tab sets all roll pages to equal the same length as the longest roll When you check the Equalize Timing checkbox each roll page displays for the same length of time on screen Select an event in the Page Formatted Roll group to determine which group receives the formatting 318 Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide Create Multi Page Crawls Switch to the Effect Settings tab Click the Global Settings button Check the Equalize Timing checkbox to display each roll event for the same length of time Roll Settings O Set Speed Start Off Screen E O Set Time 120 gt frames O Start On Screen amp 00 00 04 00 hhimm ss F 10 frames e Fault Page Margins 10 100 D C Show Borders End Off Screen D fa Softness o O End On Screen E di qualize Timing Baseline Offset 0 Clear velocity Dependent Filtering Reset Take Cancel OK Figure 5 6 Select the Equalize Timing
551. temporary holding place for layouts frame grabs styles library items media and other TitleOne elements You can easily add items stored in the Scrapbook to the playlist To use a Scrapbook item in the playlist Select an empty slot in the playlist Use the scrollbar below the Scrapbook to display the item Right click on the item and select Use The Scrapbook item is added to the playlist as an event To add an event to the Scrapbook Select the event in the playlist 2 Right click on the Scrapbook 3 Select Add from the right click menu The event is added to the Scrapbook Shot Box Palette You can use the Shot Box to select playlist events in Sequencer To select an event with the Shot Box Open the Preferences dialog select File gt Preferences 2 To display event numbers in the playlist switch to the Project tab and clear the Show Filename in Job Strip checkbox When this checkbox is cleared the event numbers display in the playlist rather than the file names 3 To close the Preferences dialog click OK 4 On the Shot Box palette click the Store Play toggle button to read Play Feature Note When the Store Play button reads Store you can work with files in the Media Store module Media Store is a purchase option in TitleOne 5 Enter the event number in the Shot Box Number field If the event number is 00003 you can enter 3 Chapter 5 Sequencer 6 To select the event press ENTER on the main k
552. tereo input I and any program audio from the software and then output on audio output I In the Mixer section select one of the following options e Live input only e Mix software audio over live input e Software audio only e No output In the Output section use the options to setup your audio output configuration e Discrete AES e Embedded Discrete AES e No output If you have a monitor jack on the back of your XD 200 you can adjust the volume of the jack using the Monitor Level option Decrease the value to decrease the volume View the status of your audio setting in the Embedded Audio Status and Discrete AES Input Status sections To check your status you can loop your input to your output Use the Channel Formatting section to select your channel setup options 4 Stereo Pairs 5 1 Surround Stereo Pair or 7 1 Surround Note The Channel Formatting options are only available for HD Click the Apply Changes button to apply the settings to the current configuration Chapter 1 Overview 39 TitleOne User Manual 40 View Test Pattern Save a Configuration Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manual You can select and view a test pattern to test your configuration I Select a video card in the Detected Video Cards list 2 Click the Test Pattern button Inscriber XD 200 Control Panel Use the Inscriber XD 200 control panel to configure your video card Detected Yideo Cards This list contai
553. termine how and where along the path the effect is applied Start Over End Apply All Stagger Animate Reverse Remove Effect Go Back Figure 4 123 3D Effect Options Insert Options Insert options affect where the 3D effect is inserted into the current path The options are Start Over and End and the results they produce are dependent upon the entire path rather than on the selected object If you select Start the effect is inserted at the beginning of the path If you select End the effect is inserted at the end of the path If you select Over the effect is applied over the entire path without removing any other attributes of the path Apply All Select the Apply All button if you want to apply the 3D effect to every path in your animation This button is useful when you have many paths in the workspace Animate Select the Animate button to view an animated variations of the 3D effect Reverse an Effect Select the Reverse button to apply the reverse motion of the variations to your path The animated thumbnails display the effect in reverse order Apply 3D Effects Stagger an Effect With the Stagger option you can set each path in your animation to wait a certain number of frames before playing the 3D effect For example if you have seven paths and you set the stagger number to 5 the first path displays the effect at the start frame the second path displays the effect 5 frames later the thi
554. tes palette When you apply an Active Texture to the face element all of the other elements will adopt the Active Texture as well Select the Active Texture treatment from the Treatment drop down list In the Color section of the tab click the Add button and select the Active Texture file you want to use The file is applied to all of the elements in the object Align the Active Texture Use the Face tab to set the alignment for the Active Texture Select the Align to Layout radio button to align the Active Texture to the upper left corner of the element This option allows multiple objects to show different portions of a large Active Texture depending on their layout positions Select the Align to Object radio button to align the Active Texture to the upper left corner of the element All objects using this texture and alignment option show the same section of the texture regardless of their layout position Active Textures aligned to layout Active Textures aligned to object Figure 3 37 Two Objects with Different Active Texture Alignments To re size the element so it is the same size as the Active Texture file click the Resize to Fit Texture button Chapter 3 CG 165 TitleOne User Guide Edge Treatments 166 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Select Active Texture Transparency Every element in an object can have independent transparency settings for the Active Texture You can set independent transparencies for the
555. th 7 Click the Add button To close the Preferences dialog click OK The new database is now the active database For information on switching between databases see Switch Current Database on page 403 Add Browsed Files You can browse for files to add to the Build set using the navigation pane or the Build Media Store dialog For information on browsing folders see Browse Media Files on page 385 Use the navigation pane to browse files Chapter 7 Media Store 389 TitleOne User Guide 390 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide In the navigation pane to the left of the Media window navigate to and select each folder that contains files to add On the Media Store toolbar click the Global Browse button The Media window displays thumbnails of the media files in all the folders you browsed In the Media window select the files to add and drag them to the Build button on the Media Store toolbar Note You can drag files from the Media window to the Build button immediately after selecting the folder that contains them You can also add files to the Build set using the Build Media Store dialog To open the Build Media Store dialog click the Add to the Store button on the Media Store palette OG 9 0 a E ES PE 7 D a 49 De Add to the Store Button Figure 7 11 Media Store Palette Add to the Store Button The Build Media Store dialog lists all the files in the Buil
556. th Depending if you apply the 3D effect to the start end or over the path determines whether the additional keyframes are added to the start end or throughout your path When you adjust the duration of the 3D effect you need to adjust the frames between these additional keyframes Select your path Switch to the Time tab Use the Keyframe field and arrows in the drop down menu to select the second keyframe containing your 3D effect information The position of the keyframes containing the 3D effect information depends on whether you applied the effect to the start end or over the animation path e Additional keyframes are positioned at the start of the path if you applied the effect to the start of the path e Additional keyframes are positioned at the end of the path if you applied the effect to the end of the path e Additional keyframes are positioned throughout the path if you applied the effect over the path Adjust the value in the Frame field Adjusting the frame value adjusts the frames between the selected keyframe and the preceding keyframe e Decrease the number in the Frame field to increase the speed between the selected keyframe and the preceding keyframe e Increase the number in the Frame field to decrease the speed between the selected keyframe and the preceding keyframe Select the next keyframe in the path and adjust the value in the Frame field Continue to repeat this step until you have adjusted the fr
557. that add an event to a sequence or playlist Log Event Down adds an event below the current event Log Event Up adds an event above the current event Logo Object CG Special graphic objects that can mix the face treatment with a bitmap image Commonly used for station identification images corporate logos or product logos Luminance The shade or value of a color Luminance works in conjunction with chrominance which is pure color For example when you look at a red ball your eyes do not see it as having many colors but as having many shades of red The red you see is the chrominance of the ball and the shades of red are the different luminance values Luminance Fill Paint A painting tool that fills a layer or selection based on color values in the image You can specify in the Tolerance field how close color values need to be in order to be filled in Luminance Filter Animation A motion filter that adjusts the brightness and contrast of an object over time Glossary TitleOne User Guide You can use luminance as a lighting effect where light moves from one object to another over time LZW Compression Media Store A lossless data compression scheme suitable for all image file formats See also Compression Manual Trigger Type Sequencer group trigger type Waits for an operator to press the SPACEBAR to trigger the next event The current event remains on screen until the next event is trigg
558. that fraction of a second you see flicker in the display of a frame grab using both frames Frame Grab allows you to use various filters to correct for flicker There are also other filters that let you modify the image You can switch back and forth between the filter displays until you save the image For details see Use the Image Filters on page 365 Chapter 6 Frame Grab 363 TitleOne User Guide Grab a Series of Images To quickly grab multiple frames e In Frame Grab use the CTRL G shortcut key to grab video frames Note Pressing CTRL G does not update the Frame Grab window For more information see Save a Grab Directly to Disk on page 371 Crop an Image Some frame buffers leave a ragged edge on the top and bottom of each image It may look like the grab starts half way across a scan line Normally this rough area is well outside the safe title area but you can use the cropping features to remove part of the image Frame Grab always centers crops To crop an image e Adjust the value in the Crop field Crop 0 A white border in the Grab window marks the crop boundary When you save the image Frame Grab saves only the image information inside the marker Cropping the image decreases the size of your image file Because you are cropping 4 3 or 16 9 images depending on your video input you can smoothly scale the images up to full screen again You may notice that the image Quality is degraded if you
559. the Aspect field on the Brush tab The default value for the Aspect field on the Brush tab is set to the current video aspect Any brush strokes you make with the default aspect settings are corrected for output For example if you are working in NTSC the default aspect is 1 111 If you view images created in Paint at this aspect ratio using another application that does not use variable aspect ratio views any circular brush strokes or objects appear elliptical See Understand Video Color on page 502 for details Work with Layers In Paint images are made up of layers Each layer overlaps the one behind it allowing you to create complex images by overlapping graphic elements on different layers You can add duplicate delete rearrange and merge layers but you can only work on one layer at a time This ensures that other layers are not affected by changes you make on a single layer Each layer has four channels the red green blue and alpha channels View a Layer Name a Layer Change Layer Opacity Create a New Layer Duplicate a Layer View Brush Color Select Transform Layers Filter SEI H KR gd z e Figure 8 34 Layers Tab y a ke 4 7 3 3 H gt Te a ba L ete fr E reng 101 wer 100 Opacity Enis Opacity fir You can only work on one layer at a time The layer with the Layer Select Toggle on is always the active layer To switch to another layer click on the Layer
560. the Input Output button to set your broadcast standard High Definition or Standard Definition Click the Reference In Mixer button to set the genlock source mixer mode and keying settings for the video card Click the Audio button to set your audio input mixer and output settings Click the Test Pattern button to select and output a test pattern To save the current settings click the Saved Configuration button Enter a name for the configuration in the Save Configuration As field Click the Save button To open a saved configuration click the Saved Configuration button Select a configuration from the Current Configuration list Click the Load button can create save and switch between different video card configurations Select a video card in the Detected Video Cards list Use the buttons below the Video Card Details section to configure the video card e General Details view information about your Inscriber and InfoCaster applications and the current signal status e Input Output set your broadcast standard High Definition or Standard Definition e Reference In Mixer set the genlock source mixer mode and keying settings for the video card e Audio set your audio input mixer and output settings e Test Pattern select and output a test pattern Click the Saved Configuration button Chapter 1 Overview 31 TitleOne User Manual 32 View System Details Chapter 1 Overview TitleOne User Manu
561. the Size and Aspect Ratio controls to change the height and width of your text e To change both the height and width of your selected text enter a new value in the Size field e To change only the width of your selected text enter a new value in the Aspect Ratio field Higher values make your text wider and smaller values make your text narrower When text expands beyond the current height or width of a text object the object formats its text depending on the constraints in its text object properties Table 3 8 Default Text Object Behavior when Resizing Text Text Object Type Behavior Text Field The size of Text Field objects is not constrained Objects become larger or smaller to fit the size of the text inside Chapter 3 CG Table 3 8 Default Text Object Behavior when Resizing Text Text Object Type Behavior Text Constrained Field The width and height of Text Constrained Field objects are constrained If the text becomes too tall to fit inside the object the text grows wider as its size increases If the text becomes too wide to fit inside the object the text grows taller You are unable to increase the size or aspect ratio of text that completely fills a Text Constrained Field Paragraph Field The size of Paragraph Field objects is not constrained Objects become larger or smaller to fit the text inside Fixed Width Paragraph The width of Fixed Width Paragraph Field Field objects is constrained but the height is
562. the lower right side of the button To access the additional tools click and hold the mouse over the desired tool button See Work with Paint Tools on page 448 for details aaa 56868 ty yy ZA 2 E oy a ASAS YT T Figure 8 3 Paint Tools Palette Chapter 8 Paint 437 TitleOne User Manual Paint Palette Tools Table 8 2 Paint Palette Tools General Tools Color Picker NN Transformation Tools hun TI Selection Tools de Selection Move Brush Selection EN Wand EN Luminance Wand NN SN r Rectangular Selection EM Column Selection Elliptical Selection ES Scan Line Selection Lasso Linear Lasso ES 438 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Table 8 2 Paint Palette Tools Color Tools by Tolerance Fill E Linear Gradient pg Luminance Fill o Radial Gradient Alpha Tools a Alpha Add Alpha Luminance Fill s i Alpha Subtract Alpha Tolerance Fill ad Alpha Memory Alpha Linear Gradient rf Alpha Fil Alpha Radial Gradient Image Editing Tools Clone Fill ES Luminance Add Chapter 8 Paint 439 TitleOne User Manual Table 8 2 Paint Palette Tools A A A Dodge Texture D Active Channels You can select which image channels red green blue or alpha you want to work on When you first launch paint all channels are selected See Work with Channels on page 495 for details Active Channels ooog Figure 8 4 Active Channels Status Bar The status ba
563. the object The media appears at the beginning of the first line of text with the blinking text cursor after it Figure 3 5 Insert a Logo into a Text Object To quickly move the media to another location in your text object Hold the SHIFT key and press the LEFT ARROW Your media is selected Press CTRL X to cut the media Move your text cursor to where you want to insert the media Press CTRL V to paste the media The media remains in the Windows clipboard so you can continue to paste the media into other text objects if necessary The Character Map helps you copy and paste special characters into your text objects It is also a reference for the keystroke codes that reproduce special characters on your keyboard s number pad Chapter3 CG 109 TitleOne User Guide 110 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Choose Tools gt Character Map to open the Character Map window The window displays all of the characters available for your current font BE Character Map Ja fx Font PET DEEL easy RER EE eee Tafe A eltelt mee oo ee REITER REEGELEN eapite a Eelst orereta 242000 DR Advanced view U 00E5 Latin Small Letter With Ring Above Keystroke Alt 4O229 Figure 3 6 Character Map Window Single click on a character to see a larger image of it The Keystroke information displayed in the window s status bar tells you how to enter that character directly with the keyboard s numeric keypad For instan
564. the tool you want to use 2 Click the keyframe you want to change and drag to adjust the keyframe 3 Hold down the I 2 or 3 keys while dragging to constrain the change to a particular axis e Press I while dragging to constrain the X axis e Press 2 while dragging to constrain the Y axis e Press 3 while dragging to constrain the Z axis 258 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Animation Settings When your CG layout is complete and you are ready to create motion paths you need to define your layout as an animation and then switch to Animation Editor You also need to decide how Animation Editor must deal with each object and each object in your layout Transition Settings Once you create the text and graphic objects in CG they are sent to Animation Editor with all formatting and style information intact Before switching to Animation Editor you need to decide whether you want to animate objects and characters individually or as a group To select animation options for each object in your layout I Click the Effect Settings button on the toolbar to open the Transition Settings dialog EI 2 Select either Export as a single group object or Send as individual object Transition Settings Animation To apply complex animations the objects will need to be exported Set properties to control animations Determine how to handle objects CO Export as a single grouped object 4 Send as individual objects 0 Treat text
565. their default names Use tags with News Edit to quickly modify the content of tagged objects See Use Tags on page 206 The objects in the Layout Tree View are arranged by z order allowing you to quickly see which objects are ahead of other objects Open the Layout Select Tools gt Layout Tree View to open the Layout Tree View window The Tree View objects in the layout are displayed in the Layout Tree View list On your output objects that are higher in the list are displayed in front of objects that are lower in the list am Layout Tree View FON ES TU test 11 Object ER ine 4 Mi Line 3 Me Line 2 g Line 1 Locked IG Panel Graphic Arc Objects IG Panel Graphic Line 4 IG Panel Graphic Line 3 IG Panel Graphic Line 2 IG Panel Graphic Line 1 Back gt IG Panel Graphic Main Panel Object Layer Buttons Delete Button Figure 3 52 The Layout Tree View 194 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Manage Objects The names of the objects are displayed in the list If you haven t given the objects a name or assigned News Tags to them the objects have a default name Each object has an object type icon Table 3 24 Object Type Icons Icon Description Regular text objects without News Edit tags Graphic objects G Text Objects with News Edit tags assigned to them Click the Menu in the Layout Tree View window to change the size of the object type icons Select Menu gt Large Icons to
566. time All filters are applied at a specific keyframe initiating a change from one keyframe to the next Filters include Transparency Crop Mosaic Luminance and Tint All filters are located on the Filter tab Figure 4 119 Filter Tab Motion Filter When applying filters to a keyframe each Right Click Menu control and tool button on the palette contains a right click menu The right click Emet menu lets you reset the field values and control how the behavior is applied to the keyframes Reset Apply to all keptrames Apply to all Forward Apply to all Previous e Apply to all keyframes e Apply to all Forward adjusts all keyframes after and including the current one to the end of the path e Apply to all Previous adjusts all keyframes up to and including the current one in the path Transparency Transparency changes the alpha value of an object over time so you can fade an object in or out between keyframes The value you set is a percentage of complete Transparency transparency the lower the value the more opaque the higher the value the more transparent If you have three keyframes and you set the transparency value for the first keyframe to 100 the second keyframe to 50 and the third keyframe to 0 the object appears to gradually fade in over time Transparency values range from 0 to 100 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual 295 Crop Mosaic and Blur Tin
567. ting the video transparent areas Layouts are made up of layout objects which you customize and position within the CG workspace Right Click Menus Right click the CG workspace to view contextual right click menus These menus contain useful options for configuring the workspace If you right click a layout object the menu displays options for working with that particular object Cut Copy Paste Layout objects can be cut copied and pasted within the Cut Paste CG workspace Use the following methods to cut copy and paste objects that are selected in the layout d E e Click the Cut Copy and Paste buttons in the Main i Toolbar Copy e Select Edit gt Cut Edit gt Copy or Edit gt Paste e Use the standard shortcut keys CTRL X CTRL C and CTRL V Objects are pasted at the center of the CG workspace Undo Redo CG contains unlimited Undo Redo steps to help you correct Undo mistakes Use the following methods to undo and redo your d actions L CO e Click the Undo and Redo buttons in the Main Toolbar Redo e Select Edit gt Undo or Edit gt Redo The Tools Palette e Right click the CG workspace and select Undo or Redo e Use the standard shortcut keys CTRL Z and CTRL Y The Tools palette contains tools for 7 SE adding text and graphic objects to your cP eege layout Vertical Paragraph Field Some of the buttons in the palette contain J e Fixed Width Paragraph multiple tools If the tool you a
568. tinue adding the column entries in each new line using the TAB key to move to the next column IO Link the text file database to the layout either directly or through the ODBC system list See Link Directly to a Text File on page 219 and Add a Text File to System List on page 215 Chapter 3 CG 213 TitleOne User Guide Add Database to System List 214 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Once a database has been created add it to the ODBC system list so that CG can read the database content Add a Database to System List To add an Access or Excel database to the system list In Windows open the Data Sources ODBC option Windows XP view Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Data Sources ODBC Windows Classic view Start gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Data Sources ODBC 2 Select the User DSN tab or the System DSN tab The User DSN tab registers the database for the current logged on user If somebody else logs on to the computer the database is unavailable The System DSN tab registers the database in a global location on the computer and is visible for any logged on user 3 Click the Add button to open the Create New Data Source dialog 4 Select the driver from the list for your database If you are connecting to an Access database select Microsoft Access Driver mdb If you are connecting to an Excel spreadsheet select Microsoft Excel Driver x
569. tion size and lighting angles Perspective can be applied to an object in Paint by using the Freeform tool or Depth fields on the Transform tab PGM Button A Program Preview palette button that sets automatic online updates for the current Program channel Photoshop Filters Paint Filters associated with Adobe Photoshop These filters can be used in Paint along with standard Inscriber filters See also Filters and Third Party Filters Pickle Device See GPI Trigger Pixel A single sample of picture information Pixel is short for picture cell Pixel Shape The shape of a pixel as determined by its proportion of length to width Pixel shape differs Glossary TitleOne User Guide between computer and video output In computer or print media pixels are square In video and television media pixels are slightly rectangular Pixelize Filter Paint A distortion filter that replaces groups of pixels in an image with the average color values of the pixels in each group Playlist The side palette in TitleOne that displays the layouts in your current project The playlist is available in all TitleOne modules See also Sequencer Playlist Pluge Test Part of the SMPTE video test pattern generally used when calibrating your output monitor and your frame buffer Plug In Filters See Third Party Filters Port Object CG Displays layers of data created in associated RTX applications Port obje
570. tion enabled on your system before you can add video clips to layouts or the Media Library Add an Active Texture Treatment to an Object Add a video clip to an object element to apply a moving image to text and graphic objects Active Textures are commonly looped video clips used to add texture and motion to several layout objects To apply an Active Texture to an object using the Media Library Select the Pointer tool in the Tools palette Select the object you want to edit ha In the Media tab of the CG Libraries palette grab the media box containing the video clip and drag it to the object 4 Drop the Active Texture in the object The Active Texture is applied to all the elements in the object See Active Texture Treatment on page 164 for information about setting Active Texture alignment transparency and playback options Feature Note You must have the Clip Option enabled on your system before you can add Active Textures to layouts or the Media Library Insert Media into Text Objects Video clips and image files can be inserted into text objects Inserted media adopts the style and size of the object text and they stay within the text as the object is moved To insert media into a text object using the Media Library Select the Selection tool in the Tools palette ha 2 Select the text object you want to insert the media into A blinking text cursor appears inside the object 3 Within the Media Libr
571. tion from the Current Configuration list Click the Load button You can view which Inscriber applications are installed on your system which applications are currently running and the status of the selected video card and reference signals Select a video card in the Detected Video Cards list The Detected Video Cards list displays the status of the reference signal e Green Signal is genlocked to the source e Yellow Signal is present e N A gray Signal is not available 2 Click the General Details button e The Inscriber applications that are currently running are listed in the Running Applications window e The Signal Status window displays the status of video input bypass relays and the output signal for both fill and key channels Configure Input Output You can select your broadcast standard High Definition or Standard Definition and set whether the card will be used for input and output or for output only I Select a video card in the Detected Video Cards list 2 Click the Input Output button Inscriber XD 200 Control Panel Use the Inscriber XD 200 control panel to configure your video card Detected Yideo Cards This list contains all video cards detected and displays their status Select card in table below to work with its settings card Card Model Serial Number Input 1 Input2 Refln Timecode Bypass RefIn Sync gt 1 inscriber D 200 4014290 Ga Inn Gua Gua J o 501 Input 1 2 f
572. tion outline select File gt Import Export gt Export Selection You can export the selection in a variety of file formats To import a selection select File gt Import Export gt Import Selection This imports the selection or image outline not the selection or image contents To export the selection contents select File gt Import Export gt Export Selection Contents When you export the selection contents Paint crops the image to the selection and alphas out all unselected pixels Make sure you save the image as an ipt format to maintain the alpha channel Ifyou do not the area around the selection appears black instead of transparent when you import the selection To import the selection contents select File gt Import Export gt Import Image as Transformation If you select File gt Import Export gt Import Selection you will import only the selection outline Chapter 8 Paint Modify Selections Selections can be powerful tools and you can create modify and use them in numerous ways with the options on the Select tab Creation Options When making a selection you can specify whether you want to make a single selection add to an existing selection subtract from an existing selection or intersect a new selection with an existing selection You can also specify that you only want to move the current selection These options are available in the Selection Tools section of the Select tab Table 8 12 Creation Opti
573. tional TitleOne Features rrrrrnrnrnrnnnnrnrnnnnrvrnnnnrnrnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnsnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnennnnnssennnnn 4 Work with Files in TitleOne 0 oooooococcorora rennene 6 Make Transterting Layouts EE 6 Transfer Your Central Folder to a New System rrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnrnvrnnnrenrnnnrnnnnesennnnesennnnnsen 7 SE le 6 BOS to at 7 Save EE 7 e EEE EE EE 8 Bertier 8 TitleOne Workspace ococococo eee 9 How Do I Use the Main Toolbar AA 9 How Do USE EPA rs 12 How Do Use the Program Preview Palette rrrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrrvrnnnrrrnrnnnsennarsrnnnsnsnnnnsrsnnnnsnennnnn 13 Preview Play Single Layouts ccccccssseeccssseccceseecceeseeeceeueeecsueeceseeeeeesseeeessessessueeeesseeeessaass 13 Clear the Preview Program Channel cccccccseecceceeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeeseaueeesaaeeeeeaaes 14 D al Channel Systems spas 14 How Do I Use the Attributes Palette oooonccccconccnconoccnconoconononnoncnnanonononcnnnonaronnnnrononnnncnnnnnos 15 How Do I Use the Scrapbook rrarrrrannrnnannornnnrnnannnnnnnrnnansnnnnnrnnansennunsnnanaennansnnnnnennansnnnnnennannnnnnnee 15 STN IM e 15 Save the Scrapbook Contents cccooccccccccncoccnccocnccoonnncncnononnnnnnnnnnonnnnonnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnrnnnnnnnenannnnnnnns 17 Save Individual Scrapbook E 17 Set Up Your System for TitleOne Operation 18 ETP NNN peer 18 NVS 18 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide
574. tions in your frame buffer configuration software Some frame buffers fail to switch to video passthrough if you select the wrong input type in the configuration software Scrambled Signal Check that the horizontal and vertical frame buffer resolutions match the input signal resolution Check these values on the General Preferences tab No Sync Check your sync input source and the sync options in the frame buffer configuration software Multiple Board When you have more than one frame buffer installed you can perform a Systems grab from any frame buffer board To select a board e Use the Program palette For information on the Program Preview palette see How Do I Use the Program Preview Palette on page 13 e Click a channel button in the Attributes palette E 2 3 4 To limit grab capability to one board only edit Inscribe ini and change the Chapter 6 Frame Grab 369 TitleOne User Guide 370 Initialize Board Save an Image Chapter 6 Frame Grab TitleOne User Guide FrameGrabOnBoards entry in the Configuration section By default this entry is set to 0 which enables frame grabs from any board To limit grabs to one particular board change this value to I 2 or 3 to match the board to grab from For example to limit grabs to board 2 set FrameGrabOn Boards to 2 Configuration FrameGrabOnBoards 2 By default Frame Grab does not initialize the current board to Live when you switch to the Frame Gra
575. tions on page 469 for details on modifying your selections Expand EE Grow 1 E Contract fi Similar 1 Feather 1 S smooth i 5 FA Image Layer Border 1 S Select Fully All None visible Invisible Invert Crop Select Rectangle vw LS 42 gt Hide Selection gogls pions I ectio acti Figure 8 19 Select Tab Selection Tools Paint has ten Selection tools all located on the Tools palette The Selection tools offer a variety of ways of making selections You can make a simple selection with only one tool or you can refine and create complex selections by using a variety of tools and options See Modify Selections on page 469 for details on creating complex selections Chapter 8 Paint 465 TitleOne User Manual 466 Chapter 8 Paint TitleOne User Manual Each selection tool creates a differently shaped selection The tools are described in Table 8 11 Selection Tools Table 8 11 Selection Tools Tool E ie L 1 2 Selection Move Luminance Wand e Brush Selection Rectangular e Selection Elliptical Selection Scan Line o Selection Column Selection Lasso o Linear Lasso e Description Moves the current selection outline Selects areas of similar color The Wand Tolerance field on the Select tab specifies how similar colors have to be to for inclusion in the selection Selects areas of similar luminance
576. tions for previewing an animation on the computer screen These options include previewing the whole animation or only from the current frame and also include controls to jump to a specific frame in a path Previous Next Time Synched Keyframe Keyframe to Keyframe Play Md d 7 IHN a gt f ji f 1 j 1 Rewind Previous Time Next Forward Play in Play from to Start Frame Slider Frame to End Reverse Current Frame Frame Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Figure 4 96 Preview Toolbar Controls The Time Slider The Time Slider gives you a visual representation of where you are at any point in time in your animation You can select any frame in the animation by dragging the time slider to the desired location When you have more than two keyframes in your animation the location in time of each keyframe is indicated by small vertical marks along the bottom of the Time Slider Play Controls Many of the preview toolbar controls do not actually run through an animation path they jump the preview to a particular frame so you can see exactly what each path looks like at that frame Only three of the controls run a preview Play Play Reverse and Play from Current Frame Table 4 33 Play Controls Functions Button Function Play Plays the entire animation starting at the first keyframe and moves forward in time to the last keyframe and then La resets back to the beginning Play in Reverse Plays the entire animat
577. tleOne User Guide 3 Switch to the Attributes tab Logo Details of the Attributes palette Set the appearance of logo Preview Mame Al Eur Transparency 2 o wo Logo Constraints Apply the following logo constraint AE 4 In the Logo Details section of the tab click the Add button and select the image file you want to use for your EE logo The image is applied to your logo object Figure 3 22 Add a Logo Object To add a logo object from the Media Library Libraries Leem Styles Media I Switch to the Media tab of the CG Libraries palette R If the logo you want to use is not already stored in one of the library boxes see The Media Library on page 177 to learn how to add media to the Media Library i v 2 Grab the media box containing your logo and drag it to the CG workspace 3 Drop the logo in the CG workspace The logo object is added to your layout de MH Menur Clicking a library box in the Media Library adds a full sized logo object to your layout Logo objects allow you to add edge depth and shadow embellishments which follow a logo s alpha information Many software packages let you create an alpha channel for your images If your logo contains an alpha channel CG reads this information and applies it to the logo object Logo Mix Change Logo Image Constrain a Logo allowing you to add edges depths and shadows wh
578. tleOne User Manual Figure 4 113 Time Tab In the FX workspace time is captured allowing you to see every moment in time for the animation For preview purposes the current point in time for each path is outlined in green in the FX workspace and you can scroll through time using the Time slider on the Preview toolbar 2 BMK d Db Hm Pro Current Frame Time Slider Figure 4 114 Preview Toolbar Time Slider To adjust the length of an animation path simply add or subtract frames across the entire path or between keyframes The are a number of ways to change the length of a path e Enter a frame value in the Path Start Frame or Path End Frame fields e Enter a precise number of frames in the Path Duration field Drag the right edge of the Track Slider to the right or the left edge to the left to increase the length of the path Drag the right edge of the Track Slider to the left or the left edge to the right to decrease the length of the path The numbers in the Path Duration and Total Animation Duration frame fields change as you adjust the length of the path Shift the Path in Time Keyframe Markers You can shift a path in time by entering a new start time in the Path Start Frame field and a new end time the Path End Frame field In order to maintain the current length of the path you must change both the start and end times by the same number of frames Instead of shifting the animation path by entering new sta
579. to a different output channel Linked events are taken to air simultaneously 29 STRATA I Assigns the event to Strata layer I SHIFT Clears the event on Strata layer I STRATA I 30 STRATA 2 Assigns the event to Strata layer 2 SHIFT Clears the event on Strata layer 2 STRATA 2 H STRATA 3 Assigns the event to Strata layer 3 SHIFT Clears the event on Strata layer 3 STRATA 3 32 STRATA 4 Assigns the event to Strata layer 4 SHIFT Clears the event on Strata layer 4 STRATA 4 Chapter 9 Resources 535 TitleOne User Guide Clear Number 33 34 37 38 3D FlyBy Auto Text and Number Animation 35 36 39 536 Chapter 9 Resources TitleOne User Guide Key CLEAR BOTH CLEAR ALL CLEAR CLEAR 2 Key IMPORT 3D AUTO TEXT SHIFT AUTO TEXT CTRL ALT AUTO TEXT VIA TRANS I SHIFT VIA TRANS I Function Clears all output channels both video boards Clears all output channels and the Scratch vii layout The default template loads into Scratch vii See Set Default Template on page 72 Clears output channel I Clears output channel 2 Function Imports a 3D animation The Import 3D Animation dialog opens to allow you to select files COLLADA dae file and animation source frames 3D FlyBy is not supported in TitleOne Inserts specified Auto Text string in text field For more information see Insert a Text String from the Auto Text File on page 70 O
580. to make sure the Position tool is selected Select the tool from the Tools palette or the Placement tab The Position tool is selected when the cursor contains the arrow and crosshairs as in the graphic to the right Select the Keyframe The easiest way select a keyframe is to click the keyframe you want to move However if you are working with multiple keyframes that overlap you may have a hard time determining whether you have selected the right keyframe To select the keyframe without clicking it directly Select the path name from the drop down menu located to the left of the Attributes Palette 2 Enter the keyframe number in the Key field or use the left right arrows to select the key number Evening Ne ze Ah Frame 0047 Pause 0000 amp 0031 431 N 0029 E Figure 4 88 Keyframe Selection 264 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Animation Editor indicates the number of frames between the previous and current keyframe and the number of frames between the current and next keyframe to help you specify precise frames on the timeline Drag and Drop Positioning The easiest way to move a keyframe is to click and drag it to a new location on the screen Only keyframes within the safe title area are included in the render but you can place keyframes outside this area to create a fly in or fly out effect Absolute Positioning If you need absolute positioning to line up ke
581. to pause the timer Click Play to resume the timer Click Stop to stop the timer from counting and to reset the timer to the first frame Chapter 2 Output 83 TitleOne User Guide 84 Strata Configuration Utility Using the Strata Configuration Utility option you can set up virtual channels which appear as separate output channels in TitleOne You assign the virtual channels to layers on your output This enables real time compositing of up to five virtual channels into a single physical channel Use Strata to schedule and play events independently on separate layers at the same time Feature Note The Strata Configuration Utility is a purchase option in TitleOne Output Using Strata Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide Strata is a utility that controls the output and display of your Inscriber applications Using Strata you can easily assign any of G Scribe G Store TitleOne Automation Interface and Overlay to layers on one or two channels Events can be scheduled and played independently on separate layers without interfering with each other Strata automatically detects your Strata enabled applications and the number of boards on your system When Strata is installed on your system you can assign your applications to virtual output channels and assign virtual channels to layers on your video board output Open the Strata Utility by double clicking the Strata icon on your desktop The utility will look differ
582. to select the second color for the edge The second color is applied to the perimeter of the edge closest to both the face and the outside of the edge c Use the first Color slider to set how far from the inside perimeter of the edge that the color gradient begins d Use the second Color slider to set how far from the outside perimeter of the edge that the color gradient ends 2 Enter values in the Transparency fields to set the transparencies of the first and second colors 3 Use the Bevel control to set the thickness of the tube Lower values make the tube thicker and higher values make the tube thinner 168 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide The Color Palette The Color Palette gives Quick access to pre defined colors You can customize the palette by adding new colors and you can save and load your customized palettes The colors you add to Mm the Color Palette are automatically saved with your layouts Open the Color Palette by clicking on a color drop down list Select a Palette The Color Palette stores all of the Color pre defined and custom colors for the 1 Defaut current layout You can quickly apply these E RRR colors to CG elements Tite tt _ ett The Color Palette opens when you click a Ho color drop down list The palette displays lol TITT color chips for all the predefined and custom E El colors in the layout T Eet E Select one of the color chips to apply the color to the selected CG element
583. to show a marker or guideline 3 Clear a menu option to hide a marker or guideline You can also show hide and modify layout markers by right clicking on the CG workspace and selecting an option from the right click menu Guides Horizontal and vertical guides help you position your layout objects Select the Display Options gt Show All Guides option to display the guides in the CG workspace To add a horizontal guide to your layout select the Horizontal Horizontal Guide tool in the Tools palette and click the CG Guide workspace A horizontal guide is created To add a vertical guide select the Vertical Guide tool and K ry click the CG workspace If the Snap to Guides option is checked in the Display Ehre uide Options menu objects in your layout snap to the horizontal and vertical guides when the objects are moved You can move a guide by selecting it with the Pointer or Selection tool and dragging it to another location To delete a guide select it and press the DELETE key Screen Grid The screen grid allows you to snap objects to the grid for easier alignment Select the Display Options gt Screen Grid option to display the grid in the CG workspace The grid does not appear on your layout output To change the color size and transparency of the screen grid select Display Options gt Edit Screen Grid The Screen Grid Editor Color sets the size and appearance of the we S grid Click the Reset button to
584. ts Send To Back CTRL B Lock Unlock CTRL SHIFT P selected object s position Keyframes Chapter 9 Resources 525 TitleOne User Guide 526 Chapter 9 Resources TitleOne User Guide Cut keyframe CTRL X Insert keyframe SHIFT INSERT before Copy keyframe CTRL C Insert keyframe at ALT INSERT or current frame CTRL ALT E Paste keyframe CTRL V Paste keyframe at CTRL ALT V current frame Delete keyframe DELETE Paste keyframe CTRL SHIFT V attributes Insert keyframe at INSERT or Select first HOME default CTRL E keyframe in path Insert keyframe CTRL INSERT Select last END after keyframe in path Select next CTRL W Select previous CTRL Q keyframe keyframe Select all CTRL A Adjust keyframe ARROW keys keyframes using current tool Constrain tool to I click and drag Constrain tool to 3 click and drag X axis Z axis Constrain tool to 2 click and drag Y axis Layout Redraw FX CTRL D Preview current CTRL F workspace frame Play wireframe CTRL H preview of animation in FX workspace Animation Paths Select first path CTRL HOME Select next path CTRL PAGE DOWN Sequencer FrameGrab Media Store Select last path CTRL END CTRL PAGE UP path Action Shortcut Shortcut Insert group CTRL T Select all events CTRL A header Remove group CTRL U Select multiple Hold CTRL or header events SHIFT and click to select Action Shortcut Grab video frame CTRL G Feature Note Media Stor
585. tton in the CG Editor toolbar to move selected objects by a certain number of pixels in either a horizontal or vertical direction p E a Enter the number of pixels to nudge by i in the Pixel Shift field b Nudge the selected objects using the Nudge button in the CG Editor toolbar e The Nudge button displays the last nudge direction you used Click the Nudge button to nudge the selected objects in that direction e To nudge in a different direction click the arrow beside the Nudge button and click the Nudge Left Nudge Right Nudge Up or Nudge Down button in the flyout menu Use the ARROW keys to move selected objects either horizontally or vertically e Press the ARROW keys to move the objects one pixel at a time e Hold the SHIFT key while pressing the ARROW keys to move the objects 10 pixels at a time Chapter3 CG 185 TitleOne User Guide 186 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide e Hold the CTRL key while pressing the ARROW keys to move the objects by the number of pixels specified in the CG Editor toolbar s Pixel Shift field Align Objects Use the Align menu or the Attributes tab to quickly align objects to the safe title area or to each other Bez Murphy Wiornrthor of 5 15 Align center to object Align left to safe title area Figure 3 46 Align Objects To align objects in a layout Select the objects you want to align in the CG workspace 2 Access the alignment controls with one of the follow
586. u can apply a template to individual characters in a word or line of text To apply a template to individual characters In CG Editor select the Treat Text as Individual Characters radio button on the Transition Settings dialog 2 Switch to Animation Editor 3 Select any single character within a word or text line 4 Click the Select Word Line button to choose the entire word or text line kr ol He Select Wal Le All Objects E Start 0 Length 0 PA Count Stagger O Select Word Line Figure 4 99 Object Path Selection 5 Click Select Word Line again while on the same single character to apply a template only to that individual character Click Apply Click the Play button on the Preview toolbar to view the results Apply to All Objects You can apply template effects to all objects in the layout To apply a template to all objects In CG Editor select the Treat Text as Lines radio button on the Transition Settings dialog 2 Switch to Animation Editor 274 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Stagger a Template 3 Click on the FX workspace 4 Click the Select All Objects button 5 Click Apply 6 Click the Play button on the Preview toolbar to view the results To switch between applying templates to either individual characters or all objects you must adjust the export settings in the Transition Settings dialog in CG Editor Apply to Multiple Paths In Animation Editor
587. u need to select the combination of options that determine how and where along the path the template is applied as well as the total length and start frame for the path Template options must be set when applying a template You need to define the Start frame and length of the resulting path The following subtopics describe the Overwrite Append Insert and Timing options O overwrite Start o d S TT Length sl fel Relative O Absolute Count 21 wall Reverse Stagger 1 Gei Beginning One Figure 4 100 Template Options Overwrite Overwrite deletes all information including keyframes in the selected path except the object itself and applies the template instead Overwrite behavior depends on whether you select the Relative or Absolute option These options determine where the template is inserted in the selected path If you select Relative the template attributes are applied and the current keyframe position stays the same Relative maintains the position of the selected keyframe and applies the template relative to this starting position With this option you can insert the template at the beginning or end of the selected keyframe If you select Absolute all the preset keyframe attributes from the template are used Absolute ignores the size and position of the current keyframes in the original path and forces the keyframes into the preset template attributes Append The Append option adds the template effec
588. umber pad RapidFire Read F4 Clear Output Take Write Tmpl F3 Transfer Auto Text Config Go To Layout MEN GEN menuv Position Sie S v Menu e Position X Ready Docked RapidFire Dialog Undocked RapidFire Dialog Figure 2 14 RapidFire Dialog Docked and Undocked By default the RapidFire dialog is docked below the playlist If you enter a number using the number pad the number is displayed in the text field in the RapidFire dialog To undock the RapidFire dialog Drag the RapidFire dialog from its default location For example drag the dialog onto the workspace The undocked RapidFire dialog displays on top of the TitleOne window You can drag the RapidFire dialog anywhere on your screen To dock the RapidFire dialog Drag the RapidFire dialog to the playlist Chapter 2 Output 61 TitleOne User Guide 62 Use RapidFire Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide Hide the RapidFire Dialog To hide the RapidFire dialog Click the RapidFire dialog text field 2 Press the ESCAPE key Note Hiding the dialog does not disable RapidFire on the Tools menu You can access RapidFire functionality using the following methods e Keyboard You can operate RapidFire with keyboard commands See RapidFire on page 529 and RapidFire Keyboard on page 532 For a complete list of TitleOne shortcut keys see Shortcut Keys on page 521 e RapidFire dial
589. unning the status light is red Displays all of the items in Overlay on the program channel Hides all of the items on the program channel Resets all of the items on the program channel to the first frame after you click Take Each item resets to the first frame and resumes playback You can easily output items in Overlay using the output options This topic describes the output options for all items except timers For information on playing timers see Output Timers on page 82 Click on the numbered button beside the item to show or hide the item during output Chapter 2 Output 81 TitleOne User Guide 82 Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide e A white number marks items hidden during output e A yellow number marks items displayed during output A flashing indicator beside the number indicates the item s show hide state has changed The indicator stops flashing the next time you take the item Click the Take button The Take button applies any changes to the show hide state e If you set an item to display in step one clicking Take displays the item on the program channel e If you set an item to hide in step one clicking Take hides the item on the program channel The status indicators change when you take an item If the item is running the status light turns green If the item is not running the status light is red To quickly display all the items on the program channel click the All On butt
590. up Background Color Group 5 Background Color Group 6 Background Color Kal G a II 1 mn Gi a a A seen Default to Group Headers On Line Gutput Director Default to Non Keved Cuts D allOnlineFiles Default Trigger Broer SPI Port Coni OK Cancel Figure 5 38 Change the On Line Output Directory After you move online you can access the options on the Run tab The Number and Label option allow you to quickly select events in the Sequencer playlist Note You must be online CTRL SHIFT 0 to access the Run tab Select Events by Number After you enter the event number the event is selected in the global playlist and the Sequencer playlist Switch to the Run tab Click the Number button Enter the event number h Un ND Press ENTER Sequencer selects the event Select Events by Label After you enter the event name the event is selected in the global playlist and the Sequencer playlist Switch to the Run tab Click the Label button Enter the event name h Un Nm Press ENTER Sequencer selects the event Preview an Event You can use the Preview button on the Run tab to preview the selected event Select the event you want to preview 2 Switch to the Run tab If you need to press CTRL SHIFT O to move online 3 Click the Preview button The event preview displays in the Preview palette and on your preview monitor Event Editor Run Effect Settings Audio Mask Ren
591. ure 4 94 Snapshot of Current Object Snapshot of All Objects provides a fully rendered bitmap of the current frame for all paths in your animation Snapshot of Current Object and Snapshot of All Objects are radio buttons so you can only select one display option at a time As with Snapshot of Current Object viewing the path with this option selected slows down the display Evening News Be Tonight at 1 Figure 4 95 Snapshot of All Objects Chapter 4 Animation 269 TitleOne User Manual 210 Preview Motion Paths It is important to preview your animation even when you make a minor change When one keyframe is changed it can affect the entire spline timing and movement of the path as well as the interaction of objects On the Computer Screen Preview Toolbar Current The term preview refers to viewing the animation in Animation Editor on the computer screen not on your frame buffer A preview produces only a wireframe outline of the path so you are not able to see exactly what text and objects look like at each frame However the preview provides accurate timing and spline information and does not require rendering so you can view changes quickly and easily You need to render an animation only when you want to do a take To save time just preview the results on your computer screen The Preview toolbar also called the Scrubber is located on the bottom of the FX workspace It provides different op
592. urphv City Hall Victor Atlas Community Center Kim Le Miller Park Pagoda Jade Engeline Reese Middle School Sam Lord Placid Creek jm 3 Figure 3 61 A Tab Delimited Text Source with Column Headings Click Next The next dialog displays the data type contained in each column of the text file If you want to change the data type click a column name and select a new data type from the drop down list Click Next The final dialog displays the text file arranged in a table format Click the Finish button Now the text file will be treated just like a table in Access or Excel Link the table to the CG layout as described in Link Layout to Database on page 218 Create a Tagged CG Layout In CG tags label text objects within a layout The grey labels in the layout are the tags You must add tags to the text objects before you can connect them to database tables To add a tag to a text object Select a text line in the CG layout 2 Click the News Edit button in the CG Editor toolbar News Edit opens if 3 In News Edit enter a tag label in the Tags text box and then click Add The tag is applied to the text line Tags See Use Tags on page 206 to learn more about tags Set Up a Layout with Columns Layouts that display database text in columns are useful when you want to generate a list of database table entries like a list of television shows or a team s win loss record If you follow the row colu
593. used for station identification images corporate logos or product logos They let you add complex images with detailed alpha information in your layouts If the CG graphic tools are not sufficient to allow you to create a graphic layout you can use Paint or a third party program to create a graphic and add it to your layout p EEN Tonight at 9 00 Logos are special graphic objects that can mix the face color with a bitmap image You can scale and position logos anywhere in the layout Any alpha transparency in the logo is maintained allowing you to add edge depth and shadow elements which follow the logo s contour Logos can also be inserted inside text objects using the Selection tool and the Media Library See Insert Media into Text Objects on page 108 for more details Add a Logo Object You can add logo objects to your layout by either drawing the logo object with the Logo tool or by dragging images from the Media Library To add a logo with the Logo tool Select the Logo tool from the Tools palette 2 Click and drag in the CG workspace to place size and orient your logo object e To center your logo where you clicked in the CG workspace hold the ALT key while dragging Otherwise the point you clicked becomes one of the logo s corners e Hold the SHIFT key while dragging to constrain your logo s aspect ratio to I I Chapter 3 CG 137 TitleOne User Guide Add Logo Embellishments 138 Chapter 3 CG Ti
594. uto Text File Use the following instructions to create a text file to use with the Auto Text feature Open a text editor such as Notepad or Wordpad If you purchased the RapidFire Keyboard option press CTRL ALT AUTO TEXT to launch a text editor 2 Create a text file where each line has the following format Number TAB Text Modifier CR For example a text entry looks like 53 Hooking d e Number is any number Each number in the file must be unique e TAB is the tab character e Text is a single line of text e Modifier is one of the text modifiers listed in the following table You can enter text modifiers anywhere in the line of text including the beginning and end e CR is a carriage return Table 2 4 Modifier Descriptions Modifier Description t Enters a tab character Chapter 2 Output 69 TitleOne User Guide Table 2 4 Modifier Descriptions Modifier Description n Enters a carriage return NU Presses the UP ARROW key d Presses the DOWN ARROW key Inserts a backslash character 3 Save the file as a text txt file with the same filename as the associated playlist scribelist file You must save the text file in the same folder as the associated playlist Note If you launched the text editor using the RapidFire Keyboard CTRL ALT AUTO TEXT shortcut key the file is automatically saved correctly Insert a Text String from the Auto Text File To insert a text string fro
595. utton Pa NE ESA EA E MEA REA 0 EE LE Local Browse Figure 7 27 Database Mode Toolbar Set Button Chapter 7 Media Store To display the Browse Set folio files click the Browse Set button on the Media Store toolbar in browse mode Browse Set Button le Bl Scan SAC Source Files nimations e Bronse Figure 7 28 Browse Mode Toolbar Browse Set Button You can refine the search results in the Set or Browse Set folio by searching the media files in one of these folios Chapter 7 Media Store 421 TitleOne User Guide Use Media Files In addition to viewing thumbnail previews of media files in the Media window and previewing files in the Program Preview palette you can also check files set transition effects and trim video clips before using them e Verify that the media files are available for use For more information see Check Media File Reference on page 422 e View the transparency levels of media files For more information see View Media File Transparency on page 423 e Set default transition effects for media files For more information see Set Transition Effects on page 423 e Trim video clips if they are too long or have extra content at the beginning or end For more information see Set Transition Effects on page 423 Media Store provides many ways to quickly use media files such as clicking or dragging thumbnails in the Media window and using the Shot Box palette e Add media
596. value the greater y the softness A value of O means no softness The Softness value is not used by the hard edge brush style or Pencil tool Aspect The Aspect attribute specifies the width of the brush as a factor of the brush width over brush height When used in conjunction with the Angle attribute you can design brushes that create calligraphy effects Z ZZ By default the brush Aspect is corrected for the current video aspect ratio Circular stokes look circular and square strokes look square in Paint and on video See Video Aspect Ratio on page 491 for details Angle The Angle attribute specifies the counter clockwise angle of the brush in degrees 8 Ze 0 to 359 Usually you change this attribute after you have changed the brush Aspect Brush Preview Window Brush Preview Cursor Speed The Speed attribute affects the speed at which Paint calculates your brush stroke This attribute is dependent on the size of the brush The higher the setting the more calculations Paint performs If you want to paint slowly lower Speed to smooth the stroke You can change the selected brush visually in the Brush Preview Window The Brush window provides a preview of the current brush The preview shows certain brush attributes Size Softness Angle and Aspect You can change the size angle and aspect in the Brush window on the Brush tab I LE L co Figure 8 13 Brush Preview Windo
597. ve an object with two keyframes the path between the keyframes is always a straight line If you add a third keyframe to the path Animation Editor creates a bezier curve between the keyframes If the three keyframes on the same X axis the path will be a straight line However if you move the keyframes slightly out of alignment the curve becomes obvious Figure 4 91 Bezier Curve 266 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Display Options Animation Editor offers several different display options to help simplify your workspace These options include Display All Paths Display Text Outlines Snapshot of Current Object and Snapshot of All Objects Display options are all located on the bottom row of the FX palette Default Display By default Animation Editor displays all paths in wireframe view with the current point in time rendered for each path This provides a snapshot of the animation at the current frame in time You can change and combine the display options at any time to suit your needs Table 4 32 Animation Display Options Function Display All Paths Shows an overall picture of how paths in the animation interact Display Text Outlines Shows how text paths in the animation interact ES E Snapshot of Current Shows detail work where you need to see SEI Object a fully rendered snapshot of the selected path s CR Snapshot of All Shows fine detail work where you need to ER Objects see exact
598. vent in the Sequencer Playlist Creating multi page rolls requires both the CG and Sequencer tools Glossary 569 TitleOne User Guide 570 N Native Resolution The number of physical pixels a television or monitor is designed to display For example the native resolution of an SD image is 720x480 and HD has a native resolution of 1920x1080 or 1280x720 News Edit CG A dialog which allows the quick update of layout text with commonly used names places or other text Also allows you to connect text objects to external data sources Noise Filter See Dither Filter Non Keyed Cuts Cut transitions without a key or alpha channel Non Repeating Textures Non repeating textures are good for backgrounds and other large objects since they do not have to be tiled or otherwise duplicated Non Tab Constrained Line See Anchored Text Line NTSC National Television Standards Committee One of several standards developed for television broadcast transmission and reception An NTSC television image has 525 horizontal scan lines per video frame with each frame transmitted at 30 fps frames per second Contrast with PAL Glossary TitleOne User Guide O Object CG Layouts are made up of objects which are customized and positioned within the workspace Layouts can consist of clip graphic logo Port and text objects Offline A state that is suitable for creating and editing layouts in TitleOne If
599. verse All Paths Views Display All Paths Display Text Outlines Snapshot of All Objects Snapshot of Current Chapter 4 Animation 253 TitleOne User Manual Rotate Orientation Ga 254 Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual Right Click Menu You can access the Tools options by positioning the cursor anywhere over the FX workspace and pressing the right mouse button This menu contains the Tools available on the FX palette You can also use this menu to copy cut paste and perform certain keyframe actions A checkmark indicates which tool is currently active Reset Position vw Position Orientation Spins Offset Extend Skew Twist Scale Cut Copy Paste Mew Paste At Paste Replace Insert keyframe Insert At Delete keyframe Reset keyframe Figure 4 80 Animation Right Click Menu Program Preview Palette The Program Preview palette allows you to view contents on the Preview and Program channels The Preview channel is the video channel used to preview video before you send it to the Program channel The Program channel is the video channel used to broadcast or send to tape Animation Concepts The basic idea behind Animation is to change the way text and objects appear over time You start with the still text and graphic objects created in CG Editor then switch to Animation Editor to set up the objects in various stages of change over a particular duration In Animation
600. w Table 8 6 Brush Styles Cursor How to ch Size cursor Change size click and drag in the Brush window Cp Angle cursor Change angle hold the SHIFT key and drag in the Brush window Si Aspect cursor Change Aspect hold the CTRL key and drag in the Brush window The Brush Preview cursor lets you see the effects of the current brush settings on the Paint workspace before you make any ef changes to your image The cursor shows several brush attributes including Size Angle and Shape The brush preview cursor respects selections and layers It is enabled by default To disable this option switch to the View tab and clear the Brush Preview Cursor checkbox Chapter 8 Paint 453 TitleOne User Manual Work with Alpha Tools and Logos Removing background information from around logos or objects is one of the primary reasons for using Paint This task is often referred to as logo clean up Effective and efficient logo clean up calls for proficiency with both the alpha tools and the selection tools See Make Selections on page 465 for details on making selections Understand Alpha The main feature of Paint is its ability to manipulate and paint with alpha Paint is a full fledged 32 bit image editing program that really understands the alpha channel You can paint edit transform and apply filters to the alpha channel completely independent of the color channels Why Add Alpha When an image or area of an image is transpa
601. w on page 194 The objects in a layout can be grouped together to help you maintain the spacing of the text and graphics When an object in a group is moved all the objects within the group are moved as well Click the Group button in the CG Editor toolbar to group Group two or more selected objects If you click the Group button when both a group and an ungrouped object are selected all 7 Ely the selected objects are grouped together When you select one object in a group the entire group is Ungroup surrounded by a boundary but only the object you clicked on is selected The selected object is surrounded with a white boundary while the unselected objects have a blue boundary Wienther nt 8 15 Figure 3 51 Three Grouped Objects with Only One Selected All of the objects in a group move together when one of the objects is moved Changes to object attributes only affect selected objects Click the Ungroup button to break apart the selected object s group If the selected object is part of more than one group only the most recently created group is released Chapter 3 CG 193 TitleOne User Guide The Layout Tree View In large layouts with overlapping objects it is sometimes easiest to edit the layout with a tree view The tree view displays all of the objects in a layout and allows you to select them change their z order lock them duplicate them and delete them You can also assign News Tags to text objects by changing
602. w Delay Status All On All OFF Mrk EN Please choose an ICG File to show on this layer Figure 2 20 Click the Setup Button to View Open Options 6 Click Choose and open the scribe file The file loads in Overlay Click on the numbered button beside the item so it turns yellow Chapter 2 Output 73 TitleOne User Guide 74 Set Up Items in Overlay Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide 8 Click the Take button Overlay displays the layout on the program channel In Overlay you can open your CG items updated tagged text lines add and remove items and save and load sets of items The following topics describe these features in detail Tag Layout Text for Updates In the CG module of your TitleOne product you can label your text objects using tags Once you label a text object with a tag you can change the tagged text in Overlay Tagged text is useful for immediate updates For example if you tag a text area in the layout for displaying a game score you could easily change the score in Overlay before you air the layout To tag text in CG select the text line in your layout 2 Click the News Edit button EOS AG Figure 2 21 News Edit Button 3 In the News Edit dialog TitleOne automatically labels the text with the place holder text To change the label name enter a name for the tag in the Tags field and click Add CON DM The text line in your layout is labeled with the tag name PEN
603. when the TAB key is pressed pressing the TAB key creates a new text object to the right of the existing object Otherwise the text cursor moves to the next tab stop within the text object If there are no tab stops defined the text cursor moves approximately 10 pixels away from the current position Show or Hide Tab Stops You can choose to show or hide the tab stops within your currently selected text object Click the Display Options button in the CG toolbar W zoom ull Sct The Display Options menu opens p N Falsa Display Options ENER Select the Tab Stops option Your tab stops display as vertical yellow lines within any selected text objects Tab Stop Marker To hide the tab stop markers open the Display Options menu and clear the Tab Stops option Add a Tab Stop Add tab stops to your text objects by clicking in the CG Ruler You can also use the Tab Editor dialog for more precise placement of multiple tabs To add a left aligned tab stop with the CG Ruler Select a text object 2 Click the mouse cursor within the CG Ruler to add a left aligned tab stop at that location To add a tab stop with the Tab Editor Click the Modify Tab Stops button on the CG Editor toolbar then select the Modify Tab Stops Sea option The Tab Editor opens Modify Tabs Stops a Vie In the Tab Details section of the dialog select the position and alignment of the tab stop Click the Plus button to add the tab
604. whenever the source point reaches the image edge Figure 8 27 Clone Tile Checkbox The Clone Fill tool lets you copy entire sections of a layer with one click When you set the clone source the Clone Fill tool copies the entire layer or selection and pastes the source onto the current layer For example if you have an active selection and you use ALT click to set the clone source the Clone Fill tool fills the selection with a copy of the entire image sized to fit The CTRL and SHIFT modifier keys and the Tile and Align checkboxes work the same way for the Clone Fill tool as for the Clone tool For example you select an eye and set the selection as the source point using ALT SHIFT click When you click in the layer with the Clone Fill tool the layer is filled with a sized to fit copy of the eye If the Tile option on the Brush tab is enabled the Clone Fill tool tiles the eye throughout the image Work with Filters Inscriber filters extend the functionality of Paint All filters appear in the Plug In Filters list on the Filter tab Paint also supports third party Photoshop plug in filters so many of the filters you use in Photoshop can also be used in Paint See Third Party Filters on page 486 for details on using third party filters la EI Recent Inscriber D I Lu E Plug Ins E T D 5 Y C Include Subfolders Add Select About Opacity 100 E Figure 8 28 Filter Tab Inscriber Filters
605. wing methods e To immediately play the next event press the SPACEBAR The current event is cleared from screen and the next event plays e To clear the screen before playing the next event click the CLR button above the Program palette or press CTRL SHIFT ZENTER Press the SPACEBAR to play the next event The Timed trigger sequentially plays each event for the set duration During output the clock starts at 00 00 00 00 Select the Timed Trigger Use the options on the group header or the Event Editor tab to select the Timed trigger Select the group header 2 Select the trigger using one of the following methods e On the group header right click on the current trigger and select Timed from the right click menu e On the Event Editor tab select Timed from the Trigger Type drop down list Output with a Timed Trigger Once you move the playlist online you can start playback Chapter 5 Sequencer 339 TitleOne User Guide 340 Use the GPI Trigger Chapter 5 Sequencer TitleOne User Guide I To go online press CTRL SHIFT O You are prompted to save your playlist if you have not saved yet Once all the events are rendered and moved online the Run tab becomes available 2 Select the group header containing the events you want to output 3 Switch to the Run tab 4 Click the Run Job button Each event in the group plays seQuentially for the set duration The GPI trigger type allows an operator to manu
606. witch to CG Switch between modules using the buttons on the toolbar or the options on the Tools menu e Click the CG button in the Main toolbar e Select Tools gt Character Gen e Press the F6 key Interface Overview The CG workspace contains the tools for creating your CG layouts as well as the tools for outputting your layouts and for transferring resources between layouts and between other modules Main Toolbar CG Toolbar G Scribe Beta Temporary License Exp res in 126 Day s C DOCUMENTS AND SETTINGS A THORNO1 DESKTOP CG DOC INS BAE A Fie Edit Playlist Tools Help hu 04 Lower Third Red World z stit v Ey Y R zoom Full Screen w FL E 4 210 20 4 49 I 0 mn WEATHER Tools gl S Palette 5 VII 1 Playlist H KenPamef Library Palette 8 VII S s 3 SE Po 204 d Preview 44 CLR Program GIR Attributes Face Edge Depth Shadow SEE TS Paragraph Text Object Properties EE ee gt Style Bru Kerning 0 00 5 7 Apply Per Character Size 27 S Pixels 5 Aspect Ratio 1 20 of font wid Alignment Leading 0 g Scrapbook maintain Aspect Ratio Scrapbool Relative Embellishments Program Channel Attributes CG Editor Toolbar Palette 94 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Table 3 1 The CG Workspace Workspace Area
607. with a 3x3 convolution filter Contrast with Sharpen Filter Borders Sequencer Sets the output area for rolls and crawls During playback the roll crawl displays within the set border Browse Folio Media Store The folder that contains the media files from the directory you are currently browsing It can be accessed by clicking the BI button on the Media Store toolbar in browse mode Contrast with Global Browse Folio Browse Mode Media Store The Media window displays the media files from the folders you have browsed on local network and removable drives The Media Store toolbar provides access to folios of browsed files Contrast with Database Mode Browse Set Folio Media Store A temporary location for holding media files from the most recent Media Store search in browse mode Brush Based Tools Paint Tools that let you use brush attributes to perform non painting tasks such as cloning or alpha memory All of the settings from the Brush tab are used by brush based tools Brush Styles Paint Brush tab settings that control the appearance of Paint tool strokes The Hard Edge style applies the tool as if it were a pencil The Soft Edge style applies the tool as if it were a brush The Soft Edge Buildup style applies the tool as if it were an airbrush Build Folio Media Store The folder that contains browsed media files to be added to a Media Store database You can access the Bui
608. wn the CTRL key and dragging over the text 106 Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide 3 Enter your text The way the object handles text depends on whether it is constrained or unconstrained e If the text object is unconstrained it expands to the right to fit your text e If the text object is constrained the text gets smaller to fit within the object Figure 3 2 Add Text to a Constrained Text Field Pressing ENTER while editing a paragraph text object like a Paragraph Field or a Fixed Width Paragraph Field object adds a new line to the text object Figure 3 3 Add Lines to a Fixed Width Paragraph Field Pressing ENTER while editing a single line text object like a Text Field or a Text Constrained Field object creates a new text object below the one being edited Figure 3 4 Add a New Single Line Text Object Chapter3 CG 107 TitleOne User Guide 108 Insert Media into Text Objects Chapter 3 CG TitleOne User Guide Change the Selection Edit Mode There are two modes you can use when working with text objects Selection Mode and Edit Mode Press the SPACEBAR and ESC keys to switch between the two modes e When you select a text object with the Pointer tool you are h automatically placed in Selection Mode In Selection Mode the entire object is selected This is useful if you want to move rotate or change the attributes of the entire object Press the SPACEBAR to switch to Edit Mode e When you select a t
609. xt header belong to the same group 8 On the group header right click on the column heading Default Group and select Page Formatted Crawls All of the events in your group are immediately converted to a page formatted crawl You can only insert crawl events into the Page Formatted Crawl group Figure 5 8 Select Page Formatted Crawls in Sequencer When you output the playlist all events in the Page Formatted Crawl group are rendered to disk and then played back as one smooth continuous crawl Note If your crawl events have backgrounds the background from the first event will be used as the background for the whole Page Formatted Crawl group Adjust Crawl The Equalize Timing option on the Effect Settings tab sets all crawl pages to Timing equal the same length as the longest crawl When you check the Equalize Timing checkbox each crawl page displays for the same length of time on screen Select an event in the Page Formatted Crawl group to determine which group receives the formatting 2 Switch to the Effect Settings tab 3 Click the Global Settings button 4 Check the Equalize Timing checkbox to display each crawl event for the same length of time Chapter 5 Sequencer 321 TitleOne User Guide Set Roll and Crawl Output Options Sequencer includes output options for your rolls and crawls Use the Effect Settings to adjust the on screen borders start position and output speed Adjust Roll and Crawl Borders S
610. xt file The templates are loaded and their tags are filled as specified Event Names You can specify names for your layouts by adding eventname lines to your text file This example gives each layout a specific number for its name template 10 eventname 20 Reporter Janet Murphy Location City Hall template 10 eventname 30 Reporter Victor Atlas Location Community Center template 10 Reporter Kim Le Location Miller Park Pagoda The Video Safe Title Area Chapter 3 CG template 10 Reporter Janet Murphy Location Community Center When a number is specified the layout is created with that number In the above example the first layout is named 20 and the second is named 30 If a new layout doesn t have an event name and it follows a layout with a specific number the new layout s number automatically follows from the proceeding layout s number In the above example the third layout is named 31 and the fourth is named 32 You can also give alphanumeric names to layouts The following example creates a layout called sports template 10 eventname sports Reporter Janet Murphy Location Recreation Center By default the video safe title area is the center 80 of the layout area Within this area text and graphics will be displayed on any standard TV monitor Outside of this area some monitors may cut off some or all of the layout The video safe title area is a useful reference when you wan
611. xture Treatment to an Object ooncccccocccncccocnnononcnnnnonnnnononcnnononnnnnnnarononnnens 178 Insert Media into Text Objects A 179 Add Media to the Background NEEN 179 Meda al EET ET ENE EE EE EEE EEE 180 BLE EE MS a da leo la 180 Manage Eege sois a 181 Select ee 181 Select Objects with the Mouse AA 182 Select Objects and Text with the Keyboard oooccccccocncococoncccononococonononnanononanononnarononnnnnnnnnas 183 Position Obecis a ist Te 184 Move OD ec ua 185 AIOT ODJOCIS eebe 186 Eet Ee 189 LOCK PES va 190 Prevent Objects from Rolling or Crawling occccccocnncccccnncoconnnnonononcnnanononnnnonconarononnnrnnnonanannnnos 190 Rotate a d FP ODjGClS Lue 190 EE ODE ee 192 GP OE EE 193 The Layout Tree VIEW aos is Ee eds ee FN 194 Open the Layout Tree VIEN saca dilatan 194 Table of Contents TitleOne User Guide X Manage 02 E 195 EET ONE EE 195 Change BEEN NES pean RE aa 195 Chandge Object Lay Crs eseu ee Seed ee See ee 196 Duplicate DVDEN 197 LOK ONE PG 197 Delete EE 198 Mie ft dl elei ue TEE 199 Se ALSO BACON 199 mage eaten O See een eae 200 A EE 200 Mage AAA ae 201 Remove a Background NAN 201 Update LAVOUNS sa SST 202 Use NEWS EI 202 PENN Tt EE 202 Select News Edit Tables 00nnnn0nnnnaannnnannnsennenrnrersnrrrsrrrrornrersnrrrsnrrrsrrrrrsnrersnrrrsnrrrornrrrnnrrrnnn 203 Create a News Edit Table 00nnnn0nnnnnnennnoennnnsnnrsernrsrnrersnrersnrrrsrrnrrornrrrsnrrrsnreesr
612. y Preview Name Delay Status penalty SCRIBE 0 2 stationlogo SCRIBE 0 el l newscrawl SCRIBE D L JE i Figure 2 26 Output Options in Overlay Table 2 5 Overlay Output Options Output Option Description Numbered buttons Sets the show hide state of the item A white number marks an item set to hide on the program channel A yellow number marks an item set to display on the program channel Flashing Indicator Indicates the item s show hide state has changed The indicator stops flashing the next time you take the item 80 Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide Table 2 5 Overlay Output Options Output Option Take button Status Indicators All On button All Off button Reset checkbox Output Items Description Applies any changes to the show hide state If you set an item to display clicking Take displays the item on the program channel If you set an item to hide clicking Take hides the item on the program channel When you take a timer that is set to display the timer plays on the program channel at its last running state e If the timer was not running clicking Take displays the timer at the first frame The timer does not start running until you click the Play button e If the timer was already running and you hid the timer clicking Take displays the running timer Displays the on air status of the item If the item is running the status light turns green If the item is not r
613. yframes use the Position fields on the Placement tab In Animation Editor position is defined by the X Y and Z coordinates The X coordinate marks the horizontal position the Y coordinate marks the vertical position and the Z coordinate marks the depth The center of the screen is 0 0 0 and positions are measured outward from the center point or focal point miz E lo Is 2 26 5 Figure 4 89 Keyframe Positioning The easiest way to line up keyframes is to position the first keyframe check the X Y and Z fields for its position then select the next keyframe and enter the same information for the axis you are trying to line up For example enter the same number value in the X axis for all keyframes to align them along the same horizontal line Chapter 4 Animation 265 TitleOne User Manual Determine the Keyframe Order The first keyframe in a path has a circled number I in the middle of it see Figure 4 90 This number refers to the order in which the keyframes appear Movement always begins at keyframe I then moves along the path to number 2 3 and so on Keyframe Labels Figure 4 90 Keyframe Labels If you want to reverse the order of keyframes click the Reverse Path button on the FX palette The keyframe labels change to A reflect their new order in the path When you preview the animation the keyframe previously labeled I is displayed last in the motion path instead of first Bezier Curves When you ha
614. ylist The layout is copied to Scratch vii and opened for edit Ensure that the output channel for Scratch vii is set to the channel I to take the layout to the preview channel To change the output channel for the current layout to I press the RapidFire STRATA I key or CTRL 1 on the standard keyboard Chapter 2 Output 65 TitleOne User Guide 66 Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide 4 Alter you complete any updates press the RapidFire TAKE key or the number pad ENTER key The updated layout 213 is output to the preview channel The original layout 213 remains unchanged 5 Press the RapidFire SWAP key or the number pad FORWARD SLASH key to swap channels I and 2 and put the graphic on the air channel Note On a one channel system press the RapidFire SETUP key or MINUS SIGN on the number pad to preview the graphic in the Program Preview palette and then the RapidFire TAKE key or the number pad ENTER key to take the graphic to air Modify a Layout in the Playlist Using the number pad enter the number of the layout in the playlist to retrieve for example 213 2 Press F4 to read the layout from the playlist The layout is copied to Scratch vii and opened for edit 3 When the updates are complete ensure that the RapidFire text field contains the number of the layout you are editing for example 213 4 Press the RapidFire RECORD LAYOUT key or FS on the standard keyboard to update the original la
615. you cannot use SHIFT or CTRL to select multiple paths Instead use the Count field to apply a template to multiple paths Enter the number of paths you want the template applied to in the Count field The template is applied to the selected path plus the next paths that equal the number set in the Count field For example if you have six paths but you want to apply the template to paths 2 3 4 and 5 only select path 2 in the FX workspace and set the number in the count field to 4 The template is applied to paths 2 through 5 but not I and 6 Staggering starts each path after a set number of keyframes For example if you have five paths and you set the stagger value to 10 the first path begins at the Start frame the second path begins 10 frames later the third begins 20 frames later and so on Use this option if you want to fly multiple objects or individual characters on screen spaced evenly apart in time To stagger a template follow this example Set up five paths containing two keyframes 2 Switch to the Time tab and click on the first path 3 Switch to the Templates tab and select a template from the preset list 4 TypesS in the Count field O in the Start field 30 in the length field and IO in the Stager field 5 Click Apply 6 Click on the Play button in the Preview toolbar to view the results Chapter 4 Animation TitleOne User Manual 275 Template Options Before you apply a template to a path yo
616. you purchased the optional 3D DVE daughter card for your Altitude Express video card 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to define all the DVEs in your template To set the DVE dimensions complete the following steps I Select the DVE from the Effect Name list 2 Click the dimension button for the selected DVE Live Format 1080 or 720p To set the DVE source z order and duration complete the following steps Expand the DVE Effect in the Effect Name list by clicking the button beside the name 2 Select the DVE Device in the expanded list 3 Click the Edit DVE button to enable the Source Duration options 4 Use the Source buttons to select the source for the DVE SDI I SDI 2 Graphic I Graphic 2 or Video I 5 Set the duration for the DVE in the Duration field Time is measured in frames Appendix A DVE Switcher 547 TitleOne User Guide 7 Set the z order to determine the DVE and graphic layers by clicking the appropriate Z Order button There are seven available layers with layer 3 at the top and layer 3 on the bottom ALA 0088 Figure 9 3 Z Order Options Click the Save Effect button above the options to save your settings Position Size and To position size and crop the DVE complete the following steps Crop the DVE 7 Expand the DVE Effect in the Effect Name list by clicking the button beside the name Select the DVE Device in the expanded list Click the Edit DVE button to enable t
617. yout operations including the following Read a layout from the playlist or registry Write a new or modified layout to the playlist Write a modified layout to the registry You cannot create new registry entries using RapidFire Take a layout to air Clear all output or individual Strata layers Clear a layout Read a layout from or write a layout to Media Store Read a layout from the working directory Write a layout to the working directory Add Auto Text to a layout For information on the Auto Text feature see Update a Layout with Auto Text on page 69 Feature Note Media Store and the Strata Configuration Utility are purchase options in TitleOne Set Up RapidFire Set up the conditions for the proper operation of RapidFire Before Launching RapidFire Verify the following conditions Chapter 2 Output TitleOne User Guide Ensure that RapidFire is enabled on the Tools menu Tools gt RapidFire When you enable RapidFire the keys on the number pad are reprogrammed to perform RapidFire operations To return to normal function you must disable RapidFire on the Tools menu e Ensure that NumLock is on for the number pad e Ifyou are using RapidFire in the Sequencer module ensure that all your groups are expanded RapidFire does not work correctly when Sequencer groups are collapsed Open RapidFire To open RapidFire perform one of the following actions e Press FIO e Type a number on the n
618. yout with your changes Modify a Registry Template Note You cannot create new registry entries using RapidFire Using the number pad enter the number of the registry item to retrieve for example 101 2 Dress F2 to load the layout from the registry 3 Edit the layout 4 When the updates are complete ensure that the RapidFire text field contains the number of the template you are editing for example 101 5 Press F3 to update the registry template with your changes Create a New Layout Using a Layout in the Working Directory Ensure that the Load From Working Directory option is selected in the RapidFire menu See Figure 2 17 on page 64 If the RapidFire dialog is undocked click its Config button and then ensure that the Load From Working Directory checkbox is selected in the InsertText dialog 2 In the RapidFire text field enter the filename of the layout without the scribe file extension to load from the working directory for example layoutl 3 Press SHIFT F4 to load the layout from the working directory The layout is copied to Scratch vii and opened for edit 4 Change the layout if required 5 Using the number pad enter a number to use as a name for the layout for example 214 6 Press the RapidFire RECORD LAYOUT key or FS on the standard keyboard to write the layout The layout in Scratch vii is written to the playlist Write a Layout to the Working Directory Create a layout 2 Ensure tha
619. ype File format of the media file User Name User who added the media file Number Media number assigned by Media Store Date File creation date In the Available attributes list double click an attribute value The attribute appears in the Key Search Criteria field To perform the search click the Search button Set Up an Advanced Search Advanced searches help to set your search parameters by narrowing or expanding your search criteria You can search for media in any folio except the Build set Using the buttons on the toolbar display the media to search in the Media window To open the Search dialog click the Search button on the Media Store palette From the Search Key list select a search key For descriptions of search keys see Table 7 9 on page 414 In the Available attributes list double click an attribute value OR In the Operators list double click or For operator descriptions see Use Search Operators on page 416 The criterion appears in the Key Search Criteria field If necessary add additional criteria Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide 415 416 Chapter 7 Media Store TitleOne User Guide To add criteria using the same search key repeat the following steps a In the Operators list double click an operator AND OR NOT For operator descriptions see Use Search Operators on page 416 b Specify the attribute value using the Available attributes or Operators list

Inscriber TitleOne™ - Portland Community Media

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Inscriber TitleOne&trade; - Portland Community Media

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Inscriber TitleOne™ - Portland Community Media